Instruction Manual: Digital Protective Relay BE1-700C BE1-700V

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
DIGITAL PROTECTIVE RELAY
BE1-700C
BE1-700V
Digital Protective Relay Relay Minor Major

Power Trouble Alarm Alarm Trip
R
BE1-700
Com 0
ITEM NUMBER: **************
RS-232
CURRENT SENSING: 1A PH, 1A G
50/60HZ
POWER SUPPLY: 48/125V AC/DC Edit Reset
SERIAL NUMBER: ******** REV ***
D2848-49
06-29-04
Publication: 9376700990
Revision: B 10/04
INTRODUCTION
This instruction manual provides information about the operation and installation of the BE1-700 Digital
Protective Relay. To accomplish this, the following is provided:
C General information, specifications and a Quick Start guide.

C Functional description and setting parameters for the inputs and outputs, protection and control
functions, metering functions, and reporting and alarm functions.
C BESTlogic programmable logic design and programming.
C Documentation of the preprogrammed logic schemes and application tips.
C Description of security and the user interface setup including ASCII communication and the human-
machine interface (HMI).
C Installation procedures, dimension drawings and connection diagrams.
C Description of the front panel HMI and ASCII command interface with write access security
procedures.
C A summary of setting, metering, reporting, control and miscellaneous commands.
C Testing and maintenance procedures.
C Description and use of BESTNet Communication for the optional web page enabled relay.
C Appendices contain time overcurrent characteristic curves, an ASCII command–HMI cross reference
and overexcitation (24) inverse time curves.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury or equipment damage, only qualified personnel should
perform the procedures in this manual.
NOTE
Be sure that the relay is hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG copper
wire attached to the ground terminal on the rear of the unit case. When the relay is
configured in a system with other devices, it is recommended to use a separate lead to
the ground bus from each unit.
BE1-700 Introduction i
First Printing: July 2004
Printed in USA
© 2004 Basler Electric, Highland, Illinois 62249 USA
All Rights Reserved
October 2004
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION
of Basler Electric, Highland, Illinois, USA. It is loaned for confidential use, subject to
return on request, and with the mutual understanding that it will not be used in any
manner detrimental to the interest of Basler Electric.
It is not the intention of this manual to cover all details and variations in equipment, nor does this manual
provide data for every possible contingency regarding installation or operation. The availability and design of
all features and options are subject to modification without notice. Should further information be required,
contact Basler Electric.
BASLER ELECTRIC
ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE +1 618.654.2341 FAX +1 618.654.2351
ii Introduction BE1-700
PRODUCT REVISION HISTORY
The following information provides a historical summary of the changes made to the software, embedded
software (firmware) and hardware of this device. The corresponding revisions made to this instruction manual
are also summarized. This revision history is separated into four categories: BESTCOMS Software Version,
Application Program Firmware Version, Hardware Version and Manual Revisions. All revisions are listed in
reverse chronological order (month and year) with the most recent on top.
BESTCOMS
Software Version Change
2.02.00 / 09-04 C Added support for the Modbus/TCP protocol.

C Added links on the System Summary Screen to jump to the Settings Screen
for the selected setting.
C Revised the 47N Mode label to always be Vpn.
C Added the ability to double click a saved IP address to connect to it.
2.01.00 / 07-04 C Provided support for voltage relays (BE1-700V).

C Resolved a possible program crash when using the Discovery applet.
2.00.00 / 06-04 C Initial release.
Application Program
Firmware Version
1.02.00 / 10-04 C Added the Modbus/TCP option.
1.01.00 / 06-04 C Initial release.
Hardware Version Change
A / 07-04 C Added support for voltage relays (BE1-700V).
- / 06-04 C Initial release.
Manual Version Change
B / 10-04 C Annotated each section, sub-section, figure and table to indicate

applicability to a current (BE1-700C) or voltage (BE1-700V) relay, as
appropriate.
C Updated the discussion of the 24 element in Section 4, Protection and
Control.
C Added Table 6-14, Targets as Displayed to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions.
C Updated Figure 10-7, Protection Menu Branch Structure.
C Increased the number of figures in Section 14, BESTCOMS Software from
16 to 42.
C Added a troubleshooting guide to Section 15, BESTNet Communication.
C Added voltage ASCII commands to Appendix B, Command Cross-
Reference.
C Added Appendix C, Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves (BE1-700V
Only).
A / 07-04 C Initial release
BE1-700 Introduction iii

This page is intentionally left blank.
iv Introduction BE1-700
CONTENTS
SECTION 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
SECTION 2 Quick Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
SECTION 3 Input and Output Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
SECTION 4 Protection and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SECTION 5 Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
SECTION 6 Reporting and Alarm Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
SECTION 7 BESTlogic Programmable Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
SECTION 8 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SECTION 9 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
SECTION 10 Human-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
SECTION 11 ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
SECTION 12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
SECTION 13 Testing and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
SECTION 14 BESTCOMS Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
SECTION 15 BESTNet Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
APPENDIX A Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curves (BE1-700C Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
APPENDIX B Command Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
APPENDIX C Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves (BE1-700V Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
BE1-700 Introduction v
This page intentionally left blank.
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Input and Output Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Protection and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Metering Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Reporting and Alarm Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
BESTlogic Programmable Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Write Access Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Human-Machine Interface (HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Sample Style Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Metered Current Values and Accuracy (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Metered Voltage Values and Accuracy (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Metered Frequency Values and Accuracy (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Calculated Values and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
IRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Contact Inputs Recognition Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Time Overcurrent Functions (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Time Current Characteristic Curves (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Time Overcurrent (51P, 51N, 151N, 51Q) (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Volts/Hz (24) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Sync-Check (25) (BE1-700V, Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Sync-Check, Voltage Monitor (25VM) (BE1-700V, Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Phase Undervoltage Function (27P/127P) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Auxiliary Undervoltage Function (27X) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Negative-Sequence Voltage Protection (47) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Phase Overvoltage Function (59P/159P) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Auxiliary Overvoltage Function (59X, 159X) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Over/Underfrequency Function (81/181/281/381/481/581) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
VT Fuse Loss Detection (60FL) (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Reclosing Timers (79) (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Breaker Failure Timer (BF) (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
General Purpose Timers (62, 162) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Automatic Setting Group Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
BESTlogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
AC Current Inputs (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Phase AC Voltage Inputs (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Auxiliary AC Voltage Inputs (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Analog to Digital Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
BE1-700 General Information i

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Control Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Surge Withstand Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) ............................................ 1-17
UL Recognition for US and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Figures
Figure 1-1. Style Chart for a BE1-700C Current Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-2. Style Chart for a BE1-700V Voltage Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Tables
Table 1-1. Burden . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
ii General Information BE1-700

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION
DESCRIPTION
The BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay is an economical, microprocessor based, multifunction system that is
available in a panel mount, non-drawout case. The relay can be purchased as a current relay (BE1-700C)
or as a voltage relay (BE1-700V). In this manual, function headings will note in parenthesis whether it applies
to a current or voltage relay.(See Figures 1-1 and 1-2.) Depending on the type of relay, the BE1-700 features
include the following. Functions are shown as C (current), V (voltage) or A (all - either current or voltage).
C C Three-phase Overcurrent Protection C V Voltage Protection
C C Ground Overcurrent Protection C V Frequency Protection
C C Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection
C C Breaker Failure Protection C A Breaker Monitoring
C A Control Protection C A Metering Functions
C A Communication C A Automatic Reclosing (optional)
BE1-700 relays have four programmable contact sensing inputs, five programmable outputs and one alarm
output. Outputs can be assigned to perform protection, control, or indicator operations through logical
programming. For example, protection functions could be programmed to cause a protective trip. Control
functions could be programmed to cause a manual trip, manual close, or automatic reclose. Indicators could
be configured to annunciate relay failure, a settings group change and others.
Protection scheme designers may select from a number of pre-programmed logic schemes that perform the
most common protection and control requirements. Alternately, a custom scheme can be created using
BESTlogic.
A simplified "How To Get Started" procedure for BE1-700 users is provided in Section 2, Quick Start.
FEATURES
The BE1-700 family includes many features for the protection, monitoring and control of power system
equipment. These features include protection and control functions, metering functions, and reporting and
alarm functions. A highly flexible programmable logic system called BESTlogic allows the user to apply the
available functions with complete flexibility and customize the system to meet the requirements of the
protected power system. Programmable I/O, extensive communication features and an advanced human-
machine interface (HMI) provide easy access to the features provided.
The following information summarizes the capabilities of this multifunction device. Each feature, along with
how to set it up and how to use its outputs, is described in complete detail in the later sections of this manual.
Input and Output Functions

Input functions consist of power system measurement and contact sensing inputs. Programmable contact
outputs make up the output functions. Input and output functions are described in the following paragraphs.
Power System Measurement Functions
Three-phase currents or voltages are digitally sampled and the fundamental is extracted using a discrete
fourier transform (DFT) algorithm.
The voltage sensing circuits can be configured for single-phase, three wire or four wire voltage transformer
circuits. Voltage sensing circuitry provides voltage protection, frequency protection and metering. Neutral
(residual) and negative-sequence voltage magnitudes are derived from the three-phase voltages. Digital
sampling of the measured frequency provides high accuracy at off-nominal values.
BE1-700 General Information 1-1
An auxiliary voltage sensing input provides protection capabilities for over/undervoltage monitoring of the first
and third harmonic of the VT source connected to the Vx input. This capability is useful for ground fault
protection or sync-check functions.
Each current sensing circuit is low burden and isolated. Neutral (residual) and negative-sequence current
magnitudes are derived from the three-phase currents. An independent ground current input is included for
direct measurement of the current in a transformer neutral, tertiary winding or flux balancing current
transformer.
Contact Sensing Inputs
Four programmable contact sensing inputs (IN1, IN2, IN3 and IN4) with programmable signal conditioning
provide a binary logic interface to the protection and control system. Each input function and label is
programmable using BESTlogic. A user-meaningful label can be assigned to each input and to each state
(open and closed) for use in reporting functions.
Contact Outputs
Five programmable general purpose contact outputs (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 and OUT5) provide a binary
logic interface to the protection and control system. One programmable, fail-safe contact output (OUTA)
provides an alarm output. Each output function and label is programmable using BESTlogic. A
user-meaningful name can be assigned to each output and to each state (open and closed) for use in
reporting functions. Output logic can be overridden to open, close or pulse each output contact for testing or
control purposes. All output contacts are trip rated.
Protection and Control Functions
Protection functions, depending on the relay style ordered, may consist of overcurrent, voltage, frequency,
breaker reclosing, fuse loss and breaker failure protection and general purpose logic timers. Setting groups
and virtual control switches make up the control functions. The following paragraphs describe each protection
and control function.
Overcurrent Protection (BE1-700C)
Overcurrent protection is provided by six instantaneous overcurrent functions and three time overcurrent
functions. Digital signal processing filters out unwanted harmonic components while providing fast overcurrent
response with limited transient overreach and overtravel.
Each instantaneous overcurrent function has a settable time delay. Phase elements include 50TP and 150TP.
Neutral elements include 50TN and 150TN. Negative-sequence elements include 50TQ and 150TQ.
Inverse time overcurrent functions are provided for phase, neutral and negative-sequence protection. A 51P
phase element, 51N and 151N neutral elements, and a 51Q negative-sequence element are provided. Time
overcurrent functions employ a dynamic integrating timing algorithm covering a range from pickup to 40 times
pickup with selectable instantaneous or integrated reset characteristics. Time overcurrent curves conform to
the IEEE PC37.112 document and include seven curves similar to Westinghouse/ABB CO curves, five curves
similar to GE IAC curves, a fixed time curve and a user programmable curve. Phase time-overcurrent
functions can be voltage restrained or controlled for generator backup applications.
Voltage Protection (BE1-700V)
One volts per hertz protective element (24) provides overexcitation protection for a generator and/or
transformer.
Two phase overvoltage and two phase undervoltage elements provide over/undervoltage protection (27P,
59P). Phase overvoltage protection can be set for one of three, two of three or three of three logic. When a
1-2 General Information BE1-700

four-wire voltage transformer connection is used, overvoltage protection can be set for either phase-to-phase
voltage or phase-to-neutral voltage.
Two auxiliary overvoltage and one auxiliary undervoltage element provides over/undervoltage protection (27X,
59X, 159X). Auxiliary voltage protection elements can be set to individually monitor the auxiliary voltage
fundamental, third harmonic or phase 3V 0 voltages. Ground unbalance protection is provided when the
optional auxiliary voltage input is connected to a source of 3V0 such as a broken delta VT.
With the optional auxiliary voltage input connected to the bus, one sync-check function provides synchronism
protection (25). Sync-check protection checks for phase angle difference, magnitude difference, frequency
difference (slip) and, optionally, if the three-phase VT frequency is greater than the auxiliary VT frequency.
One voltage monitor output (25VM1) provides independent dead/live voltage closing logic.
One negative-sequence overvoltage element provides protection for phase unbalance or a reverse system
phase-sequence (47).
Voltage transformer circuit monitoring adds security by detecting problems in the voltage transformer sensing
circuits and preventing mis-operations of the 27P/127P, 47, 59P/159P.
Frequency Protection (BE1-700V)

There are six independent frequency elements. Each can be set for over, under or rate of change (81R)
frequency operation. Each can be individually set to monitor the frequency on the main three-phase voltage
input or the VX input.
Breaker Failure Protection (BE1-700C)
One breaker failure protection block (BF) provides programmable breaker failure protection.
Fuse Loss Protection (BE1-700V)
A fuse loss function protects against false tripping due to a loss of voltage sensing.
General Purpose Logic Timers
Two general purpose logic timers (62, 162) with six modes of operation are provided.
Setting Groups
Two setting groups allow adaptive relaying to be implemented to optimize BE1-700 settings for various
operating conditions. Automatic and external logic can be employed to select the active setting group.
Virtual Control Switches
BE1-700 virtual control switches include one virtual breaker control switch and two virtual 43 switches.
Trip and close control of a selected breaker can be controlled by the Virtual Breaker Control Switch (101). The
virtual breaker control switch is accessed locally from the front panel human-machine interface (HMI) or
remotely from the communication ports.
Additional control is provided by the two virtual switches: 43 and 143. These virtual switches are accessed
locally from the front panel HMI or remotely from the communication ports. Virtual switches can be used to
trip and close additional switches or breakers, or enable and disable certain functions.
Metering Functions
Metering is provided for all measured currents, voltages and frequency and all derived neutral and negative-
sequence currents and voltages.

Reporting and Alarm Functions
Several reporting and alarm functions provide fault reporting, demand, breaker and trip circuit monitoring as
well as relay diagnostic and firmware information.
Relay Identification
Two free-form fields are provided for the user to enter information to identify the relay. These fields are used
by many of the reporting functions to identify the relay that the report is from. Examples of relay identification
field uses are station name, circuit number, relay system, purchase order and others.
IRIG
A standard IRIG input is provided for receiving time synchronization signals from a master clock. Automatic
daylight saving time compensation can be enabled. Time reporting is settable for 12 or 24-hour format. The
date can be formatted as mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy.
General Status Reporting
The BE1-700 provides extensive general status reporting for monitoring, commissioning and troubleshooting.
Status reports are available from the front panel HMI or communication ports.
Demand Reporting
Ampere demand registers monitor phase A, B, C, neutral and negative-sequence values. The demand interval
and demand calculation method are independently settable for phase, neutral and negative-sequence
measurements. Demand reporting records today's peak, yesterday's peak and peak since reset with time
stamps for each register.
Breaker Monitoring
Breaker statistics are recorded for a single breaker. They include the number of operations, fault current
interruption duty and breaker time to trip. Each of these conditions can be set to trigger an alarm.
Trip Circuit Monitoring
A trip circuit monitor function is provided to monitor the trip circuit of a breaker or lockout relay for loss of
voltage (fuse blown) or loss of continuity (trip coil open). The monitoring input is internally connected across
OUT1. Additional trip or close circuit monitors can be implemented in BESTlogic using additional inputs, logic
timers and programmable logic alarms.
Fault Reporting
Fault reports consist of simple target information, fault summary reports and detailed oscillography records
to enable the user to retrieve information about disturbances in as much detail as is desired. The relay records
and reports oscillography data in industry standard IEEE, Comtrade format to allow using any fault analysis
software. Basler Electric provides a Windows® based program called BESTwave that can read and plot binary
or ASCII format files that are in the COMTRADE format.
Sequence of Events Recorder
A 255 event Sequence of Events Recorder (SER) is provided that records and time stamps all relay inputs
and outputs as well as all alarm conditions monitored by the relay. Time stamp resolution is to the nearest
half-cycle. I/O and Alarm reports can be extracted from the records as well as reports of events recorded
during the time span associated with a specific fault report.

Alarm Function
Extensive self diagnostics will trigger a fatal relay trouble alarm if any of the relay core functions are adversely
affected. Fatal relay trouble alarms are not programmable and are dedicated to the Alarm Output (OUTA) and
the front panel Relay Trouble LED. Additional relay trouble alarms and all other alarm functions are
programmable for major or minor priority. Programmed alarms are indicated by major and minor alarm LEDs
on the front panel. Major and minor alarm points can also be programmed to any output contact including
OUTA. Over 20 alarm conditions are available to be monitored including user definable logic conditions using
BESTlogic.
Active alarms can be read and reset from the front panel HMI or from the communication ports. A historical
sequence of events report with time stamps lists when each alarm occurred and cleared. These reports are
available through the communication ports.
Version Report
The version of the embedded software (firmware) is available from the front panel HMI or the communication
ports. The unit serial number and style number is also available through the communication port.
BESTlogic Programmable Logic
Each BE1-700 protection and control function is implemented in an independent function element. Every
function block is equivalent to its single function, discrete device counterpart so it is immediately familiar to
the protection engineer. Each independent function block has all of the inputs and outputs that the discrete
component counterpart might have. Programming with BESTlogic is equivalent to choosing the devices
required by your protection and control scheme and then drawing schematic diagrams to connect the inputs
and outputs to obtain the desired operating logic.
Several preprogrammed logic schemes and a set of custom logic settings are provided. A preprogrammed
scheme can be activated by merely selecting it. Custom logic settings allow you to tailor the relay functionality
to match the needs of your operation's practices and power system requirements.
Write Access Security

Security can be defined for three distinct functional access areas: Settings, Reports and Control. Each access
area can be assigned its own password. A global password provides access to all three functional areas. Each
of the four passwords can be unique or multiple access areas can share the same password.
A second dimension of security is provided by allowing the user to restrict access for any of the access areas
to only specific communication ports. For example, you could set up security to deny access to control
commands from the ethernet port that is connected through a modem to a telephone line.
Security settings only affect write access. Read access is always available in any area through any port.
Human-Machine Interface (HMI)
Each BE1-700 comes with a front panel display with five LED indicators for Power Supply Status, Relay
Trouble Alarm, Minor Alarm, Major Alarm and Trip. The lighted, liquid crystal display (LCD) allows the relay
to replace local indication and control functions such as panel metering, alarm annunciation and control
switches. Four scrolling pushbuttons on the front panel provide a means to navigate through the menu tree.
Edit and reset pushbuttons provide access to change parameters and reset targets, alarms, and other
registers. In Edit mode, the scrolling pushbuttons provide data entry selections. Edit mode is indicated by an
Edit LED on the Edit pushbutton.
The LCD has automatic priority logic to govern what is being displayed on the screen so that when an operator
approaches, the information of most interest is automatically displayed without having to navigate the menu
structure. The order of priorities are:

â Recloser active
ã Targets
ä Alarms
å Programmable automatic scrolling list
Up to 16 screens can be defined in the programmable, automatic scroll list.
Communication
Three independent, isolated communication ports provide access to all functions in the relay. COM 0 is a nine
pin RS-232 port located on the front of the case. COM 2 is a two wire RS-485 port located on the back of the
case. The optional rear ethernet port is referred as Com1 in the BESTCOMS General Operation Screen,
Security tab.
An ASCII command interface allows easy interaction with the relay using standard, off the shelf
communication software. The ASCII command interface is optimized to allow automation of the relay setting
process. Settings files can be captured from the relay and edited using any software that supports the *.txt
file format. These ASCII text files can then be used to set the relay using the send text file function of your
communication software.
A ModbusTM protocol manual (9376700991) is optionally available for the RS-485 communication port.
Ethernet information can be found in Section 15, BESTNet Communication.
MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION
General
The BE1-700 relay electrical characteristics and operational features are defined by a combination of letters
and numbers that make up the style number. The model number, together with the style number, describe
the options included in a specific device and appear on labels on the front panel and inside the case. Upon
receipt of a relay, be sure to check the style number against the requisition and the packing list to ensure that
they agree.
The style number identification charts, Figures 1-1 and 1-2, define the electrical characteristics and operational
features included in BE1-700 current and voltage relays, respectively. In this manual, the current relay will be
referred to as a BE1-700C but the full style number is needed to properly describe the relay. In a similar
fashion, Figure 1-12 defines the BE1-700V or voltage relay.
Sample Style Number

If, for example, the style number were E0N1X0N, the device would be a current relay and have the following
characteristics and features:
BE1-700
(E) - 5 ampere phase and independent ground input
(0) - No voltage sensing input
(N) - No reclosing function option
(1) - 48 Vdc power supply
(X) - Panel mount, non-drawout case
(0) - ASCII over RS-485, no Ethernet
(N) - No Option 2 is available

BE1-700 0 X N
MODEL NO.
Current Sensing Voltage Sensing Option 1 Power Supply Case Communication Option 2
Input Type Input Type Protocols 1
B) 1 amp phase and 0) No voltage N) No Reclosing 1) 48 Vdc X) Panel Mount, 0) ASCII over N) None
independent ground input sensing R) Reclosing function 2) 125 Vac/Vdc non-drawout RS-485,
E) 5 amp phase and (79) added 3) 24 Vdc case no Ethernet
independent ground input 4) 250 Vac/Vdc R
1) Modbus over
F) 5 amp phase, 1 amp RS-485,
independent ground input no Ethernet
NOTE: 4) ASCII over
1 ASCII communication is standard on Com 0 (Front RS-232) port. RS-485,
BESTNet and
ASCII over
Ethernet
R
5) Modbus over
RS-485,
BESTNet and
ASCII over
Ethernet
7) ASCII over
RS-485,
R
Modbus /TCP
over Ethernet
Figure 1-1. Style Chart for a BE1-700C Current Relay
BE1-700 N X N
MODEL NO.
Current Sensing Voltage Sensing Option 1 Power Supply Case Communication Option 2
Input Type Input Type Protocols 1
N) No current inputs 3) 3-phase voltage N) No Reclosing 1) 48 Vdc X) Panel Mount, 0) ASCII over N) None
sensing R) Reclosing function 2) 125 Vac/Vdc Non-drawout RS-485,
4) 3-phase sensing (79) added 3) 24 Vdc Case no Ethernet
R
with auxiliary 4) 250 Vac/Vdc 1) Modbus over
input and RS-485,
sync-check no Ethernet
4) ASCII over
NOTE: RS-485,
1 ASCII communication is standard on Com 0 (Front RS-232) port. BESTNet and
ASCII over
Ethernet
R
5) Modbus over
RS-485,
BESTNet and
ASCII over
Ethernet
7) ASCII over
RS-485,
R
Modbus /TCP
over Ethernet
Figure 1-2. Style Chart for a BE1-700V Voltage Relay

OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Depending on the style ordered, BE1-700 relays have the following features and capabilities:
Metered Current Values and Accuracy (BE1-700C)

Current Range: 5A: 0.5 to 15 Aac
1A: 0.1 to 3.0 Aac
Accuracy: ±1% of reading, ±1 least significant digit at 25°C
Temperature Dependence: #±0.02% per °C
Metered Voltage Values and Accuracy (BE1-700V)

Voltage Range
3-wire: 0 to 300 VL-L
4-wire: 0 to 300 VL-L
Accuracy (10 to 75 hertz)
50 V to 300 V: ±0.5% of reading, ±1 least significant digit at 25°C
Metered Frequency Values and Accuracy (BE1-700V)

Range: 10 to 75 hertz
Accuracy: ±0.01 hertz, ±1 least significant digit at 25°C
Sensing Input
3-wire: Phase A – B
4-wire: Phase A – Neutral
Minimum Frequency Tracking Voltage: 10 V rms
Calculated Values and Accuracy
Demand
Range: 0.1 to 1.5 nominal
Type: Exponential
Accuracy: ±1% of reading ±1 digit at 25°C
Interval: 1 to 60 minutes
Clock
Accuracy: ±2 milliseconds (with IRIG synchronization)
Resolution: 1 millisecond
Date and Time Setting Provisions: Front panel HMI, communication port, and IRIG.
Leap year and selectable daylight saving time
correction provided.
IRIG
Supports IRIG Standard 200-98, Format B002
Input Signal: Demodulated (dc level-shifted digital signal)
Logic-High Voltage: 3.5 Vdc, minimum
Logic-Low Voltage: 0.5 Vdc, maximum
Input Voltage Range: ±20 Vdc, maximum
Resistance: Non-linear, approximately 4 kS at 3.5 Vdc,
approximately 3 kS at 20 Vdc
Contact Inputs Recognition Time

Programmable, 4 to 255 milliseconds

NOTE
All timing specifications are for the worst case response. This includes output
contact operate times and standard BESTlogic operation timing but excludes input
debounce timing and nonstandard logic configurations. If a nonstandard logic
scheme involves feedback, then one or more BESTlogic update rate delays must
be included to calculate the worst case delay. An example of feedback is virtual
outputs driving function block Inputs. For more information, see Section 7,
BESTlogic Programmable Logic.
Time Overcurrent Functions (BE1-700C)
Current Pickup, Phase and Neutral (51P, 51N, 151N)

Dropout/pickup ratio: 95%
Pickup Accuracy
5 ampere CT: ±2% or ±50 mA
Current Pickup, Negative-Sequence (51Q)

Pickup Accuracy
Current Input - All 51 Functions

5 ampere CT
Range: 0.50 to 16.0 A
Increments: 0.01 from 0.50 to 9.99, 0.1 from 10.0 to 16.0
1 ampere CT
Range: 0.10 to 3.2 A
Increments: 0.01 A
Time Current Characteristic Curves (BE1-700C)

Timing Accuracy (All 51 functions): Within ±5% or ±1½ cycles whichever is greater for
time dial settings greater than 0.1 and multiples of
2 to 40 times the pickup setting but not over 150 A
for 5 A CT units or 30 A for 1 A CT units.
See Appendix A, Time Overcurrent Characteristic
Curves, for information on available timing curves.
Instantaneous Overcurrent Functions (BE1-700C)
Current Pickup Accuracy

Phase and Neutral (50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN)
Dropout/Pickup Ratio: 95%
Negative-Sequence (50TQ, 150TQ)
Current Pickup Ranges (50T, 150T)

5 ampere CT
Range: 0.5 to 150.0 A

Increments: 0.01 from 0.50 to 5.00 A
0.05 from 5.05 to 9.99 A
0.1 from 10.0 A to 99.9 A
1.0 from 100 A to 150 A
1 ampere CT
Range: 0.1 to 30.0 A
Increments: 0.01 from 0.01 to 9.99 A, 0.1 from 10.0 to 30.0 A
Settable Time Delay Characteristics (50T, 150T)

Definite time for any current exceeding pickup
Time Range: 0.00 to 60.0 seconds
Time Increments: 1 ms from 0 to 999 ms
0.1 s from 1.0 to 9.9 s
1 s from 10 to 60 s
Timing Accuracy
50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN: ±0.5% or ±½ cycle whichever is greater plus trip
time for instantaneous response (0.0 setting)
50TQ, 150TQ: ±0.5% or ±1 cycle whichever is greater plus trip
time for instantaneous response (0.0 setting)
Trip Time (for 0.0 Time Delay Setting)

50TP, 50TN, 150TP, 150TN: 2¼ cycles maximum for currents $ 5 times the
pickup setting. Three cycles maximum for a
current of 1.5 times pickup. Four cycles maximum
for a current of 1.05 times the pickup setting.
50TQ, 150TQ and 50T/150T: 3¼ cycles maximum for currents $ 5 times the
pickup setting. Four cycles maximum for a current
of 1.5 times pickup. Five cycles maximum for a
current of 1.05 times the pickup setting.
Time Overcurrent (51P, 51N, 151N, 51Q) (BE1-700C)

Pickup
5 A CT: 0.5 to 16.0 A
1 A CT: 0.1 to 3.20 A
Accuracy: +2% for P and N; +3% for Q
Time dial: TD = K = 0 - 99 for 46 curve

TD = 0.0 - 9.9 for all other curves
Accuracy: +5% or 1.5 cycles
Time Current Characteristics

The following expression describes the inverse time current characteristic for each curve:
AD
TT = + BD + K = Time to Trip
MN − C
RD
TR = = Time for Decaying Reset
M2 − 1
Where D = time dial, M = multiple of PU and A, B, C, N, K and R are constants that govern the shape of each
curve. The protection engineer can set the constants for the P (programmable) curve to achieve virtually any
characteristic.

Volts/Hz (24) (BE1-700V)
Pickup
Range: 0.5 to 6 V/Hz
Accuracy: ±2%
Reset Dial
Range: 0.0 to 9.9 V/Hz
Accuracy: ±0.5
Sync-Check (25) (BE1-700V, Optional)

Delta Phase Angle: 1 to 45°
Delta Voltage Magnitude: 1 to 20 V
Delta Frequency: 0.01 to 0.50 Hz
Sync-Check, Voltage Monitor (25VM) (BE1-700V, Optional)

Live Voltage threshold: 10 to 150 V
Dead Voltage threshold: 10 to 150 V
Dropout Time delay: 0.050 - 60 seconds
Logic: Dead Phase/Dead Aux
Dead Phase/Live Aux
Live Phase/Dead Aux
Independent output: 25VM1
Phase Undervoltage Function (27P/127P) (BE1-700V)
Pickup/Inhibit
Setting Range: 10 to 300 V
Setting Increment: 0.1 V (for a range of 0 to 99.9)
1.0 V (for a range of 100 to 150)
Accuracy: ±2% or 1 V
Time Delay
Setting Range: 0.050 to 600 s
Increment: 1 ms from 0 to 999 ms

0.1 s from 1.0 to 9.9 s
1 s from 10 to 600 s
Accuracy: ±0.5% or ±2½ cycles, whichever is greater
Auxiliary Undervoltage Function (27X) (BE1-700V)

Modes: 1 (Vx), 2 (3V0), 3 (Vx3rd)
Pickup/Inhibit
Accuracy: ±2% or 1 V, whichever is greater
Time Delay
Setting Range: 0.050 to 600 seconds
Setting Increment: 1 millisecond from 0 to 999 milliseconds
0.1 second from 1.0 to 9.9 seconds
1 second from 10 to 600 seconds
Accuracy: ±0.5% or ±2½ cycles, whichever is greater
Negative-Sequence Voltage Protection (47) (BE1-700V)
Pickup
Setting Range: 1.0 to 300 VL-N
Time Delay
0.1 s from 1.0 to 9.9 s
Accuracy: ±0.5% or ±2.5 cycles, whichever is greater
Phase Overvoltage Function (59P/159P) (BE1-700V)
Pickup
Time Delay
0.1 s from 1.0 to 9.9 s
1 s from 10 to 60 s
Auxiliary Overvoltage Function (59X, 159X) (BE1-700V)

Modes: 1 (Vx), 2 (V3V0) 3 (Vx3rd)
Pickup
Accuracy: ±2% or 1 V, whichever is greater
Time Delay
0.1 s from 1.0 to 9.9 s
1 s from 10 to 60 s
Over/Underfrequency Function (81/181/281/381/481/581) (BE1-700V)
Pickup
O/U Setting Range: 40 to 70 Hz
O/U Setting Increment: 0.01 Hz

O/U Pickup Accuracy: ±0.01 Hz
O/U Dropout Setting: 0.0020
Time Delay
0.1 s from 1.0 to 9.9 s
Accuracy: ±0.5% or +1.5 cycle / -0 cycle (minimum trip time
affected by a minimum 3 cycle security count; 80
ms guaranteed trip time)
Undervoltage Inhibit
Increments: 0.1 V (for a range of 0.1 to 99.9 V)
1.0 V (for a range of 100 to 300 V)
Accuracy: +0.5% or 1 V
Overfrequency Inhibit
Setting Range: 46 to 64 Hz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: +0.01 Hz
Underfrequency Inhibit
Setting Range: 46 to 64 Hz
Increment: 0.01 Hz
Accuracy: +0.01 Hz
VT Fuse Loss Detection (60FL) (BE1-700V)

Time Delay: 50 ms, fixed
Reclosing Timers (79) (Optional)
79P Pilot Reclose Time Delay

Range: 0.100 to 600 seconds
Accuracy: +0.5% or +1.75 cycles, -0 cycles
791, 792, 793, 794 Time Delays

79R Reset Time

79F Reclose Fail Time

79M Maximum Cycle Time


79SCB
Number of Shots: 1 to 4
Breaker Failure Timer (BF) (BE1-700C)
Current Detector Pickup

Range: Fixed at 0.5 A for 5 A unit, 0.1 A for 1 A unit
Accuracy: ±10%
Current Detector Time Delay

Range: 50 to 999 ms
Increments: 1 millisecond
Reset Time: Within 1¼ cycles of the current being removed
Timer Accuracy: ±0.5% or +1¼, -½ cycles, whichever is greater
General Purpose Timers (62, 162)

Modes: Pickup/Dropout, 1 Shot Non-retriggerable, 1 Shot
Retriggerable, Oscillator, Integrating, Latch
Range: 0 to 9,999 s
Increments: 1 ms from 0 to 999 ms
0.1 s from 1.0 to 9.9 s
1 s from 10 to 9,999 s
Accuracy: ±0.5% or ±¾ cycles, whichever is greater
Automatic Setting Group Characteristics

Number of Setting Groups: 2
Control Modes
Automatic: Recloser shot, cold-load pickup, dynamic load or
unbalance (BE1-700C); Fuse loss (60FL) (BE1-
700V)
External: Discrete input logic, binary input logic
Switch Level
Range: 0 to 150% of the Setting Group 0, monitored
element setting
Accuracy: ±2% or ±50 mA (5 A), ±2% or ±10 mA (1 A)
Switch Timer
Range: 0 to 60 min, where 0 = disabled
Increment: 1 min
Accuracy: ±0.5% or ±2 s, whichever is greater
BESTlogic
Update Rate: ½ cycle
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
AC Current Inputs (BE1-700C)
5 Ampere CT
Continuous Rating: 20 A
One Second Rating: 400 A
For other current levels, use the formula:
½
I = (K/t)
where t = time in seconds and K = 160,000
Saturation Limit: 150 A

Burden: <10 mS
1 Ampere CT
Continuous Rating: 4A
One Second Rating: 80 A
For other current levels, use the following formula I = (K/t)½ where t = time in seconds, K = 90,000 (panel
mount, non-drawout case)
Saturation Limit: 30 A
Burden: #10 mS at 1 A
Phase AC Voltage Inputs (BE1-700V)

Continuous Rating: 300 V, line to line
One Second Rating: 600 V, line to line (3-wire sensing)
600 V, line to neutral (4-wire sensing)
Burden: <1 VA at 300 Vac
Auxiliary AC Voltage Inputs (BE1-700V)

Continuous Rating: 150 V
One Second Rating: 600 V
Burden: <1 VA at 150 Vac
Analog to Digital Converter

Type: 16 bit
Sampling Rate: 12 samples per cycle, adjusted to input
frequency (10 to 75 Hz)
Power Supply
Option 1, 48 Vdc
Range: 35 to 150 Vdc or 55 to 135 Vac
Option 2, 125 Vac/Vdc

Option 3, 24 Vdc
Range: 17 to 32 Vdc (down to 8 Vdc for momentary dips)
Option 4, 240 Vac/250 Vdc

Burden
Options 1, 2 and 3: 8 W continuous, 10 W maximum
(all outputs energized)
Output Contacts
Make and Carry for Tripping Duty: 30 A for 0.2 seconds per IEEE C37.90;
7 A continuous
Break Resistive or Inductive: 0.3 A at 125 or 250 Vdc (L/R = 0.04 maximum)

Control Inputs
Turn-On Voltage
24 Vdc Power Supply: 4 to 9 Vdc
48 Vdc Power Supply: 26 to 38 V
125 Vac/Vdc Power Supply: 69 to 100 V
250 Vac/Vdc Power Supply: 138 to 200 V
Voltage Range: Same as control power
Input Burden: Burden per contact for sensing depends on the
power supply model and the input voltage. Table
1-1 provides appropriate burden specifications.
Table 1-1. Burden

Power Supply Burden
24 V 18 kS
48 V 44 kS
125 V 94 kS
250 V 185 kS
Communication Ports
Interface
Front RS-232: 300 to 19,200 baud, 8N1 full duplex
Rear RS-485: 300 to 19,200 baud, 8N1 half duplex
Ethernet: IEEE 802.3 (10BaseT)
Response Time (RS-232): <100 msec for metering and control functions
Display
Type: Two line, 16 character alphanumeric liquid crystal
display (LCD) with LED (light emitting diode) back
light
Operating Temperature: &40 to 70°C (–40 to 158°F) (Display contrast may

be impaired at temperatures below &20°C (&4°F))
Isolation
Meets IEC 255-5 and exceeds IEEE C37.90 one minute dielectric test as follows.
All Circuits to Ground: 2,000 Vac or 2,828 Vdc (excludes communication
ports)
Input Circuits to Output Circuits: 2,000 Vac or 2,828 Vdc
Communication Ports to Ground: 500 Vdc
Surge Withstand Capability
Oscillatory: Qualified to IEEE C37.90.1-2002 Standard Surge

Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective
Relays and Relay Systems (excluding
communication ports).

Fast Transient: Qualified to IEEE C37.90.1-2002 Standard Surge
Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective
Relays and Relay Systems (excluding
communication ports). (Excludes across open
output contacts due to installed surge suppression
components.)
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI)

Qualified to IEEE C37.90.2-1995, Standard for Withstand Capability of Relays Systems to Radiated
Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

Four kilovolts contact discharges and 8 kilovolts air discharges applied in accordance with Qualification
EN61000-4-2.
UL Recognition for US and Canada

UL recognized per Standard 508 and Standard CAN/CSA-C22.2 Number 14-M91, UL File Number E97033.
Environment
Temperature
Operating Range: –40 to 70°C (–40 to 158°F) t
Storage Range: –40 to 70°C (–40 to 158°F)
t Display is inoperative below –20°C
Humidity
Qualified to IEC 68-2-38, 1 st Edition 1974, Basic Environmental Test Procedures, Part 2: Test Z/AD:
Composite Temperature Humidity Cyclic Test
Shock
Qualified to IEC 255-21-2, Class 1
Vibration
Qualified to IEC 255-21-1, Class 1
Physical
Weight: 4.33 pounds (1.96 kg) maximum
Case Size: 10.5" (266.7 mm) wide, 3.468" (88.09 mm) high,
8.1" (206.9 mm) deep (front projection) or 7.81"
(198.5 mm) deep (behind panel)

SECTION 2 • QUICK START
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 2 • QUICK START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
BESTlogic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Characteristics of Protection and Control Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Function Block Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
USER INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Front Panel HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
ASCII Command Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ASCII Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Batch Command Text File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
BESTCOMS for BE1-700, Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Entering Test Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Checking the State of Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
FAQ/TROUBLE SHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figures
Figure 2-1. BE1-700C Time Overcurrent (51) Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Figure 2-2. BE1-700V Menu Screens Numbering Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Tables
Table 2-1. Function Categories and Manual Sections Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Table 2-2. Trip LED Truth Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
BE1-700 Quick Start i

SECTION 2 • QUICK START
GENERAL
This section provides an overview of the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay. You should be familiar with the
concepts behind the user interfaces and BESTlogic before you begin reading about the detailed BE1-700
functions. Sections 3 through 6 in the instruction manual describe each function of the BE1-700 in detail.
The following information is intended to provide the reader with a basic understanding of the user interfaces
and the security features provided in the BE1-700 relay. Detailed information on the operation of the human-
machine interface (HMI) can be found in Section 10, Human-Machine Interface , and the ASCII command
communications in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface. BESTCOMS is a Windows® based software
application that enhances communication between the PC user and the BE1-700 relay. BESTCOMS for the
BE1-700 is provided free of charge with the BE1-700. BESTCOMS operation is very transparent and contains
a Windows® type help file for additional operational details.
Also covered in this section is an overview of BESTlogic which is fundamental to how each of the protection
and control functions are set-up and used in the BE1-700 relay. Detailed information on using BESTlogic to
design complete protection and control schemes for the protected circuit can be found in Section 7, BESTlogic
Programmable Logic, and Section 8, Application.
Sections 3 through 6 describe each function provided in the BE1-700 relay and include references to the
following items. Note that not all items are appropriate for each function.
C Human-machine interface (HMI) screens for setting the operational parameters.
C BESTCOMS or ASCII commands for setting the operational parameters.
C BESTCOMS or ASCII commands for setting up the BESTlogic required to use the function in your
protection and control scheme.
C Outputs from the function such as alarm and BESTlogic variables or data reports.
C HMI screens for operation or interrogation of the outputs and reports provided by each function.
C BESTCOMS or ASCII commands for operation or interrogation of the outputs and reports provided
by each function.
About This Manual
The various application functions provided by this multifunction relay are divided into four categories:
input/output functions, protection and control functions, metering functions and reporting and alarm functions.
Detailed descriptions of each individual function, setup and use is covered in the sections as shown in Table
2-1. Detailed information on using programmable logic to create your own protection and control scheme is
described in Section 7,BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Section 15, BESTNet Communication , provides
information on all of the device ethernet enabled features and capabilities. Browser screen shots of available
web pages are illustrated and explained.
Table 2-1. Function Categories and Manual Sections Cross-Reference
Section Title Section
Input/Output Functions Section 3
Protection and Control Functions Section 4
Metering Functions Section 5
Reporting and Alarm Functions Section 6
Programmable Logic Section 7
Application Section 8
Installation Section 12
BESTNet Communication Section 15
BE1-700 Quick Start 2-1

BESTlogic
Each of the protection and control functions in the BE1-700 is implemented as an independent function block
that is equivalent to a single function, discrete device counterpart. Each independent function block has all
of the inputs and outputs that the discrete component counterpart might have. Programming BESTlogic is
equivalent to choosing the devices required by your protection and control scheme and drawing schematic
diagrams to connect the inputs and outputs to obtain the desired operational logic. The concept is the same
but the method is different in that you choose each function block by enabling it and use Boolean logic
expressions to connect the inputs and outputs. The result is that in designing your system, you have even
greater flexibility than you had using discrete devices. An added benefit is that you are not constrained by the
flexibility limitations inherent in many multifunction relays.
One user programmable, custom logic scheme created by the user may be programmed and saved in
memory. To save you time, several preprogrammed logic schemes have also been provided. Any of the
preprogrammed schemes can be copied into the programmable logic settings without the user having to make
any BESTlogic programming.
There are two types of BESTlogic settings: function block logic settings and output logic settings. These are
described briefly in the following paragraphs. Detailed information on using BESTlogic to design complete
protection and control schemes for the protected circuit can be found in Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable
Logic, and Section 8, Application.
Characteristics of Protection and Control Function Blocks

As stated before, each function block is equivalent to a discrete device counterpart. For example, the phase
time overcurrent function block in the BE1-700 relay has all of the characteristics of Basler BE1 relays with
similar functionality. Figure 2-1 is a logic drawing showing the inputs and outputs.
One input:
C BLK (block 51P operation)
Two mode settings: D2849-15
Mode = 06-17-99
C Enable 51P operation
0-disable PHASE
C Disable 51P operation
1-enable TOC
Two outputs: (51P) 51PT
C 51PT (51 Phase Trip) BLK 51PPU
C 51PPU (51 Phase Pickup)
Three operational settings:
C Pickup Figure 2-1. BE1-700C Time Overcurrent
C Time Delay (51) Logic
C Characteristic Curve
Of the above characteristics, the three operationalsettings are not included in the logic settings. They
are contained in the protection settings. This is an important distinction. Since changing logic settings is similar
to rewiring a panel, the logic settings are separate and distinct from the operational settings such as pickups
and time delays.
Function Block Logic Settings

To use a protection or control function block, there are two items that need to be set. The mode and the input
logic. The mode is equivalent to deciding which devices you want to install in your protection and control
scheme. You then must set the logic variables that will be connected to the inputs.
For example, the 51N function block has three modes (disabled, 3-phase summation (3Io) and ground), and
one input, block (torque control). To use this function block, the logic setting command might be
SL-51N=1,/IN2 for Set Logic-51N to be Mode 1 (3-phase and neutral) with the function blocked when Contact
Sensing Input 2 is not (/) energized. Contact Sensing Input 2 would be wired to a ground relay enable switch.
As noted before, the protection settings for this function block, pickup, time dial and curve must be set
separately in the setting group settings. The setting might be S0-51N=6.5,2.1,S1R,N for Setting in Group 0
2-2 Quick Start BE1-700

- the 51N function = pickup at 6.5 amps with a time dial of 2.1 using curve S1 with an integrating Reset
characteristic and no directional detection.
The 51N function block has two logic output variables, 51NT (Trip) and 51NPU (Picked Up). The combination
of the logic settings and the operational settings for the function block govern how these variables respond
to logic and current inputs.
Output Logic Settings

BESTlogic, as implemented in the BE1-700, supports up to 16 output expressions. The output expressions
are called virtual outputs to distinguish them from the physical output relays. VOA and VO1 through VO5 drive
physical outputs OUTA (failsafe alarm output) and OUT1 through OUT5 respectively. The rest of the virtual
outputs can be used for intermediate logic expressions.
For example, OUT 1 is wired to the trip bus of the circuit breaker. To set up the logic to trip the breaker, the
BESTlogic setting command might be SL-VO1=VO11+101T+BFPU for Set Logic - Virtual Output 1 = to Virtual
Output 11 (which is the intermediate logic expression for all of the function block tripping outputs) or (+) 101T
(the trip output of the virtual breaker control switch) or ( +) BFPU (the pickup output of the breaker failure
function block that indicates that breaker failure has been initiated).
USER INTERFACES
Two user interfaces are provided for interacting with the BE1-700 relay: one is the front panel HMI and the
other is ASCII communications. The front panel HMI provides access to a subset of the total functionality of
the device. ASCII communications provides access to all settings, controls, reports and metering functions
of the system.
Front Panel HMI

The front panel HMI consists of a two line by 16 character LCD (liquid crystal display) with four scrolling
pushbuttons, an edit pushbutton and a reset pushbutton. The EDIT pushbutton includes an LED to indicate
when edit mode is active. There are five other LEDs for indicating power supply status, relay trouble alarm
status, programmable major and minor alarm status, and a multipurpose Trip LED that flashes to indicate that
a protective element is picked up. The Trip LED lights continuously when the trip output is energized and seals
in when a protective trip has occurred to indicate that target information is being displayed on the LCD. A
complete description of the HMI is included in Section 10, Human-Machine Interface.
The BE1-700 HMI is menu driven and organized into a menu tree structure with six branches. A complete
menu tree description with displays is also provided in Section 4, Protection and Control. A list of the menu
branches and a brief description for scrolling through the menu is in the following paragraphs.
1. REPORT STATUS. Display and resetting of general status information such as targets, alarms, recloser
status.
2. CONTROL. Operation of manual controls such as virtual switches, selection of active setting group, etc.
3. METERING. Display of real-time metering values.
4. REPORTS. Display and resetting of report information such as time and date, demand registers, breaker
duty statistics, etc.
5. PROTECTION. Display and setting of protective function setting parameters such as logic scheme,
pickups, time delays, etc.
6. GENERAL SETTINGS. Display and setting of non-protective function setting parameters such as
communication, LCD contrast and CT ratios.
Each screen is assigned a number in the HMI section. The number indicates the branch and level in the menu
tree structure. Screen numbering helps you to keep track of where you are when you leave the menu tree top
level. You view each branch of the menu tree by using the right and left scrolling pushbuttons. To go to a level
of greater detail, you use the down scrolling pushbutton. Each time a lower level in a menu branch is reached,
the screen number changes to reflect the lower level. The following paragraphs and Figure 2-2 illustrate how
the display screens are numbered in the menu tree.
Viewing the 47 pickup and time delay settings of Setting Group 1 involves the following steps:

1. At the top level of the menu tree, use the LEFT or RIGHT scrolling pushbuttons to get to the
PROTECTION logic branch (Screen 5).
2. Press the DOWN scrolling pushbutton to reach the SETTING GROUP level (Screen 5.1).
3. Scroll RIGHT, to SETTING GROUP 1 branch (Screen 5.2).
4. From Screen 5.2, scroll down to the next level of detail which is the 24 SETTINGS (Screen 5.2.1).
5. Scroll right to the 47 SETTINGS (Screen 5.2.5) and then down to reach the 47 pickup and time delay
settings (Screen 5.2.5.1).
5 PROTECTION *
700C-5051-A-BE
5.1 SETTING 5.2 SETTING

GROUP 0 GROUP 1
D2838-49
06-08-04
5.2.1 24 5.2.5 47
SETTINGS SETTINGS
5.2.5.1 47
PU 0.0 TD 50m
Figure 2-2. BE1-700V Menu Screens Numbering Example
ASCII Command Communications

The BE1-700 relay has two independent communications ports for serial communications plus one optional
ethernet port. A computer terminal or PC running a terminal emulation program such as Windows
HyperTerminal can be connected to any of the ports so that commands can be sent to the relay.
Communication with the relay uses a simple ASCII command language. When a command is entered via a
serial port, the relay responds with the appropriate action. ASCII command communication is designed for
both human-to-machine interactions and batch download type operations. The following paragraphs briefly
describe the command structure and discuss human-to-machine interactions and batch command text file
operations. The operation of the ASCII commands is described in detail in Section 11, ASCII Command
Interface.
Command Structure
An ASCII command consists of a command string made up of one or two letters followed by a hyphen and
an object name. The first letter specifies the general command function and the second a sub-group. The
object name is the specific function for which the command is intended. A command string entered by itself
is a read command. A command string followed by an equal sign and one or more parameters is a write
command. The general command groups are organized into five major groups plus several miscellaneous
commands. These commands are as follows:
C CONTROL. Commands to perform select before operate control actions such as tripping and closing the
circuit breaker, changing the active setting group, etc. Subgroups include S for Select and O for Operate.
G GLOBAL. Perform global operations that do not fall into the other general groups such as password
security. Subgroups include: S for security settings.
M METERING. Read all real time metering values. This general command group has no subgroups.
P PROGRAM. Subgroup command to read or program a setting.

R REPORTS. Read and reset reporting functions such as time and date, demand registers, breaker duty
statistics, etc. Subgroups include: A for Alarm functions, B for Breaker monitoring functions, D for Demand
recording functions, F for Fault summary reporting functions, G for General information and S for
sequence of events recorder functions.
S SETTINGS. Set all setting parameters that govern the functioning of the relay. Subgroups include: 0,1,
for settings in setting groups, A for alarm settings, B for breaker monitoring settings, G for general settings
and L for logic settings.
MISCELLANEOUS. Miscellaneous commands include ACCESS, EXIT and HELP.
Examples of object names would be 51N for the neutral inverse time overcurrent function or PIA for the A
phase, peak current demand register.
For example, to check the 51N pickup setting in Setting Group 1, you would enter S1-51N for Setting, Group
1-51N. The relay would respond with the current pickup, time dial and curve settings for the 51N function. To
edit these settings the same command would be used with an = followed by the new settings and the ENTER
pushbutton. Note that its necessary to use the ACCESS and EXIT commands when using the write version
of these commands.
ASCII Command Operations

Using ASCII commands, settings can be read and changed on a function by function basis. The mnemonic
format of the commands helps you interact with the relay. It isn’t necessary to remember all of the object
names. Most commands don’t require that you specify a complete object name. If the first two letters of a
command are entered, the relay will respond with all applicable object names.
Example Obtain a breaker operations count by entering RB (Report Breaker). The BE1-700 responds with
the operations counter value along with all other breaker report objects. If you know that the
object name for the breaker operations counter is OPCNTR, you can enter RB-OPCNTR and
read only the number of breaker operations.
Partial object names are also supported. This allows multiple objects to be read or reset at the same time.
Example Read all peak-since-reset demand registers. Entering RD-PI (report demand - peak current) will
return demand values and time stamps for phase A, B, C, neutral and negative-sequence
current. To read only the neutral demand value, the full object name (RD-PIN) is entered.
Entering RD-PI=0 resets all five of the peak-since-reset demand registers.
Batch Command Text File Operations

With a few exceptions, each function of the relay uses one command to set it and each setting command
operates on all of the parameters required by that function. See the example mentioned previously in the
paragraph titled Command Structure. This format results in a great many commands to fully set the relay.
Also, the process of setting the relay does not use a prompting mode where the relay prompts you for each
parameter in turn until you exit the setting process. For these reasons, a method for setting the relay using
batch text files is recommended.
In batch download type operations, the user creates an ASCII text file of commands and sends it to the relay.
To facilitate this process, the response from a multiple read command is output from the BE1-700 in command
format. So the user need only enter S for Set (with no subgroup) and the relay responds with all of the setting
commands and their associated parameters. If the user enters S1 for Setting Group 1, the relay responds with
all of the setting commands for Setting Group 1. The user can capture this response to a file, edit it using any
ASCII text editor and then send the file back to the relay. See Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, for a
more detailed discussion of how to use ASCII text files for setting the relay.
BESTCOMS for BE1-700, Graphical User Interface
Basler Electric's graphical user interface (GUI) software is an alternative method for quickly developing setting
files in a user-friendly, Windows ® based environment. Using the GUI, you may prepare setting files off-line
(without being connected to the relay) and then upload the settings to the relay at your convenience. These
settings include protection and control, operating and logic, breaker monitoring, metering and fault recording.

Engineering personnel can develop, test and replicate the settings before exporting it to a file and transmitting
the file to technical personnel in the field. On the field end, the technician simply imports the file into the
BESTCOMS database and uploads the file to the relay where it is stored in nonvolatile memory.
The GUI also has the same preprogrammed logic schemes that are stored in the relay. This gives the
engineer the option (off-line) of developing his setting file using a preprogrammed logic scheme, customizing
a preprogrammed logic scheme or building a scheme from scratch. Files may be exported from the GUI to
a text editor where they can be reviewed or modified. The modified text file may then be uploaded to the relay.
After it is uploaded to the relay, it can be brought into the GUI but it cannot be brought directly into the GUI
from the text file. The GUI logic builder uses basic AND/OR gate logic combined with point and click variables
to build the logic expressions. This reduces the design time and increases dependability.
The GUI also allows for downloading industry standard COMTRADE files for analysis of stored oscillography
data. Detailed analysis of the oscillography files may be accomplished using Basler Electric's BESTwave
software. For more information on Basler Electric's Windows ® based BESTCOMS (GUI) software or
BESTwave contact your local sales representative or Basler Electric, Technical Support Services Department
in Highland, Illinois.
GETTING STARTED
If your relay has power supply Option 2, it can be supplied by normal 120 Vac house power. This power
supply option is the 125 Vac/dc power supply. The contact sensing inputs are half-wave rectified,
opto-isolators. The default contact recognition and debounce settings enable their use on ac signals as well
as dc signals.
The BE1-700 measures the A phase, B phase and C phase current magnitudes directly from the three current
sensing inputs. The neutral and negative-sequence magnitudes are calculated from the fundamental
component of each of the three-phase currents. When evaluating the negative-sequence functions, the relay
can be tested using a single-phase current source. To fully evaluate the operation of the relay in the power
system, it is desirable to use a three-phase current source.
Connect a computer to the front RS-232 port (refer to Section 12, Installation, for connection diagrams). Apply
power and Enter A= to gain setting access. Set the clock using the RG-TIME= and RG-DATE= commands.
(Refer to Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, for additional information.)
Entering Test Settings
Enter SG (Setting General) to get a listing of the general setting commands with default parameters and put
them in a text file as described previously in Batch Command Text File Operations. Then enter S0 (setting
group 0) to get a listing of the Setting Group 0 protection setting commands with default parameters and put
them in a text file also. With these two sub-groups of settings, you will not see the global security settings, user
programmable BESTlogic settings, settings for protection Setting Groups 0 and 1, settings for alarm functions
and the settings for breaker monitoring functions.
Open the SG file in a text editor, change settings, as required and save the changes. For example:
• The ratios for the phase and neutral current transformers (CTP, CTG).
• The demand interval and CT circuit to monitor for the phase, neutral and negative-sequence
currents (DIP, DIN, DIQ).
• The nominal system frequency (FREQ).
• The normal phase-sequence (ABC or ACB) for the system (PHROT).
• Open the S0 file in a text editor, change settings as required, and save the changes.
Do not forget to add E;Y (Exit; Save Settings? Yes) to the end of both files. Enter A= to gain setting access
and then send each of these text files to the relay as described above under Batch Command Text File
Operations.
As you gain knowledge of the relay, you can experiment with the rest of the settings. To set up a file with all
user settings, enter S and the relay will respond with all settings in command format. A Microsoft ® Excel
spreadsheet of the Relay Settings Record is available for creating and documenting your relay settings. This

file may be downloaded from Basler Electric’s Web site (http://www.basler.com) or by contacting Basler
Electric, Info/Support Section at the Highland, Illinois facility. You may also use the GUI as discussed
previously in this section.
Default settings can be found several different ways. The default preprogrammed logic scheme is dependent
on the type of relay. (See Figure 1.1, Style Chart.) Section 8, Application, lists all of the default logic settings
for the default logic scheme. If you wanted to know the default logic setting for relay Output 3 (VO3), you could
look at the default listing and find that SL-VO3=51PT. Translated, this means that the setting, logic – Virtual
Output 3 is TRUE (1) when the phase time overcurrent element trips. You could also look in Section 4,
Protection and Control, find the table for the logic settings. It lists the same information, but it lists the mode
and block inputs separately. If you want to find the default settings for an input or output, look in Section 3,
Input and Output Functions.
Checking the State of Inputs
You can review the state of the inputs through the front panel HMI or the ASCII command interface. The front
panel HMI displays the input status on Screen 1.5.1. A diagram showing all of the menu tree branches is
located in Section 10, Human-Machine Interface. To get to this screen, press the UP scrolling pushbutton until
you reach the top screen in the current branch. You know when you have reached the top screen because
the screen stops changing when you press the UP scrolling pushbutton. From this position, press the RIGHT
scrolling pushbutton until you have reached the screen titled, REPORT STATUS. From this position press the
DOWN scrolling pushbutton one time (TARGETS) and press the RIGHT scrolling pushbutton three times. At
this time, you should see the OPERATIONAL STATUS Screen. If you press the DOWN scrolling pushbutton
from this screen, you should see the INPUTS Screen (IN 1234).
To check the state of the inputs using the ASCII command interface, type in the RG-STAT command and
press enter. This command only reads the status of the inputs.
Testing
To determine if the relay is responding correctly to each test, the following commands are useful:
1. RG-TARG, (report general targets): reports the targets from the last fault.
2. RF, (report faults): reports a directory listing of the twelve fault summary reports. The fault summary
reports are numbered from 1 to 255 and then wrap around and start over. RF-### reports the ###
report.
3. RS-##, (report sequence of events record), ## events: reports the most recent ## changes of state
in the protection and control logic.
FAQ/TROUBLE SHOOTING
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

1. Why won't the trip LED reset when I press the RESET key on the front panel?
The RESET key is context sensitive. To reset the trip LED or the targets, the Target Screen must be
displayed. To reset the alarms, the Alarm Screen must be displayed.
2. Is the power supply polarity sensitive?

No, the power supply will accept either an ac or dc voltage input. However, the contact sensing for the
programmable inputs is polarity sensitive. Refer to Section 12, Installation, for typical interconnection
diagrams.
3. What voltage level is used to develop current flow through the contact sensing inputs?
Voltage level is dependent on the power supply option (called out in the BE1-700 style charts). For
additional information, see Figures 1-1 and 1-2 in Section 1, General Information, and Section 12,
Installation.

4. Does the BE1-700 trip output contact latch after a fault?
The answer to the question is yes and no. In general, once the fault goes away the output contacts
open. The BE1-700 does offer an option to ensure that the contact will stay closed for at least 200
milliseconds. See Section 3, Input and Output Functions for additional information on that function. But,
BESTlogic can keep the relay outputs closed as long as power is applied. Refer to Application, Section
8, Application, Application Tips, for additional information.
5. Why won't a function work when I put in settings such as the pickup and time delays?
Make sure that the logic for the function is set to “Enable.”
6. How many overcurrent elements does the BE1-700 have available?

The BE1-700 has six instantaneous overcurrent and four time overcurrent elements. Just like any
element each of these elements can be assigned to any output for building logic equations.
7. Can I make logic settings from the front panel?

No, the front panel can not program logic settings. Logic settings must be programmed using the ASCII
command interface or BESTCOMS communication software.
8. Since the BE1-700 is a programmable device, what are the factory defaults?
The factory default preprogrammed logic scheme depends on the specific type of relay ordered. See
Figure 1-1, Style Chart. A current relay has700C-5051-A-BE or 700C-OC79-A-BE (R style) logic. A
voltage relay has 700VOUVF-A-BE or 700V-VF79-A-BE (R style) logic. Default settings are shown with
each function in the instruction manual. For input or output default settings see Section 3, Input and
Output Functions . For protection and control functions, see Section 4, Protection and Control. The
default settings are also embedded in the BE1-700 spreadsheets that are available from the Basler
Electric web site, http://www.basler.com, in the Download Section under Software Tools.
9. Does the BE1-700 have a battery installed as the back-up power source for the internal clock on
loss of power?
No.
10. Why do I keep getting access conflict errors when I attempt communication with the relay?
If you try to gain access to more than one port at a time, an access conflict results. The relay has three
communication ports: COM0, Com1 and COM2. The front panel HMI and RS-232 port are considered
to be the same port and are designated COM0. Com1 is the optional ethernet port. The rear RS-485
port is designated as COM2. If access at the front panel HMI has been obtained, access cannot be
gained at another port. The front RS-232 port can still be accessed because the HMI and front RS-232
port are considered to be the same port (COM0). Access needs to be gained only when a write
command to the BE1-700 is required (control or setting change or report reset). When access is gained
through a port, a five minute timer starts counting down to zero. When port activity occurs, the timer
resets to five minutes and resumes counting down. If no activity is seen for the duration of the five
minute timer, access is withdrawn and any unsaved changes are lost. When activity at a port is no
longer required, access should be terminated with the Exit command. When using BESTCOMS, the
Access and Exit commands are executed for you. Obtaining data or reports from the relay never
requires password access.
11. Why doesn't the trip LED behave as expected when the relay picks up and trips?
Why don’t the targets work properly?
If a protective element is tripping at the desired level, but the targets and fault records aren’t behaving
as expected, two commands should be checked. The SG-TARG command needs the protective
element (function) enabled so that targets are logged. The SG-TRIGGER command must be

programmed with the correct pickup logic expression and trip logic expression to initiate fault records.
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting, for detailed information about programming
these commands.
Trip LED behavior also depends on the pickup and trip expressions of the SG-TRIGGER command.
When the SG-TRIGGER pickup expression is TRUE and the trip expression is FALSE, the Trip LED
flashes. In other words, a flashing LED means that a protection element is in a picked up state and is
timing toward a trip. When both the pickup and trip expression is TRUE, the Trip LED lights steadily.
The Trip LED also lights steadily when neither expression is TRUE but latched targets exist. When
resetting a target, the Trip LED will not turn off if the fault is still present. The truth table of Table 2-2
serves as an aid to interpreting Trip LED indications.
Table 2-2. Trip LED Truth Table

Trip Pickup Targets Trip LED
No No No Off
No No Yes On
No Yes No Flash
No Yes Yes Flash
Yes No No On
Yes No Yes On
Yes Yes No On
Yes Yes Yes On
12. Is the IRIG signal modulated or demodulated?

The BE1-700 accepts an IRIG-B signal that is demodulated (dc level-shifted digital signal). See Section
1, General Information, Operational Specifications, for additional information.
13. Can the IRIG signal be daisy-chained to multiple BE1-700 units?

Yes, multiple BE1-700 units can use the same IRIG-B input signal by daisy chaining the BE1-700
inputs. The burden data is nonlinear, approximately 4 kilo-ohms at 3.5 Vdc and 3 kilo-ohms at 20 Vdc.
See Section 1, General Information, Specifications, and Section 3, Input and Output Functions , for
additional information.
14. How are reports and other information obtained from the relay saved in files for future use?
BESTCOMS can be used to capture records information. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, Fault Reporting, Fault Summary Reports.
Also, any information reported by the relay can be transferred to a text file and saved for future use.
Text received from the relay to your terminal emulation software can be selected and copied to the
clipboard. The clipboard contents are pasted into any word processor such as Microsoft® Notepad and
then saved with an appropriate file name.
You may also use your terminal emulation software to store reports in files as they are received from
the relay. In BESTVIEW, this is accomplished by using the “log/open log file” function. In Microsoft ®
HyperTerminal, this function is available through the “capture text” feature. Microsoft ® Windows ®
Terminal provides this function through the “received text file” feature.

15. How can I check the version number of my BE1-700?
The application version can be found in three different ways: One, use HMI, Screen 4.7. Two, use the
RG-VER command with the ASCII command interface. Three, use BESTCOMS for BE1-700. (The
version in BESTCOMS is provided on the General Operation Screen, GeneraI Information tab).

SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
POWER SYSTEM INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Current Measurement (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Current Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Neutral and Negative-Sequence Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Fast-Dropout Current Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Voltage Measurement (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Voltage Measurement Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
VT Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Zero-Sequence Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Negative-Sequence (V2) Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Frequency Measurement (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Frequency Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Measurement Functions Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Power System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
CT & VT Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
CONTACT SENSING INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Digital Input Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Setting the Digital Input Conditioning Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Retrieving Input Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Hardware Outputs and Virtual Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Retrieving Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Relay Trouble Alarm Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Programmable Hold Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Output Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Enabling Logic Override Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Pulsing an Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Holding an Output Contact Open or Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Returning an Output Contact to Logic Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Retrieving Output Logic Override Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figures
Figure 3-1. General Operation Screen, Power System Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-2. General Operation Screen, CT & VT Setup Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Figure 3-3. Digital Input Conditioning Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-4. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Inputs 1-4 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-5. Output Logic, General Purpose Output Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-6. Output Logic, Fail-Safe Alarm Output Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-7. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Outputs 1-5, A Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Tables
Table 3-1. Measurement Functions Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-2. Digital Input Conditioning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Table 3-3. Hold Timer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
BE1-700 Input and Output Functions i

SECTION 3 • INPUT AND OUTPUT FUNCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
The BE1-700C current relay inputs consist of 3-phase current inputs and an independent ground current input.
The BE1-700V voltage relay inputs consist of 3-phase voltage inputs and an optional single-phase auxiliary
voltage input. Five general purpose output contacts and one dedicated, fail-safe alarm output make up the
BE1-700 outputs. Each input and output is isolated and terminated at separate terminal blocks. This section
describes the function and setup of each input and output, and provides the equations that the BE1-700 uses
for calculating the power quantities.
POWER SYSTEM INPUTS

Power system inputs as described in the introduction, are sampled 12 times per cycle by the BE1-700. The
BE1-700 measures the voltage and current from these samples and uses those measurements to calculate
other quantities. Frequency is measured from a zero crossing detector. Measured inputs are then recorded
every quarter cycle. If the applied voltage is greater than 10 volts, the BE1-700 measures the frequency and
varies the sampling rate to maintain 12 samples per cycle. Frequency compensation applies to all power
system measurements. Power system inputs are broken down in the following paragraphs into Current
Measurement, Voltage Measurement, Frequency Measurement and Measurement Functions Setup. After the
power system inputs are discussed, the paragraphs on power calculations discuss calculating power
quantities.
Current Measurement (BE1-700C)

Secondary current from power system equipment CTs is applied to current transformers inside the relay.
These internal transformers provide isolation and step down the monitored current to levels compatible with
relay circuitry. Secondary current from each internal CT is converted to a voltage signal and then filtered by
an analog, low-pass, anti-aliasing filter.
Current Measurement Functions

Input waveforms are sampled by an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) at 12 samples per cycle. The relay
extracts the magnitude and angle of the fundamental components of each three-phase current input and the
magnitude and angle of the independent ground current input.
Neutral and Negative-Sequence Current

Neutral and negative-sequence components are measured from the fundamental component of the three-
phase current inputs. The relay can be set to accommodate ABC or ACB phase sequence when calculating
the component.
Fast-Dropout Current Detector

A separate, fast-dropout current measurement algorithm is used by the breaker failure function and the
breaker trip-speed monitoring function. This measurement algorithm has a sensitivity of 10 percent of nominal
rating and detects current interruption in the circuit breaker much more quickly than the regular current
measurement functions. This measurement algorithm only monitors phase current.
Voltage Measurement (BE1-700V)

Three-phase voltage inputs are reduced to internal signal levels by a precision resistor divider network. If the
relay is set for single-phase or four-wire VT operation, the measuring elements are configured in wye. If the
relay is set for three-wire VT operation, the measuring elements are configured in delta.
BE1-700 Input and Output Functions 3-1

Voltage Measurement Functions
Input waveforms are sampled by an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) at 12 samples per cycle. The relay
extracts the magnitude and angle of the fundamental components of each three-phase voltage input and the
magnitude of the optional auxiliary voltage input.
VT Connections
When four-wire VT connections are used, the relay measures the three-phase to neutral voltages and
calculates the phase voltage quantities. Overvoltage and undervoltage functions (27/59) can be set to operate
on either the phase-to-neutral (PN) or phase-to-phase (PP) quantities. Three-wire VT connections limit 27/59
operation to PP quantities. When single-phase VT connections are used, the 27/59 elements operate as
appropriate for the single-phase voltage applied.
Zero-Sequence Voltage
When four-wire VT connections are used, the BE1-700 calculates the zero-sequence voltage (3V0). Zero-
sequence voltage measurement is not available when single-phase or three-wire VT connections are used.
The 27X and 59X can be set to monitor the zero sequence voltage.
Negative-Sequence (V2) Voltage

Negative-sequence voltage is calculated from the fundamental component of the three-phase voltage inputs.
It is only available on three-phase, three-wire, or three-phase, four-wire systems. V2 is calibrated to the phase-
to-neutral base. Negative-sequence measurements can accommodate either ABC or ACB phase sequence.
Frequency Measurement (BE1-700V)

Power system frequency is monitored on the A-phase voltage input or the AB voltage input when in three-wire
mode. When the applied voltage is greater than 10 volts, the BE1-700 measures the frequency. The measured
frequency is used by the 81 function and applies to all measurements and calculations.
Frequency Compensation
After measuring the frequency, the BE1-700 varies the sampling rate to maintain 12 samples per cycle over
a frequency of 10 to 75 hertz. If the voltage is too low for accurate frequency measurement or if the measured
frequency is out of range, the ADC defaults to a sampling rate appropriate for the relay nominal frequency
setting. The sampling rate is adjusted every 250 milliseconds.
Measurement Functions Setup

The BE1-700 requires information about the power system and its current or voltage transformers to provide
metering, fault reporting and protective relaying. This information is entered using BESTCOMS. Alternately,
it may be entered at the HMI (see Section 10, Human-Machine Interface) or through the communication port
using the following ASCII commands: SG-CT, SG-VTP, SG-VTX, SG-FREQ, SG-NOM and SG-PHROT. The
SG-LINE command is found in Section 4, Protection and Control, with the polarizing information.
Power System Settings

To enter power system settings, select General Operation from the Screens pull-down menu. Then select the
Power System Tab. Refer to Figure 3-1.
Use the pull down buttons and menus to make the power systems settings.
Nominal Frequency can be set for 50 hertz or 60 hertz power systems. When the voltage and current are too
low for reliable frequency measurement, the ADC sample rate defaults to operation at the nominal frequency
setting. Nominal frequency is also used in the volts/hertz (24) overexcitation calculation (BE1-700V only).
Nominal Phase Rotation can be set for either ABC rotation or ACB rotation.
3-2 Input and Output Functions BE1-700

Nominal Secondary Voltage
and Current Settings. Vnom is
used for the 60FL function and
DNP 3.0 analog event reporting
functions. V nom is also used in
the volts/hertz (24) calculation.
In the BE1-700 voltage relay,
Vnom is defined as the secondary
phase-neutral voltage for all
sensing connections. That is,
even if the user has selected 3-
wire, AB, BC or CA phase-
phase sensing connections,
Vnom must be set for the phase-
neutral equivalent. For example,
if a 3-wire open delta voltage
source with a phase-phase
voltage rating of 120 volts is
connected, the nominal voltage
must be set at 120/ 3 or 69.3 Figure 3-1. General Operation Screen, Power System Tab
volts.
Inom is used in the 46 time curve calculation (K factor) of the negative-sequence current (51Q) element and
DNP 3.0 analog event reporting functions. Inom can be either the secondary rating of the CT (1 or 5 amp) or
the secondary current allowed by the CT ratio.
Nominal Current (Inom) is the nominal phase current rating for the system corresponding to 1 pu current and
is configured in secondary amps. If 1 pu secondary current is unknown, then setting Inom to the secondary CT
rating (1 or 5 A) is acceptable for most applications. However, this could degrade the expectation (not
accuracy) of the time curve for the 51Q element as Inom is used to directly compute multiple of pickup (MOP)
and time delay.
In BESTCOMS for the BE1-700, under General Operation, Power System tab are settings for Nominal Voltage
and Current. Nominal Voltage (Vnom) is the nominal voltage rating corresponding to 1 pu volts and is configured
as a phase-neutral secondary value.
CT & VT Settings
To enter current and power
transformer settings, select
General Operations from the
Screens pull-down menu.
Then select the CT & VT
Setup tab. Refer to Figure 3-
2.
CT Ratio. The BE1-700
requires setting information
on the CT ratio. These
settings are used by the
metering and fault reporting
functions to display
measured quantities in
primary units. Sec. Amps is
used to select secondary CT
amps. Pri Amps will display
the primary amps of the CT
based on the number of
turns. Either Turns or Pri
Figure 3-2. General Operation Screen, CT & VT Setup Tab

Amps may be adjusted to achieve the desired turns ratio. Adjusting either will automatically change the value
of the other.
VTP Setup, VT Ratio. The BE1-700 requires setting information about the VT ratio, the VT connections and
the operating modes for the 27/59 functions. These settings are used by the metering and fault reporting
functions to display measured quantities in primary units. The voltage input circuit settings also determine
which power measurement calculations are used. Most of these connections such as 3W, 4W, AN or AB are
self explanatory.
VTP Setup, VTX Ratio. The auxiliary voltage input (VX) connection can be set for any voltage combination
VA, VB, VC, VAB, VBC or VCA. When set for one of these voltages, the sync-check function can automatically
compensate for the phase angle difference relative to the reference voltage measured at the three-phase
voltage inputs. Alternately, the VX input connection can be set to GR. This setting is used when the VX input
is connected to a source of ground unbalance voltage or residual voltage such as a generator grounding
resistor, broken delta VT connection or capacitor bank star point.
Table 3-1 lists the measurement function’s settings. C refers to a current relay; V refers to a voltage relay.
Table 3-1. Measurement Functions Settings

Relay
Type Function Range Increment Unit of Measure Default
C CT Ratio 1 to 50,000 1 turns 1
CT Ratio,
C independent ground 1 to 50,000 1 turns 1
input
PP (phase-to-phase)
C 51 pickup mode n/a n/a PP
PN (phase-to-neutral)
0.1 to 2
0.01 secondary amps 1
(1 ampere sensing)
C Nominal amps
0.5 to 10
0.01 secondary amps 5
(10 ampere sensing)
V VTP ratio 1 to 10,000 0.01 turns 1
3W, 4W, AN, BN, CN,

V VTP connection n/a n/a 4W
AB, BC, CA
PP (phase-to-phase)
V 27/59 pickup mode n/a n/a PP
PN (phase-to-neutral)
VTX ratio
V 1 to 9,999 0.01 turns 1
AN, BN, CN, AB, BC,

V VTX connection n/a n/a AN
CA, GR
V Nominal frequency 50, 60 n/a hertz 60
50 to 250
V Nominal volts 0.1 sec volts 69.3
0 = disabled
C&V Phase Rotation ABC, ACB n/a n/a ABC
CONTACT SENSING INPUTS

BE1-700 relays have four contact sensing inputs to initiate BE1-700 relay actions. These inputs are isolated
and require an external wetting voltage. Nominal voltage(s) of the external dc source(s) must fall within the
relay dc power supply input voltage range.

Digital Input Conditioning Function
Status of the contact sensing inputs is checked 12 times per cycle. See Figure 3-3. When operating on a 60
hertz power system, this results in the input status being sampled every 1.4 milliseconds (1.6 milliseconds on
50 hertz systems). User-settable digital contact recognition and debounce timers condition the signals applied
to the inputs. These parameters can be adjusted to obtain the optimum compromise between speed and
security for a specific application. Digital input conditioning is evaluated every quarter cycle.
Figure 3-3. Digital Input Conditioning Timing Diagram
If the sampled status of a monitored contact is detected to be closed for the recognition time, the logic variable
changes from an open (logic 0 or FALSE) state to a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state. Once contact closure is
recognized, the logic variable remains in the closed state until the sampled status of the monitored contact
is detected to be open for a period that is longer than the debounce time. At this point, the logic variable will
change from a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state to an open (logic 0 or FALSE) state.
Setting the Digital Input Conditioning Function

Settings and labels for the
digital input conditioning
function are set using
BESTCOMS (see Figure 3-4).
Alternately, settings may be
made using the SG-IN ASCII
Command.
Each of the four inputs has
two settings and three labels.
The settings are Recognition
Time and Debounce Time.
The labels include a label to
describe the input, a label to
describe the Closed State and
a label to describe the Open
State. Labels are used by the
BE1-700's reporting functions.
To edit the settings or labels,
select Inputs and Outputs
from the Screens pull-down Figure 3-4. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Inputs 1-4 Tab
menu. Then select the Inputs
1-4 tab.
See Table 3-2 for a list of settings and their defaults.

Table 3-2. Digital Input Conditioning Settings
Setting Range Increment Unit of Measure Default
Recognition Time 4 to 255 1* milliseconds 4
Debounce Time 4 to 255 1* milliseconds 16
Time Units Pull-down menu that selects the unit of measure for Recognition Time and
Debounce Time. Units of measure available are: milliseconds (ms), seconds,
minutes and cycles. The default is milliseconds.
Name User programmable label for the input contact. Used by the reporting function
to give meaningful identification to the input contact. This label may be up to 10
characters long.
Closed State User programmable label for the contact’s close state. Used by the reporting
function to give meaningful identification to the state of the input contact. This
label may be up to seven characters long.
Open State User programmable label for the contact’s open state. Used by the reporting
function to give meaningful identification to the state of the input contact. This
label may be up to seven characters long.
* Since the input conditioning function is evaluated every quarter cycle, the setting is internally rounded to the
nearest multiple of 4.16 milliseconds (60 Hz systems) or 5 milliseconds (50 Hz systems).
If you are concerned about ac voltage being coupled into the contact sensing circuits, the recognition time can
be set to greater than one-half of the power system cycle period. This will take advantage of the half-wave
rectification provided by the input circuitry.
If an ac wetting voltage is used, the recognition time can be set to less than one-half of the power system
cycle period and the debounce timer can be set to greater than one-half of the power system cycle period.
The extended debounce time will keep the input energized during the negative half-cycle. The default settings
of 4 and 16 milliseconds are compatible with ac wetting voltages.
Digital input conditioning settings are entered through the communication ports using the SG-IN (setting
general-input) command.
Retrieving Input Status Information from the Relay

Input status is determined through BESTCOMS by selecting Metering from the Reports pull-down menu and
selecting the Start Polling button in the lower right hand corner of the screen. Alternately, status can be
determined through HMI Screen 1.5.1 or through the communication ports using the RG-STAT (report
general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, for more
information.
OUTPUTS
BE1-700 relays have five general purpose output contacts (OUT1 through OUT5) and one fail-safe, normally
closed (when de-energized), alarm output contact (OUTA). Each output is isolated and rated for tripping duty.
OUT1 through OUT5 are Form A (normally open) and OUTA is Form B (normally closed). A trip coil monitoring
circuit is hardwired across Out1. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Trip Circuit Monitoring, for
details.
Hardware Outputs and Virtual Outputs

Output contacts OUT1 through OUT5 and OUTA are driven by BESTlogic expressions for VO1 through VO5
(Virtual Outputs 1 through 5) and VOA (Virtual Output A). The use of each output contact is completely
programmable so you can assign meaningful labels to each output and to the logic 0 and logic 1 states of each
output. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, has more information about programming output
expressions in your programmable logic schemes.

A virtual output (VOn) exists only as a logical state inside the relay. A hardware output is a physical output
relay contact. BESTlogic expressions for VO1 through VO5 (Virtual Outputs 1 through 5) and VOA (Virtual
Output A) drive output contacts OUT1 through OUT5 and OUTA. The state of the output contacts can vary
from the state of the output logic expressions for three reasons:
a. The relay trouble alarm disables all hardware outputs.
b. The programmable hold timer is active.
c. The select-before-operate function overrides a virtual output.
Figure 3-5 shows a diagram of the output contact logic for the general purpose output contacts. Figure 3-6
illustrates the output contact logic for the fail-safe alarm output contact.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
CONTROLED BY SL-VO[n]
LOGIC EQUATION
OUTPUT
VO[n] STATUS HARDWARE
AND
OUTPUT
OUTPUT CONTROL
(CO-OUT COMMAND) OR 0 Sec OR
Control Override (0/1) AND AND OUT[n]
0.200 Sec
AND
Override State (0/1)
ONE SHOT TIMER
Hold State (0/1) ALMREL
HOLD ENA D2647-18

08-20-98
(SG-HOLD COMMAND)
Figure 3-5. Output Logic, General Purpose Output Contacts
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
CONTROLED BY SL-VO[n]
LOGIC EQUATION OUTPUT
STATUS HARDWARE
VO[A]
AND OUTPUT
OUTPUT CONTROL
(CO-OUT COMMAND) OR 0 Sec
Control Override (0/1) AND OR NOT OUT[A]
0.200 Sec
AND
Override State (0/1)
ONE SHOT TIMER
ALMREL
Hold State (0/1)
HOLD ENA D2647-19
08-20-98
(SG-HOLD COMMAND)
Figure 3-6. Output Logic, Fail-Safe Alarm Output Contact
Retrieving Output Status

Output status is determined through BESTCOMS by selecting Metering from the Reports pull-down menu and
selecting the Start Polling button in the lower right hand corner of the screen. Alternately, status can be
determined through the HMI Screen 1.5.2 and through the communication ports using the RG-STAT (report
general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, for more
information.
Relay Trouble Alarm Disable

When the BE1-700 self-diagnostics function detects a relay problem, an internal alarm condition (ALMREL)
is set. This alarm condition disables the outputs and de-energizes the OUTA relay, closing the OUTA contact.
For more details about this function see Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarms Function.
Programmable Hold Timer

Historically, electromechanical relays have provided trip contact seal-in circuits. These seal-in circuits
consisted of a dc coil in series with the relay trip contact and a seal-in contact in parallel with the trip contact.
The seal-in feature serves several purposes for electromechanical relays. One purpose is to provide
mechanical energy to drop the target. A second purpose is to carry the dc tripping current from the induction
disk contact which may not have significant closing torque for a low resistance connection. A third purpose
is to prevent the relay contact from dropping out until the current has been interrupted by the 52a contacts in
series with the trip coil. If the tripping contact opens before the dc current is interrupted, the contact may be
damaged. Of the three items, only item three is an issue for electronic relays like the BE1-700.
To prevent the output relay contacts from opening prematurely, a hold timer can hold the output contact closed
for a minimum of 200 milliseconds. If seal-in logic with feedback from the breaker position logic is desired, the
BESTlogic expression for the tripping output can be modified. This process is described in Section 7,
BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Application Tips.
The hold timer can be enabled for each input using the SG-HOLD (setting general-hold) command. Hold timer
settings are shown in Table 3-3.
To enable the hold timer using
BESTCOMS, select Inputs
and Outputs from the Screens
menu. Refer to Figure 3-7. To
enable the hold timer for a
desired output, check the box
labeled Hold Attribute by
clicking in the box with the
mouse pointer.
Figure 3-7. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Outputs 1-5, A Tab
Table 3-3 lists the default setting for the hold timer attribute. the Hold Attribute for Out 1, Out 2 and Out 5 is
enabled.
Table 3-3. Hold Timer Settings

Output 0 = disabled 200 ms OUTA = 0 OUT1 = 1 OUT2 = 1
Hold timer 1 = enabled OUT 3 = 0 OUT4 = 0 OUT5 = 1
Output Logic Override Control

Each output contact can be controlled directly using the select-before-operate output control function. The
virtual output logic expression that normally controls the state of an output contact can be overridden and the
contact pulsed, held open or held closed. This function is useful for testing purposes. An alarm point is
available in the programmable alarm function for monitoring when the output logic has been overridden. See
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Functions, for more information about programmable
alarms. Write access to control functions is required before using the select-before-operate control functions
through the HMI or ASCII command interface. It can not be achieved using BESTCOMS.
Enabling Logic Override Control

By default, logic override control is disabled. Output logic override must be enabled before the control can be
used. Enabling of the output logic override control is not possible at the front panel HMI. It can only be enabled
through a communication port using the CS/CO-OUT=ena/dis (control select/control operate-output

override=enable/disable) command. The CS/CO-OUT command only enables or disables override control
of the output logic; it doesn’t enable or disable the outputs themselves.
Pulsing an Output Contact

Pulsing BE1-700 outputs provides the same function as the push-to-energize feature of other Basler Electric
solid-state relays. This feature is useful when testing the protection and control system. When pulsed, an
output contact changes from the current state (as determined by the virtual output logic expression) to the
opposite state for 200 milliseconds. After 200 milliseconds, the output contact is returned automatically to logic
control.
Pulse override control is accessed at Screen 2.4.1 of the HMI by entering a P in the field for the output contact
to be pulsed. Pulse control is accessed through a communication port by using the CS/CO-OUTn=P (control
select/control operate-output contact n = pulse) command.
Holding an Output Contact Open or Closed

Outputs can be forced to a closed (logic 1 or TRUE) state or to an open (logic 0 or FALSE) state. This feature
can be used to disable a contact during testing. Open or close logic override control is accessed at Screen
2.4.1 of the HMI by entering a 0 for open or 1 for closed in the field for the output contact to be controlled.
Outputs are forced open or closed through a communication port by using the CS/CO-OUTn=P0/1 (control
select/control operate-output contact n-0/1) command.
Returning an Output Contact to Logic Control

When the output logic has been overridden and the contact is held in an open or closed state, it is necessary
to manually return the output to logic control. Outputs are returned to logic control through Screen 2.4.1 of the
HMI. An L is entered in the field of the contact that is to be returned to logic control. Outputs are returned to
logic control through a communication port by using the CS/CO-OUTn=L (control select/control operate-output
contact n = logic control) command.
CS/CO-OUT Command
Purpose: Controls or reads output selection/operation.
Syntax: CS/CO-OUT<x>[=<mode>]
Comments: n = output number 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or A
mode = 0, 1, P, L, ENA or DIS
The output control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the command must be
selected using the CS-OUT command. After the command is selected, there is a 30 second window during
which the CO-OUT control command can be entered. The control selected and operation selected syntax
must match exactly or the command will be blocked. If the operate command isn’t entered within 30 seconds
of the select command, the operate command will be blocked. An error message is returned when a control
command is blocked.
Output control commands are acted on immediately except when the ENA and DIS modes are used. ENA and
DIS output control command changes aren’t executed until saved with the EXIT command. Output control
status is saved in nonvolatile memory and is maintained when relay operating power is lost. All relay
responses in the following examples and throughout the manual are printed in courier typeface.
CS/CO-OUT Command Examples

1. Enable the output control feature.
>CS-OUT=ENA
OUT=ENA SELECTED
>CO-OUT=ENA
OUT=ENA EXECUTED (NOTE: The command is not effective until EXIT with SAVE (Y).)
2. Test all outputs by pulsing momentarily.
>CS-OUT=P
OUT=P SELECTED

>CO-OUT=P
OUT=P EXECUTED
3. Disable the trip output (OUT1) by holding it at logic 0.
>CS-OUT1=0
OUT1=0 SELECTED
>CO-OUT1=0
OUT1=0 EXECUTED
4. Return OUT1 to logic control.
>CS-OUT1=L
OUT1=L SELECTED
>CO-OUT1=0
OUT1=L EXECUTED
Retrieving Output Logic Override Status

The status of the output contact logic override control can be viewed at HMI Screen 1.5.3. It can not be
achieved using BESTCOMS. HMI Screen 2.4.1 is used for output control but can also display the current
status. Output logic status can also be viewed using the RG-STAT (report general-status) command. An L
indicates that the state of the output is controlled by logic. A 0 or 1 indicates that the logic has been overridden
and the contact is held open (0) or closed (1) state. A P indicates that the contact is being pulsed and will
return to logic control automatically. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting,
for more information.

SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Using Protection and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SETTING GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Setting BESTlogic Settings, Setting Group Control Function Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Automatic Setting Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Automatic Control by Monitoring Line Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Group Control by Monitoring Reclose Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Group Control by Monitoring Fuse Loss Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Setting Automatic Setting Group Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Logic Override of the Setting Group Control Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Retrieving Setting Group Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
50T/150T Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection with Settable Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
BESTlogic Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Operating Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
51P/51N/151N/51Q Time Overcurrent Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
BESTlogic Settings for Time Overcurrent Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Operating Settings for Time Overcurrent Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Programmable Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Setting Programmable Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Negative-Sequence Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Negative-Sequence Coordination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Delta/Wye Transformer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Generator Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
VOLTAGE PROTECTION (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
24 Element - Volts per Hertz Overexcitation Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
BESTlogic Settings for the Volts Per Hertz Overexcitation Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Operating Settings for the Volts Per Hertz Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Volts Per Hertz Programmable Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
27P/127P/59P/159P Phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
BESTlogic Settings for Phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Operating Settings for Undervoltage and Overvoltage Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
27X/59X/159X Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
BESTlogic Settings for the Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Operating Settings for the Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
47 Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
BESTlogic Settings for the Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Operating Settings for the Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
FREQUENCY PROTECTION (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
81 Element - Over and Underfrequency Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
BESTlogic Settings for Over and Underfrequency Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Operating Settings for Over and Underfrequency Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
BF Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
BE1-700 Protection and Control i
BESTlogic Settings for the BF (Breaker Failure) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Operating Settings for the BF (Breaker Failure) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Retrieving Logic Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
GENERAL PURPOSE LOGIC TIMERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
62/162 Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
PU/DO (Pickup/Dropout Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
One-Shot Nonretrigerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
One-Shot Retriggerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
BESTlogic Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Operating Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Retrieving 62/162 Output Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
RECLOSING (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
79 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Recloser BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Recloser Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Sequence Controlled Blocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Zone-Sequence Coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
SYNCHRONISM-CHECK PROTECTION (BE1-700V, OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
25 Element - Sync-Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
BESTlogic Settings for the Sync-Check Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Operating Settings for the Sync-Check Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
25 Element - Voltage Monitor (25VM) ......................................... 4-54
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER FUSE LOSS DETECTION (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
60FL Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
60FL Element Blocking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
VIRTUAL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
43 Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
BESTlogic Settings for x43 Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
BESTlogic Settings for 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Figures
Figure 4-1. Setting Group Control Logic Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Figure 4-2. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-3. Input Control Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Figure 4-4. Example 1 - Change Group on Recloser Shot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5. Setting Group Selection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Figure 4-6. Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4-7. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, 50TN Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Figure 4-8. Overcurrent Screen, 50T Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Figure 4-9. Time Overcurrent Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4-10. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Time Overcurrent (151N) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-11. Overcurrent Protection Screen, 51 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-12. Curve Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-13. Sequence Components for an A-B Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-14. Phase-to-Phase Fault Magnitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Figure 4-15. Volts per Hertz Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-16. Time Shown on Vertical Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-17. Time Shown on Horizontal Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-18. Voltage Protection Screen, 24 (Overexcitation) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Figure 4-19. Inverse Time Delay and Reset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
ii Protection and Control BE1-700
Figure 4-20. 27 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Figure 4-21. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Time Undervoltage (27P) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-22. Voltage Protection Screen, 27P/127P Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-23. Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Figure 4-24. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Time Overvoltage (59X) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-25. Voltage Protection, 59X/159X Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Figure 4-26. 47 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Figure 4-27. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
Time Overvoltage, Negative-Sequence (47) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Figure 4-28. Voltage Protection Screen, 47 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Figure 4-29. Typical 81 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Figure 4-30. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Over/Under Frequency (81) Element . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Figure 4-31. Voltage Protection Screen, INH/81/181/281/381/481/581 Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Figure 4-32. Breaker Failure Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Figure 4-33. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Breaker Failure Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Figure 4-34. Breaker Failure Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Figure 4-35. 62/162 Function Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Figure 4-36. PU/DO (Pickup/Dropout Timer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Figure 4-37. One-Shot Nonretrigerable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Figure 4-38. One-Shot Retrig Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Figure 4-39. Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Figure 4-40. Integrating Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Figure 4-41. Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Figure 4-42. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Logic Timer (62) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Figure 4-43. Logic Timers Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Figure 4-44. 79 Recloser Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Figure 4-45. Recognition Dropout and Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Figure 4-46. 79SCB Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Figure 4-47. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Reclosing (79) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Figure 4-48. Reclosing Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Figure 4-49. S#-79SCB = 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 Logic Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Figure 4-50. S#-79SCB = 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 Logic Timing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Figure 4-51. BESTlogic Function Element Screen for Reclosing Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Figure 4-52. Overall Logic Diagram for Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Figure 4-53. Sync-Check Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Figure 4-54. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Sync-Check (25) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Figure 4-55. Voltage Protection Screen, 25 (Sync-Check) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Figure 4-56. 25VM Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Figure 4-57. 60FL Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Figure 4-58. 60FL Element Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Figure 4-59. x43 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Figure 4-60. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Virtual Switch (43) Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Figure 4-61. 101 Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Figure 4-62. 101 Control Switch State Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Figure 4-63. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Virtual Breaker Control (101) Element . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Tables
Table 4-1. Setting Group Control Functions BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Table 4-2. Setting Group Binary Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-3. Automatic Setting Group Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Table 4-4. SL-50T Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Table 4-5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-6. Phase Time Overcurrent Element BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 4-7. Phase Time Overcurrent Function Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 4-8. Definitions for Equations 1-2 and 4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Table 4-9. Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Table 4-10. Fault Type Multipliers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Table 4-11. Volts Per Hertz Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
BE1-700 Protection and Control iii

Table 4-12. Volts Per Hertz Function Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Table 4-13. Volts Per Hertz Function Programmable Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Table 4-14. Undervoltage and Overvoltage Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Table 4-15. Undervoltage and Overvoltage Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Table 4-16. Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Table 4-17. VTX Connection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Table 4-18. Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Table 4-19. Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Table 4-20. Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Table 4-21. BESTlogic Underfrequency and Overfrequency Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Table 4-22. Operational Underfrequency and Overfrequency Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Table 4-23. Breaker Failure Element BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Table 4-24. BF Breaker Failure Element Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Table 4-25. 62/162 BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Table 4-26. 62/162 Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Table 4-27. Recloser Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Table 4-28. Recloser Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Table 4-29. Zone-Sequence Coordination Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Table 4-30. Sync-Check Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
Table 4-31. Sync-Check Function Operating Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Table 4-32. S#-25VM Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Table 4-33. Voltage Monitor Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Table 4-34. 60FL Logic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Table 4-35. 60FL Element Blocking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Table 4-36. x43 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Table 4-37. 101 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Equations
Equation 4-1. Time OC Characteristics for Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Equation 4-2. Time OC Characteristics for Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Equation 4-3. Time to Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Equation 4-4. Time to Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Equation 4-5. Trip Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
iv Protection and Control BE1-700

SECTION 4 • PROTECTION AND CONTROL
INTRODUCTION
The BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay provides the following functions that can be used to protect and control
power system equipment. C identifies a BE1-700C; V identifies a BE1-700V relay; A means both.
BE1-700 protection functions include:
! V Overexcitation, Volts per Hertz (24)
! V Sync-check (25) (optional) including Conditional Voltage (25VM)
! V Three-phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage (27P/127P and 59P/159P)
! V Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage (27X and 59X/159X)
! V Negative-Sequence Overvoltage (47)
! C Instantaneous Overcurrent with Settable Time Delay (50TP, 50TN, 50TQ, 150TP, 150TN,
150TQ)
! C Time Overcurrent (51P, 51N, 51Q, 151N)
! V VT Fuse Loss Detection (60FL)
! A General Purpose Logic Timers (62, 162)
! V Overfrequency, Underfrequency (81, 181, 281, 381, 481, 581)
! C Breaker Failure (BF)
BE1-700 control functions include:

! Four-shot Recloser (79) (optional) with zone-sequence coordination, sequence controlled blocking
and reclose control of setting group. The first reclose is user selectable as a stand-alone pilot initiated
reclose or included as part of a standard 4-shot recloser.
! Virtual Selector Switches (43, 143)
! Virtual Breaker Control Switch (101)
! Trip Circuit Monitor (52TM)
Two setting groups allow coordination to be adapted for changes in operating conditions. Setting groups
can be selected using programmable logic criteria.
Using Protection and Control Functions

Three steps must be taken before using a protection or control function.
â The function logic must be enabled in the active logic scheme by the SL-<function> command.
ã Function inputs and outputs must be connected properly in a logic scheme.
ä Function characteristics or settings must be programmed and based on the specific application
requirements.
If a preprogrammed logic scheme is used in a typical application, items 1 and 2 may be skipped. Most
preprogrammed schemes are general in nature. Unneeded capabilities can be disabled by a setting of zero.
For example, if the second neutral time overcurrent function is enabled but not needed, disable it by setting
the 151N pickup setting to zero at the BESTCOMS screen or by using the ASCII command S#-151N=0,0,0.
More information about the individual function logic of item 1 is provided in this section. Information pertaining
to items 2 and 3 is available in Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Section 8, Application, and
Section 14, BESTCOMS Software.
SETTING GROUPS
The BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay provides a normal setting group (SG0) and one auxiliary setting group
(SG1). The auxiliary setting group allows for adapting the coordination settings to optimize them for a
predictable situation. Sensitivity and time coordination settings can be adjusted to optimize sensitivity or
clearing time based upon source conditions or to improve security during overload conditions. The possibilities
for improving protection by eliminating compromises in coordination settings with adaptive setting groups is
endless. Figure 4-1 shows the setting group control logic block.
BE1-700 Protection and Control 4-1

The group of settings that is active at any point in time is
controlled by the setting group control logic. This function logic
allows for manual (logic) control. The function monitors logic
inputs, D0 and D0 and changes the active setting group
according to the status of these inputs. These inputs can be
connected to logic expressions such as contact sensing inputs.
The function logic has two logic variable outputs, SG0 and
SG1. The appropriate variable is asserted when each setting
group is active. These logic variables can be used in
programmable logic to modify the logic based upon which Figure 4-1. Setting Group Control Logic
setting group is active. For example, it may be desirable for the Block
51P element to trip the low-side breaker through OUT2 under
normal conditions but to trip the 86T lockout relay through OUT1 when in Setting Group 1. To accomplish this,
the logic for OUT1 would include the term 51PTand SG1 so that 51PT actuates only when SG1 is active.
The setting group control function logic also has an alarm output variable SGC (Setting Group Changed). This
output is asserted whenever the BE1-700 switches from one setting group to another. The SGC alarm bit is
asserted for the SGCON time setting. This output can be used in the programmable alarms function if it is
desired to monitor when the BE1-700 changes to a new setting group. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarms
Functions, Alarms Function, for more information on using alarm outputs.
The SGCON time setting also serves to provide anti-pump protection to prevent excessive changing between
groups. Once a change in active group has been made, another change cannot take place for two times the
SGCON setting.
The SGC ACTIVE alarm output is typically used to provide an external acknowledgment that a setting group
change occurred. If SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) is used to change the active group,
then this signal could be monitored to verify that the operation occurred. The SGC ACTIVE alarm output ON
time is user programmable and should be set greater than the SCADA scan rate. This can be set through the
BESTCOMS graphical user interface (GUI). Alternately, it can be set using the SG-SGCON (settings
general–SGC Alarm on time) command.
When the BE1-700 switches to a new setting group, all functions are reset and initialized with the new
operating parameters. The settings change occurs instantaneously so at no time is the BE1-700 off line. The
active setting group is saved in nonvolatile memory so that the BE1-700 will power up using the same setting
group that was active when it was powered down. To prevent the BE1-700 from changing settings while a fault
condition is in process, setting group changes are blocked when the BE1-700 is in a picked-up state. Since
the BE1-700 is completely programmable, the fault condition is defined by the pickup logic expression in the
fault reporting functions. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting, for more information.
Selection of the active setting group provided by this function logic can also be overridden. When logic
override is used, a setting group is made active and the BE1-700 stays in that group regardless of the state
of the manual logic control conditions.
Setting BESTlogic Settings, Setting Group Control Function Logic

BESTlogic settings are made from the BESTlogic Function Element screen in BESTCOMS. Figure 4-2
illustrates the BESTCOMS screen used to select BESTlogic settings for the Setting Group Selection function.
To open the BESTlogic Function Element screen for Setting Group Selection, select Setting Group Selection
from the Screens pull-down menu. Then select the BESTlogic button in the lower left hand corner of the
screen. Alternately, settings may be made using the SL-GROUP ASCII command. At the top center of the
BESTlogic Function Element Screen is a pull-down menu labeled Logic. This menu allows viewing of the
BESTlogic settings for each preprogramed logic scheme. A custom logic scheme must be created and
selected in the Logic pull-down menu at the top of the screen before BESTlogic settings can be changed. See
Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic.
Enable the Setting Group Selection function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu.
To connect the functions inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function
Element screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open. Select the expression type to be used.
Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables to be connected to the input. Select Save when
4-2 Protection and Control BE1-700

finished to return to the
BESTlogic Function Element
Screen. For more details on
the BESTlogic Expression
Builder, see Section 7,
BESTlogic Programmable
Logic. Select Done when the
settings have been completely
edited.
Table 4-1 summarizes the
function’s modes of operation.
Figure 4-2. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Setting Group Selection
Table 4-1. Setting Group Control Functions BESTlogic Settings

Function Range/Purpose Default
0 = disabled, 1 = discrete inputs, 2 = binary
Mode inputs. (If auto mode is desired, logic mode 1
must be either 1 or 2.)
Discrete Input 0 (D0 Logic) Input Logic expression
0
Discrete Input 1 (D1 Logic) Input Meaning depends upon the Mode setting.
Logic expression
AUTOMATIC When TRUE, automatic control is enabled. /0
When FALSE, logic control is enabled.
Example 1. Make the following settings to the setting group selection logic. Refer to Figure 4-2.
Mode: Discrete Inputs
D0: 0
D1: 0
AUTOMATIC: /0
Manual (logic) control reads the status of the logic inputs to the setting group control function block to
determine what setting group should be active. For the logic inputs to determine which setting group
should be active, the AUTO input must be a logic 0. The function block logic mode setting determines how
it reads these logic inputs. There are three possible logic modes as shown in Table 4-1.
When the setting group control function block is enabled for Mode 1, there is a direct correspondence between
each discrete logic input and the setting group that will be selected. That is, asserting input D0 selects SG0
and asserting input D1 selects SG1. The active setting group latches in after the input is read so they can be
pulsed. It is not necessary that the input be maintained. If one or more inputs are asserted at the same time,
the numerically higher setting group will be activated. A pulse must be present for approximately one second
for the setting group change to occur. After a setting group change occurs, no setting group change can occur
within two times the SGC alarm on-time. Any pulses to the inputs will be ignored during that period.
Figure 4-3 shows an example of how the inputs are read when the setting group control function logic is
enabled for Mode 1. Note that a pulse on the D1 input doesn’t cause the setting group to change to SG1
because the AUTO input is active.

Figure 4-3. Input Control Mode 1
When the setting group control function block is enabled for Mode 2, inputs D0 and D1 are read as binary
encoded (Table 4-2). A new coded input must be stable for approximately 1 second for the setting group
change to occur. After a setting group change occurs, no setting group change can occur within two times the
SGC alarm on time.
Table 4-2. Setting Group Binary Codes

Binary Code
D1 D0 Decimal Equivalent Setting Group
0 0 0 SG0
0 1 1 SG1
Automatic Setting Group Control

The relay has built in schemes that may be used to automatically change setting groups. One scheme is
based on the history of the current in the relay. Another scheme is based upon the status of the reclose
function (79) or fuse loss logic (60FL). To enable automatic change of setting groups, setting group control
must be enabled and the <autologic> bit of SL-GROUP command must be a 1 and can be set as follows:
SL-GROUP = /0,,,,,/0.
When automatic control is enabled, it holds precedence over all manual logic control.
The automatic setting group control may be used to force the relay to change to settings that will automatically
compensate for cold load pickup conditions. For instance, if the relay senses current drop below a very small
amount for a period of time indicating an open breaker, then the relay may move to an alternate setting group
that will allow for the large inrush of current the next time the load is energized. After current has returned to
measurable levels for some period of time, the relay returns to the normal settings. Another application is to
prevent the relay from seeing an overload condition as a fault. If the relay sees sustained high level phase or
unbalance currents that are encroaching on normal trip levels (indicative of an overload or load imbalance
rather than a fault), the relay may move to an alternate setting group that may accommodate the condition.
The relay can be set to alarm for this condition using the programmable logic alarms.
The relay has the logic to automatically change setting groups based upon the status of the reclose function
(79) or fuse loss (60FL). This scheme allows the relay to have fast and slow curves, for instance, when the
user is applying automatic reclosing into a fault. On the first trip of a fault the relay may use a setting group
with a fast overcurrent curve and/or a low set instantaneous setting, with the intent of tripping faster than
downstream fuses. On subsequent trips, by monitoring the reclose step, the relay would be in an alternate
setting group with a slower overcurrent response and/or a higher or no instantaneous trip with the intent of
operating slower than downstream fuses.
The user should also be aware that the 79 function “Sequence Control Block” (79SCB) provides an alternate
method to control relay operation based on the reclose status. See the 79 function description later in this
section for additional details.

Automatic Control by Monitoring Line Current
The Setting Group 1 and 2 switch to and return settings determine how the function selects the active setting
group when automatic selection is enabled.
Automatic control of the active setting group allows the relay to automatically change configuration for
optimum protection based on the current system conditions. For example, in locations where seasonal
variations can cause large variations in loading, the overcurrent protection can be set with sensitive settings
during the majority of the time and switch to a setting group with lower sensitivity (higher pickups) during the
few days of the year when the loading is at peak.
The relay will switch to a setting group when current rises above the “switch-to threshold” for the “switch-to
time” and will return from the setting group when current falls below the “return threshold” for the “return time.”
However, if the “switch-to” threshold is 0 and a non-zero switch-to time is entered, then the relay changes to
the indicated setting group and falls below 10% of nominal (0.5A/0.1A for 5A/1A nominal relays) after the
switch-to time. This is used in the example application for cold load pickup, below.
If the monitored element is 60FL, 791, 792, 793 or 794, the switch-to time, switch-to threshold, return time,
and return threshold are ignored and the setting group is based upon the status for the reclose step. This
method of controlling setting groups will be covered further in the following paragraphs:
If a group’s switch-to threshold is zero and the groups the switch-to time delay is 0 and the monitored element
is any overcurrent element (i.e., /60FL, 791, 792, 793 or 794), then the relay will never automatically switch
to that setting group.
There are five settings for each group that are used for automatic control. Each group has a switch threshold
and time delay, a return threshold and time delay, and a monitored element. The switch and return thresholds
are a percentage of the SG0 pickup setting for the monitored element. The monitored element can be any of
the 51 protective functions. Thus, if you wish to switch settings based upon loading, you could set it to monitor
51P. If you wish to switch settings based upon unbalance, you could set it to monitor 51N,151N or 51Q. When
the monitored element is 51P, any one phase must be above the switch threshold for the switch to time delay
for the criteria to be met. All phases must be below the return threshold for the return time delay for the return
criteria to be met.
On the BE1-700C, this function can also be used to automatically change the active setting group for cold load
pickup conditions. If the switch threshold for a group is set to 0%, the function will switch to that group when
there is no current flow for the time delay period, indicating that the breaker is open or the circuit source is out
of service. The threshold for this is 10% nominal rating of the relay current input.
Note the difference in operation when a switch-to threshold of 0% is used. For this setting the group is
switched to when current falls below 0.5 A / 0.1 A (5 A / 1 A nominal), but when any other switch level is used,
the switch occurs when current rises above the switch level.
When the switch criteria is met for more than one setting group at a time, the function will use the numerically
higher of the enabled settings groups. If the switch to time delay setting is set to 0 for a setting group,
automatic control for that group is disabled. If the return time delay setting is set to 0 for a setting group,
automatic return for that group is disabled and the relay will remain in that settings group until returned
manually of by logic override control.
Group Control by Monitoring Reclose Status

The active setting group may also be controlled by the status of the reclose (79) (optional) function. Upon
entering a reclose operation, as the relay steps through an automatic reclose operation, the relay may be
instructed to change to an appropriate setting group using the command SP-GROUP[n] = ,,,,<791, 792, 793
or 794>. If the monitored element in the SP-GROUP command is 791, 792, 793 or 794, the switch-to time,
switch-to threshold, return time and return threshold are ignored.
When settings group changes are made via SP-GROUP[n] = ,,,,<791, 792, 793 or 794> the relay will stay in
the last group changed to till the relay returns to reset condition. Upon return to reset condition, the relay
restores Setting Group 0.

The points in the reclose process that the 791, 792, 793 and 794 setting causes a change to the desired
setting group is when a) the referenced reclose occurs and b) after the breaker closes. For instance, SP-
GROUP1 = ,,,,791 will cause the relay to change from Setting Group 0 to Setting Group 1 after the first
reclose, but not till the relay senses the breaker has actually closed.
Example 1.
In most common practices, two setting groups are used for emulating a circuit recloser in a fuse saving
scheme (a “fast” curve and a “slow” curve). The settings below call for using Setting Group 0 during normal
operation, Setting Group 1 after reclose 2 and remain in Setting Group 1 until the breaker closed from lockout.
The active group would return to group 0 when the recloser went to reset if any of the close operations prior
to lockout was successful. Refer to Figure 4-4.
Closed
BREAKER STATUS Manual Close
Open
RESET
TIMER 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD 79RTD
79C
RESET 791TD 792TD 793TD 794TD LOCKOUT RESET
Recloser
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 1
SG0
P0002-22
SG1 09-08-03
Figure 4-4. Example 1 - Change Group on Recloser Shot
Group Control by Monitoring Fuse Loss Status

The active setting group may also be controlled by the status of the fuse loss function (60FL). The relay may
be instructed to change to Setting Group 1 using the command SP-GROUP1=....<60FL>. If the monitored
element in the SP-GROUP command is 60FL, the switch-to threshold, return time and return threshold are
ignored.
When setting group changes are made via SP-GROUP1=,,,,<60FL>, the relay will stay in the last group
changed until the relay returns to the reset condition. Upon return to the reset condition, the relay restores
Setting Group 0.
Setting Automatic Setting Group Control

Operating settings are made using BESTCOMS. Figure 4-5 illustrates the BESTCOMS screen used to select
operational settings for the Setting Group Selection function. To open the Setting Group Selection Screen,
select Setting Group Selection from the Screens pull-down menu. Alternately, settings may be made using
the SP-GROUP ASCII command.
At the top left of the screen is a pull-down menu labeled Logic. This menu allows viewing of the BESTlogic
settings for each preprogramed logic scheme. A custom logic scheme must be created and selected in the
Logic pull-down menu at the top of the screen before BESTlogic settings can be changed. See Section 7,
BESTlogic Programmable Logic. To the right of the Logic pull-down menu is a pull-down menu labeled
Settings. The Settings menu is used to select the setting group that the elements settings apply to. Using the

pull-down menus and buttons, make the application appropriate settings to the Setting Group Selection
function.
Table 4-3 summarizes the function’s modes of operation.
Figure 4-5. Setting Group Selection Screen
Table 4-3. Automatic Setting Group Control Settings

Setting Range Purpose Default
Time in minutes that determines when a setting
1 to 60
Switch Time change occurs once the Switch Threshold setting 0
0 = disabled
is exceeded.
Switch Percentage of the SG0 Monitor Setting that must
0 to 150 0
Threshold be exceeded for a setting group change to occur.
Time in minutes that determines when a return to
1 to 60
Return Time SG0 will occur once the monitored current has 0
0 = disabled
decreased below the Return Threshold setting.
Percentage of the SG0 Monitor Setting that the
Return
0 to 150 monitored current must decrease below in order 0
Threshold
for a return to SG0.
Determines when automatic setting group changes
occur. Time overcurrent elements 51P, 51N or 51Q
can be selected so that setting group changes are
based on load current. Recloser Shots 791, 792,
51P, 51N, 151N,
793 or 794 can be used to switch setting groups
51Q (BE1-700C
when the appropriate shot is reached in a reclosing
Monitor Setting only); 60FL (BE1- 51P
sequence. Fuse Loss (60FL) can also be used to
700V only); 791,
switch setting groups. If 60FL or one of the recloser
792, 793 or 794
shots is entered as the Monitor Setting, the Switch
Time, Switch Threshold, Return Time and Return
Threshold parameters are not required.

Setting Range Purpose Default
Setting Group
1-10 Measured in seconds, the SGC alarm timer sets
Change (SGC) 5
(0 = disabled) the amount of time the alarm is on.
Alarm Timer
Logic Override of the Setting Group Control Function

Setting group selection can be overridden to allow manual setting group selection. Manual setting group
control and selection is achieved through the human-machine interface (HMI) Screen 2.3.1 or by using the
CS/CO-GROUP command. It can not be achieved using BESTCOMS. The CS/CO-GROUP command uses
select-before-operate logic. A setting group must be selected using the CS-GROUP command before the
setting group is activated using the CO-GROUP command. The process of selecting and then placing a
setting group in operation is summarized in the following two paragraphs:
Use the CS-GROUP command to select the desired setting group. After the CS-GROUP command is issued,
there is a 30 second window during which the setting group can be activated using the CO-GROUP command.
Use the CO-GROUP command to activate the setting group already selected. The setting group activated with
the CO-GROUP command must match the setting group selected with the CS-GROUP command. If the
setting group specified in each command doesn’t match or the CO-GROUP command isn’t entered during the
30 second window, the CO-GROUP command is blocked and an error message is returned.
CS/CO-GROUP commands are executed without having to use the EXIT command to save setting changes.
When a setting group change is made, any subsequent setting change is blocked for two times the duration
of the SGC alarm output time setting. Refer to the SGC Alarm subsection for more information about SGC
Alarm settings.
CS/CO-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read or change logic override settings for setting group selection.
Syntax: CS-GROUP[=<mode>]
Comments: mode =Setting Group 0, 1 or L. L returns group control to the automatic setting group logic.
<mode> entry of CS-GROUP command and CO-GROUP command must match or setting
group selection will be rejected. If more than 30 seconds elapse after issuing a CS-GROUP
command, the CO-GROUP command will be rejected.
CS/CO-GROUP Command Examples

• Read the current status of setting group override.
>CO-GROUP
L
• Override logic control and change the active setting group to SG1.
>CS-GROUP=1
GROUP=1 SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=1
GROUP=1 EXECUTED
• Return control of the active setting group to the automatic setting group logic.
>CS-GROUP=L
GROUP=L SELECTED
>CO-GROUP=L
GROUP=L EXECUTED
Retrieving Setting Group Status Information

The active setting group can be determined from HMI Screen 1.5.5 or by using the RG-STAT command.
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, provides more information about
determining the active setting group. The active group cannot be determined using BESTCOMS.
Logic override status can be determined from HMI Screen 2.3.1 or through the RG-STAT command. Section
6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, provides more information about determining
logic override status. Logic override cannot be determined using BESTCOMS.
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION (BE1-700C)
The BE1-700C includes instantaneous elements for Phase, Neutral or Ground, and Negative-Sequence as
well as time overcurrent elements for Phase, Neutral or Ground and Negative-Sequence.
50T/150T Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection with Settable Time Delay

There are two BESTlogic elements for phase (50TP and 150TP), two elements for ground (50TN and 150TN),
and two elements for negative-sequence (50TQ and 150TQ) instantaneous overcurrent protection. The
alphanumeric designation for each element contains the letter T to indicate that the element has an adjustable
time delay. If an element has a time delay setting of zero, then that element will operate as an instantaneous
overcurrent relay.
The 50TP, 50TN, and 50TQ instantaneous overcurrent elements are shown in Figure 4-6. The 150TP, 150TN
and 150TQ elements are identical to their counterparts. Each element has two logic outputs: Pickup (PU) and
Trip (T).
Figure 4-6. Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements
Each element has a Block ( BLK) input that can be used to disable the function. A BESTlogic expression is
used to define the BLK input. When this expression is TRUE, the element is disabled by forcing the outputs
to logic zero and resetting the timers to zero. This feature functions in a similar way to a torque control contact
of an electromechanical relay.
A Logic Mode input allows each instantaneous overcurrent element to be enabled or disabled. The ground
elements, 50TN and 150TN, have additional mode selections. Element operation can be based on calculated
3 Phase Residual (3IO), Mode 1; or on measured ground current through the Ground Input, Mode G. More
information about logic mode selections is provided in the following BESTlogic Settings for Instantaneous
Overcurrent Elements subsection.
Each instantaneous overcurrent function has a pickup and time delay setting. When the measured current
increases above the pickup threshold, the pickup output (PU) becomes TRUE and the timer starts. If the
current stays above pickup for the duration of the time delay setting, the trip output (T) becomes TRUE. If the
current decreases below the dropout ratio, which is 95 percent, the timer is reset to zero.
The phase overcurrent protective functions include three independent comparators and timers, one for each
phase. If the current increases above the pickup setting for any one phase, the pickup output asserts. If the
trip condition is TRUE for any one phase, the trip logic output asserts.
If the target is enabled for the element, the target reporting function will record a target for the appropriate
phase when the protective function trip output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic expression
is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting, for more information about target
reporting.
BESTlogic Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

illustrates the BESTCOMS screen used to select BESTlogic settings for the 50T and 150T elements. To open
the BESTlogic Function Element Screen, select Overcurrent Protection from the Screens pull-down menu.
Then select the 50T or 150T tab. Open the BESTlogic Function Element Screen for the desired element by

selecting the BESTlogic button corresponding with the desired element. Alternately, these settings can be
made using the SL50T and SL150T ASCII commands.
At the top center of the
Screen is a pull-down menu
labeled Logic. This menu
allows viewing of the
BESTlogic settings for each
preprogramed logic scheme. A
custom logic scheme must be
created and selected in the
Logic pull-down menu at the
top of the screen before
BESTlogic settings can be
changed. See Section 7,
BESTlogic Programmable
Logic.
Enable the 50T or 150T
function by selecting its mode
of operation from the Mode
pull-down menu. To connect
the element’s inputs, select
the button for the
corresponding input in the Figure 4-7. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, 50TN Element
Screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then,
select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables to be connected to the input. Select Save when finished
to return to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. For more details on the BESTlogic Expression Builder,
See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select Done when the settings have been completely edited.
Table 4-4 summarizes the function’s modes of operation.
Table 4-4. SL-50T Command Settings

0 = disabled
1 = enabled (x50TP and x50TQ)
Mode 1
1 = 3-phase residual (3IO) (x50TN only)
G = ground input (x50TN only)
BLK Logic expression that disables function when TRUE. 0
Example 1. Make the following settings to the 50TN element. Refer to Figure 4-7.
Mode: 3-phase residual
BLK: 0
NOTE
If the BE1-700 has 5 ampere phase inputs and a 1 ampere independent ground input, the
valid pickup setting range of the neutral overcurrent functions will depend on the logic
mode setting which designates whether the three-phase residual or the independent
ground input is to be monitored. If changing logic schemes or settings causes a neutral
overcurrent setting to be OUT OF RANGE, the out of range setting will be forced in-range
by multiplying or dividing the current setting by 5.
Operating Settings for Instantaneous Overcurrent Elements

Operating settings for the 50T functions consist of Pickup and Time delay values. The Pickup value
determines the level of current required for the element to start timing toward a trip. Time delays can be set
in milliseconds, seconds or cycles. The default is milliseconds if no unit of measure is specified. Minimum
timing resolution is to the nearest one-quarter cycle. A time delay setting of zero makes the element
instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
Operating settings are made
using BESTCOMS. Figure 4-8
illustrates the BESTCOMS
screen used to select
operational settings for the
50T elements. To open the
Screen, select Overcurrent
Protection from the Screens
pull-down menu. Then select
the 50T tab. Alternately,
settings may be made using
S<g>-50T ASCII command or
through HMI Screens 5.x.6.1 -
5.x.6.6 where x represents 1
(Setting Group 0) or 2 (Setting
Group 1).
The default unit of measure for
the Pickup s etting is
secondary amps. Primary Figure 4-8. Overcurrent Screen, 50T Tab
amps (Pri Amps), per unit
amps (Per U Amps) and
percent amps (% Amps) can also be selected as the pickup setting unit of measure. The unit of measure for
the Time setting that represents the element’s time delay, defaults to milliseconds. It is also selectable for
seconds, minutes and cycles.
If time delay settings are made in cycles, they are converted to seconds or milliseconds (per the nominal
frequency setting stored in EEPROM) before being stored and rounded to the nearest whole millisecond. See
Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Current Measurement Functions, for more information about this
setting. If the nominal frequency setting is being changed from the default (60 hertz) and time delay settings
are being set in cycles, the frequency setting should be entered and saved before making any time delay
settings changes.
Beside the Logic pull-down menu is a pull-down menu labeled Settings. The Settings menu is used to select
the setting group that the element’s settings apply to.
Table 4-5 summarizes the element’s modes of operation.
Table 4-5. Instantaneous Overcurrent Operating Settings

Range
Unit of
Setting 1A 5A Increment Measure Default
0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.01 to 9.99
secondary
Pickup 0.1 to 30 0.5 to 150 0.1 for 10.0 to 99.9 0
amperes
1.0 for 100 to 150
0 to 999 milliseconds 1 milliseconds
0.1 for 0.1 to 9.9 seconds
Time 0.1 to 60 seconds
1.0 for 10 to 60 seconds 0
0 to 3600 cycles (60 Hz)
t cycles
0 to 2500 cycles (50 Hz)
t Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.1 cycle from the front panel
HMI. All time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface.
Time delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after
conversion is limited to that appropriate for each of those units of measure.
Example 1. Make the following settings to the 50TN element. Refer to Figure 4-8.
Pickup: 2 secondary amps
Time: 10 seconds
Retrieving Logic Output Status Information

The status of each logic variable can be determined through the ASCII command interface using the
RG-STAT (report general-status) command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status
Reporting, for more information. The status cannot be determined using BESTCOMS.
51P/51N/151N/51Q Time Overcurrent Element

BE1-700 relays have one element for phase (51P), two elements for neutral (51N and 151N) and one element
for negative-sequence (51Q) inverse time overcurrent protection.
Figure 4-9 shows the 51P, 51N, 151N and 51Q elements. The 151N element is identical in configuration. Each
element has two outputs: Pickup (PU) and Trip (T). A block logic (BLK) input is provided to disable the
function. When this expression is TRUE, the element is disabled by forcing the outputs to logic 0 and resetting
the timers to zero. This feature operates in a similar manner to the torque control contact of an
electromechanical relay.
Figure 4-9. Time Overcurrent Elements
Each inverse time overcurrent function has a Mode, Pickup, Time Dial, Curve setting. See Appendix A, Time
Current Characteristic Curves, for details on each of the curves available. To make the protective element use
integrated reset and emulate an electromechanical induction disk reset characteristic, the user can append
an R to the selected time current characteristic curve designation. An available programmable curve can be
used to create a custom curve by selecting coefficients in the inverse time characteristic equation.
When the measured current is above the pickup threshold, the pickup logic output is TRUE and inverse timing
is started according to the selected characteristic. If the current stays above pickup until the element times
out, the trip logic output becomes TRUE. If the current falls below the dropout ratio, which is 95 percent, the
function will either reset instantaneously or begin timing to reset depending on the user's setting.
The phase overcurrent protective functions use the highest of the three measured phase currents. If the
current is above the pickup setting for any one phase, the pickup logic output is asserted. If the trip condition
is TRUE, the trip logic output is asserted.
If the target is enabled for an element, the target reporting function will record a target for all phases that are
above pickup when the protective function trip output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic
expression is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions, for more
details on the target reporting function.

BESTlogic Settings for Time Overcurrent Elements
BESTlogic settings are made
from the BESTlogic Function
Element Screen in
BESTCOMS. Figure 4-10
BESTlogic settings for the
time overcurrent function. To
open the screen, select
Overcurrent Protection from
the Screens pull-down menu
and select either 51or 151 tab.
Then select the BESTlogic
button at the bottom of the
screen that corresponds with
the element to be modified.
made using the SL-51 and SL-
151 ASCII commands.
BESTlogic Function Element Figure 4-10. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
screen is a pull-down menu
labeled Logic. This menu Time Overcurrent (151N) Element
allows viewing of the
preprogramed logic scheme. A custom logic scheme must be created and selected in the Logic pull-down
menu at the top of the screen before BESTlogic settings can be changed. See Section 7, BESTlogic
Programmable Logic.
Enable the time overcurrent function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu. To
connect the functions inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function Element
see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select Done when the settings have been completely edited.
The logic settings for the 51 inverse time overcurrent functions are provided in Table 4-6. These settings
enable an element by attaching it to the CT input circuits and provide blocking control as determined by the
logic expression assigned to the block input.
Table 4-6. Phase Time Overcurrent Element BESTlogic Settings
0 = disabled
Mode 1 = enabled
1
1 = 3 phase residual (3IO) (51N, 151N only)
G = ground input (51N, 151N only)
BLK Logic expression that disables element when TRUE 0
Example 1. Make the following settings to the 151N element using BESTCOMS. Refer to Figure 4-10.
Mode: Three-phase Residual (3I0) Input
BLK: 0
Operating Settings for Time Overcurrent Elements

operational settings for the Time Overcurrent element. To open the screen, select Overcurrent Protection from

and select either 51 or 151
tab. Alternately, settings may
be made using S<g>-51 and
S<g>-151 ASCII commands
or from the HMI Screens
5.x.7.1 through 5.x.7.5 where
x equals 1 for Setting Group 0
and 2 for Setting Group 1.
The default unit of measure
for the Pickup setting is
secondary amps. Primary
amps (Pri Amps), per unit
amps (Per U Amps) and
percent amps (% Amps) can
also be selected as the pickup
setting unit of measure. The
unit of measure for the Time
setting that represents the
element’s time delay, defaults
to milliseconds. It is also Figure 4-11. Overcurrent Protection Screen, 51 Tab
selectable for seconds,
minutes and cycles.
Beside the Logic pull-down menu is a pull-down menu labeled Settings. The Settings menu is used to select
the setting group that the element’s settings apply to.
Table 4-7 summarizes the function’s operating settings.
Table 4-7. Phase Time Overcurrent Function Operating Settings

Range
Unit of
Setting 1A 5A Increment Measure Default
0 = disabled 0 = disabled 0.01 for 0.01 to 9.99 secondary

Pickup 0
0.1 to 3.2 0.5 to 16 0.1 for 10.0 to 16.0 amps
0.0 to 9.9
Time Dial 0.1 n/a 0
0.0 to 99 (46 only)
Curve See Table A-1 n/a n/a V2
Example 1. Make the following settings to the Phase 51P time overcurrent element in BESTCOMS. Refer
to Figure 4-11.
Pickup: 10 secondary amps
Time Dial: 3.0
Curve: S1R
Programmable Curves
Time-current characteristics for trip and reset programmable curves are defined by Equation 4-1 and Equation
4-2, respectively. These equations comply with IEEE standard C37.112-1996. The curve-specific coefficients
are defined for the standard curves as listed in Appendix A, Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curves. When
time-current characteristic curve P is selected, the coefficients used in the equation are those defined by the
user. Definitions for these equations are provided in Table 4-8.

AD RD
TT = + BD + K TR =
MN - C M2 - 1
Equation 4-1. Time OC Equation 4-2. Time OC
Characteristics for Trip Characteristics for Reset
Table 4-8. Definitions for Equations 1-2 and 4-2

Parameter Description Explanation
TT Time to trip Time that the 51 function will take to time out and trip.
D Time dial setting Time dial setting for the 51 function.
Measured current in multiples of pickup. Timing algorithm has a dynamic
M Multiple of pickup
range of 0 to 40 times pickup.
Coefficient specific to
A Affects the effective range of the time dial.
selected curve
Coefficient specific to Affects a constant term in the timing equation. Has greatest effect on curve
B
selected curve shape at high multiples of tap.
Affects the multiple of PU where the curve would approach infinity if
C allowed to continue below pickup. It has greatest effect on curve shape
selected curve
near pickup.
Exponent specific to Affects how inverse the characteristic is. It has greatest effect on curve
N
selected curve shape at low to medium multiples of tap.
K Constant Characteristic minimum delay term.
TR Time to reset Relevant if 51 function is set for integrating reset.
R Affects the speed of reset when integrating reset is selected.
selected curve
Setting Programmable Curves

Curve coefficients are entered using BESTCOMS. Alternately, curve coefficients can be entered using the SP-
CURVE ASCII (Settings Protection-programmable curve) command. Table 4-9 lists the programmable curve
settings.
Table 4-9. Programmable Time Current Characteristic Curve Coefficients
Unit of
Setting Range Increment Measure Default
A Coefficient 0 to 600 0.0001 n/a 0.2663
B Coefficient 0 to 25 0.0001 n/a 0.034
C Coefficient 0.0000 to 1.0000 0.0001 n/a 1
N Coefficient 0.5 to 2.5 0.0001 n/a 1.2969
R Coefficient 0 to 30 0.0001 n/a 0.5
Curve coefficients are entered by selecting the Curve Coefficients button on the 51 tab in the Time
Overcurrent Screen. (Refer to Figure 4-12.) The Curve Coefficients Screen will appear. Enter the calculated
values for each constant and select Done.
Programmable curve coefficients can be entered regardless of the curve chosen for the protection element.
However, the programmable curve will not be enabled until P is selected as the curve for the protective
element.

Figure 4-12. Curve Coefficients
Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection

For years, protection engineers have enjoyed increased sensitivity to phase-to-ground unbalances with the
application of ground relays. Ground relays can be set more sensitively than phase relays because a balanced
load has no ground (3I0) current component. The negative-sequence elements can provide similar increased
sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults because a balanced load has no negative-sequence (I 2) current
component.
Negative-Sequence Pickup Settings

A typical setting for the negative-sequence elements might be one-half the phase pickup setting in order to
that the magnitude of the current for a phase-to-phase fault is o3/2 (87%) of the three-phase fault at the same
achieve equal sensitivity to phase-to-phase faults as three-phase faults. This number comes from the fact
location. This is illustrated in Figure 4-13.

The phase-to-phase fault is
made up of both positive and
negative-sequence components
as shown in Figure 4-14. For a
phase-to-phase fault, the
sequence component is 1/o3

magnitude of the negative-
(58%) of the magnitude of the
two factors (o3/2 and 1/o3) are

total phase current. When these
combined, the o3 factors cancel

which leaves the one-half
factor.
Figure 4-13. Sequence Components for an A-B Fault

Z
I3Ph FAULT
V
I3Ph FAULT = V
Z
Z
D2843-04.vsd
02-08-99
Z
I Ph-Ph FAULT
V
IPh-Ph FAULT = V*√ 3 = I3Ph FAULT* √ 3
Z *2 2
Figure 4-14. Phase-to-Phase Fault Magnitude
Negative-Sequence Coordination Settings

The 51Q Settings should be checked for coordination with phase-only sensing devices such as downstream
fuses and reclosers and/or ground relays. To plot the negative-sequence time current characteristics on the
same plot for the phase devices, you need to multiply the negative-sequence element pickup value by the
correct multiplier. The multiplier is the ratio of phase current to negative-sequence current for the fault type
for which you are interested. To plot the negative-sequence time current characteristics on the same plot for
the ground devices, you need to multiply the pickup value by the multiplier for phase-to-ground faults (see
Table 4-10).
Table 4-10. Fault Type Multipliers
Fault Type Multiplier
Ph-Ph m = 1.732
Ph-Ph-G m > 1.732
Ph-G m=3
3-phase m = infinity
For example, a down stream phase 51 element has a pickup of 150 amperes. The up-stream 51Q element
has a pickup of 200 amperes. To check the coordination between these two elements for a phase-to-phase
fault, the phase overcurrent element would be plotted normally with pickup at 150 amperes. The 51Q element
would be shifted to the right by the appropriate factor m. Thus, the characteristic would be plotted on the
coordination graph with pickup at: (200 amperes) * 1.732 = 346 amperes.

Generally, for coordination with down stream phase overcurrent devices, phase-to-phase faults are the most
critical to consider. All other fault types result in an equal or greater shift of the time current characteristic
curve to the right on the plot.
Delta/Wye Transformer Application

Often, the phase relays on the delta side of a delta/wye transformer must provide backup protection for faults
unit fault current for three-phase faults and 2/ o3 (1.15) per unit fault current for phase-to-phase faults.
on the wye side. For faults not involving ground, this is not a problem since the phase relays will see 1.0 per
trapped in the delta not seen by the delta-side phase relays. The phase relays will see only 1/o3 (0.577) per
However, for faults involving ground, the sensitivity is reduced because the zero-sequence components are
unit current for phase-to-ground faults.

Negative-sequence overcurrent protection is immune to the effect caused by the zero-sequence trap and 30
degrees phase shift provided by the delta/wye transformer. For a phase-to-ground fault, the magnitude of the
negative-sequence components is a the magnitude of the total fault current. On a per unit basis, this is true
for the fault current on the delta side of the transformer as well. (The previous statement specifies per unit
since the actual magnitudes will be adjusted by the inverse of the voltage ratio of the delta/wye transformer.)
Thus, backup protection for phase-to-ground faults on the wye side of the transformer can be obtained by
using negative-sequence overcurrent protection on the delta side with the pickup sensitivity set at 1/3 per unit
of the magnitude of the phase-to-ground fault for which you wish to have backup protection.
Generator Application
Generators have a maximum continuous rating for negative-sequence current. This is typically given in terms
of percent of stator rating. When using the 46 time current characteristic curve, the user should convert the
I2 rating data to actual secondary current at the relay. This value, plus some margin (if appropriate), should
then be entered into the pickup setting. For example, generator ratings of 5 A of full-load current (at the relay
terminals) and 10 percent continuous I2, converts to 0.25 A. Therefore, the minimum pickup setting for the 46
curve should be set at a value below 0.50 A. Continuous I2 ratings for generators are typically in the range of
3 to 15 percent of their full-load current rating.
VOLTAGE PROTECTION (BE1-700V)

BE1-700 voltage protection includes elements for overexcitation, phase undervoltage, phase overvoltage,
auxiliary overvoltage and negative-sequence overvoltage.
24 Element - Volts per Hertz Overexcitation Protection

Overexcitation occurs when a generator or transformer magnetic core becomes saturated. When this
happens, stray flux is induced in nonlaminated components, causing overheating. The BE1-700 detects
overexcitation conditions with a volts/hertz element that consists of one alarm setting, one integrating time
characteristic with selectable exponents (3 sets of time curves) and two definite-time characteristics. This
allows the user to individually select an inverse-time characteristic, a composite characteristic with inverse-
time and one or two definite-time elements, or a dual-level, definite-time element. The volts/hertz element has
two outputs: pickup and trip as shown in Figure 4-15.
The integrating time characteristic closely approximates
the heating characteristic of the protected equipment as
overexcitation increases. A linear reset characteristic
provides for the decreasing (cooling) condition.
The 24 element is enabled or disabled by the Mode input.

Two modes are available. Selecting Mode 0 disables
protection; Mode 1 enables the 24 element.
The block (BLK) input is used to disable protection. A Figure 4-15. Volts per Hertz Element
BESTlogic expression defines how the BLK input
functions. When this expression is TRUE, the element is disabled by forcing the outputs to logic 0 and
resetting the timers. This feature functions in a similar way to the torque control contact of an
Theory of Operation
V/Hz protection responds to the magnitude of voltage versus frequency where the measured voltage is phase-
phase and includes the phase with the frequency measurement element. If monitored V/Hz is above a pickup
setting, the pickup bit is asserted and integrating and/or definite time timers start timing towards trip. The trip
output becomes TRUE when the first timer times out (integrating or definite time characteristic). If monitored
V/Hz is above both the integrating and definite time pickup thresholds, the definite time delay has priority over
the integrating time characteristic.
The pickup settings determine the V/Hz pickup level. The measured V/Hz is always calculated as the
measured voltage divided by the sensed system frequency. The measured phase depends on the sensing
voltage setting, SG-VTP. The 24 function monitors VAB for both 3-wire and 4-wire connections. Thus, setting
is in VPP/Hz for VT connection = 3W, 4W, AB, BC, CA and VPN/Hz for VT connection = AN, BN, CN. For
more information, refer to Section 3, Input and Output Functions.
Nominal voltage for the BE1-700 is defined as a phase to neutral quantity. (Refer to Section 3, Input and
Output Functions,for details). Nominal V/Hz depends on the sensing voltage (VT) connection, nominal voltage
and nominal frequency settings. Nominal V/Hz is calculated as the nominal voltage divided by nominal
frequency. For VT connections equal to 3W, 4W, AB, BC, CA, the nominal voltage (phase-neutral value) must
be converted to a phase-phase value by multiplying by the square root of 3. No additional conversion is
required for VT connections equal to AN, BN or CN.
For 3W, 4W, AB, BC or CA phase to phase sensing connections:
Measured VPHASE − PHASE VNOMINAL ∗ 3

V/Hz MEASURED = V
Measured Frequency HzNOMINAL = Nominal Frequency
For AN, BN or CN phase to neutral sensing connections:
V Measured VPHASE − NEUTRAL V VNOMINAL

HzMEASURED = Measured Frequency HzNOMINAL= Nominal Frequency
Equations 4-3 and 4-4 represent the trip time and reset time for a constant V/Hz level. Normally, the V/Hz
pickup is set to a value greater than the V/Hz nominal. This ensures that V/Hz measured divided by V/Hz
nominal is always greater than 1.000 throughout the pickup range. If the pickup is set less than nominal, then
measured values above pickup and below nominal will result in the maximum time delay. The maximum time
delay is determined by Equation 4-3 with (V/Hz measured / V/Hz nominal) set equal to 1.001. The overall
inverse time delay range is limited to 1,000 seconds maximum and 0.2 seconds minimum.
DT
TT = n
V 
 HzMEASURED − 1 ET
 V  TR = DR ∗ ∗ 100
 HzNOMINAL  FST
Equation 4-3. Time to Trip Equation 4-4. Time to Reset
where:
TT = Time to trip
TR = Time to reset

DT = Time dial trip
DR = Time dial, reset
ET = Elapsed time
n = Curve exponent (0.5, 1, 2)
FST = Full scale trip time (TT)
ET/FST = Fraction of total travel toward trip that integration had progressed to. (After a trip,
this value will be equal to one.)
When the measured V/Hz rises above a pickup threshold, the pickup element becomes TRUE and an
integrating or definite time timer starts. If the V/Hz remains above the pickup threshold and the integration
continues for the required time interval as defined by the equations shown above and the set time dial, the
trip output becomes TRUE. But if the measured V/Hz condition falls below the pickup setting and integrating
reset is chosen, the integrating trip timer will ramp down towards reset at a linear rate based on the reset time
dial setting. See Appendix C, Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves, for details on each of the available
time curves.
If the target is enabled for the 24 element, the target reporting function will record a target when the trip output
is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic expression is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, Fault Reporting, for more information about target reporting.
BESTlogic Settings for the Volts Per Hertz Overexcitation Element

Logic settings for the 24 function are made using the SL-24 (settings logic - Volts per Hertz) command. The
settings of this command determine whether the element is enabled or disabled. The SL command also
provides blocking control as determined by the logic expression assigned to the BLK input. Table 4-11 lists
the V/Hz logic settings.
Table 4-11. Volts Per Hertz Logic Settings
Mode 0 = disable 0
1 = enable
BLK logic Logic expression that disables the 0
function when TRUE.
SL-24 Command
Purpose: Read or set logic for the overexcitation element
Syntax: SL-24[=<mode>,<BLK logic>]
Comments: Refer to Table 4-11 for settings definitions.
SL-24 Command Example
1. Enable Volts/Hz protection but block when VO13 is low.

>SL-24=1,/VO13
Operating Settings for the Volts Per Hertz Element

Operating settings for the 24 function consist of a pickup setting, a trip time dial and a reset time dial. A pickup
of 0 disables the element. The unit of measure is secondary VPP/Hz or VPN/Hz and depends on the SG-VTP
setting. For more information, refer to Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage Inputs. Settings are
made using the S<g>-24 and S<g>-24D commands. These settings can also be viewed or changed at the
front panel HMI using Screen 5.x.1.1 where x equals 1, 2, 3, 4 for Setting Group 0, 1, 2, 3, and through
BESTCOMS.
Table 4-12 lists the volts per hertz operating settings.

Table 4-12. Volts Per Hertz Function Operating Settings
Integrating Pickup
0.5 - 6 0.1 Sec. V/Hz 0
Trip Time Dial 0 - 9.9 0.1 n/a 0
Reset Time Dial 0 - 9.9 0.1 n/a 0
Curve Exponents 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 n/a n/a 2.0
Definite Time
0.5 - 6 0.1 Sec. V/Hz 0
Pickup #1
Definite Time 3 digit
0.050 - 600 seconds 0
Delay #1 resolution
Definite Time
0.5 - 6 0.1 Sec. V/Hz 0
Pickup #2
Definite Time 3 digit
0.050 - 600 seconds 0
Delay #2 resolution
S<g>-24 and S<g>-24D Commands

Purpose: Read or set the volts per hertz pickup levels, time curve exponent, time dials and definite
times.
Syntax: S<g>-24[=<Pickup>,<Trip Time Dial>,<Reset Time Dial><Curve Exponent>]
S<g>-24D[=<Pickup #1>,<Definite Time #1>,<Pickup #2>,<Definite Time #2>]
Comments: g = Setting Group 0, 1, 2 or 3. Refer to Table 4-12 for S<g>-24 setting information.
Volts Per Hertz Programmable Alarm

A separate V/Hz alarm threshold and user adjustable time delay are included for indicating when
overexcitation is occurring so that the operator can take corrective action before the 24 function trips. If the
V/Hz level exceeds the alarm setting, a programmable alarm bit is set. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, for more information. Settings for the alarm is via the SA-24 command. Table 4-13 lists the V/Hz
programmable alarm settings. V/Hz functions are also settable via the HMI Screen 5.3.1 and through
BESTCOMS.
Table 4-13. Volts Per Hertz Function Programmable Alarm Settings
Alarm Level 0.5 - 6 0.1 Sec. V/Hz 0
3 digit
Alarm Time Delay 0.050 – 600 seconds 0
resolution
SA-24 Command
Purpose: Read or set logic for the volts per hertz element.
Syntax: SA-24[=<Alarm pickup>,<Definite time>]
Comments: Refer to Table 4-13 for settings information.
V/Hz Settings Example

V/Hz tripping elements are used to de-energize a generator or transformer that is experiencing an
overexcitation condition. Therefore, the manufacturer’s overexcitation limit curves are required to establish
optimum protection. Figures 4-16 and 17 show examples of a transformer and generator limit curve along with
the optimum composite protection characteristic.
NOTE
Actual damage curves must be obtained from the equipment manufacturer for particular equipment to be
protected.

Volt/Hz Characteristic
1000.0
Generator Limit
Inverse
105%, TD=1.9
100.0
Time in Seconds
Transformer Limit
10.0
Definite
118%, 6s
1.0
100% 105% 110% 115% 120% 125% 130% 135% 140%
Percent of Nominal V/Hz
Figure 4-16. Time Shown on Vertical Axis
Volt/Hz Characteristic
140%
135%
Transformer Limit
130%
125%
120%
Generator Limit
Definite
115% 118%, 6s
110%
Inverse
105%, TD=1.9
105%
100%
1.0 10.0 100.0 1000.0
D2871-43
Time in Seconds 02-12-04
Figure 4-17. Time Shown on Horizontal Axis
Assuming a Vnom of 69.3 volts phase-neutral, 1 pu volts/hertz = (69.3 * %3) / 60 = 2.00. Using IEEE/C37.102,
“Guide for AC Generator Protection” as a guide for setting overexcitation protection, the following example
demonstrates how to set the BE1-700 to provide a composite V/Hz characteristic for protection of a generator
and a step-up transformer:
• Alarm = 1.05% @ 1 second time delay; V/Hz = 2 * 1.05 = 2.10
• Inverse time pickup = 1.05%; Time Dial = 1.9; Inverse Trip Curve = (M-1)^2; V/Hz = 2 * 1.05 = 2.10
• Definite Time #1 = 118% @ 6 seconds time delay; V/Hz = 1.18 * 2.0 = 2.36
In BESTCOMS, the 24 graphing capability can be used to verify the composite shape as shown Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18. Voltage Protection Screen, 24 (Overexcitation) Tab
The reset rate is determined by the rest dial setting. A setting of 0.0 enables reset to be instantaneous. Using
the inverse squared characteristic, assume a trip time dial setting 2.0 and a pickup multiple of 1.2. The total
time to trip will be 50 seconds. If this exists for 30 seconds before being corrected (60% elapsed time), what
would the total reset time be for a reset dial setting of 5? Based on the reset equation (Equation 4-5), the
calculation will be:
ET 30
Equation 4-5. Trip Time TR = DR ∗ ∗ 100 TR = 5.0 ∗ ∗ 100 = 300 seconds
FST 50
If the overexcitation condition returns prior to total reset (i.e., less than 300 seconds), timing resumes from
that point at the inverse square rate. For example, if this condition recurs after 150 seconds or 50% of the total
reset time, then trip time from the second event will start at 30% instead of 0%, therefore tripping in 70% or
the original trip time or 35 seconds. Figure 4-19 illustrates the inverse time delay and reset time.

100%
60%
30%
30 120 35
D0249-02
0 30 150 185 02-13-04
TIME IN SECONDS
Figure 4-19. Inverse Time Delay and Reset Time
27P/127P/59P/159P Phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage Protection

Figure 4-20 illustrates the inputs and outputs of the phase
D2849-17
undervoltage (27P) element. The 127P undervoltage 06-29-99
element as well as the 59P and 159P phase overvoltage

elements are identical in configuration.
Each element has two logic outputs: 27PT (Trip) and
27PPU (Pickup). When the monitored voltage decreases
below the undervoltage pickup setting (27P) or increases
above the overvoltage pickup setting (59P), the pickup
output becomes TRUE and the element starts timing
toward a trip. The trip output becomes TRUE when the Figure 4-20. 27 Element
element timer times out. The BLK (block) input is used to
disable protection. A BESTlogic expression defines how the BLK input functions. When this expression is
TRUE, the element is disabled by forcing the outputs to logic 0 and resetting the timer. This feature functions
in a similar way to the torque control contact of an electromechanical relay.
An element is enabled or disabled by the Mode input. Any one of four modes is possible for the phase
undervoltage and phase overvoltage elements. Selecting Mode 0 disables protection. Mode 1 activates
protection when one of the three phases of voltage decreases below the pickup setting (27P) or increases
above the pickup setting (59P). Mode 2 requires two of the three phases of voltage to be beyond the pickup
setting. Mode 3 requires all three phases of voltage to be beyond the pickup setting. More information about
logic mode selections is provided in the BESTlogic Settings for Phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage
Elements in this section.
The phase undervoltage and overvoltage protective functions each include a timer and three independent
comparators, one for each phase. If the voltage decreases below 27P or increases above 59P pickup setting
(on the number of phases defined by the Mode setting), the pickup output asserts. When the time delay
expires, the trip logic output asserts. The 27P/59P functions can be set to monitor VPP or VPN. This is
determined by the 27/59 mode parameter of the phase VT connections setting. For more information on the
VTP setup for PP or PN voltage response, see Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage Inputs.
The pickup setting determines the voltage pickup level of the element. The time delay setting controls how
long it takes for the trip output to become TRUE after the pickup output becomes TRUE. When the monitored
voltage decreases below 27P or increases above the 59P pickup threshold, the pickup output (PU) becomes
TRUE and the timer starts. If the voltage remains in the pickup range for the duration of the time delay setting,
the trip output (T) becomes TRUE. If the voltage increases above the dropout ratio of 102 percent (27P) or
decreases below the dropout ratio of 98 percent (59P), the timer is reset to zero.

If the 60FL element trip logic is TRUE, and V block is enabled for phase blocking (P), all functions that use
the phase voltage are blocked. For more information on the 60FL function, see the paragraphs later in this
section.
If the target is enabled for the element, the target reporting function will record a target for all phases that are
picked up when the protective function trip output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic expression
is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions, for more information
about target reporting.
BESTlogic Settings for Phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage Elements

BESTlogic settings are made from the
BESTlogic Function ElementScreen in
BESTCOMS. Figure 4-21 illustrates
the BESTCOMS screen used to select
BESTlogic settings for the Under and
Overvoltage elements. To open the
screen, select Voltage Protection from
the Screens pull-down menu and
select the 27P tab. Alternately,
settings may be made using the SL-
27P and SL-59P ASCII commands.
At the top center of the BESTlogic
Function Element Screen is a pull-
down menu labeled Logic. This menu
allows viewing of the BESTlogic
settings for each preprogramed logic
scheme. A custom logic scheme must
be created and selected in the Logic
pull-down menu at the top of the Figure 4-21. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
screen before BESTlogic settings can Time Undervoltage (27P) Element
be changed. See Section 7,BESTlogic
Programmable Logic.
Enable the element by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu. To connect the
elements inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. The
BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then, select the
BESTlogic variable or series of variables to be connected to the input. Select Save when finished to return
to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. For more details on the BESTlogic Expression Builder , see
Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select Done when the settings have been completely edited.
Table 4-14. Undervoltage and Overvoltage Logic Settings

0 = Disabled.
1 = Undervoltage (27) or overvoltage (59) on one (or more) phases
causes pickup.
Mode 0
2 = Undervoltage (27) or overvoltage (59) on one (or more) phases
causes pickup at least 2 of 3.
3 = Undervoltage or overvoltage on all three phases causes pickup.
BLK logic Logic expression that disables function when TRUE. 0
Example 1. Make the following BESTlogic settings to the 27P element. Refer to Figure 4-21.
Mode: At Least 1of 3 phases
BLK: 0
Operating Settings for Undervoltage and Overvoltage Elements
Operating settings for the 27P and 59P functions consist of pickup and time delay values. The pickup value
determines the level of voltage required for the element to start timing toward a trip. The time delay value
determines the length of time between pickup and trip. Time delays can be set in milliseconds, seconds or
cycles. The default is milliseconds if no unit of measure is specified. A time setting of zero makes the element
instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
using BESTCOMS. Figure 4-
22 illustrates the BESTCOMS
undervoltage and overvoltage
elements. To open the screen,
select Voltage Protection from
and select the 27P or 59 P tab.
made using the S<g>-27P and
S<g>-59P ASCII command or
through the HMI using
Screens 5.x.3.1 (27P) and
5.x.8.1 (59P), where x
represents 1 (Setting Group 0)
or 2 (Setting Group 1).
Beside the Logic pull-down
menu is a pull-down menu Figure 4-22. Voltage Protection Screen, 27P/127P Tab
labeled Settings. The Settings
menu is used to select the
setting group that the elements settings apply to. The default unit of measure for the Pickup, Alarm Threshold,
and Inhibit settings are secondary volts. Primary volts (Pri Volts), per unit volts (Per U Volts) and percent volts
(% Volts) can also be selected as the pickup setting unit of measure. The unit of measure for the Time setting
that represents the element’s time delay, defaults to milliseconds. It is also selectable for seconds, minutes
and cycles. A time setting of zero makes the element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
Under and overvoltage operating settings are summarized in Table 4-15.
Table 4-15. Undervoltage and Overvoltage Operating Settings

Unit of
0.1 (for 0 - 99.9)

0 = disabled secondary
Pickup 1.0 (for 100- 0
10 to 300 volts t
300)

0.1 to 600 seconds
Time Delay 1.0 for 10 to 600 seconds 50
0 to 36,000 cycles (60 Hz)

† cycles
0 to 30,000 cycles (50 Hz)
t Unit of measure is secondary VPP or secondary VPN depending on the VTP connection settings.
† Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.1 cycle from the front panel HMI. All
time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time delays

entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after conversion is
limited to that appropriate for each of those units of measure.
Time delay settings entered in cycles are converted to seconds or milliseconds (per the nominal frequency
setting stored in EEPROM) before being stored. See Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage
Measurement Functions , for more information about this setting. If the nominal frequency setting is being
changed from the default (60 hertz) and time delay settings are being set in cycles, the frequency setting
should be entered and saved before making any time delay settings changes.
Example 1. Make the following operating settings to the 27P element. Refer to Figure 4-22.
Pickup: 135 sec. volts
Time: 3 seconds
27X/59X/159X Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Protection

Figure 4-23 illustrates the inputs and outputs of the auxiliary under/overvoltage elements. Element operation
is described in the following paragraphs.
Mode Mode
0-Disable AUX 0-Disable AUX
1-Fundamental Vx Input UNDER- 1-Fundamental Vx Input OVER-
2-3VO - 3ph VT Input VOLTAGE 2-3VO - 3ph VT Input VOLTAGE
3-Harmonic Vx Input (27X) 27XT 3-Harmonic Vx Input (59X) 59XT
BLK 27XPU BLK 59XPU
D2871-21
05/13/02
Mode
159X
159XT
BLK
159XPU
Figure 4-23. Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Elements
The auxiliary elements have two outputs: 27/59XPU (pickup) and 27/59XT (trip). When the monitored voltage
increases above the pickup setting, the pickup output becomes TRUE and the element starts timing toward
a trip. The trip output becomes TRUE when the element timer times out.
The BLK (block) input is used to disable protection. A BESTlogic expression defines how the BLK input
resetting the timer. This feature functions in a similar way to the torque control contact of an electromechanical
relay.
The 27X and the 59X elements are enabled or disabled by the mode input. Four modes are available.
Selecting Mode 0 disables protection. Mode 1, 2 or 3 enables the element as described in this section under
BESTlogic Settings for the Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Element. The pickup setting determines the voltage
pickup level of the element. The time delay setting controls how long it takes for the trip output to become
TRUE after the pickup output becomes TRUE. When the monitored voltage increases above the pickup
threshold, the pickup output becomes TRUE and the timer starts. If the voltage remains above the pickup
threshold for the duration of the time delay setting, the trip output becomes TRUE. If the voltage decreases
below the 59X dropout ratio of 98 percent or increases above the 27X dropout ratio of 100%, the timer is reset
to zero.
If the 60FL element trip logic is TRUE and V block is enabled for 3VO blocking (N), the 27X/59X functions will
be blocked if they are set to Mode 2. For more information on the 60FL function, see the paragraphs later in
this section.

If the target is enabled for the 59X element, the target reporting function will record a target when the trip
output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic expression is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and
Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions, for more information about target reporting.
BESTlogic Settings for the Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Elements

Element Screen in
Under/overvoltage element.
(In this case, the auxiliary
overvoltage element is
shown.) To open the
Screen for Undervoltage /
Overvoltage elements, select
Voltage Protection from the
Then select the 27X or the
59X/159X tab. Alternately,
SL-59X, SL-159X or SL-27X
ASCII command.
At the top center of the Time Overvoltage (59X) Element
Screen is a pull-down menu labeled Logic. This menu allows viewing of the BESTlogic settings for each
Programmable Logic.
Enable the Under/Overvoltage function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu. To
connect the elements inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function Element
Screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder screen will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then,
Table 4-16. Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Logic Settings

0= disabled
1= fundamental Vx input
Mode 0
2= 3Vo-3-phase VT Input
3= 3rd harmonic, Vx input
Logic expression that disables function when
BLK 0
TRUE. A setting of 0 disables blocking.
Note: To use Mode 2, the VTP connection must be 4-wire. Optional Auxiliary input must be
present to use Mode 1 or Mode 3.
Example 1. Make the following settings to the 59X element. Refer to Figure 4-23.
Mode: Fundamental Vx Input
BLK: 0
Operating Settings for the Auxiliary Under/Overvoltage Element
Operating settings for the 27X and 59X functions consist of pickup and time delay values. The pickup value
determines the level of voltage required for the element to start timing toward a trip. Unit of measure is
secondary volts (PP or PN) and depends on the VTX setting see Table 4-17. For more information, refer to
Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage Inputs. The time delay value determines the length of time
between pickup and trip. Time delays can be set in milliseconds, seconds or cycles. The default is
milliseconds if no unit of measure is specified. A time setting of zero makes the element instantaneous with
no intentional time delay.
Table 4-17. VTX Connection Settings
VTX Mode Unit
AB, BC, CA 1 or 3 VPP
AN, BN, CN 1 or 3 VPN
GR 1 or 3 VPN
Don’t care 2 VPN
operational settings for the auxiliary Under/Overvoltage element. To open the Voltage Protection screen for
Under/Overvoltage elements, select Voltage Protection from the Screens pull-down menu. Then select either
the 27X or the 59X/159X tab. Alternately, settings may be made using the S<g>-59X, S<g>-159X and S<g>-
27X ASCII commands or through HMI Screens 5.x.3.2 (27x), 5.x.8.2 (59x) and 5.x.8.4 where x equals 1
(Setting Group 0) or 2 (Setting Group 1).
Beside the Logic pull-down menu is a pull-down menu labeled Settings. The settings menu is used to select
the setting group that the elements settings apply to.
Figure 4-25. Voltage Protection, 59X/159X Tab

Table 4-18. Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Operating Settings
Unit of
0 = disabled
Pickup 0.1 sec. volts 0
1 to 150

0.1 to 600 seconds
Time Delay 1.0 for 10 to 600 seconds 50
0 to 36,000 cycles (60 Hz)

r cycles
0 to 30,000 cycles (50 Hz)
r Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.1 cycle from the front panel HMI.
All time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time
delays entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after
Example 1. Make the following changes to the 59X element. Refer to Figure 4-25.
Pickup: 75 secondary volts
Time: 50 ms
47 Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Protection

Figure 4-26 illustrates the inputs and outputs of the negative-
sequence overvoltage element. Element operation is described in
the following paragraphs. Negative-sequence overvoltage
protection is not available if VTP connection is single-phase.
The negative-sequence overvoltage element has two outputs:
47PU (pickup) and 47T (trip). When the monitored negative-
sequence voltage increases above the pickup setting, the pickup
output becomes TRUE and the element starts timing toward a trip.
The trip output becomes TRUE when the element timer times out. Figure 4-26. 47 Element
The BLK (block) input is used to disable protection. A BESTlogicexpression defines how the BLK input
relay.
The 47 element is enabled or disabled by the Mode input. Two modes are available. Selecting Mode 0
disables protection. Mode 1 enables the 47 element. More information about logic mode selections is provided
in the BESTlogic Settings for the Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Element paragraphs.
The pickup setting determines the voltage pickup level of the element. Voltage pickup is based on PN. The
time delay setting controls how long it takes for the trip output to become TRUE after the pickup output
becomes TRUE. When the monitored voltage increases above the pickup threshold, the pickup output (47PU)
becomes TRUE and the timer starts. If the voltage remains above the pickup threshold for the duration of the
time delay setting, the trip output (47T) becomes TRUE. If the voltage decreases below the dropout ratio of
98 percent, the timer is reset to zero.
If the 60FL element trip logic is TRUE and V block is enabled for negative-sequence blocking <Q>, all
functions that use the negative-sequence voltage (V2) are blocked. For more information on the 60FL function,
see the paragraphs later in this section.
If the target is enabled for the 47 element, the target reporting function will record a target when the trip output
is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic expression is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, Fault Reporting Functions, for more information about target reporting.

BESTlogic Settings for the Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Element
Element Screen in BESTCOMS.
Figure 4-27 illustrates the
BESTCOMS screen used to
select BESTlogic settings for the
negative-sequence overvoltage
function. To open the screen
select Voltage Protectionfrom the
Screens pull-down menu and
then select the 47 tab. Then
select the BESTlogic button at
the bottom of the screen.
made using the SL-47 ASCII
command.
labeled Logic. This menu allows Figure 4-27. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Time Overvoltage,
viewing of the BESTlogic settings Negative-Sequence (47) Element
for each preprogramed logic
scheme. A custom logic scheme
must be created and selected in the Logic pull-down menu at the top of the screen before BESTlogic settings
can be changed. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic.
Enable the negative-sequence overvoltage function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-
down menu. To connect the elements inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic
Function Element Screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open. Select the expression type
to be used. Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables to be connected to the input. Select
Save when finished to return to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. For more details on the BESTlogic
Expression Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select Done when the settings have been
completely edited.
Table 4-19. Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Logic Settings

0 = disable
Mode 0
1 = enable
BLK TRUE. A setting of 0 disables blocking. 0
Example 1. Make the following BESTlogic settings to the 47 element. Refer to Figure 4-27.
Mode: Enable
BLK: 0

Operating Settings for the Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Element
negative-sequence
overvoltage element. To open
the screen select Voltage
pull-down menu and then
select the 47 tab. Alternately,
settings maybe made using
the S<g>-47 ASCII command
or through the HMI interface
using Screen 5.x.5.1 where x
represents 1 (Setting Group 0)
or 2 (Setting Group 1).
Beside the right of the Logic
pull-down menu is a pull-down
menu labeled Settings. The Figure 4-28. Voltage Protection Screen, 47 Tab
Settings menu is used to
select the setting group that
the elements settings apply to.
The default unit of measure for the Pickup setting is secondary volts. Primary volts (Pri Volts), per unit volts
(Per U Volts) and percent volts (% Volts) can also be selected as the pickup setting unit of measure. The unit
of measure for the Time setting that represents the element’s time delay, defaults to milliseconds. It is also
selectable for seconds, minutes and cycles. A time setting of “0" makes the element instantaneous with no
intentional time delay.
Table 4-20 summarizes the element’s operational settings.
Table 4-20. Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Operating Settings

Unit of
0 = disabled
Pickup 0.1 sec. volts 0
10 to 300

0.1 to 600 seconds
1.0 for 10 to 600 seconds
Time 50
0 to 36,000 cycles (60 Hz)
t cycles
0 to 30,000 cycles (50 Hz)
t Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.1 cycle from the front panel HMI.
All time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time
Example 1. Make the following operational settings to the 47 element. Refer to Figure 4-28.
Pickup: 50 Vpp secondary volts
Time: 50 ms

FREQUENCY PROTECTION (BE1-700V)
81 Element - Over and Underfrequency Protection

BE1-700 frequency protection consists of six independent elements that can be programmed for
underfrequency, overfrequency protection. Under and over frequency protection can be used for load
shedding or islanding detection such as when a source of distributed generation (DG) is suddenly separated
or islanded from the electric utility. For this condition, frequency will quickly change from 60 Hz (except for the
improbable case of a perfect load to generation match) making frequency measurement an excellent method
for detecting and island condition.
Each element has an adjustable frequency (Hz) setpoint and
time delay. The 81 elements share a common undervoltage
inhibit setting for under/overfrequency applications. An
over/underfrequency element is shown in Figure 4-29. Power
system frequency is measured on the A-phase voltage input
for four-wire or single-phase connections or the AB voltage
input when in three-wire mode. Power system frequency is
measured on the optional auxiliary voltage input as well.
When the applied voltage is greater than 10 volts, the BE1-
700 measures the frequency. The measured frequency is the Figure 4-29. Typical 81 Element
average of two cycles of measurement.
Frequency element designations are 81, 181, 281, 381, 481 and 581. Each of the six elements have identical
inputs, outputs and setting provisions. Figure 4-28 illustrates the inputs and output of a frequency element.
A trip output (x81T) is provided on each element. For over/under frequency applications, the trip output
becomes TRUE when the monitored frequency decreases below (81U) or increases above (81O) the pickup
setting and the element timer times out.
The BLK (block) input is used to disable protection. A BESTlogic expression is used to define how the BLK
input functions. When this expression is TRUE, the element is disabled by forcing the outputs to logic 0 and
relay.
An element is enabled or disabled by the Mode input. Three mode options are possible. Mode 0 disables
protection, Mode 1 enables the element to monitor the frequency on the VTP input and mode x enables the
element to monitor the frequency on the VTX input. Security of your load shedding scheme can be enhanced
by monitoring two independent VT circuits. See Section 8, Application Tips , for more information. More
information about logic mode selections is provided in the following BESTlogic Settings for Under / Over-
frequency Elements paragraphs.
Pickup settings define the frequency setpoint and time delay, and program the element for under/over-
frequency protection. The setpoint defines the value of frequency that will initiate action by an element. The
time delay setting determines how long it takes for the trip output to become TRUE once the measured
frequency reaches the setpoint. If three consecutive cycles of the measured frequency have either decreased
below, increased above or exceeded the rate of change pickup threshold and the timer has timed out, the
81T will trip. If the timer has not timed out and the frequency remains in the pickup range for the remainder
of the time delay, the 81T will also trip. If the monitored voltage decreases below the user-defined setpoint,
over/under frequency protection is inhibited.
If the target is enabled for the element, the target reporting function will record a target for the appropriate
phase when the protective function trip output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic expression
is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting, for more information about target
reporting.
BESTlogic Settings for Over and Underfrequency Elements

BESTlogic settings are made from the BESTlogic Function Element Screen in BESTCOMS. Figure 4-30
illustrates the BESTCOMS screen used to select BESTlogic settings for the Over/Underfrequency element.
To open the BESTlogic Function Element Screen for Over/Underfrequency element, select Voltage Protection

from the Screens pull-down menu
and select the INH/81/181/
281/381/481/581 tab. Then select
the BESTlogic button for the
element to be programmed.
Alternately, settings may be made
using the SL-<x>81 ASCII
command.
Function Element Screen is a pull-
down menu labeled Logic. This
menu allows viewing of the
preprogramed logic scheme. A
custom logic scheme must be
created and selected in the Logic
pull-down menu at the top of the
screen before BESTlogic settings
can be changed. See Section 7,
BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Figure 4-30. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
Enable the Over/Underfrequency Over/Under Frequency (81) Element
function by selecting its mode of
operation from the Mode pull-down menu. To connect the elements inputs, select the button for the
corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen
will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables
to be connected to the input. Select Save when finished to return to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen.
For more details on the BESTlogic Expression Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select
Done when the settings have been completely edited.
Under/Overfrequency logic settings are summarized in Table 4-21.
Table 4-21. BESTlogic Underfrequency and Overfrequency Settings

0 = disable
Mode 1 = phase VT Input 0
X = aux VT Input
BLK Logic expression that disables function when TRUE 0
Example 1. Make the following BESTlogic settings to the 81 element. Refer to Figure 4-30.
Mode: Phase VT Input
BLK: 0
Operating Settings for Over and Underfrequency Elements

Operating settings for the 81 elements consist of pickup values, time delay values and a mode setting that
defines whether an element provides over/underfrequency protection and is selectable from a pull-down menu
under each element tab. The pickup value determines the value of frequency required for the element to start
timing toward a trip. The time delay value determines the length of time between reaching the pickup value
and tripping. Time delays can be set in milliseconds, seconds or cycles. The default is milliseconds if no unit
of measure is specified. Minimum timing resolution is two cycles. A time delay setting of zero makes the
element instantaneous with no intentional time delay.
operational settings for the Over/Underfrequency element. To open the BESTlogic Function Element Screen
for Over/Underfrequency element, select Voltage Protection from the Screens pull-down menu and select
the INH/81/181/ 281/381/481/581 tab. Alternately, settings may be made using the S<g>-<x>81 ASCII

command or the HMI interface using Screens 5.x.12.1 through 5.x.12.8 where x equals the setting group
number.
menu is a pull-down menu
setting group that the
element’s settings apply to.
Over/Underfrequency
protection can be inhibited
when the monitored voltage
decreases below a user-
defined level. The
undervoltage inhibit level is set
through BESTCOMS.
Alternately it can be set using
the S<g>-<x>81INH command
where x equals nothing or one
through five. The inhibit may
also be set using HMI Screen
5.x.14.7 The voltage inhibit
setting unit of measure
depends upon the VTP and
VTX connection settings. For Figure 4-31. Voltage Protection Screen,
4-wire or PN connections, it is INH/81/181/281/381/481/581 Tab
Sec VPN. For 3-wire or PP
connections, it is Sec. VPP.
Table 4-22 summarizes the element’s operational settings.
Table 4-22. Operational Underfrequency and Overfrequency Settings
Unit of
81O/U
40 to 70, 0 = disabled 0.01 hertz 0
Pickup

0.0 to 600 seconds
Time 1.0 for 10 to 600 seconds 0
0 to 36,000 cycles (60 Hz)

t cycles
0 to 30,000 cycles (50 Hz)
Over
Mode n/a n/a 0
Under
81O/U
15 to 150 secondary volts
Voltage 0.1 40
0 = disabled ^
Inhibit Level
t Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.1 cycle from the front panel HMI. All
time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time delays
entered in cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after conversion is limited
to that appropriate for each of those units of measure.
^ Phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral settings depend on the VTP and VTX connection settings.

The default unit of measure for the voltage and negative-sequence inhibit setting is secondary volts. Primary
volt (Pri Volt), per unit volts (Per U Volts) and percent volts (% Volts) can also be selected as the pickup
setting unit of measure. Over/underfrequency inhibit is in hertz. The unit of measure for the Time setting that
represents the element’s time delay, defaults to milliseconds. It is also selectable for seconds, minutes and
cycles.
Example 1.
Make the following settings to the 81 element and to the inhibit function. Refer to Figure 4-31.
Pickup Hertz: 59.5
Time: 2 ms
Mode: Under
Voltage INHIBIT: 100 Vpn secondary volts
BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION (BE1-700C)
BF Element
BE1-700 relays provide one function block for breaker failure
protection. This function includes a timer and a current
detector. Figure 4-32 shows the BF function block. The
function block has two outputs BFPU (breaker failure pickup)
and BFT (breaker failure trip).
An INI (Initiate) logic input is provided to start the breaker
failure timer. When this expression is true and current is
flowing in the phase current input circuits, the breaker failure
timer is started. Supervision of the initiate signal can be
designed in BESTlogic. Once the breaker failure timer is
started, the initiate signal does not have to remain TRUE. Figure 4-32. Breaker Failure Element
A BESTlogic expression defines how the BLK (Block) input
resetting the timer to zero. For example, this may be an input wired to a test switch such that breaker failure
protection is disabled when the primary protective elements are being tested to prevent inadvertent backup
tripping during testing.
The breaker failure timer is stopped by the fast-dropout current detector function. See Section 3 Input and
Output Functions, Current Measurement, for more details on this function. The fast-dropout current detector
is designed to directly determine when the current in the poles of the breaker has been interrupted without
having to wait for the fault current samples to clear the one-cycle filter time used by the normal current
measurement function. This function has less than one cycle dropout time. The timer can also be stopped by
the block logic input being asserted.
The current detector sensitivity is fixed at 10 percent of nominal. A traditional breaker failure relay includes
a fault detector function that serves two independent purposes: current detection and fault detection. A current
detector is generally included to stop breaker failure timing when it is determined that current flow in all poles
of the breaker has stopped. The secondary function of a traditional fault detector is to provide an independent
confirmation that a fault exists on the system and to increase security from mis-operation caused by an
inadvertent initiate signal. To do this, a fault detector by definition must be set above load current which
reduces its sensitivity as a current detector. Since this breaker failure timer is included in a multifunction
protection system, fault detector supervision is not required.
If external relays are used to initiate the breaker failure timer, it may be desirable to include fault detector
supervision of the initiate signal using an instantaneous overcurrent function in BESTlogic. For example, if it
is desired that certain initiate signals be supervised by a fault detector, it is possible to AND them with one of
the 50T protective functions using a virtual output expression. In other applications, it may be desirable to
have breaker failure timing with no current detector supervision. In this case, one of the general purpose logic
timers (device 62) can be used as a breaker failure timer. See Section 8, Application, Application Tips, for
more details on this application.

When the breaker failure timer is picked up, the BFPU logic output is TRUE. This output would typically be
used as a re-trip signal to the protected breaker. This can provide an independent tripping signal to the
breaker that may also open the breaker to prevent backup tripping.
If the current detector remains picked up for the duration of the breaker failure delay time, the BFT output is
asserted. This output would normally be used to trip an 86F lockout relay which will trip and prevent closing
of adjacent breakers and/or key transfer trip transmitters.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target when the
protective function trip output is TRUE and the fault recording function Trip logic expression is TRUE. See
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions, for more details on the target reporting
function.
An alarm variable is also provided in the programmable alarms function that can be used to indicate an alarm
condition when the breaker failure protection trips. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarms
Function, for more details on the alarm reporting function.
BESTlogic Settings for the BF (Breaker Failure) Element

Element Screen in
breaker failure element. To
open BESTlogic Function
Element Screen for the
breaker failure element, select
Breaker Failure from the
Then select the button labeled
BESTlogic . Alter nately ,
the SL-50BF ASCII command.
labeled Logic . This menu Figure 4-33. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Breaker Failure
allows viewing of the Element
Programmable Logic.
Enable the breaker failure function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu. To
connect the elements inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function Element
Screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder screen will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then,

Table 4-23. Breaker Failure Element BESTlogic Settings
Mode 0 = disable, 1 = enable 0
Initiate logic
Logic expression that starts the breaker failure
0
timer when TRUE
BLK logic 0
TRUE
Example 1. Make the following changes to the breaker failure element. Refer to Figure 4-33.
Mode: Enable
INI: VO11
BLK: 0
Operating Settings for the BF (Breaker Failure) Element

breaker failure element. To
open BESTlogic Function
Element Screen for the
breaker failure element, select
Breaker Failure from the
made using the SP-50BF
ASCII command or through
the HMI interface using
Screen 5.3.1.1.
menu is used to select the Figure 4-34. Breaker Failure Screen
elements settings apply to.
Note that Breaker Failure
settings are Global.
The default unit of measure for the Pickup setting is secondary amps. The unit of measure for the Time setting
that represents the element’s time delay, defaults to milliseconds. It is also selectable for seconds, minutes
and cycles.
Table 4-24. BF Breaker Failure Element Operating Settings

0 = disabled
Time 50 to 999 ms milliseconds
1m
Delay 0.05 to 0.999 sec. seconds 0
0.1 sec
0 to 59.96 (60 Hz) or cycles
t
0 to 49.97 (50 Hz)
t Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.1 cycle from the front panel HMI. All time
delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time delays entered in
cycles are converted to milliseconds or seconds. Increment precision after conversion is limited to that
appropriate for each of those units of measure.
Retrieving Logic Status Information from the Relay
The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) or the RL (report logic) commands. Status can not be determined using BESTCOMS.
See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, for more information.
GENERAL PURPOSE LOGIC TIMERS
62/162 Elements
BE1-700 relays provide two general purpose logic timers
which are extremely versatile. Each can be set for one of five
modes of operation to emulate virtually any type of timer.
Each function block has one output (62 or 162) that is
asserted when the timing criteria has been met according to
the BESTlogic mode setting. Figure 4-35 shows the 62
function block as an example. Each mode of operation is
described in detail in the following paragraphs.
An INITIATE logic input is provided to start the timing
sequence.
A BLOCK logic input is provided to block operation of the
timer. When this expression is TRUE, the function is disabled.
Each timer has a T1 time setting and a T2 time setting. The Figure 4-35. 62/162 Function Block
functioning of these settings is dependent upon the type of
timer as specified by the mode setting in BESTlogic.
If the target is enabled for the function block, the target reporting function will record a target when the timer
output is TRUE and the fault recording function trip logic expression is TRUE. See Section 6, Reporting and
Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting Functions, for more details on the target reporting function.
PU/DO (Pickup/Dropout Timer)

The output will change to logic TRUE if the INITIATE input expression is TRUE for the duration of PICKUP
time delay setting T1 (see Figure 4-36). If the initiate expression toggles to FALSE before time T1, the T1 timer
is reset. Once the output of the timer toggles to TRUE, the INITIATE input expression must be FALSE for the
duration of DROPOUT time delay setting T2. If the INITIATE input expression toggles to TRUE before time
T2, the output stays TRUE and the T2 timer is reset.
Figure 4-36. PU/DO (Pickup/Dropout Timer)
One-Shot Nonretrigerable Timer

The one-shot nonretrigerable timer starts its timing sequence when the INITIATE input expression changes
from FALSE to TRUE (see Figure 4-37). The timer will time for DELAY time T1 and then the output will toggle
to TRUE for DURATION time T2. Additional initiate input expression changes of state are ignored until the
timing sequence has been completed. If the duration time (T2) is set to 0, this timer will not function. The timer
will return to FALSE if the BLOCK input becomes TRUE.
Figure 4-37. One-Shot Nonretrigerable Timer
One-Shot Retriggerable Timer

This mode of operation is similar to the one shot nonretrigerable mode, except that if a new FALSE-to-TRUE
transition occurs on the INITIATE input expression, the output is forced to logic FALSE and the timing
sequence is restarted. See Figure 4-38.
Figure 4-38. One-Shot Retrig Timer
Oscillator
In this mode, the INITIATE input is ignored. If the BLOCK input is FALSE, the output, x62, oscillates with an
ON time of T1 and an OFF time of T2 (see Figure 4-39). When the BLOCK input is held TRUE, the oscillator
stops and the output is held OFF.
Figure 4-39. Oscillator

Integrating Timer
An integrating timer is similar to a pickup/dropout timer except that the PICKUP time T1 defines the rate that
the timer integrates toward timing out and setting the output to TRUE. Conversely, the RESET time T2 defines
the rate that the timer integrates toward dropout and resetting the output to FALSE. PICKUP time T1 defines
the time delay for the output to change to TRUE if the initiate input becomes TRUE and stays TRUE. RESET
time T2 defines the time delay for the output to change to FALSE if it is presently TRUE and the initiate input
becomes FALSE and stays FALSE.
In the example shown in Figure 4-40, RESET time T2 is set to half of the PICKUP time T1 setting. The initiate
input expression becomes TRUE and the timer starts integrating toward pickup. Prior to timing out, the initiate
expression toggles to FALSE and the timer starts resetting at twice the rate as it was integrating toward time
out. It stays FALSE long enough for the integrating timer to reset completely but then toggles back to TRUE
and stays TRUE for the entire duration of time T1. At that point, the output of the timer is toggled to TRUE.
Then at some time later, the initiate expression becomes FALSE and stays FALSE for the duration of RESET
time T2. At that point, the output of the timer is toggled to FALSE.
D2843-12
05-29-03
Figure 4-40. Integrating Timer
This type of timer is useful in applications where a monitored signal may be hovering at its threshold between
on and off. For example, it is desired to take some action when current is above a certain level for a certain
period of time. A 50T function could be used to monitor the current level. Thus, if the current level is near the
threshold so that the INITIATE input toggles between TRUE and FALSE from time to time, the function will
still time out as long as the time that it is TRUE is longer than the time that it is FALSE. With a simple
pickup/dropout timer, the timing function would reset to zero and start over each time the initiate expression
became FALSE.
Latch
A one shot timer starts its timing sequence when the INITIATE input expression changes from FALSE to
TRUE. The timer will time for DELAY time T1 and then the output will latch TRUE. Additional INITIATE input
expression changes of state are ignored. Time (T2) is ignored. Refer to Figure 4-41.

Figure 4-41. Latch
BESTlogic Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers

Element Screen in
Logic Timer elements. To
open the BESTlogic Function
Element Screen for Logic
Timer, select Logic Timers
from the Screens pull-down
menu. Then select the
BESTLogic button for either
the 62 or the 162 element.
made using the SL-x62 ASCII
command.
labeled Logic. This menu Figure 4-42. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
allows viewing of the Logic Timer (62) Element
preprogramed logic scheme. User or custom logic must be selected on this menu in order to allow changes
to the mode and inputs of the element. Enable the Logic Timer function by selecting its mode of operation from
the Mode pull-down menu.
To connect the element’s inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function
Element Screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open. Select the expression type to be used.
Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables to be connected to the input. Select Save when
finished to return to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. For more details on the BESTlogic Expression
Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select Done when the settings have been completely
edited.
Table 4-25 summarizes the logic settings for the 62/162 timer functions.

Table 4-25. 62/162 BESTlogic Settings
Setting Range/Purpose Default
0 = Disabled 4 = Oscillator disabled

1 = PU/DO 5 = Integrating
Logic Mode
2 = One-Shot Non-retrig 6 = Latch
3 = One-Shot Retrig
INITIATE Logic expression that initiates timing sequence. 0
BLOCK Logic expression that disables function when TRUE. 0
Example 1. Make the following settings to the 62 Logic Timer. Figure 4-42 illustrates these settings.
Logic: User1
Mode: One-Shot Non-Retrig
INITIATE: 0
BLOCK: 0
Operating Settings for 62/162 General Purpose Logic Timers

Logic Timers element. To
open the Logic Timers screen,
select Logic Timers from the
made using using the S<g>-
62/162 ASCII command or
through the HMI interface
using Screens 5.1.9.1 and
5.1.9.2.
At the top left of the screen is
a pull-down menu labeled
Logic. This menu allows
viewing of the BESTlogic
settings for each
preprogramed logic scheme. Figure 4-43. Logic Timers Screen
User or custom logic must be
selected on this menu in order
to allow changes to be made to the mode and inputs of the element.
Beneath the Logic pull-down menu is a pull-down menu labeled Settings. The Settings menu is used to select
the setting group that the element’s settings apply to. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Logic
Schemes.
Using the pull-down menus and buttons, make the application appropriate settings to the Logic Timers
element.
Table 4-26 summarizes the settings for the 62/162 timer functions.

Table 4-26. 62/162 Operating Settings
0 to 999 ms 1 milliseconds
0.1 for 0.1 to 9.9 sec
T1 Time, 0.1 to 9999 sec seconds
1.0 for 10 to 9999 sec 0
T2 Time
0 to 599,940 (60 Hz)
t cycles
0 to 499,950 (50 Hz)
t Time delays less than 10 cycles can be entered to the nearest 0.1 cycle through the HMI. All
time delays can be entered to the nearest 0.01 cycle from the ASCII command interface. Time
Example 1. Make the following operating settings to the 62 element. Figure 4-43 illustrates these settings.
Logic: User1
Setting: Group 0
Time Units: ms
T1 Time: 100
T2 Time: 0
Retrieving 62/162 Output Status Information from the Relay

The status of each logic variable can be determined from the ASCII command interface by using the RG-STAT
(report general-status) or the RL (report logic) commands. Status can not bee determined using BESTCOMS.
See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, for more information.
RECLOSING (OPTIONAL)
79 Element
Recloser function block inputs and outputs are shown in
Figure 4-44 and are described in the following Mode P0014-03
03/13/01
paragraphs. The BE1-700 reclosing function provides up 0 - Disable
to four reclosing attempts that can be initiated by a 1 - Power Up To Lockout
protective trip or by one of the contact sensing inputs. 2 - Power Up To Close 79
The recloser allows supervisory control and coordination RI RECLOSER 79P
of tripping and reclosing with other system devices. Any STATUS 79C
of the four recloser shots can be used to select a 79LO
WAIT
different setting group when the appropriate shot is 79RNG
reached in a reclosing sequence. This change in setting BLK/DTL 79RST
groups allows changing protection coordination during PI 79SCB
the reclosing sequence. For example, you could have a
Figure 4-44. 79 Recloser Element
fast 51 curve on the first two trips in the reclosing
sequence and then switch to a new group on the second reclose that uses a slow 51 curve. Detailed
information about relay setting groups can be found earlier in this section under the heading of Setting Groups.
An overall logic diagram for the recloser function is shown in Figure 4-52.
Figure 4-45. Recognition Dropout and Timing
The Reclose Initiate (RI) input is used with the 52 status input to start the reclose timers at each step of the
reclosing sequence. To start the automatic reclose timers, the RI input must be TRUE when the breaker status
input indicates that the breaker has tripped. To ensure that the RI input is recognized, a recognition dropout
timer holds the RI input TRUE for approximately 225 milliseconds after it goes to a FALSE state. This situation
might occur if the RI is driven by the trip output of a protective function. As soon as the breaker opens, the
protective function will drop out. The recognition dropout timer ensures that the RI signal will be recognized
as TRUE even if the breaker status input is slow in indicating breaker opening. Figure 4-44 illustrates the
recognition dropout logic and timing relationship.
The STATUS input is used to indicate to the recloser element that the breaker is closed. A TRUE signal at
this input indicates a closed breaker.
A TRUE signal at the WAIT input disables the reclosing function. In this condition, recloser timing is
interrupted. When this input returns to a FALSE state, reclosing is enabled and recloser timing resumes.
When TRUE, the drive to lockout/block recloser (DTL/BLK) forces the reclosing function into the lockout
position, lockout persists for the period defined by the reset time after the DTL/BLK input becomes FALSE
and the breaker is closed.
If the recloser is in the reset state upon receiving a pilot initiate (PI) input signal, the reclose logic issues a pilot
reclose output (79P) after the programmed time delay. The initiate logic shall be held for 100ms in order to
assure that it will be there when the STATUS input and the PI input are compared. If the recloser is in the reset
state and the PI and RI inputs are received simultaneously with the breaker status open, the 79P timer shall
be initiated instead of the 791 timer. After the 79P shot, only the RI input is monitored to start the delayed
reclosing sequence if the 52 status input indicates that the breaker opened before the reset time has expired.
Close (79C). The 79C output becomes TRUE at the end of each reclose time delay and remains TRUE until
the breaker closes. Any of the following conditions will cause the 79C output to become FALSE:
C The STAT input indicates that the breaker is closed.
C The reclose fail timer times out.
C The recloser goes to Lockout.
C The WAIT logic is asserted.
Recloser Running (79RNG). The 79RNG output is TRUE when the recloser is running (i.e., not in Reset or
Lockout). This output is available to block the operation of a load tap changer on a substation transformer or
voltage regulator during the fault clearing and restoration process.
Lockout (79LO). This output is TRUE when the recloser is in the Lockout state. It remains TRUE until the
recloser goes to the Reset state. The recloser will go to Lockout if any of the following conditions exist:
C More than the maximum number of programmed recloses are initiated before the recloser returns
to the Reset state.
C The BLK/DTL input is TRUE.
C The Reclose Fail (79F) output is TRUE.
C The maximum reclose cycle time is executed.
Reclose Failure (79F). The 79F output is TRUE when the reclose fail timer times out. The reclose fail timer
starts when the 79C output becomes TRUE and is reset when the breaker closes (status input is TRUE). The
reclose fail timer limits the duration of the 79C output signal. The 79F output remains TRUE until the recloser
goes to the Reset state. If the reclose fail timer is set at zero, the 79F output is disabled. Disabling the reclose
fail function will allow the recloser to hold its close signal until the breaker closes. This might be used if you
have an external device such as an 86 or 25 blocking close and you want the recloser to hold the close signal
until the block is removed.
Recloser Sequence Controled Block (79SCB). This
output becomes TRUE when either the 52 status
input OR the 79C input is TRUE AND the sequence
operation (shot counter) matches one of the
programmed steps of the S<g>-79SCB command.
Figure 4-46 illustrates 79SCB logic.
Figure 4-46. 79SCB Logic

Recloser BESTlogic Settings
BESTlogic settings are made from the
BESTlogic Function Element Screen in
BESTCOMS. Figure 4-47 illustrates the
BESTCOMS screen used to select
BESTlogic settings for the reclosing
element. To open the BESTlogic Function
Element Screen for logic timers, select
Reclosing from the Screens pull-down
menu. Alternately, settings may be made
using the SL-79 ASCII command.
Function Element Screen is a pull-down
menu labeled Logic. This menu allows
viewing of the BESTlogic settings for each
preprogramed logic scheme. A custom
logic scheme must be created and
selected in the Logic pull-down menu at
the top of the screen before BESTlogic
settings can be changed. See Section 7, Figure 4-47. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Reclosing (79) Element
Enable the reclosing function by selecting
its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu. To connect the element’s inputs, select the button for
the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function ElementScreen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder screen
will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables
to be connected to the input. Select Save when finished to return to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen.
For more details on the BESTlogic Expression Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select
Done to the settings have been completely edited.
Table 4-27. Recloser Logic Settings

0 = Recloser disabled.
1 = Power Up To Lockout. After power-up, the STATUS logic must
be TRUE for the Reset time delay or the recloser automatically 0
goes to Lockout. If the STATUS logic stays TRUE for reset time
delay, the recloser goes to Reset.
Mode
2 = Power Up To Close. If the recloser was in the Reset state when
power was lost, and when power is restored the STATUS logic
is FALSE (breaker open) and the RI logic is TRUE, the recloser
will initiate the first reclose operation. If the STATUS logic stays
TRUE for the reset time delay, the recloser goes to Reset.
RI OR logic term to initiate the operation of the reclosing function. 0
OR logic term to indicate breaker status.

STATUS 0
TRUE/1 = closed, FALSE/0 = open.
WAIT OR logic term to momentarily disable but not reset the recloser. 0
LOCKOUT OR logic term to disable the recloser (drive to Lockout). 0
PI Permissive logic input. 0

Recloser Operating Settings
reclosing element. To open
the Reclosing Screen, select
Reclosing from the Screens
pull-down menu. Alternately,
the S<g>-79 ASCII command
where g is the number of the
setting group the settings are
to apply to.
At the top of the screen is a
pull-down menu labeled Logic.
This menu allows viewing of
the BESTlogic settings for
each preprogramed logic
scheme. A custom logic
scheme must be created and
Figure 4-48. Reclosing Screen
selected in the Logic pull-down
menu at the top of the screen
before BESTlogic settings can be changed. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Beneath the
Logic pull-down menu is a pull-down menu labeled Settings. The Settings menu is used to select the setting
group that the elements settings apply to.
Selecting the time units selects the time measurement that applies to all of the reclosing timers, Reset timer,
Max Cycle, Pilot and Fail.
Using the pull-down menus and buttons, make the application appropriate settings to the reclosing function.
Table 4-28 summarizes the function’s operating settings.
Table 4-28. Recloser Operating Settings

Setting Range Increment Defaults
Pilot
Reclose 1 Time
0.001 second (0 to 0.999 seconds)
Reclose 2 Time 0.1 to 600 0.1 second (1.0 to 9.9 seconds)
0
Reclose 3 Time seconds 1 second (10 to 600 seconds)
0.1 cycles (6 to 36,000 cycles)
Reclose 4 Time
Max Cycle

0.1 to 600 0.1 second (1.0 to 9.9 seconds)
Reset 10 s
seconds 1 second (10 to 600 seconds)

0.1 to 600 0.1 second (1.0 to 9.9 seconds)
Fail 60 s
seconds 1 second (10 to 600 seconds)
Setting Range Increment Defaults
ms, seconds,
Time Units
minutes, n/a ms
cycles
Example 1. Make the following setting changes to the reclosing operating settings. Refer to Figure 4-48.
Time units: ms
Pilot: 100
Reclose 1 Time: 100
Reclose 2 Time: 100
Reclose 3 Time: 100
Reclose 4 Time: 100
Reset: 10000
Max Cycle: 60,000
Fail: 1,000
Sequence Controlled Blocking

The 79SCB output is TRUE when the breaker is closed, the 79 close output (79C) is TRUE and the reclose
sequence step is enabled with a nonzero value in the S#-79SCB command. A 0 (zero) disables the 79SCB
output. There are five Sequence Controlled Blocks that can be enabled by clicking the check box as shown
in Figure 4-49.
Figure 4-49 shows a logic timing diagram showing all possible sequence control blocks enabled (TRUE). In
Figure 4-50, 79RTD is the reclose reset time delay and 79#TD is the reclose time delay where # is the reclose
shot number.
Manual Close
Closed
BREAKER STATUS
D2635-09
03-27-98
Open
RESET
79C
SCB
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 1
79SCB 1 2 3 4 5 1
Figure 4-49. S#-79SCB = 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 Logic Timing Diagram
Manual Close
Closed
BREAKER STATUS
Open
D2635-10
11-29-98
RESET
79C
SCB
STEP 1 2 3 4 5 1
79SCB 1 2 3 4 5 1
Figure 4-50. S#-79SCB = 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 Logic Timing Diagram

Zone-Sequence Coordination
To coordinate tripping and reclosing sequences with downstream protective relays and reclosers, the BE1-700
senses fault current from downstream faults when a user programmable logic, set by the SP-79ZONE
command, picks up and then drops out without a trip output occurring. Typically, the low-set instantaneous
pickup outputs (50TPPU and 50TNPU) or the time overcurrent pickup outputs (51PPU and 51NPU) are used
for the zone sequence settings.
If the upstream relay (BE1-700) senses that fault current has been interrupted by a downstream device, the
BE1-700 will increment the trip/reclose sequence by one operation. This occurs because the BE1-700
recognizes that a non-blocked low set (50TP or 50 TN) element picked up and reset before timing out to trip.
Table 4-29 summarizes the zone-sequence coordination settings.
Table 4-29. Zone-Sequence Coordination Settings

Function Range/Purpose
The zone-sequence pickup logic defines which logic elements should be
LOGIC considered zone-sequence pickups. Only OR (+) logic can be used - no
AND (t) variables may be used.
Logic settings are made from the

Screen in BESTCOMS. Figure 4-
screen used to select BESTlogic
settings for the Zone-Sequence
Coordination function. To open the
Screen for logic timers, select
Reclosing from the Screens pull-
down menu. Then select the
button labeled Logic. Alternately,
settings may be made using the
SP-79SCB ASCII command.

labeled Logic . This menu
allows viewing of the BESTlogic
settings for each preprogramed
logic scheme. A custom logic
scheme must be created and Figure 4-51. BESTlogic Function Element Screen for Reclosing Logic
selected in the Logic pull-down
Programmable Logic.
To connect the logic for sequence coordination, select the LOGIC button. The BESTlogic Expression Builder
Screen will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of
variables to be connected to the input. Select Save when finished to return to the BESTlogic Function
Element Screen. For more details on the BESTlogic Expression Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic
Programmable Logic. Select Done when the settings have been completely edited.
Example 1. Using BESTCOMS, make the following settings. Figure 4-51 illustrates these settings.
LOGIC: 50TPPU + 50TNPU
Recloser zone-sequence coordination detects when a fault has been cleared by a downstream recloser and
increments the upstream 79 automatic reclose count to maintain a consistent count with the other recloser.
A fault is presumed cleared downstream when one or more protective functions pickup and dropout with no
trip occurring. If the zone pickup logic becomes TRUE and then FALSE without a trip output operating, then
the 79 automatic reclose counter should be incremented. The shot counter is reset by the max cycle timer.
So its 79ZONE is used, this function cannot be disabled.
Figure 4-52 illustrates an overall logic diagram for the recloser function.

BE1-700
79 RNG
79F TIMING
0 79n Timer
RI STRETCHED 79n
RI INITIATE TIMING
(Reclose Initiate) 79n Timer 79F
n=Reclose 79n Reclose INITIATE
Attempt 79 F
STATUS 79F Timer
WAIT Attempt-1
BREAKER
Holdup Timer WAIT
STATUS
STATUS
1 STATUS
PROT MAX Cycle 79F
PROT Trip 79 C
Trip 79 ZONE INITIATE
1
PROT PU PU 79 Max Cycle 79 C
(79 ZONE) MAX Cycle
Timer (1 shot,
79R TIMING WAIT non-retrigger)
79 SCB
79 Reset 79RST STATUS
WAIT
Timer
79 LO
79 RST
D2595-26
79RNG 11-20-03
79SCB PU
Increment Reclose
Attempt Reclose
Protection and Control

MAX Cycle 79SCB
Reset Recloser Attempt
Reclose
79RNG Drive to Lockout
Counter LO Attempt=SCB
1,2,3,4,5,LO
DTL/BLK
Figure 4-52. Overall Logic Diagram for Reclosing

1 Not an input; internal to the relay. Refer to Zone Sequence Coordination sub-heading for details.
4-51
SYNCHRONISM-CHECK PROTECTION (BE1-700V, OPTIONAL)
25 Element - Sync-Check
Figure 4-53 illustrates the inputs and outputs of the Sync-Check
element. Element operation is described in the following
paragraphs.
The Sync-Check element has two outputs: 25 and 25VM1.
When monitored voltage between the systems as measured by
the phase VTs and the auxiliary Vx input circuits meets angle,
voltage and slip criteria, the 25 output becomes TRUE. 25VM1
is the voltage monitor output.
The BLK (block) input is used to disable synchronism checking.
A BESTlogic expression defines how the BLK input functions. Figure 4-53. Sync-Check Element
When this expression is TRUE, the element is disabled by
forcing the outputs to logic 0. This feature functions in a similar way to the torque control contact of an
The 25 element is enabled or disabled by the mode input. Two modes are available. Selecting Mode 0
disables the 25 element and selecting Mode 1 enables the 25 element.
The 25 function module will change the 25 output to TRUE if the following conditions are met:
a) Phase angle between systems is less than setting.
b) Frequency error between systems is less than setting. As an additional parameter, the relay can
be set to only allow generator frequency greater than bus frequency.
c) Voltage magnitude between systems is less than setting (the voltage used by the relay for this
feature is a voltage magnitude measurement, not a voltage phasor measurement).
The BE1-700 compares the VTP voltage magnitude and angle to the VTX voltage magnitude and angle to
determine synchronism. Therefore, proper connection of the VT inputs is vital to the correct operation of the
25 function.
The relay automatically compensates for phase angle differences associated with the phase and auxiliary VT
connections, including single-phase VTP connections. That is, for a VTP selection of phase to phase and a
VTX selection of phase to neutral, the relay will automatically compensate for the 30-degree angle between
the two voltage sources. However, the relay does not scale for differences in magnitude between the
applied voltages. For example, if VTP = 4W (L-N) and VTX=AB (L-L), the angle is automatically
compensated for. However, one of the input magnitudes needs to be scaled by SQRT (3) so that the
magnitude of the compared voltages are equivalent under sync conditions. Note: The sync-check will not work
if VTX connections are set for residual voltage input VTX=RG.
For clarification on single-phase VTP connections, refer to the interconnection diagrams shown in Figure 12-
11 of this manual. Note: For single-phase sensing connections, terminals C13, C14, C15 (A, B, C) are
connected in parallel. The single-phase signal is connected between the paralleled group and C16 (N). This
ensures that the zero-crossing circuit is always connected to the sensed circuit.
Note that delta V is a single-phase test only. For 3W VTP connection, the relay uses A-B, for 4W VTP
connection it uses A-N, and for single-phase sensing the relay uses the applied phase. Also note that VM
performs three of three testing for all connections. For 3W and 4W, phases A, B and C are actually tested.
For single-phase connections, the terminals are connected in parallel as described above and the single-
phase is tested three times. This is implemented for convenience, allowing the exact same code for both
conditions.
Measuring slip frequency directly allows the function to rapidly determine if systems are in sychronism and
requires no timer or inherent delay (as compared to systems that check only that phase angle is held within
a window for some stretch of time). The moment parameters a), b) and c) are met, the systems may be
considered in synchronism and the output becomes TRUE.

BESTlogic Settings for the Sync-Check Element
Element Screen in
Sync-Check element. To open
the BESTlogic Function
Element Screen for the Sync-
Check element, select Voltage
pull-down menu. After
selecting the 25 tab, select the
BESTlogic button. Alternately,
SL-25 ASCII command.
labeled Logic. This menu Figure 4-54. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
allows viewing of the Sync-Check (25) Element
Programmable Logic.
Enable the Sync-Check function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu. To
connect the element’s inputs, select the button for the corresponding input in the BESTlogic Function Element
Table 4-30. Sync-Check Logic Settings

Mode 0 = disable
0
1 = enable
Logic expression that disables
BLK 0
function when TRUE
Example 1. Make the following BESTlogic settings to the Sync-Check element. Refer to Figure 4-54.
Mode: Enable
BLK: /79C
79LO
Operating Settings for the Sync-Check Element

operational settings for the Sync-Check element. To open the Voltage Protection Screen, select Voltage
Protection from the Screens pull-down menu. Then select the 25 tab. Alternately, settings may be made using
the S<g>-25 ASCII command or through the HMI using Screens 5.x.2.1 through 5.x.2.4 where g equals the
setting group number and x equals 1 (Setting Group 0) and 2 (Setting Group 1).

elements settings apply to.
The default unit of measure
for Delta Voltage is secondary
volts (Sec. Volts). Primary
volts (Pri Volts), per unit volts
(Per U Volts) and percent
volts (% Volts) can also be
selected as the pickup setting
unit of measure.
Figure 4-55. Voltage Protection Screen, 25 (Sync-Check) Tab
Table 4-31 summarizes the element’s operating settings.
Table 4-31. Sync-Check Function Operating Settings

Delta voltage 1 - 20 0.1 secondary volts 1
Delta angle 1 - 45 0.1 degrees 10
Slip frequency 0.01 - 0.5 0.01 hertz 0.01
0 = disabled
Phase freq > Aux freq n/a n/a 0
1 = enabled
Example 1. Make the following operating settings to the Sync-Check element. Refer to Figure 4-55.
Delta Voltage: 10.0
Delta Angle: 10.0
Slip Frequency: 0.40
Phase Freq > Aux Freq: Enabled
25 Element - Voltage Monitor (25VM)

Operating settings for the 25VM are made on the Voltage Protection Screen, 25 tab. Refer to Figure 4-55.
The default unit of measure for Delta Voltage is secondary volts (Sec. Volts). Primary volts (Pri Volts), per unit
volts (Per U Volts) and percent volts (% Volts) can also be selected as the pickup setting unit of measure.
Table 4-32. S#-25VM Command Settings

Unit of
Live 10 - 150 n/a volts 60
Dead 10 - 150 n/a volts 20
Dropout Delay 0.050 - 60 n/a seconds 50
1 - 3, 12, 23, 31, 123
25VM1 n/a n/a disabled
DIS = disabled

The sync-check output, 25, only provides closing supervision for the live line/live bus condition. The voltage
monitor function 25VM is provided for conditions where the bus and/or the line are dead. A live condition for
either the VP or the VX is determined when the measured voltage on the respective input is above the
measured voltage and below the DV threshold.
For the phase voltage input, if the connection is three phase, 3W or 4W, all three phases are tested and must
be above the LV threshold for a live condition to be TRUE. Similarly, all three phases must be below the DV
threshold for a dead condition to be TRUE.
The function includes one
independent output, 25VM1 as
illustrated in Figure 4-56. The
logic conditions are
summarized in Table 4-33. Any
combination of logic settings
can be selected as shown in
Table 4-33. When a logic
condition is selected, it closes
the respective switch in Figure
4-56 associated with each of
t h e o u t p u t s . The two
independent logic outputs
Figure 4-56. 25VM Logic
might be used to set up
different closing supervision
criteria for automatic reclose versus manual close.
Table 4-33. Voltage Monitor Logic Settings

Voltage Monitor Logic Logic Setting
Condition
Dead Phase and Dead Aux 1
Dead Phase and Live Aux 2
Live Phase and Dead Aux 3
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER FUSE LOSS DETECTION (BE1-700V)
60FL Element
BE1-700 relays have one 60FL element that can be used to detect
fuse loss or loss of potential in a three-phase system. The 60FL
element is illustrated in Figure 4-57. When the element logic becomes
TRUE, the 60FL logic output becomes TRUE. A logic diagram is
shown in Figure 4-58. Logic parameters is shown in Table 4-34.
Figure 4-57. 60FL Element

V1
A
8.8% Vnom
V2
C 1 or 2 phase Fuse Loss
25% V1
G K
3w/4w Sensing
M 60FL
V1 60FL Reset
H
85% Vnom N
P0002-27 60FL Output Latch

06-03-04
Figure 4-58. 60FL Element Logic
Trip Logic: 60FL Trip = (A * C * G)
Reset Logic: 60FL Reset = H * /K
Table 4-34. 60FL Logic Parameters

Input TRUE Condition
A Positive-sequence voltage is greater than 8.8% of the nominal voltage, detects

minimum voltage is applied.
C Negative-sequence voltage is greater than 25% of the positive-sequence voltage,

detects loss of 1 or 2 phase voltages.
G Three-wire or four-wire sensing selected.
H Positive-sequence voltage is greater than 85% of nominal voltage, detects a

restored voltage condition.
K (A * C * G), detects either one or two phases are lost.
M, N Latches the 60FL output until the reset criteria is met.
Two inputs determine how current and voltage protective functions operate when a fuse loss condition exists.
The I Block input assumes that the voltage is VNOM when 60FL is TRUE because the voltage measurement
is not present or is unreliable. If the input voltage is nominal, then voltage restraint and control have no effect.
The V Block input determines which voltage functions are blocked when the 60FL logic is TRUE.
60FL Element Blocking Settings

The 60FL logic bit is always enabled regardless of the SP-60FL setting. This allows the user to define
additional or custom blocking logic. Settings for blocking the 60FL element are listed in Table 4-35. For more
information on blocking logic for each of the explanations, see the previous paragraphs in this section.

Table 4-35. 60FL Element Blocking Settings
Mode
Input Setting Explanation Default
Phase (P), neutral (N) and negative-sequence (Q) voltage functions are
DIS
not automatically blocked when 60FL logic is TRUE.
All functions that use phase voltage are blocked when the 60FL logic is
P
TRUE. (27P and 59P)
V Block PNQ
All functions that use 3-phase residual voltage (3V0) measurements are
N
blocked when the 60FL logic is TRUE. (27X, 59X, Mode 2)
All functions that use the negative-sequence voltage (V2) measurement
Q
are blocked when the 60FL logic is TRUE. (47)
SP-60FL Command
Purpose: Read or set the 60FL automatic blocking logic.
Syntax: SP-60FL[=,<V Blk>]
Comments: See Table 4-35 for SP-60FL settings information.
SP-60FL Command Example

1. During loss of potential conditions, control the current tripping levels with the 51P function and block the
phase and negative-sequence voltage functions.
>SP-60FL=ENA,PQ
The 60FL element detects fuse loss and loss of potential by using voltage and current thresholds that are
expressed as a percentage of the nominal voltage and current values. See Section 3, Input and Output
Functions, for information on changing the nominal voltage and current values using the SG-NOM command.
VIRTUAL SWITCHES
43 Virtual Selector Switches

The BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay has two virtual selector switches that can provide manual control, locally
and remotely, without using physical switches and/or interposing relays. Each virtual switch can be set for one
of three modes of operation to emulate virtually any type of binary (two position) switch. An example would
be an application that requires a ground cutoff switch. The traditional approach might be to install a switch on
the panel and wire the output to a contact sensing input on the relay or in series with the ground trip output
of the relay. Instead, a virtual switch can be used to reduce costs with the added benefit of being able to
operate the switch both locally through the HMI and remotely from a substation computer or through a modem
connection to a remote operator’s console.
The state of the switches can be controlled from the HMI or ASCII command interface. Control actions can
be set by the BESTlogic mode setting. When set for On/Off/Pulse, each switch can be controlled to open (logic
0), close (logic 1), or pulse such that the output toggles from its current state to the opposite state and then
returns. Additional modes allow the switch operation to be restricted. In On/Off, the switch emulates a two
position selector switch, and only open and close commands are accepted. In Off/Momentary On , a
momentary close, spring-return switch is emulated and only the pulse command is accepted. Because switch
status information is saved in nonvolatile memory, the relay powers up with the switches in the same state
as when the relay was powered down.
Each virtual selector switch element (see Figure 4-59) has
one output: 43 or 143. The output is TRUE when the switch
is in the closed state; the output is FALSE when the switch
is the open state. Since both the output and the inverse of
the output of these switches can be used as many times as
desired in your programmable logic, they can emulate a
switch with as many normally open and normally closed
Figure 4-59. x43 Element
decks as desired.
User specified labels can be assigned to each virtual switch and to both states of each switch. In the previous
ground cutoff switch example, you might enable one of the switches in BESTlogic as Mode 2, ON/OFF and
connect the output of that switch to the blocking input of the 59X protection element. This would disable the
ground overvoltage protection when the switch is closed (logic 1) and enable it when the switch is open (logic
0). For the application, you might set the switch label to be 59N_CUTOFF (10 character maximum). The
closed position on the switch might be labeled DISABLD (7 character maximum) and the open position might
be labeled NORMAL. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic has more details about setting user
programmable names for programmable logic variables.
BESTlogic Settings for x43 Virtual Selector Switches

illustrates the BESTCOMS screen used to select BESTlogic settings for the Virtual Switch element. To open
the BESTlogic Function Element Screen for the Virtual Switch element, select Virtual Switches from the
Screens pull-down menu. Then select the BESTlogic button for the virtual switch to be edited. Alternately,
settings may be made using SL-43 or SL-143 ASCII commands.

Virtual Switch (43) Element
At the top center of the BESTlogic Function Element Screen is a pull-down menu labeled Logic. This menu
allows viewing of the BESTlogic settings for each preprogramed logic scheme. A custom logic scheme must
be created and selected in the Logic pull-down menu at the top of the screen before BESTlogic settings can
be changed. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic.
Enable the Virtual Switch function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu. Select
Table 4-36 summarizes the element’s operating modes. These settings enable the x43 element by selecting
the mode of operation. There are no logic inputs.
Table 4-36. x43 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings

Mode 0 = Disabled 2 = On/Off

0
1 = On/Off/Pulse 3 = Off/Momentary On

Example 1. Make the following BESTlogic settings to the Virtual Switch function. Refer to Figure 4-60.
Mode: Disable
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Selector Switches

The state of each virtual selector switch can be controlled at the HMI through Screens 2.1.1 and 2.1.2. Control
is also possible through the ASCII command interface by using the select-before-operate commands CS-x43
(control select-virtual switch) and CO-x43 (operate select-virtual switch). A state change takes place
immediately without having to execute an exit-save settings command.
CS/CO-x43 Command
Purpose: Select and operate the virtual selector switches.
Syntax: CS/CO-<x>43[=<Action>]
Comments: x = no entry for 43 or 1 for 143
Action = 0 to open the switch, 1 to close the switch, P to pulse the switch to the opposite state for 200
milliseconds and then automatically return to starting state.
The virtual switch control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the command must
be selected using the CS-x43 command. After the select command is entered, there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-x43 control command will be accepted. The control selected and the operation selected
must match exactly or the operate command will be blocked. If the operate command is blocked, an error
message is output.
CS/CO-x43 Command Examples.

1. Read the current status of Virtual Switch 43.
>CO-43
0
2. Momentarily toggle the state of Switch 43 to closed.
>CS-43=P
43=P SELECTED
>CO-43=P
43=P EXECUTED
3. An example of an operate command not matching the select command.
>CS-743=P
743=P SELECTED
>CO-743=1
ERROR:NO SELECT
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay

The state of each virtual selector switch can be determined from HMI Screen 1.5.4. This information is also
available through the ASCII command interface by using the RG-STAT command. This information is not
available through BESTCOMS. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, for
more information.
HMI Screens 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 provide switch control and can also display the current status of their respective
switches. ASCII command CO-x43 returns the state of each virtual selector switch in a read-only mode. See
the previous Example 1.
101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch

The virtual breaker control switch (shown in Figure 4-61)
provides manual control of a circuit breaker or switch without
using physical switches and/or interposing relays. Both local and
remote control is possible. A virtual switch can be used instead
of a physical switch to reduce costs with the added benefit that
Figure 4-61. 101 Element
the virtual switch can be operated both locally from the HMI and remotely from a substation computer or
modem connection to an operator’s console.
The breaker control switch emulates a 1
typical breaker control switch with a 101T 200 ms
momentary close, spring return, trip 0
contact (output 101T), a momentary
close, spring return, close contact (output 1
101C) and a slip contact (output 101SC). 101C 200 ms
The slip contact output retains the status 0
of the last control action. That is, it is
FALSE (open) in the after-trip state and 1
TRUE (closed) in the after-close state. 101SC D2843-15.vsd
Figure 4-62 shows the state of the 101SC 0 02-02-99
logic output with respect to the state of
the 101T and 101C outputs. Figure 4-62. 101 Control Switch State Diagram
When the virtual control switch is

controlled to trip, the 101T output pulses TRUE (closed) for approximately 200 milliseconds and the 101SC
output goes FALSE (open). When the virtual control switch is controlled to close, the 101SC output pulses
TRUE (closed). The status of the slip contact output is saved to nonvolatile memory so that the relay will
power up with the contact in the same state as when the relay was powered down.
BESTlogic Settings for 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch

Element Screen in
Breaker Control Switch
element. To open the
Screen for the Virtual Switch
element, select Virtual
Switches from the Screens
the BESTlogic button for the
virtual switch to be edited.
made using the SL-101 ASCII
command.
BESTlogic Function Element Figure 4-63. BESTlogic Function Element Screen,
Screen is a pull-down menu Virtual Breaker Control (101) Element
labeled Logic. This menu
allows viewing of the BESTlogic settings for each preprogramed logic scheme. A custom logic schememust
be created and selected in the Logic pull-down menu at the top of the screen before BESTlogic settings can
be changed. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic.
Enable the Virtual Breaker Control function by selecting its mode of operation from the Mode pull-down menu.
Select Done when the settings have been completely edited.
Table 4-37 summarizes the element’s operating modes.

Table 4-37. 101 Virtual Selector Switch BESTlogic Settings
Logic Mode 0 = disabled, 1 = On/Off 0
Select Before Operate Control of Virtual Breaker Control Switch

The state of each virtual selector switch can be controlled at the HMI through Screen 2.2.1. Control is also
possible through the ASCII command interface by using the select-before-operate commands CS-101 (control
select-virtual control switch) and CO-101 (control operate-virtual controls switch). Control is not possible using
BESTCOMS. A state change takes place immediately without having to execute an Exit - Save settings
command.
CS/CO-101Command
Purpose: Select and operate the virtual control switch.
Syntax: CS/CO-101=<action>
Comments: Action = T to pulse the 101T output; C to pulse the 101C output
The virtual switch control commands require the use of select-before-operate logic. First, the command must
be selected using the CS-101 command. After the select command is entered, there is a 30 second window
during which the CO-101 control command will be accepted. The control selected and the operation selected
must match exactly or the operate command will be blocked. If the operate command is blocked and error
message is output.
CS/CO-101 Command Examples
1. Read the current status of the virtual control switch.
>CO-101
C
The returned setting indicates that the switch is in the after-close state.
2. Trip the breaker by closing the trip output of the virtual control switch.
>CS-101=T
101=T SELECTED
>CO-101=T
101=T EXECUTED
Retrieving Virtual Selector Switch Status Information from the Relay

The virtual control switch state (after-trip or after-close) can be determined through the ASCII command
interface by using the RG-STAT (reports general-status) command. Status cannot be retrieved using
BESTCOMS. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting, for more information.
HMI Screens 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 provide switch control and also displays the current status of the virtual control
switches (after-trip or after-close). As the previous Example 1 demonstrated, the state of each virtual selector
switch can be determined using the CO-101 command in a read-only mode.

SECTION 5 • METERING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 5 • METERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
METERING FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Autoranging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
BESTCOMS Metering Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Voltage (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Current (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Frequency (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Figures
Figure 5-1. BESTCOMS Metering Screen (BE1-700C is Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-2. Relationship of Slip Frequency and Sync Angle to Synchroscope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Tables
Table 5-1. Autoranging Scales for Metered Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Table 5-2. Metering Functions Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
BE1-700 Metering i
SECTION 5 • METERING
INTRODUCTION
The BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay measures the voltage and current inputs, displays those values in real
time, records those values every one-quarter second and calculates other quantities from the measured
inputs.
METERING FUNCTIONS
BE1-700 metering functions include voltage, current and frequency. Metered values are viewed through any
communication port using serial commands or at the front panel human-machine interface (HMI). Metering
functions are summarized in the following paragraphs and in Table 5-2. For assistance with navigating through
the HMI metering screens, refer to Section 10, Human-Machine Interface.
Autoranging
The BE1-700 automatically scales metered values. Table 5-1 illustrates the ranges for each value metered.
C under the Type column refers to the BE1-700C relay; V refers to the BE1-700V relay.
Table 5-1. Autoranging Scales for Metered Values

Unit Display Ranges
Metered
Type Value Whole Units Kilo Units Mega Units Giga Units
C Current 0 A to 9,999 A 10 kA to 9,999 kA 10 MA n/a

V Voltage 0 V to 999 V 1 kV to 999 kV 1 MV n/a
V Frequency 10 to 75 Hz n/a n/a n/a
BESTCOMS Metering Screen

Metered values are viewed through the BESTCOMS Metering Screen (see Figure 5-1). To open the Metering
Screen, select Metering from the Reports pull-down menu. To begin viewing metered values, select the Start
Polling button in the bottom right of the screen.
Alternately, metering can be performed through the use of the ASCII command interface or HMI using Screens
3.1 through 3.11.
Refer to Table 5-2 for a list of ASCII commands used for metering. C under the Type column refers to the
BE1-700C relay; V refers to the BE1-700V relay; A refers to both relays.
BE1-700 Metering 5-1

Figure 5-1. BESTCOMS Metering Screen (BE1-700C is Shown)
Table 5-2. Metering Functions Summary

Type Metering Function Serial Command HMI Screen
A All metered values M n/a
V Voltage, all values M-V n/a
V Voltage, A-phase M-VA 3.1
V Voltage, B-phase M-VB 3.1
V Voltage, C-phase M-VC 3.1
V Voltage, A-phase to B-phase M-VAB 3.2
V Voltage, B-phase to C-phase M-VBC 3.2
V Voltage, A-phase to C-phase M-VAC 3.2
V Voltage, Negative-Sequence M-V2 3.4
V Voltage Auxiliary M-VX 3.3
V Voltage Three-phase Auxiliary M-V3X 3.3
V Voltage, Zero-Sequence M-V3V0 3.4
C Current, all values M-I n/a
C Current, A-phase M-IA 3.5
C Current, B-phase M-IB 3.5
C Current, C-phase M-IC 3.5
C Current, Neutral M-IN 3.7
C Current, Negative-Sequence M-IQ 3.7
5-2 Metering BE1-700

Type Metering Function Serial Command HMI Screen
C Current, Ground M-IG 3.6
V Frequency M-FREQ n/a
V Frequency, Phase M-FREQP 3.10
V Frequency, Auxiliary M-FREQX 3.10
V Frequency, Slip M-FREQS 3.11
V Metered sync angle between Phase and Aux M-SYNC 3.11
inputs
Voltage (BE1-700V)
The BE1-700 meters A-phase voltage, B-phase voltage, C-phase voltage, voltage across phases A and B,
phases B and C, and phases A and C. Negative-sequence voltage and three-phase zero-sequence (residual)
voltage is also metered. The VTP connection determines what is measured. For the auxiliary voltage input,
fundamental (Vx) and 3rd harmonic voltages (V3X) are style options.
Current (BE1-700C)
Metered current includes A-phase current, B-phase current, C-phase current, neutral three-phase zero-
sequence current and ground current. Other metered currents include negative-sequence current and derived
neutral current. All current measurements are auto ranging. Current is displayed in amps up to 9,999 A and
then switches to kilo at 10.0 kA to 9,999 kA.
Frequency (BE1-700V)
Frequency is metered over a range of 10 to 75 hertz. If the measured frequency is outside this range, the
nominal system frequency will be displayed. Frequency is sensed from A-phase to Neutral for four-wire
sensing systems or from A-phase to B-phase for three-wire sensing systems. The frequency of auxiliary
voltage VX is also measured if the style option is selected. Refer to Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2. Relationship of Slip Frequency and Sync Angle to Synchroscope
BE1-700 Metering 5-3

SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM
FUNCTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
RELAY IDENTIFIER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
IRIG Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Setting the Clock Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Reading and Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
GENERAL STATUS REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
General Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Input (1234) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Output (A12345) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-OUT (A12345) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-x (43/143) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-101 (101SC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
CO-Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Active Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Recloser (79) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Logic Variables (00-31), (32-63) and (64-95) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Breaker (52) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Diag/Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Other Report - General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
DEMAND FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Setting Demand Current Reporting (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Retrieving Demand Reporting Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Overload and Unbalance Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
VT MONITOR FUNCTIONS (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Setting Fuse Loss Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
BREAKER MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Breaker Status Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Setting the Breaker Status Reporting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Retrieving Breaker Status and Operation Counter Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Breaker Duty Monitoring (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Setting the Breaker Duty Monitoring Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Retrieving Breaker Duty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Breaker Clearing Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Breaker Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
FAULT REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Fault Reporting Expressions and Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Fault Reporting Trigger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Setting the Targets Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Retrieving Target Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
BE1-700 Reporting and Alarm Functions i

Fault Summary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
BESTCOMS Fault Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Fault Summary Report Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Retrieving Fault Report Information from the Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Recording Oscillographic Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Oscillographic Records Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Retrieving Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
SER Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Retrieving SER Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
ALARMS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Relay Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Major, Minor and Logic Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Programming Alarm Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Retrieving and Resetting Alarm Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Links Between Programmable Alarms and BESTLOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Programmable Alarms Controlled by BESTlogic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Programmable Alarms Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
BESTlogic Elements Controlled by Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE VERSION REPORTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Figures
Figure 6-1. General Operation Screen, General Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Figure 6-2. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Clock Display Mode Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Figure 6-3. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Demands Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Figure 6-4. Reporting and Alarms Screen, VT Monitor Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-5. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Breaker Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Figure 6-6. Protective Fault Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Figure 6-7. Trip Detector Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Figure 6-8. Trip Circuit Voltage and Continuity Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Figure 6-9. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Fault Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Figure 6-10. Reporting and Alarms, Fault Recording Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Figure 6-11. Target Reset Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Figure 6-12. Metering Screen (BE1-700C is Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Figure 6-13. View/Download Relay Fault Files Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Figure 6-14. Oscillographic Records Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Figure 6-15. Browse for Folder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Figure 6-16. Fault Record Filenames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Figure 6-17. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Figure 6-18. Programmable Alarm Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Figure 6-19. Metering Screen (BE1-700C is Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Figure 6-20. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Alarm Reset Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Figure 6-21. General Operation Screen, General Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Tables
Table 6-1. Relay Circuit Identification Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Table 6-2. SG-CLK Command Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Table 6-3. Logic Variable Status Report Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-4. Demand Settings for Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Table 6-5. Demand Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Table 6-6. Breaker Status Reporting BESTlogic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Table 6-7. Breaker Duty Monitoring Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Table 6-8. Breaker Programmable Alarms Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Table 6-9. Legend for Figure 6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Table 6-10. Current Draw for each Power Supply Voltage Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
ii Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-700

Table 6-11. Fault Reporting Trigger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Table 6-12. Protective Functions with Targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Table 6-13. Target Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-14. Targets as Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Table 6-15. Possible Oscillographic Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Table 6-16. Recording Oscillographic Records Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Table 6-17. Relay Trouble Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Table 6-18. Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Table 6-19. Programmable Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
BE1-700 Reporting and Alarm Functions iii

SECTION 6 • REPORTING AND ALARM
FUNCTIONS
INTRODUCTION
This section describes all available reports from the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay and how they are set
and retrieved. All alarm functions are also described along with how major and minor alarms are programmed
(or mapped).
RELAY IDENTIFIER INFORMATION

BE1-700 relays have two
relay Circuit Identification
fields: Relay ID and, Station
ID. These fields are used in
the header information lines
of the Fault Reports, the
Oscillograph Records and
the Sequence of Events
Records.
Relay Circuit Identification
settings are made using
screen used to set Relay ID
and Station ID. To open this
screen, select General
Operation from the Screens
pull-down menu. Alternately,
the SG-ID ASCII command. Figure 6-1. General Operation Screen, General Information Tab
To change these, delete the
old label from the cell and type the new label. Identification settings are summarized in Table 6-1.
Table 6-1. Relay Circuit Identification Settings

Setting Range Default
Relay ID 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters t BE1-700
Station ID 1 to 30 alphanumeric characters t SUBSTATION_1

t No spaces are allowed in labels; any spaces used in the labels are stripped when the
label change is saved. Use the character _ (Shift + Underscore) to create a break in
characters. An example of this is station_name.
CLOCK
The BE1-700 provides a clock that is used by the demand reporting function, the fault reporting function, the
oscillograph recording function and the sequence of events recorder function to time-stamp events. The clock
function records the year in two-digit format.
BE1-700 Reporting and Alarm Functions 6-1

IRIG Port
IRIG time code signal connections are located on the rear panel. When a valid time code signal is detected
at the port, it is used to synchronize the clock function. Note that the IRIG time code signal does not contain
year information. For this reason, it is necessary to enter the date even when using an IRIG signal. Year
information is stored in nonvolatile memory so that when operating power is restored after an outage and the
clock is re-synchronized the current year is restored. When the clock rolls over to a new year, the year is
automatically incremented in nonvolatile memory. An alarm bit is included in the programmable alarm function
for loss of IRIG signal. The alarm point monitors for IRIG signal loss once a valid signal is detected at the IRIG
port.
The IRIG input is fully isolated and accepts a demodulated (dc level-shifted) signal. The input signal must be
3.5 volts or higher to be recognized as a valid signal. Maximum input signal level is +10 to -10 volts (20 volt
range). Input resistance is nonlinear and rated at 4 kilo-ohms at 3.5 volts.
Setting the Clock Function

Time and date format settings
are made using BESTCOMS.
Figure 6-2 illustrates the
BESTCOMS screen used to
select time and date format
settings. To open the screen
in Figure 6-2, select Reporting
and Alarms from the Screens
the Clock Display Mode tab.
made using the SG-CLK
ASCII command. (See Table
6-2.)
Time and date reporting can
be displayed in 12 or 24 hour
format. When operating in the
12 hour format, the A.M./P.M.
parameter is placed between
the minutes and seconds
parameters (10:24P23.004 Figure 6-2. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Clock Display Mode Tab
indicates 10:24 in the
evening). The default time
format is 24 hours. Date reporting format can display the date in mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy format. The default
date format is mm/dd/yy. The relay clock can also accommodate daylight saving time changes. Automatic
daylight saving time adjustments are optional and are disabled by default.
The Front Panel Back Light Delay can be adjusted to dim the back light after a period of time. The range is
0 to 600 seconds with 600 seconds as the default. The SG-BL ASCII command can also be used.
Table 6-2. SG-CLK Command Settings

Parameter Range Default
12 (12 hour format)
Time format 24
24 (24 hour format)
Automatic daylight 0 (daylight saving time disabled)
0
savings 1 (daylight saving time enabled)
m (mm/dd/yy)
Date format m
d (dd-mm-yy)
6-2 Reporting and Alarm Functions BE1-700

Reading and Setting the Clock
Clock information can be read and set at the front panel human-machine interface (HMI) and through the
communication ports. Write access to reports is required to set the clock at the HMI and communication ports.
An alarm point is provided in the programmable alarms to detect when the relay has powered up and the clock
has not been set. Time and date information is read and set at HMI Screen 4.6. Time and date information
is read and programmed through the communication ports using the RG-DATE and RG-TIME ASCII
commands. The front panel back light delay can be set using the SG-BL ASCII command.
RG-DATE Command
Purpose: Read/Set the clock’s date setting.
Syntax: RG-DATE=<M/D/Y> or RG-DATE=<D-M-Y>
Comments: d and m settings are based on SG-CLK setting.
Example 1. Enter the date for July 1, 2003.
>RG-DATE=07/01/03 or >RG-DATE=07-01-03
RG-TIME Command
Purpose: Read/Set the clock’s time setting.
Syntax: RG-TIME=<hr:mn:sc> or RG-TIME=<hr:mn<f>sc> where <f>=P or A for 12-hour format.
Comments: If P or A is not used, time is in 24-hour format. Password access privilege G or R is required to
change settings. Default time setting on power-up is 00:00:00.
Example 1. Read the clock’s current time setting (programmed in 12 hour format).
>RG-TIME
12:24P45
Example 2. Set a new time in 12 hour format.

>RG-TIME=12:24P00
SG-BL Command
Purpose: Read/Program the back light timer.
Syntax: SG-BL[={timer}] where the delay timer = 0 - 600 seconds (0 = always on; default = 600).
Example: SG-BL=50 or SG-BL=600
GENERAL STATUS REPORTING

BE1-700 relays have extensive capabilities for reporting relay status. This is important for determining the
health and status of the system for diagnostics and troubleshooting. Throughout this manual, reference is
made to the RG-STAT (report general, status) report and the appropriate HMI screens for determining the
status of various functions.
General Status Report

A General Status report is available through the communication ports using the RG-STAT command. This
report lists all of the information required to determine the status of the relay. An example of a typical General
Status report follows as well as a description of what each line represents. In the explanation of each line.
Cross-references are made to the corresponding HMI screens that contain that data.
>RG-STAT
INPUT(1234) STATUS : 0000
OUTPUT(A12345) STATUS : 010000
CO-OUT(A12345) STATUS : LLLLLL
CO-43/143 STATUS : 00
CO-101(101SC) STATUS : AFTER CLOSE(1)
CO-GROUP STATUS : L
ACTIVE LOGIC STATUS : 700XXX-5051-A-BE
RECLOSER(79) STATUS : LOCKOUT *
LOGIC VAR(00-31) STATUS : 00000000 00000000 00000000 00010000
LOGIC VAR(32-63) STATUS : 01000000 00000000 00000000 00100010

LOGIC VAR(64-95) STATUS : 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
ACTIVE GROUP STATUS : 0
BREAKER(52) STATUS : CLOSED
DIAG/ALARM STATUS : 0 RELAY, 0 LOGIC, 0 MAJOR, 0 MINOR
* An option (see Figure 1-1, Style Chart)
Input (1234)
This line reports the status of contact sensing inputs one through eight. Input information is available at HMI
Screen 1.5.1. A 0 indicates a de-energized input and a 1 indicates an energized input. See Section 3, Input
and Output Functions, for more information about contact sensing input operation.
Output (A12345)
Current output contact status is reported on this line. This information is also available at HMI Screen 1.5.2.
A 0 indicates a de-energized output and a 1 indicates an energized output. More information about output
contact operation is available in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.
CO-OUT (A12345)
This line reports the logic override of the output contacts. Logic override status is reported at HMI Screen 1.5.3
and through the CO-OUT command. Section 3, Input and Output Functions, provides more information about
output logic override control.
CO-x (43/143)
Virtual switch function status is reported on this line. This information is also available at HMI Screen 1.5.4.
See Section 4, Protection and Control, for more information about virtual switch operation.
CO-101 (101SC)
This line reports the current status of the virtual breaker control switch slip contact output. More information
about the virtual breaker control switch is available in Section 4, Protection and Control.
CO-Group
The logic override status of the setting group selection function is reported on this line. For more information
about this function, refer to Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups.
Active Logic
This line reports the name of the active logic scheme. The active logic scheme name can also be viewed at
HMI Screen 5 and through the SL-N command. See Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, for more
information about this function.
Recloser (79)
The status of the recloser is reported on this line. HMI Screen 1.1 also reports this information. More
information about the recloser function is available in Section 4, Protection and Control.
Logic Variables (00-31), (32-63) and (64-95)

These three lines report the status of each BESTlogic variable. These lines can be entered into Table 6-3 to
determine the status of each logic variable. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, provides more
information about BESTlogic variables.
Breaker (52)
This line reports the state of the breaker. This information is also available at HMI Screen 1.5.6. More
information about breaker status is provided in the Breaker Monitoring sub-section.

Table 6-3. Logic Variable Status Report Format
150TNT
150TPT
50TNT
50TQT
150TQT
79SCB
79P
43
143
50TPPU
150TPPU
50TNPU
50TQPU
50TQPU
79C
51PPU
51QPU
51PT
51NT
151NT
51QT
150NPU
51NPU
151NPU
79RNG
79LO
79RST
50TPT
LOGIC 0
01
02
00
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
101C
101SC
101T
162
27XTPU
VO10
VO11
VO12
VO13
VO14
VO15
27XT
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
62
ALMMIN
VOA
ALMLGC
TRSTKEY
VO1
VO2
VO3
VO4
VO5
VO6
VO7
VO8
VO9
ALMMAJ
OUT1MON
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
159PPU
127PPU
127PT
47PU
24PU
59PPU
27PPU
27PT
47T
24T
25VM1
ARSTKEY
SG0
SG1
SPARE
SPARE
59PT
159PT
59XT
159XT
59XPU
159XPU
81T
181T
281T
381T
481T
581T
60FL
25
BF PU
BF T
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
Diag/Alarm
This line reports the status of the Relay Trouble Alarm, Major Alarm, Minor Alarm and Logic Alarm. The status
of these alarms can be viewed at HMI Screen 1.3. Front panel LEDs also indicate the status of the Relay
Trouble Alarm, Minor Alarm and Major Alarm. Alarm status is also available through the communication ports.
The SA-MIN command reports the Minor Alarm status, the SA-MAJ command reports the Major Alarm status
and the SA-LGC command reports the Logic Alarm status.
Other Report - General Commands

There are several other RG commands in addition to the RG-STAT command. These include RG-TIME,
RG-DATE, RG-TARG and RG-VER. These commands are covered in detail in respective paragraphs in this
section. As with other commands, a combination read command is available to read several items in a group.
If the command RG is entered by itself, the relay reports the time, date, target information and other reports
in the following example. RG-VER and RG-STAT commands have multiple line outputs and these are not read
at the RG command.
Example 1. Read the general reports.
>RG
RG-DATE=02/13/04
RG-TIME=23:59:59
RG-TARG=NONE

DEMAND FUNCTIONS
The demand reporting function continuously calculates demand values for the three-phase currents, neutral
current (3-phase residual 3IO) and negative-sequence current. Demand values are recorded with time stamps
for Peak Since Reset, Yesterday’s Peak and Today’s Peak. Programmable alarm points can be set to alarm
if thresholds are exceeded for overload and unbalanced loading conditions.
Setting Demand Current Reporting (BE1-700C)

Demand reporting settings for
current are made using
screen used to select demand
reporting settings. To open
the screen shown in Figure 6-
3, select Reporting and
Alarms, from the Screens pull-
down menu. Then select the
Demands tab. Alternately,
the SG-ID ASCII command.
Demand settings for current
include columns labeled
Phase, Neutral and Negative-
Sequence. Each of these
columns have settings for
Interval(Minutes) and Current
Threshold. Current Threshold Figure 6-3. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Demands Tab
display units are selectable
from a pull-down menu
allowing the selection of Sec. Amps, Pri. Amps, Per U Amps or % Amps . The default display unit is Sec.
Amps.
Using the pull-down menus and buttons, make the application appropriate demand settings. Demand alarm
thresholds are for current is set using the SA-DI (setting alarm, demand current) command. Demand reporting
is setup using the SG-DI (setting general, demand interval) command.
Demand reporting settings are summarized in Table 6-4.
Table 6-4. Demand Settings for Current

Unit of
Sec. Amps, Pri.
sec.
Current Threshold display units Amps, Per U Amps, n/a amps
amps
% Amps
.50 Sec. Amps - 16.0
Current Threshold 0.01 w 0
Sec. Amps
.50 Sec. Amps - 16.0
Neutral Threshold Sec. Amps 0.01 w 0
.50 Sec. Amps - 16.0

Negative-Sequence Threshold 0.01 w 0
Sec. Amps

Unit of
Phase Current Logging Interval 0-60 1 minutes 15
set by
Current Logging Period (days) 2.78 - 166.67 2.78 days Logging
Interval
w Unit of measure is based on the threshold display units selection. The default is secondary amperes.
Retrieving Demand Reporting Information

Values and time stamps in the demand registers are reported in primary values. They can be read at the front
panel HMI and through the communication ports.
Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak and Peak Since Reset demand values are accessed through HMI Screen
4.4, DEMAND REPORTS. Demand values viewed at the HMI can be reset by pressing the Reset key. When
the Reset key is pressed, the viewed register value is set to zero and then updated on the next processing
loop with the currently calculated demand value. No write access is needed to reset demand register values
at the HMI. It is also possible to preset a value into the Peak Since Demand registers. This can be done by
pressing the Edit key. Write access to the Reports functional area is required to preset values at the HMI.
Values and time stamps in the demand registers can also be read through the communication ports by using
the RD (report demands) command.
RD Command
Purpose: Report all demand data (peak, today and yesterday).
Syntax: RD
Comments: RD reports Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak and Peak Since Reset demand data for all
Phase current, Neutral current and Negative-Sequence current.
RD Command Example
Example 1. Read all demand register data.

>RD
a=
ACCESS GRANTED : GLOBAL
>RD
RD-TIA:0.00A 07:11 01/04/04;
RD-TIB:0.00A 07:11 01/04/04
RD-TIC:0.00A 07:11 01/04/04;
RD-TIN:0.00A 07:11 01/04/04
RD-TIQ:0.73A 05:17 01/04/04
RD-YIA:0.00A 23:59 01/04/04;
RD-YIB:0.00A 23:59 01/04/04
RD-YIC:0.00A 23:59 01/04/04;
RD-YIN:0.00A 23:59 01/04/04
RD-YIQ:0.97A 17:34 01/04/04
RD-PIA=0.00A 07:11 01/04/04;
RD-PIB=0.00A 07:11 01/04/04
RD-PIC=0.00A 07:11 01/04/04;
RD-PIN=0.00A 07:11 01/04/04
RD-PIQ=1.00A 08:28 01/04/04
Demand information specific to current, vars or watts can be obtained by including an object name with the
command function (R) and subgroup (D). Today’s Peak, Yesterday’s Peak and Peak Since reset information
for current is available using the RD-TI, RD-YI and RD-PI commands.

RD-TI/YI Command
Purpose: Reads Today’s Peak (TI) or Yesterday’s Peak (YI) Demand current values.
Syntax: RD-TI<x> or RD-YI<x>
Comments: x =A/B/C/N/Q, where A, B, and C represent A, B and C-phase; N represents Neutral; and Q
represents Negative-Sequence.
RD-TI and RD-YI Command Examples
Example 1. Read today’s C-phase ampere demand current.

>RD-TIC
8.77A 16:44 06/30/02
Example 2. Read all demand current values for yesterday.

>RD-YI
RD-YIA:8.68A 17:15 01/01/04; RD-YIB:8.66A 17:15 01/01/04
RD-YIC:8.67A 17:15 01/01/04; RD-YIN:0.24A 17:15 01/01/04
RD-YIQ:0.25A 17:15 01/01/04
RD-PI Command
Purpose: Read/Reset the peak demand current values.
Syntax: RD-PI<x>[=0]
Comments: x =A/B/C/N/Q, where A, B, and C represent A, B and C-phase, N represents Neutral and Q
represents Negative-Sequence. A setting of 0 (RD-PI=0) resets the peak demand values.
RD-PI Command Examples

Example 1. Read the peak demand current for phase A.
>RD-PIA
9.08A 12:09 08/02/04
Example 2. Read all peak demand current values.

>RD-PI
RD-PIA=9.08A 14:33 04/10/04; RD-PIB=9.09A 14:33 04/10/04
RD-PIC=9.08A 14:33 04/10/04; RD-PIN=9.77A 18:05 04/05/04
RD-PIQ=8.77A 09:28 03/15/04
Example 3. Reset all peak demand current values.

>RD-PI=0
Overload and Unbalance Alarms

The programmable demand alarm includes alarm points for monitoring phase demand thresholds for phase
overload alarms and neutral and negative-sequence demand thresholds for unbalanced loading alarms. Each
time the current demand register is updated, the register value is compared to the corresponding demand
alarm threshold. If a threshold is exceeded, the alarm point is set. The Alarm Functions subsection provides
more information about using the programmable alarms reporting function.
Demand alarm thresholds for current are set using the SA-DI (setting alarm, demand current) command.
Table 6-5 summarizes the demand alarm settings.

Table 6-5. Demand Alarm Settings
Setting Unit of
Alarm Level Range Increment Measure Default
0 = disabled
0.01 for 0.1 to 9.99 secondary
Alarm Level 0.1 - 3.2 (1 A units) 0
0.1 for 10.0 to 16.0 amperes
0.5 - 16.0 (5 A units)
SA-DI Command
Purpose: Read or set current demand alarm thresholds.
Syntax: SA-DI<x>=<Alarm Level>
Comments: x = P (Phase), N (Neutral) or Q (Negative-Sequence). See Table 6-5 above for SA-DI
settings information.
SA-DI Command Example

1. Set the demand alarm thresholds at six amperes for A, B and C phase current; and three amperes for
neutral and negative-sequence current.
>SA-DIP=6.0; SA-DIN=3.0; SA-DIQ=3.0
VT MONITOR FUNCTIONS (BE1-700V)

The VT Monitor reporting function allows the user to enable or disable Fuse Loss Block Logic. Block Phase,
Block 3V0 and Block V2 and each be independently checked (enabled) or unchecked (disabled) for the 27
and 59 elements. The default value for all of these logic functions is enabled.
Setting Fuse Loss Block Logic

Fuse Loss Block Logic settings
for can be are made using
screen used to select these
reporting settings. To open the
screen shown in Figure 6-4,
select Reporting and Alarms,
from the Screens pull-down
menu. Then select the VT
Monitor tab. Alternately,
settings may be made using the
SP-60FL ASCII command.
Figure 6-4. Reporting and Alarms Screen, VT Monitor Tab
BREAKER MONITORING
Breaker monitoring helps manage equipment inspection and maintenance expenses by providing extensive
monitoring and alarms for the circuit breaker. Breaker monitoring functions include breaker status and
operations counter reporting, fault current interruption duty monitoring and trip-speed monitoring. Each
function can be set up as a programmable alarm. The Alarm Functions sub-section has more information

about the use of programmable alarms. The breaker trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor is a related
function and is described in the Trip Circuit Monitor subsection.
Breaker Status Reporting

The breaker status monitoring function monitors the position of the breaker for reporting purposes. Opening
breaker strokes are also counted and recorded in the breaker operations counter register. Circuit breaker
status is also used by the breaker trip circuit voltage and continuity monitor. The Trip Circuit Monitor sub-
section provides more details.
Setting the Breaker Status Reporting Function

Since the relay is completely
programmable, it is necessary
to program which logic
variable will monitor breaker
status. Breaker status is
programmed using the
Screen in BESTCOMS. Figure
6-5 illustrates this screen. To
Element screen for breaker
status, select Reporting and
Alarms from the Screens pull-
down menu and choose the
Breaker Monitoring tab. Then
select the Logic button in the
lower left hand corner of the
screen and inside the box
labeled, Breaker Status Logic.
made using the SB-LOGIC
ASCII command. Figure 6-5. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Breaker Status
To connect the Breaker
Status’s CONTROL input, select the CONTROL button. The BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open.
Select the expression type to be used. Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables to be
connected to the input. Select Save when finished to return to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. For
more details on the BESTlogic Expression Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic . Select
Table 6-6 lists the settings for the Breaker Status logic.
Table 6-6. Breaker Status Reporting BESTlogic Settings

Breaker Closed Logic OR logic expression that is TRUE when the breaker is
/IN1
closed (e.g., 52a logic).
Example 1. Make the following settings to the Breaker Status logic. Refer to Figure 6-5.
CONTROL: /IN1
Retrieving Breaker Status and Operation Counter Information

Current breaker status can be read from HMI Screen 1.5.6 and through the communication ports using the
RG-STAT command. The General Status Reporting subsection provides more information about this
command.

The number of breaker operations can be read at HMI Screen 4.3.1. The counter value can be adjusted using
the Edit key. This allows the relay counter value to be matched to an existing mechanical cyclometer on a
breaker mechanism. Write access to the reports functions must be gained to edit this value at the HMI.
Breaker operations can be read or set through the communication ports using the RB-OPCNTR (report
breaker, operations counter) command.
RB-OPCNTR Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker operations counter.
Syntax: RB-OPCNTR=<#operations>
Comments: #operations = number of breaker operations recorded (0 - 99,999). If the counter exceeds 99,999,
the counter will wrap back to 0.
RB-OPCNTR Command Examples

Example 1. Read the number of breaker operations.
>RB-OPCNTR
14
Example 2. Synchronize the relay breaker operations counter with an external counter reading of 65
operations.
>RB-OPCNTR=65
The breaker operations counter can be monitored to give an alarm when the value exceeds a threshold. See
Breaker Alarms, in this section for more information about this feature.
Breaker operations can also be read using the RB command. The RB command returns the number of
breaker operations and breaker contact duty information.
RB Command
Purpose: Read breaker status.
Syntax: RB
Comments: No password access is required to read settings.
RB Command Example
Example 1. Use the RB command to obtain breaker information.

>RB
RB-DUTYA=92.04; RB-DUTYB=22.25; RB-DUTYC=27.87
RB-OPCNTR=65
Breaker duty monitoring is discussed in the following paragraphs.
Breaker Duty Monitoring (BE1-700C)
When the breaker opens, the Nth power of the current interrupted in each pole of the circuit breaker is
accumulated by the breaker duty monitor. Breaker opening is defined by the breaker status monitoring
function (SB-LOGIC). Figure 6-6 illustrates breaker status (SB-LOGIC) during a fault and protective trip. Table
6-9 serves as a legend for the call-outs of Figure 6-6.
The relay sums the Nth power of the currents that are interrupted and will set the breaker duty alarm when the
sum exceeds the Nth power of the maximum breaker duty (Dmax) setting. The user must enter a value for N
and a value for Dmax.
To determine N and Dmax, the user needs to find two measurements of allowable breaker wear. These levels
would typically be the maximum number of operations at load level currents and the maximum number of
operations at maximum fault rating.
Point 1; # Ops @ Imax load
Point 2; # Ops @ Imax fault

To determine the breaker wear exponent N, using the above data points as an example, apply this equation:
 # Ops @ I max load 

log  
 # Ops @ I max fault 
N=
 I max fault 
log  
 I max load 
N can be any value from 1 to 3.
Using values for Imax load and I max fault in primary amperes (the relay multiplies by the CTR before doing
calculations), the value for maximum breaker duty, Dmax, is calculated from either of these two equations:
1/ N
 
D max = •
N
  I max load  # Ops @ I max load 
 
1/ N
 
D max =  

I N
max fault  • # Ops @ I max fault 

Both of the last two equations should yield the same value for Dmax.
When testing the relay by injecting currents into the relay, the values in the duty registers should be read and
recorded prior to the start of testing. Once testing is complete and the relay is returned to service, the registers
should be reset to the original pre-test values. A block accumulation logic input may be used when testing so
that simulated breaker duty is not added to the duty registers. The BLKBKR logic function is an OR logic term
(e.g., IN1 or VO7) which blocks the breaker monitoring logic when TRUE (1). BLKBKR is set to zero to disable
blocking. When breaker monitoring is blocked (logic expression equals 1), breaker duty is not accumulated.
Setting the Breaker Duty Monitoring Function

The breaker monitoring function can be programmed from the ASCII command interface using the
SB-DUTY (setting breaker, duty) command. (See Table 6-7.)
SB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read/set breaker Contact Duty Operation
Syntax: SB-DUTY[n][={Exponent},{Dmax},{BLKBKR logic}]
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S is required to change settings. The n = Ckt 1, Ckt
2, Ckt 3, Ckt 4.
Table 6-7. Breaker Duty Monitoring Settings
Exponent 0 = breaker monitoring disabled, 1 = breaker monitoring enabled 0
with duty calculated as ΣI, 2 = breaker monitoring enabled with
duty calculated as ΣI2. The exponent may be set between 1 and
3.
DMAX Maximum duty the breaker contacts can withstand before they 0e+0
need service. DMAX is programmed in primary amperes using
exponential floating point format. The maximum DMAX setting is
4.2e+7
BLKBKR logic Logic expression. Logic OR term which blocks the breaker duty 0
accumulation when TRUE (1).

Example. Enable breaker monitoring with duty calculated as ΣI2, DMAX = 3 operations @ 20 kA = 60 kA
maximum contact duty. Block breaker duty accumulation when Input 4 is FALSE.
>SB-DUTY = 2, 60E3, /IN4
Retrieving Breaker Duty Information
The values currently stored in the accumulated interruption duty registers can be read from HMI Screen 4.3.2.
Pressing the Edit key allows the user to enter a number into the register to preset to an previous value. Write
access to the reports functional area is required to edit this value. These values can also be read and set
through the ASCII command interface using the RB-DUTY (report breaker, duty) command. It should be noted
that when reading and writing to these registers, only the set of registers that is selected to be monitored by
the exponent setting (accumulated I or I 2) and the CT setting (CT 1 or 2) is affected. The other set of
registers is ignored.
RB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Reads or changes the contact duty log settings.
Syntax: RB-DUTY[n][{Phase}[={%Duty}]]
Comments: n = 1, 2, 3, 4 for Ckt1, Ckt2, Ckt3, Ckt4.
Example 1. Read the current values of contact duty log.

>RB-DUTY
RB-DUTYA=92%; RB-DUTYB=22%; RB-DUTYC=27%;
Example 2. Reset phase A duty to zero after maintenance was performed.

>RB-DUTYA=0
The breaker duty registers can be monitored to give an alarm when the value exceeds a threshold. See the
paragraphs on Breaker Alarms in this section for more information on this feature.
Breaker Clearing Time Monitoring
The breaker clearing time monitoring function monitors the time from when a trip output occurs (as defined
by the TRIP logic expression) to when the fast dropout current detector detects that current is zero in all three
poles of the breaker (see Table 6-9, Legend for Figure 6-6, Call-Out D). The output of the breaker clearing
time function is reported as a line in the fault summary reports. It is important to note that if the TRIP logic
expression trips an 86 function and the 86 function trips the breaker, the measured clearing time will not be
accurate. To ensure accuracy, the TRIP logic expression must directly trip the monitored breaker. See the
paragraphs on Fault Reporting Function in this section for more information on the TRIP logic expression and
the Fault Summary reports.
The breaker clearing time can be monitored to give an alarm when the value exceeds a threshold. See the
following paragraphs on Breaker Alarms for more information on this feature.
Breaker Alarms
The programmable alarms function includes three alarm points for checking breaker monitoring functions.
Each of these alarm points can be programmed to monitor any of the three breaker monitoring functions
(operations counter, interruption duty or clearing time). That is, you may program an alarm threshold (limit)
to monitor each function. Alternately, you may program three different alarm thresholds to monitor one of the
monitored functions. The breaker alarms can be programmed from the ASCII command interface using the
SA-BKR command. (See Table 6-8.)

Table 6-8. Breaker Programmable Alarms Settings
Mode 0 = disabled, 1 = equals breaker alarm function enabled and set for 0
percent duty, 2 = equals breaker alarm function enabled and set for
number of operations, 3 = breaker alarm function enabled and set
for breaker operate time
Alarm Limit 0 to 100%, increment = 0.01, measured in % of DMAX which is 0
(in Mode 1) programmed using the SB-DUTY command. The breaker to be
monitored (CT 1 or CT 2) is also programmed using the SB-DUTY
command.
Alarm Limit 0 to 99,999; increment = 1; number of operations counter value 0

(in Mode 2) which when reached would cause an alarm
Alarm Limit Ranges are 20 to 1000 milliseconds and 2 to 60 cycles). Setting is 0
(in Mode 3) reported in milliseconds if less than 1 second but may be entered in
milliseconds (m), seconds (s) or cycles (c).
SA-BKR Command
Purpose: Reads/Set breaker alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-BKR[n][={mode},{alarm limit},{Ckt #}]
Comments: n = 1 - 12 alarms.
Example. Program breaker alarm point number 1 for 20 operations, alarm point number 2 to 50% duty
and alarm point number 3 for slow breaker alarm for clearing times greater than 8 cycles.
>SA-BKR1 = 2, 20
>SA-BKR2 = 1, 50
>SA-BKR3 = 3, 8c

Breaker auxiliary Protective
Protective Protective contact changes element
element element state drops out
picks up trips
SG-TRIGGER
-Trip
-Pickup
-Logic
Fast dropout current

PU + logic
detector drops out
Fast dropout
current
detector
Breaker (SB-LOGIC setting)

status
Fault summary A (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE)

report triggered
B
Targets logged
Fault clearing C (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE)

time calculated
Breaker D
operate time
4 cycle
Post-trigger recording
1/4 to 5 cycles
E
Oscillographic pre-trigger (When SG-TRIGGER (PU or Logic) is TRUE) of pre-trigger Post-trigger
Record 3 cycle pre-
(Default: 15 cycle record, 3 cycle pre-trigger, 12 cycle post-trigger) When
fault data cap- SG-TRIGGER
Fault ture trigger F (PU or Logic)
currents 2 cycle post 2 cycles prior goes FALSE
recorded trip data cap- to dropout, PU
ture trigger only events
Red TRIP LED G (When SG-TRIGGER (PU) is TRUE)
flashing
Red TRIP LED H (When SG-TRIGGER (Trip) is TRUE)

solid
Breaker interruption I
duty
Setting group
J (When SG-TRIGGER (PU) is TRUE)
change blocked
Close Signal
After Close
At Close
Close
P0014-04
06-14-02
Figure 6-6. Protective Fault Analysis

Table 6-9. Legend for Figure 6-6
Call-Out Description
A A fault summary report and an oscillograph record is triggered when either the SG-TRIGGER
pickup or logic expression becomes TRUE.
B During the time that the SG-TRIGGER trip expression is TRUE, targets are logged from each
of the protective functions that reach a trip state. If a protective function is not being used for
tripping purposes, the associated target function can be disabled through the SG-TARG
setting.
C Fault clearing time is calculated as the duration of the time that either the SG-TRIGGER
pickup or logic expression is TRUE.
D Breaker operate time is calculated as the time from when the SG-TRIGGER trip expression
becomes TRUE until the fast-dropout current detector senses that the breaker has
successfully interrupted the current in all poles of the breaker.
E A second oscillographic record is triggered to record the end of the fault if the SG-TRIGGER
pickup or logic trigger expression remains in the TRUE state at the time that the first
oscillographic record ends. This second record will have from ¼ to five cycles of pre-trigger
data depending upon when both the SG-TRIGGER pickup and logic expressions become
FALSE.
F Recorded fault current, voltage and distance magnitudes are displayed on the Target Screen
of the optional HMI. The same information including current and voltage angles are recorded
in the Fault Summary Report. The magnitude, angle and distance results are based on data
captured two cycles after the trip output goes TRUE. This two-cycle delay allows the line
transients to settle to provide more accurate data. The post fault current vectors are compared
to pre-fault current vectors captured three cycles prior to protective pickup to perform distance
calculations. If the SG_TRIGGER TRIP expression does not become TRUE, the fault was
cleared by a down stream device. For these pickup-only events, fault current, voltage, angle
and distance recorded in the fault summary report will be for the power system cycle ending
two cycles prior to the end of the fault record. This is also the case if the fault record was
triggered through the ASCII command interface by the RF_TRIG command.
G During the time that the SG-TRIGGER pickup expression is TRUE, the red Trip LED on the
front panel flashes indicating that the relay is picked up.
H During the time the SG-TRIGGER trip expression is TRUE, the red Trip LED on the front panel
lights steadily indicating that the relay is in a tripped state. If targets have been logged for the
fault, the Trip LED is sealed in until the targets have been reset.
I Breaker operations and interruption duty functions are driven by the breaker status function.
The operations counter is incremented on breaker opening. The magnitude of the currents that
are used for accumulating breaker duty are recorded for the power system cycle ending when
the breaker status changes state. Thus, breaker duty is accumulated every time that the
breaker opens even if it is not opening under fault.
J Setting group changes are blocked when the SG-TRIGGER pickup expression is TRUE to
prevent protective functions from being reinitialized with new operating parameters while a
fault is occurring.
TRIP CIRCUIT MONITOR

The trip circuit monitor continually monitors the circuit breaker trip circuit for voltage and continuity. A closed
breaker with no voltage detected across the trip contacts can indicate that a trip circuit fuse is open or there
is a loss of continuity in the trip coil circuit. Breaker status (open or closed) is obtained through the breaker
status reporting function (configured by the SB-LOGIC command).
The detector circuit used by the trip circuit monitor is hardwired across the OUT1 contact. This contact is used
in all of the preprogrammed logic schemes as the main trip output. The detector circuit across OUT1 is not
polarity sensitive because the optical isolator used for detecting continuity is C1
connected across a full wave bridge. See Figure 6-7. The amount of current drawn
through the optical isolator circuit depends on the total input impedance for each
power supply voltage rating (see Table 6-10). Figure 6-8 illustrates typical trip R1
circuit monitor connections for the BE1-700.
If the breaker status reporting function detects a closed breaker and no trip circuit
voltage is sensed by the trip circuit monitor after 500 milliseconds (coordination
delay time), an alarm bit in the programmable alarms function is set (OUT1 CKT
OUT1
OPEN) and the OUT1MON BESTlogic variable is set to TRUE. OPTO
P0016-6
8/22/02
R2
C2
Figure 6-7. Trip

Detector Circuit
Table 6-10. Current Draw for each Power Supply Voltage Rating
Optical Isolator
Power Supply
Voltage Rating R1 = R2 = R Total Off (55% V) On (80% V)
24 Vdc 6.8 kS 14.6 k 13.2 V (0.78 ma) 17.4 V (1.19 ma)
48 Vdc 18 k 36 k 26.4 V (0.68 ma) 38.4 V (1.02 ma)
125 Vdc 47 k 94 k 68.7 V (0.71 ma) 100 V (1.06 ma)
250 Vdc 47 k 94 k 68.7 V (0.71 ma) 100 V (1.06 ma)
Trip Circuit Relay Circuit
BE1-700
C1
TRIP
Other
Relays
OUT1 CIRCUIT
MONITOR R
C2
52b
BE1-
SB-LOGIC = /IN1 700
52a IN1
D2877-41
02-10-04
52
TC
Figure 6-8. Trip Circuit Voltage and Continuity Monitor
In Figure 6-7, a 62x auxiliary relay is shown. In this case, the impedance of the 62x coil is small compared to
the impedance of the TCM circuit so the TCM optical isolator is always on and the TCM is always at logic 1.
This prevents the TCM logic from working even if the trip coil is open. To prevent this problem, a diode was
added as shown in Figure 6-8 to isolate the TCM circuit from the effects of 62X.

FAULT REPORTING
Fault Reporting Expressions and Settings

The fault reporting function records and reports information about faults that have been detected by the relay.
The BE1-700 provides many fault reporting features. These features include Fault Summary Reports,
Sequence of Events Recorder Reports, Oscillographic Records and Targets.
Logic expressions are used to define the three conditions for fault reporting. These conditions are Trip, Pickup
and Logic trigger. Figure 6-6 and Table 6-9 illustrate how each of these logic expressions are used by the
various relay functions. Note that even though BESTlogic expressions are used to define these conditions,
these expressions are not included here. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, provides information
about using BESTlogic to program the relay.
Trip
Trip expressions are used by the fault reporting function to start logging targets for an event and to record the
fault current magnitudes at the time of trip. The HMI uses the trip expression to seal-in the Trip LED. The
breaker monitoring function uses the trip expression to start counting the breaker operate time.
Pickup
Pickup expressions are used by the fault reporting function to time-stamp the fault summary record, time the
length of the fault from pickup to dropout (fault clearing time) and to control the recording of oscillograph data.
The HMI uses the pickup expression to control the flashing of the Trip LED. A pickup expression is also used
by the setting group selection function to prevent a setting group change during a fault.
Logic
Logic trigger expressions allow the fault reporting function to be triggered even though the relay in not picked
up. A logic trigger expression provides an input to the fault reporting function much as the pickup expression
does. This logic expression is not used by the setting group selection or the HMI.
Fault Reporting Trigger Settings

Fault reporting trigger settings
are made from the BESTlogic
Function Element Screen in
Fault Recording function. To
Element Screen for Fault
Recording, select Reporting
and Alarms from the Screens
pull-down menu. Select the
Fault Recording tab. Then
select the Logic button in the
Fault Recording box in the
upper left hand corner of the
screen. Alternately, settings
may be made using SG-
TRIGGER ASCII command.
To connect the function’s Figure 6-9. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Fault Recording
inputs, select the button for
the corresponding input in the
BESTlogic Function Element Screen. The BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open. Select the
expression type to be used. Then, select the BESTlogic variable or series of variables to be connected to the
input. Select Save when finished to return to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. For more details on
the BESTlogic Expression Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic. Select Done when the
settings have been completely edited. Trigger settings for fault reports are made using the SG-TRIGGER
(settings-general, trigger) command.
Table 6-11 lists the function’s trigger settings.
Table 6-11. Fault Reporting Trigger Settings

Function Purpose Default
Logic expression used to define Trip fault reporting

TRIPPED condition. When this expression becomes TRUE (1), it VO11+BFT
triggers data recording.
Logic expression used to define Pickup fault reporting

PICKED UP condition. When this expression becomes TRUE (1), it VO12+BFPU
initiates the pickup timing sequence.
Logic expression used to define the trigger for fault

LOGIC reporting when relay is not picked up. When this 0
expression is TRUE (1), fault reporting is triggered.
Example 1. Make the following BESTlogic settings to the Fault Recording function. Refer to Figure 6-9.
TRIPPED: BFT + VO11
PICKED UP: 79LO + VO12
LOGIC: 79SCB
Targets
Each protective function (see Table 6-12) logs target information to the fault reporting function when a trip
condition occurs and the trip output of the function block becomes TRUE (refer to Figure 6-6 and Table 6-9,
Call-Out B). C applies to BE1-700C relays; V applies to BE1-700V relays; and A applies to both types. Target
information can be viewed and reset at the HMI and through the communication ports.
Target logging for a protective function can be disabled if the function is used in a supervisory or monitoring
capacity. The following paragraphs describe how the relay is programmed to define which protective functions
log targets.
Table 6-12. Protective Functions with Targets
Type Protective Function Name Default
V Phase undervoltage 27P enabled
nd
V 2 phase undervoltage 127P enabled
V Auxiliary undervoltage 27X enabled
V Negative-sequence overvoltage 47 enabled
V Phase overvoltage 59P enabled
V 2nd phase overvoltage 159P enabled
V Auxiliary overvoltage 59X enabled
nd
V 2 auxiliary overvoltage 159X enabled
C Phase instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TP enabled
nd
C 2 phase instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TP enabled
C Neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TN enabled

Type Protective Function Name Default
nd
C 2 negative-sequence instantaneous OC with settable time 150TQ enabled
delay
C 2nd neutral instantaneous OC with settable time delay 150TN enabled
C Negative-sequence instantaneous OC with settable time delay 50TQ enabled
C Phase inverse time OC 51P enabled
C Neutral inverse time OC 51N enabled
C Negative-sequence inverse time OC 51Q enabled
nd
C 2 neutral inverse time OC 151N enabled
V Volts per hertz 24 enabled
A General purpose logic timer 62 enabled
A 2nd general purpose logic timer 162 enabled
V Underfrequency/overfrequency 81 enabled
nd
V 2 underfrequency/overfrequency 181 enabled
V 3rd underfrequency/overfrequency 281 enabled
th
th
V 6th underfrequency/overfrequency 581 enabled
V Fuse loss detection 60FL enabled
C Breaker failure BF enabled
Setting the Targets Function

Targets are enabled using the
BESTCOMS screen shown in
Figure 6-10. You can select
which protective elements
trigger a target and what type
of logic condition will reset the
targets. To open the
Reporting and Alarms, Fault
Recording Tab, select
Reporting and Alarms from
the Screens pull-down menu.
Then select the Fault
Recording Tab. Enable the
targets by checking the
appropriate boxes.
Alternately, targets can be
enabled using the SG-TARG
ASCII command. Using the
SG-TARG command, you can
select which protective Figure 6-10. Reporting and Alarms, Fault Recording Tab
elements trigger a target and
what type of logic condition
will reset the targets.
Target settings are summarized in Table 6-13.

Table 6-13. Target Settings
Function Purpose
x Protective elements that will trigger a target. Multiple
elements can be specified by separating each element by /.
When the programmed protective element’s BESTlogic
expression is TRUE (1) and the trip output is TRUE (1), a trip
event is recorded in the target log.
rst TARG logic Logic expression that when TRUE (1), will reset the targets.
Retrieving Target Information

Targets can be viewed at HMI Screen 1.2 and through the
communication ports using the RG-TARG (report general,
targets) command. The relay provides target information
from the most recent trip event. Target information is specific
to an event; it is not cumulative. Targets for previous events
are recorded in the fault summary reports which are
described in the following subsection.
When a protective trip occurs and targets are logged, the
HMI Trip LED seals-in and Screen 1.2 is automatically
displayed. The LCD scrolls between the targets and the fault
current magnitudes that were recorded during the fault. Figure 6-11. Target Reset Logic
Pressing the HMI Reset key will clear these targets and the
Trip LED. Password access is not required to reset targets at the HMI. See Figure 6-14.
A logic input (see Figure 6-11) can be used to reset the target. Using BESTCOMS, select Reporting and
Alarms from the Screens pull-down menu. Then select Fault Recording tab. The logic input can be connected
by selecting the Logic button in the Target Reset pane. When the logic input becomes TRUE, the target is
reset.
BESTCOMS can also be used
to review targets and alarms
after an operation by selecting
Metering from the Reports
pull-down menu. The pane at
the bottom of the Metering
Screen (Figure 6-12) will
contain target and alarm
information.
The RG-TARG (report
general-targets) command is
used to read and reset targets
through the communication
ports.
Table 6-14 provides the
possible targets which may be
displayed in the Metering
Screen. C applies to BE1-
700C relays; V applies to
BE1-700V relays; and A
applies to both types. Figure 6-12. Metering Screen (BE1-700C is Shown)

Table 6-14. Targets as Displayed
Type IEEE Device Number Definition
V 24 Overexcitation
V 25 (Optional) Sync-Check
V 27/127 Phase undervoltage
V 27X Auxiliary undervoltage
A 43/143 Virtual Switch
V 47 Negative-sequence voltage
C 50/150 ABC, N, P, Q Instantaneous overcurrents
C 51 ABC, N, Q; 151 ABC, N Time overcurrents
V 59/159 ABC Phase overvoltage
V 59/159X Auxiliary overvoltage
V 60FL Fuse loss
A 62/162 Logic timers
V 81/181/281/381/481/581 Frequency
C BF Breaker failure
RG-TARG Command
Purpose: Report general information (date, time and targets).
Syntax: RG-TARG=0
Comments: Entering RG-TARG returns the target information logged during the most recent trip event.
Entering RG-TARG=0 clears the latched target data.
RG-TARG Command Example
Example 1. Read the targets.

>RG-TARG
50AN; 150AN
Fault Summary Reports

The BE1-700 records information about faults and creates fault summary reports. A maximum of 16 fault
summary reports are stored in the relay. The two most recent reports are stored in nonvolatile memory. When
a new fault summary report is generated, the relay discards the oldest of the 16 events and replaces it with
a new one. Each fault summary report is assigned a sequential number (from 1 to 255) by the relay. After
event number 255 has ben assigned, the numbering starts over at 1.
BE1-700 relays generate three different fault summary reports. They are Close, Trip and Close Trip . The
Close report contains the data recorded by the relay when the breaker was closed. The Trip report contains
the data recorded during the fault. The Trip Close report contains both sets of data.
BESTCOMS Fault Summary Report

The BE1-700 records information about faults and creates fault summary reports. A maximum of 16 fault
summary reports are stored in the relay. The two most recent reports are stored in nonvolatile memory. When
a new fault summary report is generated, the relay discards the oldest of the 16 fault records and replaces
it with a new one. Each Fault Summary Report is assigned a sequential number (from 1 to 255) by the relay.
After event number 255 has been assigned, the numbering starts over at 1. To view fault reports using
BESTCOMS, select Oscillography Download from the Reports pull-down menu. Then select either Serial
Connection or optional Ethernet Connection. A screen such as the one shown in Figure 6-13 will appear.

From this screen, you can
View Fault Details or View
Fault Sequence of Events by
selecting your choice at the
top of the screen and then
highlighting the fault to be
displayed. In Figure 6-13, fault
013 is highlighted.
The Trigger button allows for
a fault to be manually
triggered. This can also be
done using the SG-TRIGGER
ASCII command.
The Refresh button is used to
refresh the list of faults. The
Download button, will
download the selected fault,
storing it on the selected drive
as either a binary or ASCII
file, selected beneath the
Figure 6-13. View/Download Relay Fault Files Screen
button.
Fault Summary Report Example

A fault summary report collects several items of information about a fault that can aid in determining why a
fault occurred without having to sort through all of the detailed information available. The following example
illustrates a typical fault summary report. Call-outs shown in the report are references to the legend of Table
6-9.
RF-1
BE1-700 FAULT SUMMARY REPORT
STATION ID : SUBSTATION_1
RELAY ID : BE1-700
RELAY ADDRESS : 0 D2849-51
06-09-04
FAULT NUMBER : 53
EVENT TYPE : TRIP
FAULT DATE : 01/31/03 A
FAULT TIME : 16:14:19.435
FAULT TRIGGER : VO2,VO10
ACTIVE GROUP : 0
RECLOSER STATE : OFF
FAULT TYPE : ABG B

TARGETS : 50TA,50TB
FAULT CLEARING TIME : 0.160 SEC C
BREAKER OPERATE TIME : 0.152 SEC
D
OSCILLOGRAPHIC REPORTS: 1 E
IG : 9.85A @ -40.3 DEG F
Fault Date and Time. These lines report the date and time of the initial trigger of the event. This is based on
either the pickup logic expression or the logic trigger expression becoming TRUE as defined by the
SG-TRIGGER command. Refer to Figure 6-6 and Table 6-9, Call-Out A.

Station ID and Relay ID. These lines report station and device identifier information as defined by the SG-ID
command.
Relay Address. This line reports the communications port address that the report was requested from. The
relay address number is assigned using the SG-COM command, described in Section 11, ASCII Command
Interface.
Fault Number. This line reports the sequential number (from 1 to 255) assigned to the report by the BE1-700.
Fault Trigger. This line reports the logic variables in the pickup or logic trigger expressions that became TRUE
to trigger the recording of the event.
Event Type. This line reports the type of event that occurred. There are five fault event categories:
C Trip: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression and the relay tripped to clear the
fault.
C Pickup: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression but the relay never tripped
indicating that the fault was cleared by another device.
C Logic: A fault report was recorded by the logic trigger expression but no fault was detected as
defined by the pickup expression.
C Breaker Failure: A fault was detected as defined by the pickup expression and the breaker failure
trip became TRUE before the fault was cleared.
C RF=TRIG: A fault report was recorded by the ASCII command interface.
Active Group. This line reports what setting group was active at the time that the fault occurred.
Targets. This line reports the targets that were logged to the fault report between the time that the trip
expression became TRUE until the end of the fault. Refer to Figure 6-6 and Table 6-9, Call-Out B.
Recloser State. This line reports the state of the recloser shot counter prior to the fault that triggered the
report.
Fault Clearing Time. This line reports the time from when the relay detected the fault until the relay detected
that the fault had cleared. Refer to Figure 6-6 and Table 6-9, Call-Out C.
If the fault report was triggered by the RF-TRIG command, the recording of the report was terminated after
60 seconds and this line is reported as N/A.
If the pickup or logic expressions stay TRUE for more than 60 seconds, an alarm bit in the programmable
alarm function is set and this line is reported as N/A. In this situation, the fault reporting functions (including
targets) won’t operate again until the pickup and logic trigger expressions return to a FALSE state to enable
another trigger.
Breaker Operate Time. This line reports the breaker trip time from the breaker monitoring and alarm function.
This is the time measured from when the breaker is tripped until the fast-dropout current detector function
detects that the arc has been extinguished. Refer to Figure 6-6 and Table 6-9, Call-Out D.
Oscillographic Reports. This line reports the number of oscillographic records that are stored in memory for
this fault report. Refer to Figure 6-6 and Table 6-9, Call-Out E. Recording of oscillographic records is
described in the Oscillographic Records subsection.
IA, IB, IC, IG, IQ. These lines report the current magnitudes and angles measured for the power system cycle
immediately following the trip. If the fault is cleared prior to the relay tripping, the recorded fault currents are
for the power system cycle two cycles prior to the end of the fault.
VA, VB, VC, VX. These lines report the voltage magnitudes and angles measured for the power system cycle
immediately following the trip. If the fault is cleared prior to the relay tripping, the recorded fault voltages are
for the power system cycle two cycles prior to the end of the fault.
FP and FX. This line reports the frequency for the phase voltage input and auxiliary voltage input measured
immediately following the trip trigger.

Retrieving Fault Report Information from the Relay
Fault Summary Directory Report. The fault reporting function provides a directory of fault summary reports
that lists the number assigned to the fault summary report along with the date and time of the fault, the event
type, and the total number of oscillography records stored in memory for that event. The event number is
important because it is required to retrieve information about that event from the relay. This directory report
can be accessed by using the RF command.
RF Command
Purpose: Read or reset fault report data.
Syntax: RF-<n/NEW>=<0/TRIG>
Comments: n = fault record number (1 to 255)
NEW = newest fault record since all records were last reset using RG=0
1. >RF
BE1-700 FAULT DIRECTORY
REPORT DATE : 06/01/04
REPORT TIME : 01:12:25
RELAY ID : BE1-700
RELAY ADDRESS : 0
NEW FAULTS : 3 (11:22:21 05/27/04-00:00:47 01/01/04)
TOTAL FAULTS : 3 (11:22:21 05/27/04-00:00:47 01/01/04)
-#- --DATE-- --TIME-- --EVENT TYPE-- --OSC--
197 01/01/04 00:00:47 TRIP 2
196 05/27/04 11:22:30 TRIP 0
195 05/27/04 11:22:21 TRIP 0
New Faults Counter. One line of the fault summary directory report contains the new faults counter. The new
faults counter tracks how many new fault reports have been recorded since the new faults counter was reset
to 0. This counter provides a way to check the fault information and then reset the new faults counter. Then,
the next time that the relay is checked, it’s easy to determine if any fault reports have been entered. Resetting
the new faults counter is achieved using the RF-NEW=0 command. Write access to Reports must be gained
to reset the new faults counter through the communication ports. The new faults counter can also be viewed
at HMI Screen 4.1. The new faults counter cannot be reset at the HMI.
Fault Summary Reports. Individual fault summary reports can be retrieved using the RF-n command, where
n represents the number assigned to the fault summary report. To obtain the most recent report, use
RF-NEW. If additional detail is desired, Sequence of Events Recorder data and Oscillographic data can be
obtained for the faults also. This is discussed in greater detail later in this section.
Oscillographic Records
Recording Oscillographic Record

The fault reporting function can record up to 16, IEEE Standard Common Format for Transient Data Exchange
(COMTRADE) oscillographic records. Each time the fault reporting function starts recording a fault summary
report, it freezes a 4 cycle pre-fault buffer. If the fault is not cleared within that time, the fault reporting function
records a second oscillographic record. This second record captures the end of the fault. Oscillographic
records are stored in volatile memory. As additional faults are recorded, the oldest records are overwritten.
The relay has 240 cycles of memory. The SG-OSC setting sets the number of partitions and the length of the
record is a function of the number of records. See Table 6-15.
If a second oscillographic record is required, the fault recording function will continue to record sample data
in the second record with no gap. During this time, a 5 cycle buffer is being filled. If the fault is cleared within
5 cycles of the start of the second record, the record is terminated after it finished. If the fault does not clear
in that period of time, the fault reporting function continues to save 5 cycles of sample data in its buffer until
the fault is cleared. At that point, it freezes the 5 cycle buffer, providing 5 cycles of end of fault data.

Figure 6-14. Oscillographic
Records Selector
Table 6-15. Possible Oscillographic Records

Number of Length in
Records Cycles
6 40
8 30
10 24
12 20
15 16
16 15
Oscillographic Records Settings

The oscillographic recording function can be programmed through BESTCOMS. To select the number of
records, select Reporting and Alarms from the Screens pull-down menu. Select the Fault Recording tab and
click the Select box in the Oscillographic Records pane. Make your selection as shown in Figure 6-14,
Oscillographic Records Selector. Select Done once when the setting has been made.
The oscillographic recording function can also be made using the SG-OSC (settings general, oscillography)
ASCII command. See Table 6-16 for possible settings.
Table 6-16. Recording Oscillographic Records Settings

standard memory:
Number of record
6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16 n/a oscillographic records 16
partitions
SG-OSC Command
Purpose: Read or program the number of oscillograph fault records saved.
Syntax: SG-OSC=<number of record partitions>
Comments: See Table 6-15 for SG-OSC settings information.

Retrieving Oscillographic Records
The fault summary directory and the fault summary reports list the numbers assigned to each fault record and
the number of oscillographic records associated with each fault. Oscillographic records can be retrieved using
BESTCOMS. Alternately, oscillographic records can be retrieved using the RO ASCII command.
To download oscillographic records, select Oscillography Download from the Reports pull-down menu.
Highlight the record to be downloaded and select either ASCII or binary as the file type for download. Select
the Download button.
Assume record 002 is selected for a binary download. When the Download button is selected, the Browse for
Folder Screen (Figure 6-15) appears. Select a location for the file to be stored or create a New Folder and
press OK. The Fault Record Filenames Screen (Figure 6-16) will appear. Type the base filename in the first
row. The rest of the filenames will respond by changing to match the base filename. Select OK to save the
file.
Figure 6-15. Browse for Folder Screen Figure 6-16. Fault Record Filenames
Only one oscillographic report file can be requested at a time. Reports are transmitted in COMTRADE format.
Either a configuration file (CFG), a data file (DAT) or a header report (HDR) can be requested. Header files
contain the fault summary report followed by all the pertinent settings that are associated with the requested
fault record. These settings include the following:
• BESTlogic settings for User Programmable Logic Scheme.

• User Programmable Label settings, Global I/O settings.
• The protection setting group active during the fault.
• General protection settings.
• Fault reporting settings.
• Breaker Monitoring settings.
• Alarm settings.
Files can be requested in ASCII or binary format but both file transfers use the same format. Binary file
transfer is much faster and consumes less disk space. ASCII format data is human readable and can be
analyzed by standard text editing software. Software for IBM compatible computers is available from Basler
Electric to convert binary files to ASCII format. The download protocol may be either XMODEM or XMODEM
CRC format. For ease of reference the name of the downloaded file should be the same as the command.

SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDER
SER Monitoring
A sequence of events recorder (SER) report is very useful in reconstructing the exact sequence and timing
of events during a power disturbance or even normal system operations. The SER tracks over 100 data points
by monitoring the internal and external status of the relay. Data points are scanned every quarter-cycle. All
changes of state that occur during each scan are time tagged to 1 millisecond resolution. A total of 255
changes are stored in volatile memory; when the SER memory becomes full, the oldest record is replaced by
the latest one acquired.
The SER monitors the following points and conditions:
C Single-state events such as resetting demands or targets, changing settings, etc.
C Programmable logic variables
C Targets
C Relay trouble alarm variables
C Programmable alarm variables
C Output contact status
C Fault reporting trigger expressions
When a monitored event occurs or a monitored variable changes state, the SER logs the time and date of the
event, the event or variable name and the state that the variable changed to. For user-programmable logic
variables (contact sensing inputs, virtual switches and virtual outputs), the user-programmed variable name
and state names are logged in the SER report instead of the generic variable name and state names. For
more information, refer to Section 3, Input and Output Functions.
Retrieving SER Information

SER information is retrieved through SER Directory Reports, the New Events Counter and by obtaining
specific SER Reports.
SER Directory Report. A directory report lists the number of events currently in memory and the time span
that the events cover. Directory reports are accessed using the RS (report SER) command.
New Events Counter. The new events counter tracks how many new entries have been logged to the SER
since the new events counter was reset to zero. After SER information is checked, the new events counter
can be reset. Then, the next time that the relay is checked, it is easy to determine if there are new events that
haven’t been evaluated. One line of an SER directory report contains the new events counter information. The
new events counter is reset by obtaining write access to Reports and using the RS=0 command. The new
events counter can be viewed but not reset at HMI Screen 4.2.
SER Report. A directory of SER reports can be obtained using the RS (report SER) command. Six sub-reports
are available through the RS command: RS-n, RS-Fn, RS-ALM, RS-I/O, RS-LGC and RS-NEW. These sub-
reports give specific types of data without confusing the user with every internal state change and event
occurrence. Each sub-report is defined in the following paragraphs:
RS-n (report SER, number of most recent events). Events are retrieved for the most recent entries. Entering
RS-4 would view an SER report for the last four events.
RS-<n> (report SER, for Fault <event number>). Events are retrieved for the period of time specific to a fault
event. The report includes all events within the time span of the fault plus one event before and after the fault.
Entering RS-F9 views a SER report associated with Fault Record 9.
RS-ALM (report SER, alarm). This command retrieves all alarm events that exist since the last RS=0
command was issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.) This information can also be obtained
using the RA-SER command.
RS-I/O (report SER, input/output). This command reports all input and output events since the last RS=0
command was issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.)

RS-LGC (report SER, logic). A report is retrieved for all logic events since the last RS=0 command was
issued. (RS=0 resets the new records counter to zero.)
RS-NEW (report SER, new events since RS=0 reset). Events are retrieved for the period of time covered by
the New Events Counter register.
RS Command
Purpose: Read/Reset Sequence of Events record data.
Syntax: RS-<n>, RS-F<id>, RS-AL, RS-IO, RS-NEW
Comments: <n> = number of events to be retrieved
<id> = fault record number to be retrieved
RS Command Examples
Example 1. Read the directory report of records.

>RS
BE1-700 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DIRECTORY
RELAY ID : BE1-700
RELAY ADDRESS : 3
NEW RECORDS : 15 (10:05:05.152 05/27/04 - 10:05:40.676 05/27/04)
TOTAL RECORDS :255 (10:03:59.514 05/27/04 - 10:05:40.676 05/27/04)
Example 2. View fault record number 212.

>RS-F212
BE1-700 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS DIRECTORY
RELAY ID : BE1-700
RELAY ADDRESS : 3
--DATE-- ----TIME---- ----------POINT DESCRIPTION-------- --STATUS--

01/28/04 15:13:17.481 OUTPUT 3 OPEN
01/28/04 15:13:17.356 PROT-PU NORMAL
51 PHASE PICKUP FALSE
PU TRIGGER FALSE
LOW-OC NORMAL
PROT-TRIP NORMAL
TRIP TRIGGER FALSE
01/28/04 15:13:17.281 51 PHASE B TRIP TRUE
LOW-OC TRIP
PROT-TRIP TRIP
OUTPUT 3 CLOSED
TRIP TRIGGER TRUE
01/28/04 15:13:16.417 51 PHASE PICKUP TRUE
PROT-PU PICKUP
PU TRIGGER
Sequence of Events information can also be obtained through BESTCOMS. Select Reports from the toolbar
and select Oscillography Download from the drop-down menu. Select the event number and select View Fault
Sequence of Events for details. See Figure 6-13 for an example. Select Exit when finished.

ALARMS FUNCTION
The alarms function monitors internal relay systems, external relay interfaces, and power system equipment.
Alarm points are segregated into Relay Trouble Alarms and Programmable Alarms. Alarm point status is
stored in nonvolatile memory and is retained when relay operating power is lost.
The ability to program the reporting and display of alarms along with the automatic display priority feature of
the HMI gives the relay the functionality of a local and remote alarm annunciator. See Section 10, Human-
Machine Interface, for more information on the automatic display priority logic.
Relay Trouble Alarms

All internal circuitry and software that affects how the relay functions is monitored by the continuous self-test
diagnostics function of the relay trouble alarms. A detailed list of relay trouble alarms is provided in Table 6-13.
If any one of these points asserts, the failsafe alarm output relay de-energizes and closes the OUTA contact,
the HMI Relay Trouble LED lights, all output relays are disabled, logic variable ALMREL is set and the relay
is taken offline. The relay trouble alarms function is not programmable.
If your application requires a normally closed contact that opens to indicate a relay trouble condition, use
BESTlogic to program the output logic. One of the output relays with normally open contacts (OUT1 through
OUT5) can be programmed to be held closed. For example, to open OUT5 for indication of relay trouble, set
the VO5 logic expression at /0 (SL-VO5=/0). A not zero setting is equal to logic 1. When the relay is fully
functional, the OUT5 output contact is closed. Since all output relays are disabled when a relay trouble alarm
exists, OUT5 opens when relay trouble occurs. (See Table 6-17.)
Table 6-17. Relay Trouble Alarms

I.D. Number Diagnostic Description
1 RAM FAILURE Static RAM read/write error
2 ROM FAILURE EPROM program memory checksum error
3 uP FAILURE Microprocessor exception or self-test error
4 EEPROM FATAL ERROR EEPROM read/write error
5 ANALOG FAILURE Analog to digital converter error
6 CALIBRATION ERR Relay not calibrated or calibration checksum error
7 PWR SUPPLY ERR Power supply out of tolerance
8 WATCHDOG FAILURE Microprocessor watchdog circuit timed out
9 SET DFLTS LOADED Relay using setting defaults
10 CAL DFLTS LOADED Relay using calibration defaults
Relay trouble alarms, except for CALIBRATION ERR, EEPROM FATAL ERR, SET DFLTS LOADED and
CALDFLTS LOADED indicate that the relay is not functional and causes the self-test diagnostics to force a
microprocessor reset to try to correct the problem.
CALIBRATION ERR, EEPROM FATAL ERROR or DFLTS LOADED errors indicate that the relay is functional
but needs re-calibration or the settings reprogrammed.
Any relay trouble alarm will disable the protection functions, light the Relay Trouble LED and place the output
contacts in their normal, de-energized state. If a relay trouble (RA-REL) alarm is cleared by pressing the HMI
Reset key while viewing Screen 1.3 or using the RA=0 or RA-REL=0 commands, then the relay will attempt
to return back online by issuing a software reset. The relay resets by going through a full startup and
initialization cycle. If no problems are detected, the relay returns online and enables protection.

Major, Minor and Logic Programmable Alarms
The programmable alarms function covers all circuits monitored by the continuous self-test diagnostics
function that do not affect the relay core functions. Alarm functions used to monitor the power system and
equipment are also part of the programmable alarms. Table 6-18 provides a detailed list of all programmable
alarms. The programmable alarm points can be prioritized into Major and Minor alarms using the SA-MAJ
(setting alarms, major) and SA-MIN (setting alarms, minor) commands. Major alarm points, when triggered,
causes the HMI Major Alarm LED to light and the BESTlogic variable ALMMAJ to assert. Minor alarm points,
when triggered, causes the HMI Minor Alarm LED to light and the BESTlogic variable ALMMIN to assert.
Table 6-18. Programmable Alarms

1 OUTPUT CKT OPEN ALARM t Trip circuit continuity and voltage monitor
2 BKR FAIL ALARM Breaker failure trip
Reclose fail timer timed out before breaker
3 RECLOSER FAIL ALARM t
closed
Recloser went through sequence without
4 RECLOSER LOCKOUT ALARM t
success
Breaker Alarm 1 threshold (SA-BKR1 setting)
5 BREAKER ALARM 1
exceeded
6 BREAKER ALARM 2
exceeded
7 BREAKER ALARM 3
exceeded
8 P DEMAND ALARM t Phase demand
9 N DEMAND ALARM t Neutral unbalance demand
10 Q DEMAND ALARM t Negative-Sequence unbalance demand
11 GROUP OVERRIDE ALARM t Setting group control logic override
Excessive delay in HMI or serial communication
12 SYS I/O DELAY ALARM
operation
13 COMM ERROR ALARM Communication failure
14 CLOCK ERROR t Real-time clock not set
15 uP RESET ALARM Microprocessor has been reset
16 SETTING CHANGE ALARM Settings change made by user
17 EE NONFATAL ERR ALARM EEPROM nonfatal recoverable error
One or more output contacts have logic override
18 OUTPUT OVERRIDE ALARM t
condition
19 IRIG SYNC LOST ALARM Loss of IRIG synchronization
20 SGC ACTIVE ALARM Active setting group changed
VO13 logic is TRUE. (User programmable logic
21 VO13 LOGIC ALRM t
alarm)
22 alarm)
VO14 LOGIC ALRM

23 VO15 LOGIC ALRM t
alarm)
TRUE if fault event trigger lasts longer than 60
24 FLT RPT TIMEOUT ALARM
seconds
25 LOGIC=NONE ALARM t Active logic = NONE
26
27
28 FREQ OUT OF RANGE ALARM t Frequency out of range
29 CHANGES LOST ALARM Password access lost
30 60 FUSE LOSS ALARM t One or more phases of voltage lost
31 VOLTS PER HERTZ ALARM Trips at settable percentage of the pickup level
t Alarms with an asterisk are non-latching. A non-latching alarm clears itself automatically when the alarm
condition goes away. All other alarms are latching and must be manually reset by using the HMI Reset button
or the RA=0 command.
Any programmable alarm can also be used in programmable logic expressions without being programmed
to be reported by the programmable alarm reporting function. The ALMLGC variable is provided for this
purpose. Programmable alarm variables can be masked to drive BESTlogic variable ALMLGC by using the
SA-LGC command.
Programming Alarm Priorities

Alarm settings include Major, Minor and Logic alarm priorities, Demand alarm points, and the Breaker alarm
points. Programming details for Demand alarm points is available in the Demand Functions subsection. Refer
to the Breaker Monitoring subsection for details about programming Breaker alarm points. Major, Minor and
Logic programmable alarm settings are made using BESTCOMS. To select alarm priority, select Reporting
and Alarms from the
Screens pull-down
menu. Select the
Alarms tab. See Figure
6-17. Set the alarm
p o i n t p r i o r i ty by
checking the box or
boxes to its right.
Figure 6-17. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Alarms Tab

Table 6-19 summarizes major, minor and logic programmable alarm settings.
Table 6-19. Programmable Alarm Settings

Major alarm points (drives Major List of alarm functions per Table 6-11. 25
Alarm LED and ALMMAJ logic Separated by forward slash (/).
variable
Minor alarm points (drives Minor List of alarm functions per Table 6-11. 29
Alarm LED and ALMMAJ logic Separated by forward slash (/).
variable
Logic alarm points (drives List of alarm functions per Table 6-11. 0
ALMLGC logic variable) Separated by forward slash (/).
Retrieving and Resetting Alarm Reports

When an alarm condition occurs, the appropriate front panel LED lights and HMI Screen 1.3 is displayed. (See
Section 10, Human-Machine Interface for more information about automatic display priority logic.) The HMI
display scrolls between displaying all active alarm points. This includes alarms that are not programmable
(relay trouble alarms). Any latched alarms that are not currently active can be reset by pressing the HMI Reset
Key. See Figure 6-11.
Logic variables for ALMMAJ, ALMMIN and ALMLGC can also be set to operate any of the output contacts to
give an indication that an alarm condition exists. Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, provides more
details about this feature.
The status of the three front-panel LEDs (Relay Trouble, Minor Alarm and Major Alarm) can be read through
the communication ports by using the RG-STAT command. Alarm status is given in the DIAG/ALARM line of
the General Status Report. Refer to the General Status Reporting subsection for more information about
obtaining relay status with the RG-STAT command. Figure 6-18 shows the alarm reset logic.
The Reset key of the HMI is context sensitive. That is, ARSTKEY
the functionality depends upon what screen is currently
being displayed. BESTlogic variable ARSTKEY takes HMI RESET KEY
advantage of this to allow the front panel Reset Key to Alarm
RA-MAJ=0
be used in the programmable logic scheme when RA-MIN=0 Reset
Alarm Screen 1.3 is active. An example of the use of Logic
this logic variable is to break the seal-in for a logic Logic D2850-09
06-29-99
expression. The logic expression can be programmed
so that the seal-in function uses VO13, VO14 or VO15.
Figure 6-18. Programmable Alarm Function
If the virtual output expression is included in one of the
programmable alarm masks, the automatic display priority logic will cause the display to go to Alarm Screen
1.3. When the HMI Reset key is pressed, the ARSTKEY logic variable is asserted and the logic expression
seal-in is broken. See Section 8, Application, Application Tips, for more information. Pressing the HMI Reset
key while the Alarm Screen is displayed, will clear any latched alarms that are not currently active. Refer to
Table 6-18 for a list of latching alarm points and self clearing alarm points. Figure 6-18 shows the alarm reset
logic.
After an operation, alarms information can be viewed using BESTCOMS. Select Metering from the Reports
pull-down menu. The pane at the bottom of the Metering Screen (Figure 6-19) will contain the alarm
information.
The RA (report alarms) command can be used to read detailed alarm reports and reset latched alarms.

Figure 6-19. Metering Screen (BE1-700C is Shown)
RA Command
Purpose: Report/Reset alarm information.
Syntax: RA-<type>={0}
Comments: type = LGC (Logic), MAJ (Major), MIN (Minor) or REL (Relay). <=0> means clear the latched
alarm. Privilege G or R password access is required to reset alarms.
RA Command Examples
Example 1. Read the current alarm status.
>RA
RA-LGC NONE
RA-MAJ NONE
RA-MIN ALARM# 16 - SETTING CHANGE
RA-FAIL NONE
Example 2. Clear the latched minor alarm

>RA-MIN=0
Links Between Programmable Alarms and BESTLOGIC

Several links between the programmable alarms and BESTlogic allow alarm functions to be used in the logic
scheme and programmable logic functions to be used in the alarm reporting function.
Programmable Alarms Controlled by BESTlogic Elements

Virtual Outputs VO13, VO14 and VO15 are driven by BESTlogic expressions and are available in the
programmable alarms function. These three virtual outputs have labels that can be assigned meaningful
names. Then, when a logic condition that is used for an alarm exists, the label will be reported in the alarm
reporting function.
Programmable Alarms Reset

Programmable alarms can be reset by any one of three methods:
C The programmable alarms reset logic expression becomes TRUE.
C Pressing the front panel Reset key when HMI Screen 1.3 is active.

C By connecting the alarms reset logic in BESTCOMS. Alternately, this can be done using the SA-
RESET ASCII command.
To reset the alarms using BESTCOM select
Reporting and Alarms from the Screens pull-
down menu. Then select the Alarms tab. Select
the Logic button in the BESTlogic box on the
right side of the screen. Refer to Figure 6-20.
The BESTlogic Function Element screen for
Alarm Reset Logic will appear. See Figure 6-20.
To connect the function’s input, select the
Reset button in the BESTlogic Function
Element Screen. The BESTlogic Expression
Builder Screen will open. Select the expression
type to be used. Then, select the BESTlogic
variable or series of variables to be connected
to the input. Select Save when finished to return
to the BESTlogic Function Element Screen. For
more details on the BESTlogic Expression
Figure 6-20. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Alarm
Builder , see Section 7, BESTlogic
Reset Logic
Programmable Logic . Select Done when the
settings have been completely edited.
BESTlogic Elements Controlled by Programmable Alarms

Major, Minor and Logic programmable alarm settings drive BESTlogic variables ALMMAJ, ALMMIN and
ALMLGC. These variables can be used in logic expressions to control logic when the alarm is active. For
example, these variables could be used to actuate an output relay to signal a SCADA RTU that an alarm
condition exists.
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE VERSION REPORTING

Hardware and software version reporting is used to determine what style chart selections are included in the
relay, the relay serial number and the version of the embedded software (firmware). See Figure 6-21.
Model (style) number and serial number information is contained on the label on the front panel. Embedded
software information can be obtained at HMI Screen 4.7. The information of Screen 4.7 is also displayed
briefly when operating power is applied to the relay.
A software and hardware version report can be obtained through BESTCOMS. Alternately it can be obtained
using the RG-VER ASCII command.
To obtain the relay’s version report through BESTCOMS, select Download Settings from Device from the
Communications menu. Downloaded settings from the relay will overwrite any settings you have made in
BESTCOMS; the relay will ask you to save your current file before continuing the download.
To view the version of the relay once the download is complete, select General Operation from the Screens
menu. Then select the General Information tab. The General Information tab displays all of the style
information about the relay.

Figure 6-21. General Operation Screen, General Information Tab

SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
WORKING WITH PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Function Block Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Output Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Defining Output Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Virtual and Hardware Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
BESTlogic Expression Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
The Active Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Custom Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Creating or Customizing a Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Sending and Retrieving Relay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Retrieving Relay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Sending Relay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Debugging the Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
USER INPUT AND OUTPUT LOGIC VARIABLE NAMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
BESTLOGIC APPLICATION TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Figures
Figure 7-1. BE1-700C BESTlogic Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Figure 7-2. BE1-700V BESTlogic Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Figure 7-3. BESTlogic Function Blocks Common to Both BE1-700C and BE1-700V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-4. 79 Recloser Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Figure 7-5. Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Figure 7-6. BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Figure 7-7. BESTlogic Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Tables
Table 7-1. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Table 7-2. Programmable Variable Name Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
BE1-700 BESTlogic Programmable Logic i

SECTION 7 • BESTlogic PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC
INTRODUCTION
Multifunction relays such as the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relays are similar in nature to a panel of single-
function protective relays. Both must be wired together with ancillary devices to operate as a complete
protection and control system. In the single-function static and electromechanical environment, elementary
diagrams and wiring diagrams provide direction for wiring protective elements, switches, meters and indicator
lights into a unique protection and control system. In the digital, multifunction environment, the process of
wiring individual protection or control elements is replaced with the entry of logic settings. The process of
creating a logic scheme is the digital equivalent of wiring a panel. It integrates the multifunction protection,
control and input/output elements into a unique protection and control system.
BESTlogic is a programming method used for managing the input, output, protection, control, monitoring and
reporting capabilities of Basler Electric’s digital, multifunction, protective relay systems. Each relay system has
multiple, self-contained function blocks that have all of the inputs and outputs of its discrete component
counterpart. Each independent function block interacts with control inputs, virtual outputs and hardware
outputs based on logic variables defined in equation form with BESTlogic. BESTlogic equations entered and
saved in the relay system’s nonvolatile memory integrate (electronically wire) the selected or enabled
protection and control blocks with control inputs, virtual outputs and hardware outputs. A group of logic
equations defining the function of the multifunction relay is called a logic scheme.
Two preprogrammed logic schemes are stored in relay memory. Each scheme is configured for a typical
protection application and virtually eliminates the need for “start-from-scratch” programming. Either of the two
preprogrammed schemes can be copied and saved as the active logic. Preprogrammed logic schemes can
also be copied and then customized to suit your application. Detailed information about preprogrammed logic
schemes is provided later in this section.
BESTlogic is not used to define the operating settings (pickup thresholds and time delays) of the individual
protection and control functions. Operating settings and logic settings are interdependent but separately
programmed functions. Changing logic settings is similar to rewiring a panel and is separate and distinct from
making the operating settings that control the pickup thresholds and time delays of a relay. Detailed
information about operating settings is provided in Section 4, Protection and Control Functions.
WORKING WITH PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC

BESTlogic uses two types of logic settings: output logic settings and function block logic settings. These two
types of settings are discussed in the following subsections. Output logic settings are entered in equation form
and control the hardware outputs of the relay. BESTlogic function blocks for BE1-700C relays are illustrated
in Figures 7-1; BESTlogic function blocks for BE1-700V relays are illustrated in Figure 7-2 and function blocks
available for both current and voltage are illustrated in Figure 7-3 along with the associated notes for all three
figures.
Names assigned to inputs, outputs, timers and protection and control elements represent the logic variables
in the equations. Table 7-1 lists the logic variable names and descriptions.
BE1-700 BESTlogic Programmable Logic 7-1

1-at least 1 of 3
2-at least 2 of 3
3-all 3 of 3 phases
-
1-neg-seq
2-pos-seq
- -
D2861-46
10-04-04
Figure 7-1. BE1-700C BESTlogic Function Blocks
7-2 BESTlogic Programmable Logic BE1-700

7
AUXILIARY
Mode= - OVER
0-disable VOLTAGE
(159X)
1-enable 7
(OPTIONAL) D2861-47
10-08-04
Mode=
0-disable
1-enable
Figure 7-2. BE1-700V BESTlogic Function Blocks

TIMER
(62)
TIMER
(162)
AUX
SWITCH
(43)
RECLOSER
(79)
(Optional)
AUX PI
SWITCH
(143)
BREAKER
CONTROL
SWITCH
(101)
0 - Disable
1 - Discrete Input
2 - Binary Input
E-MAIL
E-MAIL1
.
.
D2861-48
.
10-04-04
.
-
E-MAIL
0 E-MAIL7
Figure 7-3. BESTlogic Function Blocks Common to Both BE1-700C and BE1-700V

Table 7-1. Logic Variable Names and Descriptions
VARIABLE VARIABLE
NAME DESCRIPTION NAME DESCRIPTION
IN1 - IN4 Inputs 1 through 4 Status Fuse Loss Logic Variables (BE1-700V only)
VOA - VO15 Virtual Output A, Out1 through Out15 60FL 60 Loss of Potential Alarm
Control Logic Variables Voltage Logic Variables (BE1-700V only)
TRSTKEY HMI Target Reset Key 24PU 24 Pickup
ARSTKEY HMI Alarm Reset Key 24T 24 Trip
101T Virtual Breaker Control Switch Tripped 25 Synch-Check (optional)
101C Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close 25 VM1 25VM1 Sync Check voltage Monitor
62 62 Timer Output 27PT 27 Phase Undervoltage Tripped
162 162 Timer Output 27PPU 27 Phase Undervoltage Picked Up
43 Virtual Switch 43 Output 27XT 27 Auxiliary Undervoltage Trip
143 Virtual Switch 143 Output 27XPU 27 Auxiliary Undervoltage Picked Up
SG0 Setting Group 0 Active (Default) 59PPU 59 Phase Overvoltage Picked Up
SG1 Setting Group 1 Active 59XT 59 Neutral Auxiliary Overvoltage Trip
Alarm Logic Variables 159XPU 159 Auxiliary overvoltage Pick Up
ALMLGC Logic Alarm Frequency Logic Variables (BE1-700V only)
ALMMAJ Major Alarm 81T 81 Over/Underfrequency Tripped
ALMMIN Minor Alarm 181T 181 Over/Underfrequency Tripped
CKTMON Output 1 Monitor (Circuit Continuity) 281T 281 Over/Underfrequency Tripped
Reclosing Logic Variables (Optional) 381T 381 Over/Underfrequency Tripped
79C 79 Close Signal 481T 481 Over/Underfrequency Tripped
79RNG 79 Running/Block Tap Changer 581T 581 Over/Underfrequency Tripped
79LO 79 Lock Out Current Logic Variables (BE1-700C only)
79RST 79 Reset 50TP/N/Q 50 Phase/Neutral/Neg-Seq Tripped
79P 79 Pilot Reclose 150TP/N/Q 150 Phase/Neutral/Neg-Seq Tripped
79SCB 79 Sequence Control Block 51P/N/Q 51 Phase/Neutral/Neg-Seq Tripped
Breaker Failure Logic Variables (BE1-700C only) 151P/N/Q 151 Phase/Neutral/Neg-Seq Tripped
BFT Breaker Failure Tripped
BFPU Breaker Failure Picked Up
Function Block Logic Settings

P0014-03
Each BESTlogic function block is equivalent to its discrete Mode 03/13/01
device counterpart. For example, the Recloser Logic 0 - Disable

Function Block of Figure 7-4 has many of the 1 - Power Up To Lockout
2 - Power Up To Close
characteristics of a BE1-79M Multiple Shot Reclosing 79
RI RECLOSER 79P
Relay.
STATUS 79C
Before using a protection or control function block, two 79LO
items must be set: the Mode and the Input Logic. Setting WAIT
79RNG
the Mode is equivalent to deciding which protection or BLK/DTL 79RST
control functions will be used in a logic scheme. The Input PI 79SCB
Logic establishes control of a function block.
Mode and input logic information is contained in logic Figure 7-4. 79 Recloser Element
setting command strings. Depending on the command,
the mode setting can either enable or disable a logic input or determine how a function block operates. Input
logic defines which logic variables control or disable a logic function. An example of an input logic equation

is SL-181=1,IN3+VO6. In this frequency logic command string, the 1 parameter indicates that the 181 function
is enabled. The IN3+VO6 expression indicates that the 181 function is disabled when Input 3 or Virtual Output
6 are TRUE.
The AND operator may not be applied to the terms of an input logic equation. Any number of variables or their
inverse can be combined in a function block input logic expression. Section 4, Protection and Control,
provides detailed information about setting the logic for each function block.
Output Logic Settings
Defining Output Operation

Output operation is defined by Boolean logic equations. Each D2861-16
variable in an equation corresponds to the current state (evaluated 08-21-03
every quarter cycle) of an input, output or timer. Figure 7-5

illustrates this relationship. Every quarter cycle, output expressions
are evaluated as TRUE or FALSE. If a logic output that
corresponds to a hardware output changes state, then the
corresponding output relay contact also changes state.
LOGIC
When the relay is powered up, all logic outputs are disabled and EQUATION VO[n]
most variables (including virtual outputs) initialize as FALSE.
Some variable states are stored in EEPROM and are restored to Figure 7-5. Virtual Output Logic
the last state prior to loss of power. These variables include
43/143,101SC and SG0 and SG1. All control commands, including logic override control, are also stored in
EEPROM. If you override output logic and force an output to open, that condition will be maintained even if
operating power is cycled.
When the logic is running and logic expression SL-VO[n] is FALSE, then output VO[n] = 0. When the logic is
running and logic expression SL-VO[n] is TRUE, then VO[n] = 1. Hardware outputs OUTA and OUT1 through
OUT5 follow the corresponding logic outputs VOA and VO1 through VO5.
Logic equations are defined by logic variables, logic operators, and their position in an equation. The available
logic operators include AND (t), OR (+) and NOT (/). The NOT operator is applied to the variable immediately
following the symbol (/). For virtual output equations, OR logic can be applied to any number of variables if
no AND logic is used in the expression. Similarly, AND logic can be applied to any number of variables if no
OR logic is used. Any number of NOT operators may be used. For complex expressions that use both AND
and OR operators, OR logic is limited to four terms. Up to four AND terms with any number of variables can
be ORed together. When the relay is processing a complex expression, it performs AND operations before
performing OR operations.
Virtual and Hardware Outputs

A virtual output exists only as a logical state inside the relay. A hardware output is a physical relay contact that
can be used for protection or control. Each BE1-700 relay has five isolated, normally open (NO) output
contacts (OUT1 – OUT5) and one isolated, normally closed (NC) alarm output (OUTA). Output contacts OUT1
through OUT5 are controlled by the status of the internal virtual logic signals VO1 through VO5. If VO[n]
becomes TRUE, then the corresponding output relay OUT[n] energizes and closes the NO contacts. For the
alarm output, if VOA becomes TRUE, the ALM output de-energizes and opens. More information about input
and output functions is provided in Section 3 Input and Output Functions.
Hardware outputs can also be controlled by the CO-OUT (control operate, output) command. The CO-OUT
command overrides control of logic outputs. Outputs may be pulsed or latched in a 0 or 1 state independently
from the state of the virtual output logic. More information about overriding control of logic outputs is available
in Section 3, Input and Output Functions.

BESTlogic Expression Builder
The BESTlogic Expression
Builder is used to connect the
inputs of the relay’s function
blocks, physical inputs and
outputs and virtual outputs.
Using the BESTlogic
Expression Builder is
analogous to physically
attaching wire between
discrete relay terminals. The
BESTlogic Expression Builder
is opened each time the input
of a BESTlogic function block
is selected. Figure 7-6
illustrates the BESTlogic
Expression Builder Screen.
The BESTlogic Expression
Builder provides a point and
click interface that allows the
selected input to be easily
connected using a single OR
gate, single AND gate or an Figure 7-6. BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen
AND/OR combination. The
usable list of inputs and
outputs in the bottom left of the screen corresponds with the variable lists of Tables 7-1 and 7-2. Currently,
the virtual outputs are the only functions that can use the single AND or AND/OR combination BESTlogic
Expression Type.
The top of the screen displays the BESTlogic expression in a text window. Above the text window, the
selected input and the associated ASCII command are displayed.
The Clear button will clear the expression to 0. The Reset button will reset the expression to its original state
when the BESTlogic Expression Builder was first opened. The Cancel button resets the expression to its
original state when the BESTlogic Expression Builder was first opened and returns the user to the previous
screen. The Save button saves the expression shown in the text window and returns the user to the previous
window.
LOGIC SCHEMES
A logic scheme is a group of logic variables written in equation form that defines the operation of a multi-
function relay. Each logic scheme is given a unique name of one to eight alphanumeric characters. This gives
you the ability to select a specific scheme and be confident that the selected scheme is in operation. Four logic
schemes, 700C-5051-A-BE, 700C-OC79-A-BE, 700V-OUVF-A-BE, 700V-VF79-A-BE and NONE, are
configured for typical protection applications and are stored in nonvolatile memory. Only one of these logic
schemes can be active at a given time. In most applications, preprogrammed logic schemes eliminate the
need for custom programming. Preprogrammed logic schemes may provide more inputs, outputs or features
than are needed for a particular application. This is because the preprogramed schemes are designed for a
large number of applications with no special programming required. Unneeded inputs or outputs may be left
open to disable a function or a function block can be disabled through operating settings. Unused current
sensing inputs should be shorted to minimize noise pickup.
When a custom logic scheme is required, programming time can be reduced by copying a preprogrammed
scheme into the active logic. The logic scheme can then be modified to meet the specific application.

The Active Logic Scheme
Digital, multifunction relays must have an active logic scheme in order to function. All Basler Electric
multifunction relays are delivered with a default, active logic loaded into memory. The default, active logic
scheme for the BE1-700 varies depending on the specific model ordered. See Figure 1-1, Style Chart. If the
function block configuration and output logic of BASIC-OC meets the requirements of your application, then
only the operating settings (power system parameters and threshold settings) need to be adjusted before
placing the relay in service.
NOTE
There has been a fundamental improvement to the way the user sets up BESTlogic in this
device. In some prior implementations of BESTlogic, it was necessary to make a separate
setting that determined whether the user’s logic scheme or if one of the pre-programmed
logic schemes was to be made active. This setting was made from the ASCII command
interface using the SP-LOGIC (Set Protection Logic) command. This setting has been
eliminated.
In the implementation of BESTlogic used in this relay, the logic scheme defined by the user’s
logic settings is always active. If the user wishes to use a preprogrammed logic scheme,
he/she now copies it into his/her user logic settings. This process is accomplished from the
ASCII command interface using the SL-N (Set Logic Name) command in this and previous
BESTlogic implementations.
If a different preprogrammed logic scheme is required, it can be easily copied to active logic and used as is
or customized to your specifications. To accomplish this, communication with the relay must be established.
It is accomplished by connecting a computer to the front RS-232 port.
Logic schemes can be selected from the logic select tab on the BESTlogic screen. To access this screen,
select BESTlogic from the Screens pull-down menu. Then select the Logic Select tab. Select the desired logic
scheme to Copy to Active Logic (Internal Logic). The active logic scheme is shown in the Logic Name box.
In Figure 7-7, 700C-OC79-A-BE has been selected as the user logic.
Figure 7-7. BESTlogic Screen, Logic Select Tab

CAUTION
Selecting a logic scheme to be active in BESTCOMS does not automatically make that
scheme active in the relay. See the paragraphs later in this section titled, Sending and
Retrieving Relay Settings.
Custom Logic Schemes
CAUTION
If “NONE” logic is selected, the protection elements are not connected to the virtual outputs
or output relays and fault recording features including targets are not enabled.
A custom logic scheme can be created from scratch by copying NONE to Logic Name and then renaming the
logic. A custom logic scheme can also be created by modifying a preprogrammed logic scheme after copying
it to Logic Name and then renaming it. A preprogrammed logic scheme copied to Logic Name with no name
change are treated as a read-only scheme and cannot have its logic expressions altered. Before modifying
a logic scheme copied to Logic Name, the scheme must be assigned a unique name of one to eight
alphanumeric characters. This scheme is then referred to as a custom or user programmable logic scheme
because the variable expressions of the logic can be customized or created from scratch to suit the needs
of an application. A custom logic scheme may be revised many times but only the most recent changes are
saved to as the active (Logic Name) logic.
CAUTION
Always remove the relay from service prior to changing or modifying the active logic scheme.
Attempting to modify a logic scheme while the relay is in service could generate unexpected
or unwanted operations.
Copying and Renaming Preprogrammed Logic Schemes

Copying a preprogrammed logic scheme to the active logic (Logic Name) and assigning a unique name is
accomplished by selecting the desired logic scheme in BESTCOMS and then typing over the logic scheme’s
name. Changes are not activated until the new settings have been uploaded to the device.
Creating or Customizing a Logic Scheme

Before customizing a preprogrammed logic scheme, the scheme must be renamed. The following procedure
outlines the process of customizing or creating a logic scheme:
Step 1. Copy the preprogrammed scheme.
Step 2. Rename the scheme with a unique, non-preprogrammed, name.
Step 3. Using BESTCOMS, enable or disable the desired relay functions.
Step 4. Edit the logic expressions, as required.
Step 5. Save the changes. Refer to Section 14, BESTCOMS Software, for more information on how to save
and export settings files.

Sending and Retrieving Relay Settings
Retrieving Relay Settings

To retrieve settings from the relay, the relay must be connected to a computer through a serial port. Once the
necessary connections are made, settings can be downloaded from the relay by selecting Download Settings
from Device on the Communication pull-down menu.
Sending Relay Settings

To send settings to the relay, the relay must be connected to a computer through a serial port. Once the
necessary connections are made, settings can be uploaded to the relay by selecting Upload Settings to
Device on the Communication pull-down menu.
Debugging the Logic Scheme

If there are problems with a customized logic scheme, the RG-STAT command can be used to check the
status of all logic variables. More information about the RG-STAT command can be found in Section 6,
Reporting and Alarm Functions.
USER INPUT AND OUTPUT LOGIC VARIABLE NAMES

Assigning meaningful names to the inputs and outputs makes sequential events reports easier to analyze.
Input and output logic variable names are assigned by typing them into the appropriate text box on the related
BESTCOMS screen. All of the BE1-700's inputs, outputs and 43 switches have labels that can be edited.
Table 7-2 shows the range and purpose of each label. Alternately, labels may be edited using the SN ASCII
command.
Table 7-2. Programmable Variable Name Setting

Settings Range/Purpose Default
1 to 10 characters.
Name n/a
User name to replace <var> in the RS report
1 to 7 characters.
TRUE label True
Used to replace default labels
1 to 7 characters.
FALSE label False
Used to replace default labels
BESTLOGIC APPLICATION TIPS

When designing a completely new logic scheme, logic evaluation order should be considered. Contact sensing
inputs are evaluated first, then the function blocks and then the virtual outputs. VO15 is evaluated first and
VOA is evaluated last. If a virtual output is used in a logic expression to control another virtual output, the
virtual output used in the expression should be numerically higher. Otherwise, a logic expression for a
numerically smaller virtual output won’t be available to a numerically higher virtual output until the next
processing interval. Logic is evaluated every half-cycle.
When designing custom protection schemes, avoid confusion by maintaining consistency between input and
output functions in the custom scheme and the preprogrammed schemes.
OUT1 through OUT5 have normally open contacts (coil is de-energized). Normally open contacts can be used
as normally closed outputs by inverting the logic expressions that drive them. Inverting an output logic
expression causes the coil to be energized with the contacts closed in the normal state.
Several links between the programmable alarms function and BESTlogic programmable logic allow alarm
functions to be used in a logic scheme and programmable logic functions to be used in the alarm reporting
function.

Programmable alarm settings for Major, Minor and Logic alarms drive BESTlogic variables ALMMAJ, ALMMIN
and ALMLGC. These variables can be used in logic expressions to control logic when an alarm is active.
Virtual outputs VO13, VO14 and VO15 are driven by BESTlogic expressions. These three logic variables are
also available in the programmable alarm function. Virtual outputs can also be assigned user programmable
labels (described previously). With this feature, a logic condition can be designed and used for an alarm. The
virtual output label would then be reported in the Reporting and Alarms function.

SECTION 8 • APPLICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 8 • APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
EXPLANATION OF TERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
OVERVIEW OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
EMBEDDED LOGIC SCHEMES FOR BE1-700C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
700C-5051-A-BE (Basic Overcurrent Protection) Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
700C-OC79-A-BE (Overcurrent Protection with Reclosing) Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
EMBEDDED LOGIC SCHEMES FOR BE1-700V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Undervoltage and Frequency Protection) Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . 8-2
700V-VF79-A-BE (Voltage Protection with Reclosing) Logic Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
DETAILS OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
700C-5051-A-BE (BASIC OVERCURRENT) LOGIC SCHEME EMBEDDED LOGIC SCHEMES
FOR BE1-700C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
700C-OC79-A-BE (OVERCURRENT WITH RECLOSING) LOGIC SCHEME (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . 8-8
Operation - Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Operation - Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Operation - Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Operation - Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
700V-OUVF-A-BE (OVER/UNDER V & F PROTECTION) LOGIC SCHEME (BE1-700V) . . . . . . 8-15
Protection Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Integration of Protection, Control and I/O Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
700V-VF79-A-BE (VOLTAGE PROTECTION WITH RECLOSING) LOGIC SCHEME (BE1-700V) 8-23
Protection Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Dead Line Reclosing (Conditional Voltage Reclose) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
MISCELLANEOUS LOGIC EXPRESSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
APPLICATION TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Output Contact Latch Using the TRSTKEY Logic Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Alarm Latch and Pseudo Target Using the ARSTKEY Logic Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Underfrequency Load Shedding with Restoration Permissive (BE1-700V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Bus Level Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Circuit Level Application - Manual and Auto Reclosing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Logic Equations and Settings, Underfrequency Load Shedding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Bus UF Load Shed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Circuit UF Load Shed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Close Circuit Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
High-Speed Reclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Block Load Tap Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Setting Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Output Contact Seal-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
BE1-700 Application i
Figures
Figure 8-1. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Figure 8-2. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) One-line Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Figure 8-3. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Figure 8-4. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) One-line Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Figure 8-5. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Logic Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . 8-21
Figure 8-6. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Logic Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . 8-21
Figure 8-7. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) One-line Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Figure 8-8. V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) Logic Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Figure 8-9. 700V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) Logic Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . 8-25
Figure 8-10. 700V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) One-line Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Figure 8-11. Station One-line Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Figure 8-12. BE1-700C Transformer Protection Output Latch, ARSTKEY and TRSTKEY . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Figure 8-13. Underfrequency Load Shed Bus Level Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Figure 8-14. Underfrequency Load Shed, Circuit Level Application, Manual or Auto Close from
SCADA or Local Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Figure 8-15. Close Circuit Monitor Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Figure 8-16. High-Speed Reclose Interlock Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Figure 8-17. Output Seal-In Logic Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Tables
Table 8-1. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-2. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Table 8-3. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Table 8-4. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Table 8-5. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Logic Settings and Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Table 8-6. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Table 8-7. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Table 8-8. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Virtual Switches Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Table 8-9. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Virtual Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Table 8-10. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Logic Settings and Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Table 8-11. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Contact Sensing Input Logic . . . . . . . . 8-17
Table 8-12. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Function Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Table 8-13. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Table 8-14. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Table 8-15. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Settings and Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Table 8-16. 700V-VF79-A-BE Contact Input Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Table 8-17. 700V-VF79-A-BE Block Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Table 8-18. 700V-VF79-A-BE Virtual Switch Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 8-19. 700V-VF79-A-BE Output Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 8-20. 700V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) Settings and Equations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Table 8-21. Miscellaneous Logic Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Table 8-22. ARSTKEY and TRSTKEY Logic Settings and Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
ii Application BE1-700
SECTION 8 • APPLICATION
INTRODUCTION
This section discusses the application of the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay. The product can be purchased
as a current only relay (BE1-700C) or as a voltage only (BE1-700V) relay. Each product has two embedded
preprogrammed logic schemes plus NONE that maximizes the feature set of the individual product.
Each preprogrammed logic scheme is designed to take full advantage of the specific BE1-700 protection
capabilities. However, not all elements have to be set. The protection engineer can choose which elements
receive operational settings or adapt the scheme to user specific needs by changing the protection and control
elements and settings. In many cases, this eliminates the need to create a custom logic scheme from scratch.
Please note that this preprogrammed logic scheme also illustrates typical ways of using or controlling various
functions. The user may choose to create a custom logic scheme by mixing preprogrammed logic with user
defined logic. The logic also can be modified to incorporate some of the features described in the Application
Tips, provided at the end of this section. The flexibility of BESTlogic in combination with easy to use
BESTCOMS allows the engineer to quickly create a protection and control scheme that meets the exact
requirements of the application. The following sections discuss the application specifics of the BE1-700C
preprogrammed logic scheme.
CAUTION
If “NONE” logic is selected, the protection elements are not connected to the virtual outputs
or output relays, and fault recording features including targets are not enabled. The user will
have to program and enable these features and functions as part of building a custom logic
scheme.
EXPLANATION OF TERMS
The following paragraphs define terms that are used in the logic scheme discussions of this section.
Function Block. A stand-alone protection or control function that is equivalent to its discrete component
counterpart.
Torque Control. Blocks the start of a voltage or frequency function block. The pickup and trip outputs are
held at zero and the timing function is inhibited. This is in contrast to merely blocking the trip output. Torque
control applies to all voltage and frequency function blocks..
Virtual Switches. Logic switches that emulate traditional switches used on relay and control panels.
Examples of these switches are breaker control switches (101) and selector switches (43). Virtual switches
can be operated via communication commands or the front panel human-machine interface (HMI). Operation
of a virtual switch can be disabled if the switch won’t be used in a preprogrammed logic scheme that includes
the switch. Password protection is also available for the virtual switches.
Radial System. A system where the loads are fed from only one source at a time.
Network System. A system where loads can be fed by more than one source at the same time.
BE1-700 Application 8-1

OVERVIEW OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES
Four preprogrammed logic schemes and NONE are available for the BE1-700 family of products. Each logic
scheme is specific to the feature set (options) ordered by the customer and becomes the default logic. The
same schemes are available through BESTCOMS for the BE1-700 series of products. See Section 14,
BESTCOMS Software, for the windows based user interface software. More detailed information about these
schemes is provided in Details of Preprogrammed Logic Schemes.
EMBEDDED LOGIC SCHEMES FOR BE1-700C
700C-5051-A-BE (Basic Overcurrent Protection) Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides basic time and instantaneous overcurrent protection. Phase, neutral and negative-
sequence protective elements are included. Functions such as virtual breaker control and virtual switches (43)
are not enabled in this scheme but can be activated through BESTlogic. This scheme can be applied as
feeder protection, transformer overcurrent protection, bus overcurrent differential protection, etc.
700C-OC79-A-BE (Overcurrent Protection with Reclosing) Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides time overcurrent elements, and both high-set and low-set instantaneous
overcurrent elements for phase, neutral and negative-sequence protection for any overcurrent application.
Automatic reclosing is included and is initiated (RI) by a protective trip or by an external reclose initiate
contact. This scheme is ideal for protecting radial distribution feeders that require automatic reclosing such
as with overhead construction.
EMBEDDED LOGIC SCHEMES FOR BE1-700V
700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Undervoltage and Voltage Protection) Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides basic voltage and frequency protection. The scheme is well suited for 3-phase
bus over/undervoltage protection including phase rotation, underfrequency load shedding, and rate of change
frequency.
700V-VF79-A-BE (Voltage Protection with Reclosing) Logic Scheme

This logic scheme provides voltage and frequency protection and includes network reclosing with separate
pilot and time delay reclose initiates. The scheme is well suited for basic distributed generation protection, 3-
phase bus over/undervoltage protection including phase rotation, underfrequency load shedding with rate of
change supervision, and network reclosing applications such as replacement of “stand alone” automatic
reclosing, voltage and sync angle detection products.
DETAILS OF PREPROGRAMMED LOGIC SCHEMES

The following paragraphs expand on the individual preprogrammed logic schemes for the BE1-700 series of
products. The application features of each logic scheme are broken down into their separate protection
elements and described in detail. The integration of protection and control elements and alarm elements are
also described in detail. Although it is not discussed in each paragraph, the reader should be aware that the
application of an independent, overlapping, backup zone of protection is recommended for a complete
protection design.
The preprogrammed protection logic scheme begins with the application intent of the design. Next, the
protection elements are discussed, followed by protection and control integration and alarm information
specific to the preprogrammed design. Unique references for the scheme, including one-line and logic
diagrams and program codes are included.
8-2 Application BE1-700

Preprogrammed logic can be a starting point or an ending point for the protection engineer depending on how
closely the logic meets engineering requirements. These logic schemes were created by applications
personnel from the utility industry and are easily modified to meet specific user needs. For applications
assistance, contact your local Basler Electric representative.
700C-5051-A-BE (BASIC OVERCURRENT) LOGIC SCHEME (BE1-700C)

This logic scheme is intended for applications requiring three-phase and neutral nondirectional overcurrent
protection. While not as elaborate as the other preprogrammed schemes, this logic scheme provides an
excellent base on which to create a custom scheme for a specific application.
The components of this logic scheme are summarized in Tables 8-1 through 8-4. A diagram of the logic is
shown in Figure 8-1. Figure 8-2 shows a one-line drawing for the Basic Overcurrent logic scheme. Table 8-5
shows the logic settings and equations.
Operation - Protection
The phase, neutral and negative-sequence elements are activated to provide timed (51) and instantaneous
(50) overcurrent protection in this scheme. A function block is disabled by setting the pickup set-point at zero
in each setting group. Virtual output VO11 is assigned for all protective trips. When VO11 becomes TRUE,
OUT1 will operate and trip the breaker. Contact outputs OUT2, OUT3, OUT4 and OUT5 are designated to
specific function blocks. OUT2 operates for instantaneous phase overcurrent conditions, OUT3 trips for timed
phase overcurrent situations, OUT4 operates for instantaneous neutral and negative-sequence overcurrent
conditions, and OUT5 operates for timed neutral and negative-sequence overcurrent conditions.
Input IN1 is typically assigned to monitor breaker status (52b). The remainder of the inputs (IN2, IN3 and IN4)
are unassigned and are available for user specified functions.
Operation - Setting Group Selection

A setting group can be selected automatically or by using the communication ports or the front panel HMI.
Automatic setting group changes are based on current level and duration. Automatic setting group changes
for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustments are enabled by the SP-GROUP# command. Setting
group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated in this scheme, but IN2, IN3 or IN4
can be programmed to provide this function.
Operation - Alarms
If the continuous self-test diagnostics of the relay detect an error, failsafe output contact OUTA will close and
the Relay Trouble LED of the HMI will light. OUTA will also close if relay operating power is lost. More
information about alarms is provided in Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions.

8-4
VOA - ALARM
ACTIVE OUTPUT OUT
D0 SETTING A
SG0 CO-OUTx LOGIC
D1 GROUP
0 CONTROL SG1
AUTO VO11 PROT TRIP
6 VO1 - 52TC
OUTPUT
OUT1
CO-OUTx LOGIC
50TPT
PHASE
BLK
IOC 50TPPU
(50TP) VO2 - 50TPT
OUTPUT
OUT2
50TNT CO-OUTx LOGIC
IN1 NEUTRAL
OPTO BLK
IOC 50TNPU
52b (50TN)
IN2 VO3 - 51PT
OPTO
OUTPU T
50TQT OUT3
IN3 BLK NEG SEQ CO-OUTx LOGIC
OPTO IOC
50TQPU
(50TQ)
IN4 VO4
OPTO
Application
50TNT+50TQT
51PT OUTPU T
PHASE OUT4
BLK
TOC 51PPU CO-OUTx LOGIC
(51P)
43
CO-43
VO5
NEUTRAL 51N T 51NT+51QT
143 BLK OUTPU T
CO-143 TOC
51NPU OUT5
(51N)
Figure 8-1. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Logic Diagram

CO-OUTx LOGIC
243
CO-243
51QT
343 NEG SEQ
CO-343 BLK TOC 51QPU
(51Q)
D2848-17
05-28-04
VO12 PROT PU
Note: For clarity, multiple variables going to the same OR 6
gate are shown by a single line into the OR g ate.
BE1-700
52
OUT1 TRIP
51P 51N 51Q
OUT5
OUT3
50TP 50TN 50TQ
OUT4
OUT2
BE1-700C D2849-50
10-05-04
Figure 8-2. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) One-line Drawing
Table 8-1. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Contact Sensing Input Logic

State Labels
Input Purpose Variable Label Closed (1) Open (0)
Optional input used for breaker status indication in

Sequence of Events Reporting. TRUE when breaker is
IN1 BREAKER OPEN CLOSED
open. Typically, IN1 is connected to the 52b contact of
the breaker.
IN2 Not used INPUT_2 CLOSED OPEN
Table 8-2. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
Function Purpose Expression Mode Setting
50TP Used for instantaneous phase overcurrent protection 0 1 (enabled)
50TN 0 1 (3-phase
Used for instantaneous neutral overcurrent protection.
Residual)
50TQ Used for instantaneous negative-sequence overcurrent 0 1 (enabled)
protection.
150TP Not used 0 0 (disabled)
150TN Not used 0 0 (disabled)

BESTlogic
150TQ Not used 0 0 (disabled)
51P Used for timed phase-overcurrent protection. 0 1 (enabled)
51N 0 1 (3-phase
Used for timed neutral-overcurrent protection.
Residual)
51Q Used for timed negative-sequence overcurrent 0 1 (enabled)
protection.
151N Not used 0 0 (disabled)
62 Not used 0 0 (disabled)
BF Not used 0 0 (disabled)
Input 0 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
1
Input 1 Logic: No manual selection logic is used. 0
GROUP (discrete input
Auto/Manual Logic: Set to 1 (/0) to enable automatic /0 selection)
selection. No manual selection is used.
Table 8-3. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Virtual Switch Logic

State Labels
Switch Purpose Mode Variable Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
43 Not used 0 (disabled) SWITCH_43 CLOSED OPEN

143 Not used 0 (disabled) SWITCH_143 CLOSED OPEN
Table 8-4. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Virtual Output Logic

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
Alarm contact closes
VOA
Alarm Output Contact automatically when relay ALARM ACTIVE NORMAL
(OUTA)
trouble alarm occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VOA=0
VO1 Contact closes when protective
Breaker Trip Contact BKR_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT1) trip expression is TRUE.
BESTlogic Expression: VO1=VO11
Contact closes when
VO2 Instantaneous Phase
instantaneous phase- 50TP_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT2) OC Auxiliary Contact
overcurrent trip occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO2=50TPT
VO3 Timed Phase OC Contact closes when timed
51P_TRIP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT3) Auxiliary Contact phase-overcurrent trip occurs.
BESTlogic Expression: VO3=51PT
Contact closes when
Instantaneous neutral instantaneous neutral or
VO4
and negative-sequence instantaneous negative- INST_N&Q TRIP NORMAL
(OUT4)
OC sequence overcurrent condition
occurs.

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
BESTlogic Expression: VO4=50TNT+50TQT
Contact closes when timed
VO5 Timed neutral and neutral or timed negative-
51N&QTRP TRIP NORMAL
(OUT5) negative-sequence OC sequence overcurrent condition
exists.
BESTlogic Expression: VO5=51NT+51QT
VO6 None VO6 TRUE FALSE
BESTlogic Expression: VO6=0
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50, 150,51 or PROT_
VO11 TRIP NORMAL
Expression 151 element times out (trip). TRIP
BESTlogic Expression: VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
+151NT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50, 150,51 or
VO12 PROT_PU PU NORMAL
Expression 151 element picks up.
BESTlogic Expression: VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+150TPPU 150TNPU+150TQPU+51PPU
+51NPU+51QPU+151NPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21 VO13 TRUE FALSE
Table 8-5. 700C-5051-A-BE (Basic OC) Logic Settings and Equations
SL-N=700C-5051-A-BE
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0; SL-50TQ=1,0
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0; SL-150TQ=0,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,0
SL-51Q=1,0
SL-151N=0,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0

SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,/0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-101=0
SL-VOA=0
SL-VO1=VO11
SL-VO2=50TPT
SL-VO3=51PT
SL-VO4=50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO5=51NT+51QT
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=0
SL-VO10=0
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT+151NT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+150TPPU+150TNPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU+151NPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=0
700C-OC79-A-BE (OVERCURRENT WITH RECLOSING) LOGIC SCHEME (BE1-700C)

This logic scheme is intended for feeder breaker applications where nondirectional overcurrent protection is
required. Optional automatic reclosing is included and is initiated by a protective overcurrent trip or by an
external contact to initiate reclosing (RI).
A diagram of the logic is shown in Figure 8-3. Figure 8-4 shows a one-line drawing for the 700C-OC79-A-BE
logic scheme. The components of OC with 79 logic are summarized in Tables 8-6 through 8-9. The logic
settings in Table 8-10 include the logic equations that connect the various elements (electronic wiring) of the
of the overcurrent with reclosing logic protection scheme.
Operation - Protection
Time (51) and instantaneous (50, 150) overcurrent function blocks are included in this logic scheme. The
overcurrent function block outputs are directed through VO11 to provide a protective trip signal at OUT1.
Overcurrent elements intended for this scheme are phase (P), neutral (N) and negative-sequence (Q)
protection. A function block is disabled by setting the pickup point at zero in each setting group.
The 150T function blocks are arranged as high-set instantaneous functions. When a 150T trip occurs, the
recloser is driven to lockout. This scheme also allows the 50TN, 50TQ, 51N and 51Q function blocks to be
torque controlled by Contact Input IN4.
Operation - Reclosing
Reclosing logic in 700C-OC79-A-BE uses a reclose initiate (RI) scheme where each step in the reclosing
sequence is initiated by a protective trip or external initiate signal via IN3. Setting the first reclose time at zero
in the four setting groups will disable the recloser. Reclosing can also be disabled by using IN2. Contact Input
IN2 is connected to the drive to lockout (DTL) input of the recloser function block. In this scheme, enabling
the recloser after a “one-shot” trip causes the recloser to be in lockout. When the breaker is manually closed,
the relay will time out to a reset condition.
Recloser lockout also occurs if any of the 150TP/N/Q functions trips (typically used for high-set instantaneous
protection). It should be noted that the 150TP/N/Q functions drive both the RI and the DTL inputs to the
recloser function block. The DTL input takes priority over the RI input.
If zone-sequence control of the recloser is desired, a logic expression should be entered for the SP-79ZONE
setting that will advance the recloser shot count when a fault is detected, regardless of whether the relay trips.

This is typically the “Protection Picked Up” expression (VO12) in all of the preprogrammed schemes. Zone
sequence uses a BESTlogic expression but is not within the logic settings. Zone-sequence coordination may
be enabled by the expression SP-79ZONE=VO12.
700C-OC79-A-BE logic allows the recloser to torque control the 50TP/N/Q functions (typically used for low
set instantaneous protection) during various steps in the reclosing sequence. Setting the recloser Sequence
Controlled Blocking output in the two setting groups is done by using the S#-79SCB commands for
BESTCOMS.
Recloser timing is stopped by the wait input if an overcurrent protection function block is picked up (VO12)
and timing. This prevents the reset timer from resetting the reclose function for a situation where a 51 element
is just above pickup and the time to trip is longer than the reset time.
Operation - Setting Group Selection

A setting group can be selected automatically or by using the communication ports or the front panel HMI.
Automatic setting group changes are based on current level and duration. Automatic setting group changes
for cold load pickup and/or dynamic setting adjustments are enabled by the SP-GROUP# command. Setting
group changes initiated by contact sensing inputs are not accommodated in this scheme. But IN2, IN3 or IN4
can be programmed to provide this function.
Operation - Alarms
If the continuous self-test diagnostics of the relay detect an error, failsafe output contact OUTA will close and
the Relay Trouble LED of the HMI will light. OUTA will also close if relay operating power is lost. More
information about alarms is provided in Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions.
Outputs OUT4 and OUT5 are assigned to indicate user specified major or minor alarms. OUT4 indicates minor
alarms and OUT5 indicates major alarms. The user has the ability to specify which alarms are announced as
major or minor alarms. When an alarm is detected, the appropriate front panel LED will light to indicate the
alarm. Note that some alarms are non-latching and will clear when the alarm condition goes away. Other
alarms require a reset either by operating the front panel Reset pushbutton or by issuing ASCII commands
through a communication port. More information about alarms is provided in Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions.
Note
When using OUT1 through OUT5 as alarm outputs, remember that these outputs
do not have normally closed, failsafe output contacts.

Figure 8-3. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Logic Diagram

52
TRIP
CLOSE
IN4
N &Q
ENABLE
51P 51N 51Q
OUT1
TRIP
IN3
RI RI
79 79
SCB
OUT2
DTL 79C
50TP 50TN 50TQ
BLOCK
D2849-42
10-05-04
IN2
DTL
150TP 150TN 150TQ
BE1-700C
Figure 8-4. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) One-line Drawing

Table 8-6. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels
Input Purpose Variable Label Closed (1) Open (0)
52 breaker status (TRUE when breaker is open).
Used for breaker status indication in Sequence of
IN1 BREAKER Open Closed
Events Reports, recloser control and breaker
monitoring.
IN2 Reclosing Drive to Lockout. Drives recloser to RCL_DTL Normal DTL
lockout when de-energized. Can be used with an
external switch to disable the recloser. If IN2 is
not used, it must be strapped high to enable the
recloser.
IN3 Reclosing initiate used to initiate reclosing by RCL_INI INI Normal
external protective relays.
IN4 When IN4 is energized, neutral, negative- N&Q_ENABLE Enabled Disabled
sequence, 50 and 51 protection is enabled. IN4
must be tied HIGH if this feature is not used.
Table 8-7. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
50TP Block when recloser sequence controlled blocking 79SCB 1
output is TRUE. (enabled)
50TN Block when recloser sequence controlled blocking 79SCB+/IN4 1
output is TRUE or when disabled by IN4. (3-ph residual)
50TQ Block when recloser sequence controlled blocking 79SCB+/IN4 1
output is TRUE or when disabled by IN4. (enabled)
150TP Used for high set 0 1 (enabled)
150TN Used for high set 0 1 (3-ph residual)
150TQ Used for high set 0 1 (enabled)
51P Used for phase TOC protection 0 1 (enabled)
Used for neutral TOC protection. Disabled when 1
51N /IN4
IN4 is low (3-ph residual)
51Q Used for negative-sequence TOC protection. /IN4 1 (enabled)
Disabled when IN4 is low
151N Not used 0 0 (disabled)

BESTlogic
Reclose Initiate: Initiates reclosing sequence when VO8
RI is TRUE.
Breaker Status Logic: Closed breaker is indicated /IN1
when IN1 is de-energized.
Wait Logic: Stop recloser timing when timing for a VO12

fault trip. TRUE when protection picked up 1
79 expression is TRUE. (Power Up to
Lockout)
Block/Drive to Lockout Logic: Drive recloser to VO9
lockout when external recloser on/off switch is off.
Pilot Initiate: Initiate one high speed reclose when 0

PI is TRUE
BF Not used 0 0 (disabled)
Input 0 Logic: No manual selection logic is used 0

Input 1 Logic: No manual selection logic is used 0 1
GROUP (discrete input
Auto/Manual Logic: Set to 1 (/0) to enable /0
selection)
automatic selection. No manual selection is used.
Table 8-8. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Virtual Switches Logic

State Labels
Switch Purpose Mode Variable Label TRUE (1) FALSE (0)
0
43 Not used SWITCH_43 Closed Open
(disabled)
0
143 Not used SWITCH_143 Closed Open
(disabled)
0
101 Not used n/a n/a n/a
(disabled)
Table 8-9. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Virtual Output Logic

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE FALSE (0)
Alarm contact closes
VOA
Alarm Output Contact automatically when relay ALARM Active Normal
(OUTA)
trouble alarm occurs.
BESTlogic expression: VOA=0
VO1 Contact closes when protective
Breaker Trip Contact BKR_TRIP Trip Normal
(OUT1) trip expression is TRUE.
BESTlogic expression: VO1=VO11
VO2 Breaker Close Contact Close breaker when recloser
BKR_CLOSE Closed Normal
(OUT2) close output is TRUE.
BESTlogic expression: VO2=79C

State Labels
Variable
Output Purpose Output Description Label TRUE FALSE (0)
VO3 Not used VO3 True False
(OUT3)
BESTlogic expression: VO3=0
VO4 Minor Alarm Closes contact when Minor ALMMIN Active Normal
(OUT4) Alarm expression is TRUE
BESTlogic expression: VO4=ALMMIN
VO5 Major Alarm Closes contact when Major ALMMAJ Active Normal
(OUT5) Alarm expression is TRUE
BESTlogic expression: VO5=ALMMAJ
VO8 Reclose Initiate TRUE when any protective RCL_INI INI Normal
element trips or when the
external reclose initiate input is
TRUE.
BESTlogic expression: VO8=VO11+IN3
VO9 Recloser Drive to Drive recloser to lockout if IN2 RCL_DTL DTL Normal
Lockout is energized or the high-set
instantaneous elements trip.
BESTlogic expression: VO9=150TPT+150TNT+15OTQT+/IN2
Protective Trip TRUE when any 50, 150 or 51
VO11 PROT_TRIP Trip Normal
Expression element has timed out.
BESTlogic expression: VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
Protection Picked Up TRUE when any 50, 150 or 51
VO12 PROT_PU PU Normal
Expression element has picked up.
BESTlogic expression:
VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
VO13 Alarm Mask 21 VO13 True False

Table 8-10. 700C-OC79-A-BE (OC with 79) Logic Settings and Equations
SL-N=700C-OC79-A-BE
SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN4; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+/IN4
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,/IN4
SL-51Q=1,/IN4
SL-151P=0,0
SL-151N=0,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12,VO9,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,/0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-101=0
SL-VOA=0
SL-VO1=VO11
SL-VO2=79C
SL-VO3=0
SL-VO4=ALMMIN
SL-VO5=ALMMAJ
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=VO11+IN3
SL-VO9=150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+/IN2
SL-VO10=0
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=0
700V-OUVF-A-BE (OVER/UNDER V & F PROTECTION) LOGIC SCHEME (BE1-700V)

Voltage protection including volts/hertz; negative-sequence voltage; phase and neutral over and undervoltage;
overfrequency, underfrequency; and rate of change frequency are included in this scheme. This product is
an economical choice for voltage only applications such as bus over/undervoltage, underfrequency load
shedding, voltage load shedding and transformer or generator volts/Hz protection,
Figures 8-5 and 8-6 make up the logic drawings representing the logic settings and equations shown in Table
8-15. Figure 8-7 is a one-line drawing. Table 8-15 is part of a setting printout that can be generated from
BESTCOMS by using the Print command. These are the actual ASCII commands, settings and equations
generated as a result of the selections made through the Windows based BESTCOMS interface program. The
user can see the protection and control elements that are enabled (set to Mode 1) for this application and see
how the elements are logically wired together (Boolean equations). If the user should decide to build on this
scheme, all elements required for a modified application are available in BESTCOMS. For programming
details, refer to Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, and Section 14, BESTCOMS Software.
Protection Elements
Setting a protection element’s pickup at zero will disable the element. To see which elements are enabled,
select the System Setup Summary Screen in BESTCOMS and note the color of the dot associated with each
protection element. (Refer to the color legend on the System Setup Summary Screen.) Each protection
element in this preprogrammed logic scheme should be yellow or green depending on whether an operational
setting has been applied.

To ensure optimum flexibility for voltage and frequency applications, two over/undervoltage elements (59P-
159P/27P-127P), one phase sequence check (negative-sequence voltage (47)), six over/under/roc frequency
elements (81o/u/r…581o/u/r) and one volts/hertz element (24) are provided.
Integration of Protection, Control and I/O Elements

Table 8-15 includes the logic equations that connect the various elements (electronic wiring) of the voltage
protection scheme. Figures 8-5 and 8-6 (sheets 1& 2) show the logic drawings for the preprogrammed
protection scheme. Note that all voltage and frequency trips are connected to VO8 and to VO2 which, in turn,
operates Output 2. Input 1 provides breaker position/status to the logic scheme.
Alarms
Three logic variables drive the front panel LEDs: Relay Trouble (ALMREL), Major Alarm (ALMMAJ) and Minor
Alarm (ALMMIN). A fourth logic variable, Logic Alarm (ALMLGC), has no associated front panel LED. When
the relay self-test detects a problem in the relay (ALMREL) as programmed for the OC & V protection scheme,
the Relay Trouble LED lights, Output A operates and all other outputs are disabled. When a major or minor
alarm is detected, the associated LED lights. If the user chooses, Output A can also be set to operate for a
major or a minor alarm.
Note
Tables 8-11 through Table 8-14 provide detailed logic definitions for the inputs, outputs, protection and
control elements. All inputs, logic blocks and outputs available for use in the preprogrammed logic are
described in the following tables.

Table 8-11. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Contact Sensing Input Logic
State Labels, 7 Char.
Variable Label Closed Open (0)

Input Purpose 10 Characters (1)
Breaker status indication in Sequence

of Events Reporting. TRUE when
breaker is open. Typically, IN1 is
connected to the 52b contact of the Closed
IN1 BREAKER Open
breaker.
IN2 Not used INPUT_2 Closed Open
Table 8-12. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Function Block Logic

BESTlogic
24 Used for detection of transformer overexcitation 0 1 (enabled)
27P Used for phase undervoltage protection Level 1 0 1 (1 of 3)
127P Used for phase undervoltage protection Level 2 0 1 (1 of 3)
27X Not used 0 0
47 Used for negative-sequence protection 0 1 (enabled)
59P Used for phase overvoltage protection Level 1 0 1 (1 of 3)
59X Used for 3Vo voltage detection Level 1 0 2

(3Vo-3 Ph VT input)

(3Vo-3 Ph VT input)
62/162 Not used 0 0
81 Underfrequency Protection Level 1 0 1

(Phase VT input)

(Phase VT input)
381 Overfrequency Protection Level 2 0 1

(Phase VT input)

BESTlogic

(Phase VT input)

(Phase VT input)

1
GROUP
(discrete input
Auto/Manual Logic: Set to 1 (/0) to enable automatic /0 selection)
selection. Manual selection is not used.
Table 8-13. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Virtual Switch Logic

Variable Label
Switch Purpose Mode 10 Characters Closed (1) Open (0)
43 Not used 0 (disabled) SWITCH_43 Closed Open
143 Not used 0 (disabled) SWITCH_143 Closed Open
101 Not used 0 (disabled) n/a n/a n/a
Table 8-14. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Output Logic

State Labels 7
Char.
Variable Label Closed Open

Output Purpose Description 10 Characters (1) (0)
VOA Relay Trouble alarm, OUTA contact closes RELAY_TR Active Normal
(OUTA) Alarm Major, Alarm when Relay Trouble,
Minor Major or Minor alarm is
TRUE
BESTlogic expression: VOA= ALMMAJ+ALMMIN

(OUT1)
VO2 Breaker Trip Contact OUT2 contact closes if V&F_BKR_TR Trip Normal
(OUT2) initiated by Voltage and any voltage (24, 27P,
Frequency Trips 127P, 27X, 47, 59P,
159P, 59X, 159X) or
frequency (81…581) trip
is TRUE.
VO2=24T+27PT+127PT+27XT+47T+59PT+159PT+59XT+159XT+81T+181T+281T+381T+481T+581T

State Labels 7
Char.


(OUT3)

(OUT4)

(OUT5)
VO7 Not used VO7 Trip Normal
VO11 Protective trip VO11 is TRUE when any PROT_TRIP Trip Normal
expression OC&P or V&F protection
element trips
VO11=24T+27XT+27PT+127PT+47T+59PT+159PT+59XT+159XT+81T+181T+281T+381T+481T+
581T
VO12 Protective pickup VO12 is TRUE when any PROT_PU PU Normal

expression protection element picks
up
BESTlogic expression: VO12=24PPU+27XPU+27PPU+127PPU+47PU+59PPU+159PPU +59XPU+

159XPU+81T+181T+281T+381T+481T+581T

State Labels 7
Char.


Figure 8-5. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Logic Diagram
(Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 8-6. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Logic Diagram

(Sheet 2 of 2)

8-22
OUT2 Trip
52
Block V
Trips
Application
127P 159P 159X 181O 381O 581U
24 27P 47 59P 59X 81O 281U 481U 60FL
Figure 8-7. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) One-line Drawing

2 OR 3 VTS BUS P0014-115
06-11-04
BE1-700
Table 8-15. 700V-OUVF-A-BE (Over/Under V & F Protection) Settings and Equations
SL-N=700V-OUVF-A-BE
SL-24=1,0
SL-27P=1,0; SL-127P=1,0
SL-27X=0,0
SL-47=1,0
SL-59P=1,0; SL-159P=1,0
SL-59X=2,0; SL-159X=2,0
SL-81=1,0
SL-181=1,0
SL-281=1,0
SL-381=1,0
SL-481=1,0
SL-581=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,/0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-101=0
SL-VOA=ALMMAJ+ALMMIN
SL-VO1=0
SL-VO2=24T+27PT+127PT+27XT+47T+59PT+159PT+59XT+159XT+81T+181T+281T+381T+481T+
581T
SL-VO3=0
SL-VO4=0
SL-VO5=0
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=0
SL-VO10=0
581T
SL-VO12=24PU+27PPU+127PPU+27XPU+47PU+59PPU+159PPU+59XPU+159XPU+81T+181T+
281T+381T+ 481T+581T
SL-VO13=0
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=0
700V-VF79-A-BE (VOLTAGE PROTECTION WITH RECLOSING) LOGIC SCHEME

(BE1-700V)
Voltage protection including volts/hertz; negative-sequence voltage; phase and neutral over and under
voltage; over, under, and rate of change frequency are also included. Network and dead line reclosing (25 and
25VM) with a four shot automatic recloser, including a separate pilot and time delay reclose initiate round out
the application.
Figures 8-8 and 8-9 make up the logic drawings representing the logic settings and equations shown in Table
8-20. Figure 8-10 is a one-line drawing. Table 8-20 is part of a setting printout that can be generated from
BESTCOMS by using the Print command. These are the actual ASCII commands, settings and equations
generated as a result of the selections made through the Windows based BESTCOMS interface program. The
user can see the protection and control elements that are enabled (set to mode 1) for this application and see

how the elements are logically wired together (Boolean equations). If the user should decide to build on this
scheme, all elements required for a modified application are available in BESTCOMS. For programming
details, refer to Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic and Section 14, BESTCOMS.
Protection Elements
Setting a protection element’s pickup at zero will disable the element. To see which elements are enabled,
select the System Setup Summary Screen in BESTCOMS and note the color of the dot associated with each
protection element. (Refer to the color legend on the System Setup Summary Screen.) Each protection
element in this preprogrammed logic scheme should be yellow or green depending on whether an operational
setting has been applied.
To ensure that voltage and frequency at the bus are maintained within the limits, two over/undervoltage
elements (59P-159P/27P-127P), one phase sequence check (negative-sequence voltage (47)), six
over/underfrequency elements (81o/u/r…581o/u/r) and one volts/hertz element (24) are provided.
Dead Line Reclosing (Conditional Voltage Reclose)
With a source of generation on the feeder, provision for up to four dead line (conditional voltage) recloses are
provided in this logic scheme. With the reclose fail time set to zero, the Reclose Output (79C) is held
indefinitely and Output 3 (Out3) effectively becomes a dead line reclosing contact. A sync-check element is
included in this scheme for network applications requiring angle comparison between two voltages (either side
of an open breaker) before allowing the breaker to reclose. The logic settings in Table 8-20 include the logic
equations that connect the various elements (electronic wiring) of the of the VF protection scheme. Figures
8-8 and 8-9 shows the logic drawings for the preprogrammed VF protection scheme. Note that all voltage and
frequency trips are connected to VO2 which, in turn, operates Output 2. Output 3 is used for automatic
reclosing of the circuit breaker.
Input 3 is used for external initiate of reclosing; Input 2 is connected to an external reclosing on/off switch
defeating automatic reclosing when in the OFF position. And Input 1 provides breaker position/status to the
logic scheme.
Alarms
Three logic variables drive the front panel LEDs: Relay Trouble (ALMREL), Major Alarm (ALMMAJ) and Minor
Alarm (ALMMIN). A fourth logic variable, Logic Alarm (ALMLGC), has no associated front panel LED. When
the relay self-test detects a problem in the relay (ALMREL) as programmed for the OC & V protection scheme,
the Relay Trouble LED lights, Output A operates and all other outputs are disabled. When a major or minor
alarm is detected, the associated LED lights. If the user chooses, Output A can also be set to operate for a
major or a minor alarm.
Note
Tables 8-16 through Table 8-19 provide detailed logic definitions for the inputs, outputs, protection and
control elements. All inputs, logic blocks and outputs available for use in the preprogrammed logic are
described in the following tables.

Figure 8-8. 700V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) Logic Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
Figure 8-9. 700V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) Logic Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)

Figure 8-10. 700V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) One-line Drawing
Table 8-16. 700V-VF79-A-BE Contact Input Logic
Protection Elements State Labels

Input Purpose Variable Label True (1) False (0)
IN1 Breaker status indication in Sequence of Events BREAKER OPEN CLOSED
Reporting. TRUE when breaker is open.
Typically, IN1 is connected to the 52b contact of
the breaker.
IN2 Reclosing Drive to Lockout. Drives recloser to REC_OFF OFF ON
lockout when external switch is turned off.
Contact from external switch must be closed in
the off position, open in the on.
IN3 External time delay reclose initiate. TRUE when EXT_RI ACTIVE NORMAL
RI is high.
IN4 External high speed (pilot) reclose initiate. TRUE EXT_PI ACTIVE NORMAL
when PI is high.
Table 8-17. 700V-VF79-A-BE Block Logic

BESTlogic
24 Used for detection of transformer 0 1 (enabled)

overexcitation
25 Blocked when 79C is FALSE (/79C) or when /79C+79LO 1 (enabled)

(25VM) 79LO is TRUE. Set 25VM Hot Bus-Dead Line
27P Used for phase undervoltage protection Level 0 1 (1 of 3)

1

BESTlogic
127P Used for phase undervoltage protection Level 0 1 (1 of 3)

2
27X Not used 0 0
47 Used for negative-sequence voltage protection 0 1 (enabled)

(3V0-3Ph VT
Input)

(3V0-3Ph VT
Input)
62/162 Not used 0 0
Reclose Initiate: Initiates reclosing sequence VO14

when RI is TRUE.
Breaker Status Logic: Closed breaker is /IN1

indicated when IN1 is de-energized.
79 Wait Logic: Stop recloser timing when timing VO12 1
for a fault trip. TRUE when protection picked (Power Up to
up expression is TRUE. Lockout)
Block/Drive to Lockout Logic: Drive recloser to /IN2

lockout when external recloser on/off switch is
off.
Pilot Initiate: Initiate one high speed reclose VO13
when PI is TRUE

(Phase VT
Input)

(Phase VT
Input)

(Phase VT
Input)

(Phase VT
Input)

BESTlogic

(Phase VT
Input)
Input 0 Logic: No manual selection logic is 0

used
used
Input 2 Logic: No manual selection logic is 0 1
GROUP used (discrete input
selection)
used
Auto/Manual Logic: Set to 1 (/0) to enable /0
automatic selection. No manual selection is
used
Table 8-18. 700V-VF79-A-BE Virtual Switch Logic

Variable Label
Switch Purpose Mode 10 Characters Closed (1) Open (0)
43 Not used 0 SWITCH_43 Closed Open

(disabled)

(disabled)

(disabled)

(disabled)
101 Not used 0 n/a n/a n/a

(disabled)
Table 8-19. 700V-VF79-A-BE Output Logic

State Labels 7
Char.
Variable
Label 10 Closed Open
Output Purpose Description Characters (1) (0)
VOA Relay Trouble alarm, OUTA contact closes RELAY_TR Active Normal
(OUTA) Alarm Major, Alarm when Relay Trouble,
Minor Major or Minor alarm is
TRUE
BESTlogic expression: VOA= ALMMAJ+ALMMIN

(OUT1)

State Labels 7
Char.
Variable
VO2 Breaker Trip Contact OUT2 contact closes if V&F_BKR_ Trip Normal
(OUT2) initiated by Voltage and any voltage (24, 27P, TR
Frequency Trips 127P, 27X, 47, 59P,
159P, 59X, 159X) or
frequency (81…581) trip
is TRUE.
BESTlogic expression: VO2=VO8
VO3 Breaker Reclosing OUT3 contact closes BKR_CLOSE Close Normal

(OUT3) when VO9 (25) or VO10
(25VM1) is TRUE
BESTlogic expression: VO3=79P+VO9+VO10

(OUT4)

(OUT5)
VO9 Sync-Check Close 79C is TRUE and 25 is SYNC_ Close Normal

TRUE CLOSE
BESTlogic expression: VO9=79C*25
VO10 Conditional Voltage 79C is TRUE and VOLT_ Close Normal

Close 25VM1 is TRUE CLOSE
BESTlogic expression: VO10=79C*25VM1
VO11 Protective trip VO11 is TRUE when PROT_TRIP Trip Normal

expression any OC&P or V&F
protection element trips

State Labels 7
Char.
Variable
VO11=24T+27XT+27PT+127PT+47T+59PT+159PT+59XT+159XT+81T+181T+281T+381T+481T+
581T
VO12 Protective pickup VO12 is TRUE when PROT_PU PU Normal

expression any protection element
picks up
BESTlogic expression: VO12=24PPU+27XPU+27PPU+127PPU+47PU+59PPU+159PPU+59XPU

+159XPU +81T +181T +281T+381T+481T+581T
VO13 Pilot Reclose Initiate VO13 is TRUE when PILOT_INI INI Normal
IN1, is TRUE
BESTlogic expression: VO13=IN1
VO14 Reclose Initiate VO14 is TRUE when REC_INI INI Normal

IN3 or VO13 is TRUE
BESTlogic expression: VO14=IN3+VO13
Table 8-20. 700V-VF79-A-BE (V & F Protection with Reclosing) Settings and Equations
SL-N=700V-VF79-A-BE
SL-24=1,0
SL-25=1,/79C+79LO
SL-27P=1,0; SL-127P=1,0
SL-27X=0,0
SL-47=1,0
SL-59P=1,0; SL-159P=1,0
SL-59X=2,0; SL-159X=2,0
SL-81=1,0
SL-181=1,0
SL-281=1,0
SL-381=1,0
SL-481=1,0
SL-581=1,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO14,/IN1,VO12,/IN2,VO13
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,/0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-101=0
SL-VOA=ALMMAJ+ALMMIN
SL-VO1=0
581T
SL-VO3=79P+VO9+VO10

SL-VO4=0
SL-VO5=0
SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=0
SL-VO8=0
SL-VO9=79C*25
SL-VO10=79C*25VM1
581T
SLVO12=24PU+27PPU+127PPU+27XPU+47PU+59PPU+159PPU+59XPU+159XPU+81T+181T+
281T+ 381T+481T+581T
SL-VO13=IN4
SL-VO14=IN3+VO13
SL-VO15=0
MISCELLANEOUS LOGIC EXPRESSIONS

Several logic expression settings are classified as miscellaneous. That is, they are not included in the
BESTlogic settings and are not set through the ASCII command interface using the SL (Set Logic)
commands. Several of the reporting and alarm functions provided in the relay require programmable logic
expressions to determine their functionality. These settings are included with the setup parameters
associated with each function. Table 8-21 cross-references the manual sections and setting commands
associated with these non-BESTlogic logic settings.
Each of the pre-programmed logic schemes is designed to be compatible with the factory default logic
expression settings for these reporting and alarm functions. However, when copying a pre-programmed
scheme into your logic settings for modification, it is important to recognize that settings will not be copied
in for these logic settings. These miscellaneous logic settings must be reviewed to ensure desired
performance for these functions.
Table 8-21. Miscellaneous Logic Expressions

Command Reference
SA-RESET Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarms Function
SB-DUTY Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring
SB-LOGIC Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring
SG-TARG Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting
SG-TRIGGER Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting
SP-79ZONE Section 4, Protection and Control
APPLICATION TIPS
Output Contact Latch Using the TRSTKEY Logic Variable

On occasion, an application will call for latching an output contact such as simulating a lockout (86) function.
Each output contact of a Basler Electric relay can be set to latch by using an AND gate to seal the trip
condition and the TRSTKEY logic variable to reset the latch.
As an example, assume a BE1-700 is used for overcurrent protection of a radial transformer shown in Figure
8-11, Station One-line Drawing. The user wants to trip and lockout the high side circuit switcher for an
overcurrent trip.

Referring to Figure 8-12, a 51 or 151 trip will causeVO11 to go high. This in turn causes VO14 to go high,
sealing the inputs of VO3 and VO4 through AND gate VO7. This allows Output Contacts 3 and 4 to transition
and remain in that state until the TRSTKEY variable is asserted. In this example, the circuit switcher will be
tripped by Output 3 (simulating an 86 “a”) and its close circuit disabled by Output 4 (simulating an 86 “b”).
The HMI LCD display automatically goes to the Target Screen per the automatic display priority function.
When the operator presses the Reset key while the LCD display is on the Target Screen (Reset key of the
HMI is context sensitive), the TRSTKEY logic variable goes high breaking the VO7 seal in at which point
Output 3 will open and Output 4 will close. Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault
Reporting.
The data in Table 8-22 include the logic settings and equations for the ARSTKEY and TRSTKEY functions.
BE1-
700
D2881-42
10-05-04
Figure 8-11. Station One-line Drawing

Figure 8-12. BE1-700C Transformer Protection Output Latch, ARSTKEY and TRSTKEY
Table 8-22. ARSTKEY and TRSTKEY Logic Settings and Equations
SL-N=LATCH
SL-50TP=0,0; SL-50TN=0,0; SL-50TQ=0,0
SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0; SL-150TQ=0,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,0
SL-51Q=1,0
SL-151N=G,0
SL-27P=0,0
SL-59P=0,0; SL-59X=0,0
SL-47=0,0
SL-62=0,0,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-81=0,0
SL-181=0,0
SL-281=0,0
SL-381=0,0
SL-481=0,0
SL-581=0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=0,0,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-243=0
SL-343=0
SL-101=0
SL-VOA=0
SL-VO1=0
SL-VO2=0
SL-VO3=VO14
SL-VO4=/VO14
SL-VO5=0

SL-VO6=0
SL-VO7=VO14*/TRSTKEY
SL-VO8=VO13*/ARSTKEY
SL-VO9=0
SL-VO10=0
SL-VO11=51PT+51NT+51QT+151NT
SL-VO12=51PPU+51NPU+51QPU+151NPU
SL-VO13=IN3+VO8
SL-VO14=VO11+V07
SL-VO15=0
Alarm Latch and Pseudo Target Using the ARSTKEY Logic Variable
On occasion, the user may want the relay to annunciate and latch for a user defined condition originating
internal or external to the relay. This is accomplished by using an AND gate to latch the condition through
one of the relay’s user defined alarms and the ARSTKEY logic variable to reset the latch. Virtual Outputs
VO13, VO14 and VO15 can be programmed to alarm for any BESTlogic expression. Also, they can be
assigned a user defined label up to a maximum of 10 characters that will be reported in the alarm reporting
function and appear on the relay’s HMI. In the following example, the user-defined alarm condition is defined
as a “pseudo target” for an external trip function. Refer to the Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions.
Using the same transformer protection application as in the previous example, the user wants to trip and
lockout the high side circuit switcher for a Sudden Pressure Relay trip. The user also wants a sealed
annunciation on the HMI that reads “SPR_TRIP.”
Referring to Figure 8-12, when the external sudden pressure relay trip contact connected to Input 3 closes,
VO13 goes high, sealing the inputs of VO3 and VO4 through AND gate VO8. This allows Output Contacts
3 and 4 to transition and remain in that state until the ARSTKEY variable is asserted. The HMI LCD display
automatically goes to the Alarm Screen if VO13 is programmed as a major or minor alarm per the automatic
display priority function. In this example, VO13 is programmed to be SN-VO13=SPR_TRIP and will display
as such on the HMI when an SPR trip occurs. The trip and alarm (pseudo target) latch will remain until the
Reset button on the front panel of the relay is pressed while the Alarm Screen of the HMI, Menu Branch 1.3
is being displayed (Reset key of the HMI is context sensitive). Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarms
Functions, Retrieving and Resetting Alarm Reports, for details.
Underfrequency Load Shedding with Restoration Permissive (BE1-700V)

Underfrequency load shedding schemes are designed to operate when the load of a power region outpaces
generation and begins to “drag” or slow system frequency. (See Figure 8-13.) To save the system from total
collapse, segregated blocks of load representing a percentage of the total power region load are set to trip
at various levels of declining system frequency. For example, an electric utility determines that 30% of its load
will have to be shed for a worst case “load to generation” scenario. They decide to arrange the load in three
blocks set to trip at underfrequency levels of 59.7 Hz, 59.5 Hz and 59.3 Hz. Load restoration is normally
broken down into smaller blocks minimizing the impact of reapplying load to the system. Knowledge of local
conditions or “restoration permissives” are normally included as part of the system restoration process.

UF TRIP UF RESTORE
RESTORE OUT4
TRIP OUT2 PERMISSIVE
LOCAL
SCADA PB
86UF(n) 86UF(n)
RESET
UF_TRIP UFLO_TRIP
O/U 81T VO6 VO2
BLK FREQUENCY AND OUTPUT
(81) OUT2 86UF
CO-OUT 2
LOGIC TRIP
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY
TRIP SENSING O/U 181T
BLK FREQUENCY
(181) SYSTEM FREQUENCY
RESTORE SENSING 86UF
REST_PER UFLO_RES
O/U 281T RESTORE
VO10 VO4
PERMISSIVE
BLK FREQUENCY AND OUTPUT
OUT4
REST_BLK (281) LOGIC
CO-OUT4
VO7
OR
+ O/U 381T
BLK FREQUENCY
(381)
86UF1 86UF2 86UF3
IN1 “UF REST0RE”
“a” “a” “a”
OPTIONAL AUTO TARGET RESET

INI
OPTO 62 TARGET D2881-05
BLK TIMER SG-TARG
REPORTING 04-11-00
_ SETTING
FUNCTION
Figure 8-13. Underfrequency Load Shed Bus Level Application

Historically, underfrequency load shedding schemes have been applied at the bus level. With the introduction
of numeric, multifunction feeder protection relays, it has become more economical to apply underfrequency
load shedding at the circuit level. Also, reliability increases as the user is no longer depending on a single
relay to sense the underfrequency condition. If the BE1-700V is not available on every circuit or user
philosophy requires a bus level installation, the BE1-700V can also be applied for bus level underfrequency
protection.
The BE1-700V also has an optional auxiliary voltage input that can be selected for the underfrequency
function. This allows the user to supply one underfrequency element from a transmission or high side source
and another element from a low side or distribution source. Output of the two elements is connected through
an AND gate thus requiring both underfrequency elements to pickup before providing a trip output. Dual
source sensing helps to ensure operation for true system underfrequency events.
The following application tips detail examples of a “bus” and “circuit level” underfrequency load shed scheme
and restoration “permissive” using dual source sensing and the programming capabilities of the BE1-700V.
(Single source sensing can also be used.) These schemes are easily customized to meet the user’s specific
requirements.
Bus Level Application

The following logic was designed to work with the preprogrammed BUS Logic Scheme described elsewhere
in this section.
Referring to Figure 8-14, if sensing voltage is above the inhibit setting, and system frequency below the 81
and 181T setting, UF_TRIP, VO6 will go high. This in turn forces VO3 (UFLO_TRP) high, closing Output 3
Contact and tripping the user lockout(s) (86) devices and, in turn, tripping the associated breakers. When
the “load condition” that caused the underfrequency event has subsided, the system operator/dispatcher will
initiate a remote restoration procedure. A “restoration permissive” from the BE1-700 verifies that the following
conditions are met prior to restoring load:

• The underfrequency trip (81and 181T) is no longer present.
• The 86UF(s) is/are tripped.
• Sensing voltage is above the predetermined inhibit level.
• System frequency is above the predetermined restore level (281 and 381T).
Figure 8-14. Underfrequency Load Shed, Circuit Level Application, Manual or Auto Close from SCADA
or Local Restore
The first two conditions must be met to remove REST_BLK from the 281 and 381T overfrequency elements.
Then, with sensing voltage above the inhibit setting of 281 and 381T and the system frequency above the
281 and 381T setting, VO10 (REST_PER) will go high forcing VO4, UFLO_RES high, closing Output
Contact 4. As long as these conditions remain unchanged the Output Contact 4 will remain closed. When
the last 86UF (electrical reset lockout relay) is reset, Input 1, UF_RESTORE will go low, blocking the 281 and
381T elements. Also, VO4 will go low, opening Output Contact 4, removing the 86UF Restore Permissive.
The last 86UF to reset can initiate an optional “auto target reset circuit”, thus eliminating the need for further
operator input. A one-shot, non-retriggerable timer (62) initiated by the last lockout to reset (Input 1), is used
to automatically reset the BE1-700V targets and Trip LED via “logic” input to the Target Reset Logic. See
Figure 6-14, Target Reset Logic, Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions.
Circuit Level Application - Manual and Auto Reclosing

The following logic was designed to work with the preprogrammed logic for the BE1-700V.
For the Bus Application, load restoration was accomplished by resetting the lockout relays (86UFs) and
allowing the circuit reclosing relays to close the breaker and restore load. Using the Circuit Level Application,
restoration can be accomplished by an automatic or manual closure of the breaker. Both methods are
described in the following paragraphs.
Referring to Figure 8-14, if sensing voltage is above the inhibit setting of the underfrequency elements 81
and 181T and system frequency is below the 81 and 181T setting, VO6, UF_TRIP goes high. This initiates
the auto reclose sequence through VO8, RI and forces VO13 (UF_LO) high, closing and sealing the inputs
to VO1 and VO3 through AND gate VO14 (LATCH). This allows the contacts of Output 3 and Output 4 to
transition and remain in that state, simulating “a” and “b” contacts of an electrical reset lockout relay (86). The
VO14 seal also removes the block input from the 281 and 381T overfrequency elements and either drives
the 79 element to lockout (manual close) or puts a “wait” on 79 (auto close). The associated breaker will be
tripped by Output 1 and the close circuit is disabled by Output 3.

When the load condition that initiated the event has subsided, the system operator/dispatcher will initiate a
remote restoration procedure. A “restoration permissive” from the BE1-700 verifies that the following
conditions are met prior to allowing closure of the breaker:
• Underfrequency trip, 81T and 181T are no longer present.
• System frequency and voltage above the predetermined restore level (281 and 381T).
• The breaker is open.
• The VO14 latch circuit is high.
With VO7, PROT_RES high and the above conditions met, closure of the SCADA Restore contact forces
VO10, REST_PER high, breaking the VO13/VO14 seal and resetting Output Contacts 1 and 3. If automatic
reclosing is used, the “WAIT” input is removed and the reclosing element (79) closes the breaker after a
predetermined time delay. If manual reclosing is used, the “DTL/BLK” input is removed and the breaker is
ready to close SCADA or local close.
As with the Bus Level Application, an optional “auto target reset circuit” can be initiated, automatically
resetting the BE1-700 targets and Trip LED and eliminating the need for further operator input. A one-shot,
non-retriggerable timer (62) initiated by VO10, REST_PER, is used to automatically reset the BE1-700
targets and Trip LED via “logic” input to the Target Reset Logic. See Figure 6-11, Target Reset Logic, Section
6, Reporting and Alarms, Fault Reporting.
Logic Equations and Settings, Underfrequency Load Shedding
Bus UF Load Shed

The following is an example of how to apply UF Load Shed logic at the Bus level. The logic can be applied
in any number of ways including stand alone, to other preprogrammed schemes or completely customized
by the user. Using BESTCOMS to modify and add to the logic is not only quick and easy but minimizes
Input/Output “name” and “state” label changes. In this example, start with a renamed version of the
BESTCOMS BUS logic scheme modified as follows:
SL-101=0
SL-V01=VO11*SG0
SN-IN1=UF-RESTORE,CLOSE,OPEN
Add the following UF logic to the modified BUS Logic Scheme:
SL-62=2, /IN1,0 (optional target reset)

SL-081=1,O
SL-181=1,O
SL-281=1,VO7
SL-381=1,VO7
SL-VO2=VO6
SL-VO4=VO10
SL-VO6=81T*181T
SL-VO7=VO6+/IN1
SL-VO10=281T*381T
Add +81T+181T to BUS SG-TRIG. Replace the ,0 with ,62 at the end of BUS SG-TARG.
The resulting BUS-UF setting logic is as follows:
SL-50TP=1,IN2; SL-50TN=1,IN2; SL-50TQ=1,IN2

SL-150TP=0,0; SL-150TN=0,0; SL-150TQ=0,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,0
SL-51Q=1,0
SL-151N=0,0
SL-27P=0,0
SL-59P=0,0; SL-59X=0,0
SL-47=0,0
SL-62=2,/IN1,0

SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=0,0,0,0,0
SL-81=1,0
SL-181=1,0
SL-281=1,VO7
SL-381=1,VO7
SL-481=0,0
SL-581=0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=2,IN3,0,0,0,0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-101=0
SL-VOA=0
SL-VO1=VO11*SG0
SL-VO2=VO6
SL-VO3=VO8*/VO15*SG0
SL-VO4=VO10
SL-VO5=VO11*SG1
SL-VO6=81T*181T
SL-VO7=VO6+/IN1
SL-VO8=51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO9=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO10=281T*381T
SL-VO11=50TPT+50TNT+50TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+50TNPU+50TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=SG1
SL-VO14=0
SL-VO15=343+/IN4
Circuit UF Load Shed

The following is an example of how to apply UF Load Shed logic at the circuit or feeder level. The logic can
be applied in any number of ways including stand alone, to other preprogrammed schemes, or completely
customized by the user. Using BESTCOMS to modify and add to the logic is, not only quick and easy but
minimizes Input/Output “name” and “state” label changes. In this example, start with a renamed version of
the 700V preprogrammed logic scheme modified as follows:
SN-IN1=L_OR_S_RES,CLOSE,OPEN (Local or SCADA Restore)
Add the following Circuit UF logic to the modified logic scheme:
SL-62=2,VO10,0 (optional target reset)

SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO14,0
SL-081=1,O
SL-181=1,O
SL-281=1,VO14
SL-381=1,VO14
SL-VO1=VO13
SL-VO2=79C
SL-VO3=/VO13
SL-VO6=81T*181T
SL-VO7=281T*381T
SL-VO8=VO6
SL-VO10=/VO6*IN1*IN3*VO7
SL-VO13=VO6+VO14
SL-VO14=/VO10*VO13
Add +81T+181T to BUS SG-TRIG. Replace the ,0 with ,62 at the end of BUS SG-TARG.
The resulting OC-UF-79 setting logic is as follows:

SL-50TP=1,79SCB; SL-50TN=1,79SCB+/IN4; SL-50TQ=1,79SCB+/IN4
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0; SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-51P=1,0
SL-51N=1,/IN4
SL-51Q=1,/IN4
SL-151N=0,0
SL-27P=0,0
SL-59P=0,0; SL-59X=0,0
SL-47=0,0
SL-62=2,VO10,0
SL-162=0,0,0
SL-79=1,VO8,/IN1,VO12+VO14,150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+/IN2
SL-81=1,0
SL-181=1,0
SL-281=1,/VO14
SL-381=1,/VO14
SL-481=0,0
SL-581=0,0
SL-BF=0,0,0
SL-GROUP=1,0,0,0,0,/0
SL-43=0
SL-143=0
SL-101=0
SL-VOA=0
SL-VO1=VO11+VO13
SL-VO2=79C
SL-VO3=/VO13
SL-VO4=ALMMIN
SL-VO5=ALMMAJ
SL-VO6=81T*181T
SL-VO7=281T*381T
SL-VO8=VO6+VO11
SL-VO9=150TPT+150TNT+150TQT+/IN2
SL-VO10=/VO6*VO7*IN1*IN3
SL-VO11=50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+51QT
SL-VO12=50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+51QPU
SL-VO13=VO6+VO14
SL-VO14=/VO10*VO13
SL-VO15=0
Close Circuit Monitor

While a close circuit monitor is not included in any of the preprogrammed logic schemes, this function may
be added by using a 62 function block and a contact sensing input (INX) to monitor the close circuit. The logic
for the close circuit monitor is shown in Figure 8-15. The output of the 62 protection block will close the
designated output contact (VOY) when an open breaker and open close circuit condition exists. The S<g>-62
command is used to provide a 500 millisecond time delay to inhibit the momentary alarm that will occur due
to the timing differences between the two signals.

Figure 8-15. Close Circuit Monitor Logic
High-Speed Reclose
Each reclose time delay can be set as low as 100
milliseconds. Refer to Figure 8-16. If the application
requires a reclose time delay of less than 250
milliseconds, it is recommended that the close logic
expression be modified to prevent mis-coordination
between the TRIP and CLOSE outputs.
A hold timer for each output relay is provided to hold
the output closed for approximately 200
milliseconds. This prevents the relay contacts from
opening before the breaker auxiliary contact
interrupts the trip coil current. For high-speed
reclosing, the hold timer must be disabled so that
the output contact follows the VO1 output
expression. To modify the logic, add the expression
“reclose 79C AND NOT trip VO1" to the close logic.
Examples 1 and 2 show a close expression and hold
disable setting for high-speed reclosing. Figure 8-16
illustrates this high-speed reclose interlock logic
scheme.
Figure 8-16. High-Speed Reclose Interlock Logic

Example 1.
Close Expression: SL-VO2=79C*/VO1+101C
Example 2.
Hold Disable Setting: SG-HOLD1=0
Block Load Tap Changer

A block load tap changer output is not provided in any of the preprogrammed logic schemes. However, one
of the output relays can be programmed to operate when the recloser is running (79RNG) and wired to
energize a normally closed auxiliary relay. The 79RNG logic variable is high when any of the timers are
timing and low when the reclosing function is in a lockout or reset state.

Setting Group Selection
The BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay provides two settings groups for adaptive relaying. The preprogrammed
logic schemes barely tap the flexibility that is available. The following two examples illustrate how the settings
groups can be adapted for different conditions and how different setting groups can be used to vary the
system logic.
Example 1. Adapting the relay settings for different conditions

In overcurrent protection systems, the source conditions can have a major impact on sensitivity, coordination
intervals and clearing times. Generally, the pickup and time dial settings are a compromise between a normal
condition and a worst-case condition. Contact logic from the position of the source breakers can select which
settings group is active. To achieve this, assign input D0 or D1 to a contact sensing input. Select binary
coded setting group selection (Mode 2). If D0 is set, Group 0 will be selected when the input is off (binary
code 00). Group 1 will be selected when the input is on (binary code 01). Similarly, if D1 is set, Group 2 will
be selected when the input is on (binary coded 10).
This logic is useful in a situation where two transformers feed a single bus or two busses have a bus tie
between them. The feeder and bus relays must be coordinated so that only one source is in service (bus tie
open or one transformer out of service). However, when both sources are in service, such as when the bus
tie is closed, each bus relay sees only half of the current for a fault. This results in poor sensitivity and slow
clearing time for the bus relays.
Example 2. Adapting the logic in different setting groups

The logic in most of the preprogrammed logic schemes can be varied in each of the different setting groups.
This is accomplished by disabling functions by setting their primary settings at zero. It’s also possible to
perform more sophisticated modification of the logic in each of the different setting groups by using the active
setting group logic variables SG0 and SG1 in the BESTlogic expressions.
Output Contact Seal-In

Trip contact seal-in circuits have historically been provided with electromechanical relays. These seal-in
circuits consists of a dc coil in series with the relay trip contact and a seal-in contact in parallel with the trip
contact. The seal-in feature serves several purposes for electromechanical relays.
â It provides the mechanical energy to drop the target.
ã It carries the dc tripping current from the induction disk contact which may not have significant
closing torque for a low resistance connection.
ä It prevents the relay contact from dropping out until the current has been interrupted by the 52a
contacts in series with trip coil.
The first two items aren’t an issue for solid-state relays. But item three is significant.
To prevent the output relay contacts from opening prematurely, a 200 millisecond hold timer can be selected
with the SG-HOLDn=1 command. Refer to Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Outputs, for more
information about this feature. If desired, seal-in logic with feedback from the breaker position logic can be
obtained by modifying the BESTlogic expression for the tripping output. To do this, set one of the general
purpose timers (62 or 162) for Mode 1 (Pickup/Dropout Timer). Set the timer logic so that it is initiated by the
breaker position input, and set the timer for two cycles pickup and two cycles dropout. Then AND the timer
output with the tripping output and OR it into the expression for the tripping output. The same can be done
for the closing output. Figure 8-17 illustrates the seal-in logic diagram.

+ +
52b
+ VO6
IN1 INI 62 VO1 52TC OUTPUT
OPTO 62 OUT1
LOGIC
BLK
TRIPPING
LOGIC
VO7
VO2 52CC OUTPUT
OUT2
LOGIC
CLOSING
LOGIC
52a 52b
52TC 52CC
D2590-10
- - 03-23-98
Figure 8-17. Output Seal-In Logic Diagram
NOTE
The following example is based on the 700C logic scheme.
Example 1.
Turn off the hold timer for Output 1: SG-HOLD1=0
SG-HOLD2=0
Set the timer logic: SL-62=1,IN1,1,0
Set the pickup and dropout times: S#-62=2C,2C
Set the output logic: VO1=101T+BFPU+VO11+VO6

VO2=101C+79C+VO7
VO6=VO1*/162
VO7=VO2*62

SECTION 9 • SECURITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 9 • SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Setting Up Password Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Figures
Figure 9-1. General Operation, Global Security Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Figure 9-2. Show Passwords Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Tables
Table 9-1. Password Protection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
BE1-700 Security i
SECTION 9 • SECURITY
INTRODUCTION
In this section, security, in the form of multilevel password protection, is discussed along with the information
required for protecting specific function groups and user interface components against unauthorized access.
Passwords provide access security for three distinct functional access areas: Settings, Reports and Control.
Each functional area can be assigned a unique password or one password can be assigned to multiple areas.
A global password is used to access all three of the functional areas. BE1-700 passwords are not case
sensitive; either lowercase or uppercase letters may be entered. Password security only limits write
operations; passwords are never required to read information from any area.
Additional security is provided by controlling the functional areas that can be accessed from a particular
communication port. For example, security can be configured so that access to Control commands from the
rear Ethernet port (COM1) is denied. Then, an attempt to issue a Control command through COM1 will cause
the relay to respond with an ACCESS DENIED and/or INVALID PASSWORD message. This will occur
whether a valid password is entered or not. When configuring communication port access areas, you should
be aware that the front RS-232 port (COM0) and the front panel HMI are treated as the same port.
The communication ports and password parameters act as a two-dimensional control to limit changes. For
a command to be accepted, the entered password must be correct and the command must be entered through
a valid port. Only one password can be active at one time for any area or port. For example, if a user gains
write access at the Ethernet port, then users at other areas (COM0, front panel HMI, and COM2) won’t be able
to gain write access until the user at the Ethernet port uses the EXIT command to release access control.
If a port holding access privileges, sees no activity (command entered or HMI key pressed) for approximately
five minutes, access privileges and any pending changes will be lost. This feature ensures that password
protection can’t be accidentally left in a state where access privileges are enabled for one area and other
areas locked out for an indefinite period.
If password protection is disabled, then entering ACCESS= followed by no password or any alphanumeric
character string will obtain access to the unprotected area(s).
NOTE
For security reasons, all change passwords are disabled by default on the (optional) Ethernet port. You must
use a serial connection to enable and upload the desired change functions before changes will be allowed
from the Ethernet port.
Setting Up Password Protection

Password protection is configured for each access area port and communication port using BESTCOMS.
Alternately, password protection can be configured using the GS-PW ASCII command.
To configure password protection using BESTCOMS, select General Operation from the Screens pull-down
menu. Then select the Security tab. Refer to Figure 9-1.
If a change is required and the Password Security box reads Show Passwords, press Show Passwords.
Passwords may be entered in the text boxes for Global Access, Settings Access, Reports Access and Control
Access. See Figure 9-2. Each access level may be enabled (or not enabled) for COM 0 front RS232 and HMI,
rear Ethernet port (Com 1) and COM 2 rear 485. Access levels may also be enabled for multiple ports. By
default, all access on Com1 rear Ethernet port is disabled.
BE1-700 Security 9-1

Figure 9-1. General Operation, Global Security Tab
Figure 9-2. Show Passwords Screen
Table 9-1. Password Protection Settings

Setting Range/Purpose
Password User defined alphanumeric string with a maximum of 8 characters.

A setting of 0 disables password protection.
Com ports 0 = Front RS-232 port Multiple ports may be selected by using
1 = Rear Ethernet port (option) a slash (/) between each port
2 = Rear RS-485 port designator.
9-2 Security BE1-700

SECTION 10 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 10 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Automatic HMI Display Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Setting the Screen Scroll List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
HMI OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Entering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Performing Control Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Resetting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Entering Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Figures
Figure 10-1. BE1-700 Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Figure 10-2. Menu Tree Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Figure 10-3. Report Status Menu Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-4. Control Menu Branch Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-5. Metering Menu Branch Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-6. Reports Menu Branch Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-7. Protection Menu Branch Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Figure 10-8. General Settings Menu Branch Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Figure 10-9. General Operation Screen, HMI Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Figure 10-10. Virtual Control Switch 143 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Tables
Table 10-1. BE1-700 HMI Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Table 10-2. Automatic Screen Display Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Table 10-3. Virtual Control Switches HMI Screen Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
BE1-700 Human-Machine Interface i

SECTION 10 • HUMAN-MACHINE INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay human-machine interface (HMI) and illustrates
the front panel display menu tree branches.
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Figure 10-1 shows the HMI components of a BE1-700 in a fixed, horizontal, half-rack, non-drawout case.
Table 10-1 describes the HMI components called out in Figure 10-1.
A B C D E F G
Digital Protective Relay Relay Minor Major

Power Trouble Alarm Alarm Trip
R
BE1-700
Com 0
OVERCURRENT RS-232
ITEM NUMBER: **************
50/60HZ
Edit Reset
POWER SUPPLY: 48Vdc
D2838-50
10-15-04
K J I H
Figure 10-1. BE1-700 Front Panel
Table 10-1. BE1-700 HMI Components

Locator Description
A Display. Two line by 16 character liquid crystal display (LCD) with backlighting. The LCD is the
primary source for obtaining information from the relay or when locally setting the relay.
Information such as targets, metering values, demand values, communication parameters, the
active logic scheme name and diagnostic information is provided by the LCD. Information and
settings are displayed in a menu with six branches. The Menu Tree sub-section provides more
information about the menu branches.
B Power Indicator. This green LED lights when operating power is applied to the relay.
C Relay Trouble Indicator. This red LED lights momentarily during start-up and lights
continuously when a relay failure is detected. Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions ,
provides a complete description of all relay failure alarm diagnostics.
D, E Minor Alarm and Major Alarm Indicators. These red LEDs light to indicate that a programmable
alarm has been set. Each indicator can be programmed to annunciate one or more conditions.
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, provides detailed information about programming
alarms.
BE1-700 Human-Machine Interface 10-1

Locator Description
F Trip Indicator. A flashing Trip LED indicates that a protective element is picked up. A
continuously lit LED indicates that a trip output is closed. This red LED is sealed-in if a
protective trip has occurred and targets are displayed.
G Communication Port 0. This RS-232 serial port can be used to communicate with the relay
using simple ASCII command language. A computer terminal or PC running BESTCOMS
software or terminal emulation software (such as Windows® HyperTerminal) is required to send
commands to the relay or receive information from the relay.
H Reset Pushbutton. Pushing this switch will reset the Trip LED, sealed-in Trip Targets, Peak
Demand Currents and Alarms.
I Scrolling Pushbuttons. Use these four switches to navigateUP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT
( ) through
the LCD’s menu tree. When in Edit mode, the LEFT and RIGHT scrolling pushbuttons select
the variable to be changed. The UP and DOWN scrolling pushbuttons change the variable.
J Edit Pushbutton. Settings changes can be made at the front panel using this switch. When
pushed, this switch lights to indicate that Edit mode is active. When you are finished making
settings changes (using the scrolling pushbuttons) and the Edit switch is pressed again, the
switch light turns off to indicate that your settings changes have been saved. If changes aren’t
completed and saved within five minutes, the relay will automatically exit the Edit mode without
saving any changes.
K Identification Label. This label lists the style number, serial number, sensing input current and
voltage range, and power supply input voltages. (BE1-700C is shown.)
Menu Tree
A menu tree with six branches can be accessed through the front panel controls and display. The left and right
scrolling pushbuttons are used to view each of the six branches. A greater level of detail in a menu branch
is accessed using the down scrolling pushbutton. Every display screen of the menu tree is numbered in the
upper left hand corner. This number eases navigation below the top level of the menu tree by indicating the
current branch and level in the menu tree structure. Each time a lower menu tree level is reached, another
number is added to the screen number separated by a period. The up scrolling pushbutton is used to return
to the top of the menu branch.
10-2 Human-Machine Interface BE1-700

6 GENERAL SETTINGS. Provides display and setting of relay configuration settings such as
communication, LCD contrast, transformer ratios and system frequency. General Settings Menu Branch
structure is illustrated in Figure 10-8.
Figure 10-3. Report Status Menu Branch

Figure 10-4. Control Menu Branch Structure
Figure 10-5. Metering Menu Branch Structure

Figure 10-6. Reports Menu Branch Structure
5 PROTECTION
700XXX-5051-A-BE
10-6
VOLT BLOCK=PNQ
TO
Human-Machine Interface
Figure 10-7. Protection Menu Branch Structure
0F64.00 UF46.00
Relay with Reclosing Option(79)
Relays with Current Sensing
P0014-113
Relays with voltage sensing
10-06-04
BE1-700
Figure 10-8. General Settings Menu Branch Structure

Automatic HMI Display Priorities
The Report Status Screen (Menu Branch 1) provides fast and easy access to the most often used report and
status data. Screens available under this menu heading report recloser status, target status, alarm status and
operational status of inputs, outputs, controls, active setting group and breaker state. In addition, up to 16
screens from anywhere in the menu system can be selected to be displayed in a screen scroll list.
If no front panel controls are operated for approximately five minutes, the relay automatically displays the
highest priority Report Status Screen. This keeps frequently viewed data on the displayed screen or at most,
only a couple of keystrokes away. Automatic screen display follows the priority logic described in Table 10-2.
Table 10-2. Automatic Screen Display Priority

Priority Priority Logic State Screen Displayed Data
1 Recloser (79) active 1.1 Recloser Status
2 Targets active 1.2.x Scrolling display of target elements and fault currents
3 Alarms active 1.3.x Scrolling display of active alarms
4 Scrolling screens 1.4.x Scrolling display of user screens programmed with the
active SG-SCREEN command
5 Scrolling screens 1.2 Default target screen showing TARGETS NONE
disabled
If the recloser is inactive and no targets or alarms exist, the relay will scroll automatically through a maximum
of 16 user programmable screens. The screen scrolling list is programmed using the SG-SCREEN command.
Setting the Screen Scroll List

To edit the automatic scrolling list using BESTCOMS, select General Operation from the Screens pull-down
menu. Then select the HMI Display tab. Refer to Figure 10-9. The screen numbers listed exhibit the default
scrolling list. The list of numbers on the right represent the screen numbers and the order in which they will
be displayed when automatic scrolling begins. The number closest to the top will be displayed first. The four
buttons on the screen can be used to add or remove screens from the list. They can also be used to change
a selected screens position in the list.
Figure 10-9. General Operation Screen, HMI Display Tab

To add a screen to the list, select the screen on the HMI simulation by clicking the mouse pointer on the
arrows. Select the Add-> button to add the screen to the list.
Alternately, these settings may be made using the SG-SCREEN ASCII command.
HMI OPERATIONS
The following paragraphs describe how the HMI is used to set and control relay functions.
Entering Settings
Settings for protection functions can be edited at Menu Branch 5, Protection Logic of the HMI LCD. Settings
for general and reporting functions can be edited from Menu Branch 6, General Settings. To edit a setting
using the manual scrolling pushbuttons, perform the following procedures:
1. Scroll to the screen that displays the function to be edited.
2. Press the Edit pushbutton to gain access. If password security has been initiated for settings, you will be
prompted to enter the appropriate password. See the paragraphs, Entering Passwords, for details on
entering passwords from the HMI. Once access has been gained, the EDIT LED will be lit and a cursor
will appear in the first settings field on the screen.
3. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling key to select the desired setting. Some settings require entering a
number, one character at a time. For example, to enter a 51 pickup as 7.3 amps, you would press the UP
pushbutton until the 7 is showing. Then, press the RIGHT pushbutton to move the cursor over and press
the UP pushbutton until the . is showing. Then, press the RIGHT pushbutton to move the cursor over and
press the UP pushbutton until the 3 is showing. Other settings require scrolling through a list of selections.
For example, you would move the cursor over to the CRV field and then scroll through a list of available
TCC curves.
4. Once all of the settings on the screen have been entered, press the Edit pushbutton a second time and
the settings will be validated. If the settings are in range, the screen will flash CHANGES SAVED and the
EDIT LED will go out. If you want to abort the edit session without changing any settings, press the Reset
pushbutton before you press the Edit pushbutton the second time. The screen will flash CHANGES LOST
and the EDIT LED will go out.
Performing Control Operations
Control operations can be executed at Menu Branch 2, CONTROL of the HMI LCD. These functions allow you
to control the state of virtual switches, override logic and control the active setting group and override the logic
and control the state of output contacts. All of these functions work similarly to the process of entering settings
in that you press the Edit pushbutton, use the UP and DOWN scroll pushbuttons to select the desired state
and press the Edit pushbutton for the action to be executed.
Table 10-3 describes each of the call-outs shown on Figure 10-10. The
user-programmable label for this switch is SWITCH_143. The TRUE
(closed) state label has been set to TRUE. And, the FALSE (open)
state label has been set to FALSE. The logical mode for this application
would be set to Mode 2 (On/Off switch).
Figure 10-10. Virtual Control

Switch 143 Screen

Table 10-3. Virtual Control Switches HMI Screen Indicators
Locator Description
A Screen number. This number eases navigation by indicating the current branch and level in
the menu tree structure.
B User selectable label (meaningful name) for specific virtual switches. The switch label is
SWITCH_143.
C User selectable label for the closed (1) state for Virtual Switch 143. The Switch 143 closed
label is set to TRUE.
D Arrow icon indicates the current switch position (status). In Figure 10-10, the current status
is the open state which is labeled FALSE.
E User selectable label for the open (0) state for Virtual Switch 143. The Switch 143 open label
is set to FALSE.
To operate the switch, use the following procedure:
1. Using the manual scrolling pushbuttons, scroll to Screen 2.1.2 (SWITCH_143). Or, if the screen has been
placed in the automatic scroll list, simply wait for it to appear and press the RIGHT or LEFT scroll
pushbutton to freeze the display.
2. Press the Edit pushbutton to gain access. If password security has been initiated for control functions, you
will be prompted to enter the appropriate password. See the following sub-section Entering Passwords,
for details on entering passwords at the HMI. Once access is gained to the control function, the EDIT LED
will light and a cursor will appear in the action field.
3. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling key to select the desired action. The selections available depend on the
logic mode setting for that switch. If it is set to Mode 1, the action choices are pulse or one of the two
positions as defined by the user programmable state labels. If Mode 2 (ON/OFF switch) is selected, the
choices for action are limited to one of the two positions. If Mode 3 (OFF/Momentary ON Switch) is
selected, the choice for action is limited to pulse.
4. Press the Edit pushbutton a second time and the switch will change to the selected position, the screen
will flash CHANGES SAVED and the EDIT LED will go out. If you want to abort the editing session without
changing any controls, press the Reset pushbutton before you press the Edit pushbutton the second time.
The screen will flash CHANGES LOST and the EDIT LED will go out.
Resetting Functions
The Reset pushbutton is context sensitive. Its function is dependent upon the screen that is presently being
displayed. For example, pressing the Reset key when the demand screen is displayed will reset the demands
but will not reset the alarms. It is necessary to scroll through the menu tree to the Alarm Screen to reset an
alarm. You are not prompted for a password when using the Reset key.
There are two BESTlogic variables associated with the HMI Reset pushbutton. Logic variable TRSTKEY
becomes TRUE when the Reset pushbutton is pressed while the Target Screen is displayed. Logic variable
ARSTKEY becomes TRUE when the Reset pushbutton is pressed while the Alarm Screen is displayed. See
Section 8, Application, Application Tips, for examples on the use of these variables.
Entering Passwords
If password security has been initiated for a function, the HMI will prompt you to enter a password when the
Edit pushbutton is pressed. To gain access, you must enter the appropriate password. A field of eight
asterisks appears with the cursor located under the leftmost character position. You can enter passwords by
performing the following procedures:
1. Press the UP or DOWN scrolling pushbuttons until the proper first character of the password appears.
Pressing UP scrolls through the alphabet and then the numbers in ascending order. Pressing DOWN
scrolls through the numbers and then the alphabet in descending order.
2. Press the RIGHT scrolling pushbutton to move the cursor to the next character of the password and select
the appropriate character.
3. Continue the process until the entire password has been spelled out. If the password is less than eight
characters, leave the remaining asterisks in place instead of entering blanks.
4. Press the Edit pushbutton to enter the password. If the proper password has been entered, the screen
will flash ACCESS GRANTED. If an incorrect password has been entered, the screen will flash ACCESS
DENIED and the EDIT LED will go out.
5. Once you gain access, it remains in affect for five minutes after the last pushbutton has been pressed.
As long as you continue to press the Edit key for a function for which you have gained access, the five
minute timer will be refreshed and you will not be prompted for a password.

SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
SERIAL PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
RS-232 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
RS-485 Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Using the ASCII Command Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Human to Machine ASCII Command Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Command Text File Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Embedding Comments into ASCII Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Miscellaneous Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Obtaining Help Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Changing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Exit Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Reading All Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Reading Specific Groups of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Reading Logic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Configuring the Serial Port Communication Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
COMMAND SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Miscellaneous Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Metering Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Report Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Setting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Alarm Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Breaker Monitoring and Setting - Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
General Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13
Programmable Logic Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
User Programmable Name Setting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16
Protection Setting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17
Global Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-18
BE1-700 ASCII Command Interface i

SECTION 11 • ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE
INTRODUCTION
Relay and power system information can be retrieved from a remote location using the ASCII command
interface. The ASCII command interface is also used to enter settings, retrieve reports and metering
information, and perform control operations. A communication port on the relay front panel provides a
temporary, local interface for communication. Communication ports on the rear panel provide a permanent
communication interface.
Front and rear panel communication ports can be connected to computers, terminals, serial printers, modems
and intermediate communication/control interfaces such as RS-232 serial multiplexors. BE1-700
communication protocols support ASCII and binary data transmissions. ASCII data is used to send and
receive human readable data and commands. Binary data is used for computer communication and
transmission of raw oscillographic fault data if available.
The ModbusTM manual (9376700991) is currently the only available communication protocol instruction
manual. DNP and other common protocols will be made available in the future. For information about other
protocols, consult your Basler Electric representative. Note: ASCII commands which support Ethernet-
enabled relays can be found in Section 15, BESTNet Communication.
SERIAL PORT
Communication connections consist of one Data Communication Equipment (DCE) RS-232 port, one RS-485
port, an IRIG port and an optional RJ45 Ethernet port (Com 1). The BE1-700 communication protocol is
compatible with readily available modem/terminal software. If required, password protection provides security
against unauthorized operation. Detailed information about making communication connections is provided
in Section 12, Installation. Communications port setup is covered in this section. Security settings are covered
in Section 9, Security.
RS-232 Port
One female RS-232 (DB-9) connector is provided on the front panel and is designated COM0. It supports full-
duplex operation.
RS-485 Port
RS-485 terminal block connections are located on the rear panel and designated COM 2. This port supports
half-duplex, multi-drop operation. Multi-drop operation is possible if a polling address is programmed for the
port.
Ethernet Port
Optional Ethernet capability (Com 1) is available. See Section 15, BESTNet Communication.
NOTE
from the Ethernet port. See Section 9, Security, for details.
ASCII COMMAND INTERFACE

A computer terminal or PC running terminal emulation software can be used at either of the two serial ports
to send commands to the relay. Simple ASCII command language is used to communicate with the relay.
When the relay receives a command, it responds with the appropriate action. ASCII commands can be used
in human to machine interactions and in batch download type operations.
Command Structure
An ASCII command consists of a string made up of one or two letters followed by a hyphen and an object
name:
BE1-700 ASCII Command Interface 11-1
where: x Specifies the general command function.
y Specifies the command subgroup.
object name Defines the specific object to which the command refers.
Examples of object names include 51N (neutral inverse time overcurrent function) and PIA (phase A peak
current demand register). A command string entered by itself is a read command. A command string followed
by an equal sign (=) and one or more parameters is a write command.
General command functions are organized into five major groups plus one group of miscellaneous commands.
CONTROL (C): Control commands perform select-before-operate control actions such as circuit breaker
tripping and closing and active setting group changes. Subgroups include Select (S) and
Operate (O).
GLOBAL (G): One Global command performs operations that don’t fall into the other general groups.
The command for reading and changing passwords (GS-PW) is the only global
command available.
METERING (M): Commands in this group report all real-time metering values. No subgroup is used with
metering commands.
REPORTS (R): Reports commands read and reset reporting functions such as time and date, demand
registers, and breaker duty statistics. Subgroups include Alarms (A), Breaker Monitoring
(B), Demand Recording (D), Fault Summary Reporting (F), General Information (G),
Sequence of Events Recorder (S) and Oscillography (O).
SETTINGS (S): This group contains all of the setting parameters that govern relay function. Subgroups
include Setting Groups 0 and 1, Protection Settings (P) not in setting groups, Alarm
Settings (A), Breaker Monitor Settings (B), General Settings (G) and Logic Settings (L).
MISCELLANEOUS: Miscellaneous commands include Access, Exit and Help. Note that only the first letter
of these commands must be entered; entering the full command name is optional.
Using the ASCII Command Interface
Human to Machine ASCII Command Operations

Using ASCII commands, settings can be read and changed on a function by function basis. The mnemonic
format of the commands helps you interact with the relay. It isn’t necessary to remember all of the object
names. Most commands don’t require that you specify a complete object name. If the first two letters of a
command are entered, the relay will respond with all applicable object names.
ASCII Command Examples

1. Obtain a breaker operations count by entering RB (Report Breaker). The BE1-700 responds with the
operations counter value along with all other breaker report objects. If you know that the object name for
the breaker operations counter is OPCNTR, you can enter RB-OPCNTR and read only the number of
breaker operations.
Partial object names are also supported. This allows multiple objects to be read or reset at the same time.
2. Read all peak-since-reset demand current registers. Entering RD-PI (Report Demand - Peak Current (I))
will return demand values and time stamps for phase A, B, C, neutral and negative-sequence current. To
read only the Neutral demand value, the full object name (RD-PIN) is entered. Entering RD-PI=0 resets
all five of the peak-since-reset current demand registers.
Command Text File Operations

In command text file operations, an ASCII text file of commands is created and sent to the relay. For example,
the S command is used to retrieve a complete list of settings from the relay in ASCII command format. This
list of commands is captured, saved to a file, edited with any ASCII text editor and then uploaded to the relay.
11-2 ASCII Command Interface BE1-700

Because the number of relay settings is so large, loading settings with a text file is the preferred method of
setting the BE1-700.
Embedding Comments into ASCII Text Files
Adding comments to ASCII settings files is an easy way to organize and label your settings. A comment line
is started with two forward slashes (//) followed by the comment text. When the relay encounters // in a text
file, it ignores all following characters until the next carriage return or linefeed character.
Example of embedding comments in a settings file.
1. //Group0 is used during normal operation
>S0-50TP=7.50,0m;S0-50TN=2.5,0m . . .
//Group1 is used during cold load pickup
>S1-50TP=0,0m; S1-50TN=0,0m; S1-50TQ=0,0m
Miscellaneous Command Descriptions
Obtaining Help Information

The HELP (H) command provides general information on command syntax and functionality when the manual
is not available. Entering HELP or H provides information about using the HELP command. HELP1 or H1
returns a complete list of relay commands. Entering HELP <cmd>, where <cmd> is a specific command,
returns information about the use and format of the command along with an example of how the command
is used.
HELP Command
Purpose: Obtain help with command information.
Syntax: HELPx/<cmd>
Changing Settings
Access Command. Before making settings changes through a communication port, the ACCESS command
must be used to obtain programming access. Enter ACCESS=<password> to obtain access to change
settings associated with the password. Different passwords give the ability or access to perform different
operations. The relay will deny access if an invalid password is entered or if another user has already been
granted programming access through another serial port or at the front panel. Only one user can have access
at any one time.
Even if password protection is not used, it is still necessary to obtain access so that accidental changes are
prevented. If password protection is disabled, then ACCESS= will be accepted in place of a password. The
relay will respond with ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL if the command entered was received and executed.
The relay will respond with an error message and a ? if the command could not be executed.
The ACCESS (A) command and the EXIT (E) command are used to change relay settings, reset report
registers and enable control commands through a serial port. These commands prevent changes from being
made concurrently from two areas. For example, a user cannot make changes through COM 0 at the same
time a remote user is making changes through COM 2.
ACCESS Command
Purpose: Reads or sets access level in order to change settings.
Syntax: ACCESS=<password> or A=<password>
Comments: The ACCESS command must be used before any changes to settings can be made.
Available ACCESS privileges are summarized in the following paragraphs.
READ-ONLY: This is the default access privilege when no passwords are active. Read-only access allows
you to read settings and reports but not make settings changes.
PRIVILEGE G: GLOBAL ACCESS. Global access is obtained by password G (PWG). Global access permits
entry of any command with no restrictions.
PRIVILEGE S: SETTING ACCESS. Setting access is obtained by password S (PWS). Setting access allows
changes to any settings.

PRIVILEGE C: CONTROL ACCESS. Control access is obtained by password C (PWC). Control access
enables relay control operations.
PRIVILEGE R: REPORT ACCESS. Report access is obtained by password R (PWR). Report access enables
report operations to be performed.
An access privilege is obtained only when the appropriate password is entered. When a valid password is
entered, the relay responds with the access privilege provided by the password entered. If an invalid password
is entered, an error message is returned. If password protection is disabled in one or more privileges, then
entering any string will provide access to the unprotected privileges.
Note: In examples throughout this manual, relay responses are printed in Courier New typeface.
ACCESS Command Examples

1. A valid password is entered.
>ACCESS=OPENUP
ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL
2. An invalid password is entered.
>ACCESS=POENUP
ACCESS DENIED
3. The current access privilege is read.
>ACCESS
ACCESS: GLOBAL
Exit Command
After changes are made, the new data is saved or discarded using the EXIT command. Prior to saving or
discarding any changes, you must confirm that you wish to exit the programming mode. There are three exit
options: Y (yes), N (no) or C (continue).
EXIT Command
Purpose: Exit the programming mode.
Syntax: EXIT (Note: The relay will prompt for verification.)
Comments: It’s important to make all programming changes before executing the EXIT command. This
prevents a partial or incomplete protection scheme from being implemented.
When access privileges are obtained, all programming changes are made to a temporary, scratchpad copy
of relay settings. These changes aren’t saved to nonvolatile memory and initiated until the EXIT command is
invoked and confirmed. After the EXIT command is entered, the relay prompts to confirm that the new data
should be saved. Three options, Y, N or C are available. Entering Y will save the data. If N is entered, the
relay will clear the changes and resume operating with the old settings. Entering C will abort the EXIT
command and allow programming to continue.
EXIT Command Example

Release programming privileges and save settings changes.
>EXIT<CR>
SAVE CHANGES (Y/N/C)? Prompt to save Yes, No or Continue
>Y<CR> Confirmation to save changes

CHANGES SAVED Confirmation that changes were saved
Reading All Settings

All user programmable settings can be listed using the S command. This read-only command is useful for
documenting relay status during installation. The settings retrieved by the S command can be saved to a
standard text file and sent to another relay to be configured with the same settings. This type of settings
transfer takes less than one minute.

S Command
Purpose: Read all relay setting parameters.
Syntax: S
The S command returns the values of relay setting parameters in the same form that they are programmed.
It can be used at the end of a programming session to make a record of the relay settings. If saved in a file,
the report can be sent to another BE1-700 that will use the same settings. Because the report that is created
is a set of commands, sending the report to a different relay re-programs that relay with the settings contained
in the S report.
Reading Specific Groups of Settings

While the S command is useful for reading all relay settings, several commands are available to read specific
groups of settings.
SA Command
Purpose: Read all alarm settings for BKR, Major, Minor and Logic alarms.
Syntax: SA
SA Command Example
1. Read all alarm settings.
>SA
SA-BKR1=0,0; SA-BKR2=0,0; SA-BKR3=0,0
SA-DIP=0.00; SA-DIN=0.00; SA-DIQ=0.00
SA-LGC=0
SA-MAJ=25
SA-MIN=29
SA-RESET=0
SB Command
Purpose: Read all breaker settings.
Syntax: SB
SB Command Example
1. Read all breaker settings, fully loaded relay.
>SB
SB-DUTY=0,0.000e+00
SB-LOGIC=/IN1
SG Command
Purpose: Read all general settings.
Syntax: SG
SG Command Example
1. Obtain a report of all general settings.
>SG
SG-EMAIL1=0; SG-EMAIL2=0; SG-EMAIL3=0; SG-EMAIL4=0
SG-EMAIL5=0; SG-EMAIL6=0; SG-EMAIL7=0
SG-FREQ=60
SG-PHROT=ACB
SG-CTP=1
SG-CTG=1
SG-NOM=0.0,5.00
SG-IN1= 4, 16; SG-IN2= 4, 16; SG-IN3= 4, 16; SG-IN4= 4, 16
SG-HOLDA=0; SG-HOLD1=1; SG-HOLD2=1; SG-HOLD3=0
SG-HOLD4=0; SG-HOLD5=1
SG-SGCON= 5
SG-DIP=15; SG-DIN= 1; SG-DIQ= 1
SG-TARG=BF/50TP/150TP/50TN/150TN/50TQ/150TQ/51P/62/162/51N/151N/51Q,0

SG-TRIGGER=VO11+BFT,VO12+BFPU,0
SG-OSC=16
SG-ID=BE1-700,SUBSTATION_1
SG-BL=600
SG-CLK=M,24,0
SG-SCREEN1=4.6; SG-SCREEN2=1.5.6; SG-SCREEN3=4.3.1; SG-SCREEN4=0
SG-SCREEN5=0; SG-SCREEN6=0; SG-SCREEN7=0; SG-SCREEN8=0
SG-COM0=9600,A0,P0,R1,X1
SG-COM2=9600,A0,P0,R1,X0,MF1,MPN,MR10,MS1
>
SN Command
Purpose: Read/Set user programmable names for 43 virtual switches, virtual outputs and inputs where
<var>=43, 143, VOA, VO1 to VO15, IN1 to IN4.
Syntax: SNn={name},{TRUE label},{FALSE label} where n=<var>
SN Command Example
1. Read the programmed labels for the alarm output (OUTA).
>SN-VOA
VOA_LABEL,TRUE,FALSE
S<g> Command
Purpose: Read all protection settings for all Setting Group 0 and 1.
Syntax: S<g> where g = 0 or 1
S <g> Command Example
Obtain a list of settings for Setting Group 1.
>S1
S1-50TP=0.00, 0m,N
S1-50TN=0.00, 0m,N
S1-50TQ=0.00, 0m,N
S1-150TP=0.00, 0m,N
S1-150TN=0.00, 0m,N
S1-150TQ=0.00, 0m,N
S1-51P=0.00,0.0,V2,N
S1-51N=0.00,0.0,V2,N
S1-51Q=0.00,0.0,V2,N
S1-151N=0.00,0.0,V2,N
S1-62= 0m, 0m
S1-162= 0m, 0m
SP-BF= 0m
SP-CURVE= 0.2663, 0.0339, 1.0000, 1.2969, 0.5000
>
Reading Logic Settings

The SL command is used to view the names of available logic schemes in memory. It also will return all of the
logic equations for a specific logic scheme.
SL Command
Purpose: Obtain setting logic information.
Syntax: SL:<name>
Comments: No password access is required to read settings.
Entering SL by itself returns all of the logic equations associated with the active logic scheme including custom
logic. Entering SL: returns the names of all available logic schemes. Entering SL:<name> returns all logic
equations and settings for the named logic scheme.

SL Command Examples
1. Read the logic schemes available in memory.
>SL:
700C-5051-A-BE or 700C-OC79-A-BE or 700V-OUVF-A-BE or 700V-VF79-A-BE or NONE
2. Read all logic settings associated with the active logic scheme (assuming that it is 700C-5051-A-BE).
>SL:700C-5051-A-BE
SL-N:700C-5051-A-BE,BASLER
SL-50TP:1,0
SL-50TN:1,0
SL-50TQ:1,0
SL-150TP:0,0
SL-150TN:0,0
SL-150TQ:0,0
SL-51P:1,0
SL-51N:1,0
SL-51Q:1,0
SL-151N:0,0
SL-62:0,0,0
SL-162:0,0,0
SL-79:0,0,0,0,0,0
SL-BF:0,0,0
SL-GROUP:1,0,0,/0
SL-43:0
SL-143:0
SL-101:0
SL-VOA:0
SL-VO1:VO11
SL-VO2:50TPT
SL-VO3:51PT
SL-VO4:50TNT+50TQT
SL-VO5:51NT+51QT
SL-VO6:0
SL-VO7:0
SL-VO8:0
SL-VO9:0
SL-VO10:0
SL-VO11:50TPT+150TPT+50TNT+150TNT+50TQT+150TQT+51PT+51NT+151NT+51QT
SL-VO12:50TPPU+150TPPU+50TNPU+150TNPU+50TQPU+150TQPU+51PPU+51NPU+151NPU+
51QPU
SL-VO13:0
SL-VO14:0
SL-VO15:0
>
Configuring the Serial Port Communication Protocol

The serial communication protocol is defined with the SG-COM command shown below.
SG-COM0 or SG-COM2 Commands

Purpose: Read or set the serial communications protocol of Com Port 0 or Com Port 2.
Syntax: SG-COM<n> = <baud>,<A>,,<R>,<X> where n = 0, 2
Comments: Password Access Privilege G or Privilege S required to change
settings n = port number. (0 = Front, 2 = Rear 485)
baud = baud rate (300/ 600/ 1200/ 2400/ 4800/ 9600/ 19K)
A = Address for polled operation
P = Page length (lines/pg) setting
R = Reply acknowledgment level
X = Xon/Xoff setting where X0 = handshake disabled, X1 = handshake enabled.

The following parameters pertain to relays using ModbusTM communication
protocol at COM 2.
MFx = ModbusTM extended precision format where x = 0 for floating point or 1 for triple
precision
MPx = ModbusTM parity where x = N (none), O (odd), and E (even).
MRx = ModbusTM remote delay time where x = 10 (msec.) to 200 (msec.).
MSx = ModbusTM stop bit where x = 1 for one stop bit or 2 for two stop bits.
If a non-zero address is programmed in the 'A' parameter, then the relay will ignore all commands that are not
preceded by its specific address. If an address of 0 is programmed, then the relay will respond with an error
message for any command preceded by an address.
If polling software sends a command preceded by an address of 0, then that command will be treated as a
global command. All relays will execute the command but no relay will respond to avoid bus contention.
Note: Polling is disabled on COM 0 (Front RS-232), so an attempt to program an address other than A0 will
cause an error message. The factory default settings are 9600,A0,P24,R1,X1 for COM0 and 9600,
A0,P0,R1,X0 for COM 2.
SG-COM Command Examples
1. Program front port for 1200 baud
>SG-COM0=1200
2. Read the protocol setting for rear RS-485 port.
>SG-COM2
9600,A0,P0,R1,X0
3. Read settings for com port 2.
>SG-COM
SG-COM2=9600,A0,P0,R1,X0
COMMAND SUMMARY
Miscellaneous Commands
ACCESS Command
Purpose: Read/set access level in order to change settings.
Syntax: ACCESS[=<password>] or A[=<password>]
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Miscellaneous Command Descriptions
EXIT Command
Purpose: Exit programming mode.
Syntax: EXIT Note: Relay will prompt for verification.
HELP Command
Purpose: Obtain help with command operation.
Syntax: HELP <cmd> or H <cmd> gives help with a command; H1 gives command list

Metering Commands
M Command
Purpose: Read all metered values.
Syntax: M
Reference: Section 5, Metering, Metering Command Descriptions
M-I Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read metered current (I) in primary units.
Syntax: M-I<phase> where <phase> = 1 (Positive-Sequence), A (Phase A), B
(Phase B), C
(Phase C), G (Ground), N (Neutral - 3I0), Q (Negative-Sequence)
Reference: Section 5, Metering, Metering Command Descriptions
Control Commands
CO Command
Purpose: Control operation.
Syntax: CO-<control>[=<mode>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Outputs (CO-OUT)
Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups (CO-GROUP)
Section 4, Protection and Control, Virtual Switches (CO-43)
Section 4, Protection and Control, Virtual Switches (CO-101)
CS Command
Purpose: Control selection.
Syntax: CS-<control>[=<mode>]
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Outputs (CS-OUT)
Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups (CS-GROUP); Virtual Switches (CS-
43); Virtual Switches (CS-101)
Report Commands
RA Command
Purpose: Report/Reset alarm information.
Syntax: RA-<type>=0 where <type>= LGC (Logic), MAJ (Major), MIN (Minor)
or REL (Relay) and <=0> = clears the latch alarm
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarm Function
RA-LGC Command
Purpose: Report/Reset logic alarm information.
Syntax: RA-LGC=0
RA-MAJ Command
Purpose: Report/Reset major alarm information.
Syntax: RA-MAJ=0
RA-MIN Command
Purpose: Report/Reset minor alarm information.
Syntax: RA-MIN=0

RA-REL Command
Purpose: Report/Reset relay alarm information.
Syntax: RA-REL=0
RB Command
Purpose: Read breaker status.
Syntax: RB
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker Monitoring
RB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact Duty Log for phase A, B and C.
Syntax: RB-DUTYn={%duty} where n = A, B or C
RB-OPCNTR Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker operation counter.
Syntax: RB-OPCNTR={#operations}
RD Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Report all demand data (peak, today and yesterday).
Syntax: RD
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Demand Functions
RD-PI Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Reset peak demand current (phase A, B, C, Neutral, Negative-Sequence).
Syntax: RD-PI=0 where =A/B/C/N/Q
RD-TI Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Report today’s demand current (I) (phase A, B, C, Neutral, Negative-Sequence).
Syntax: RD-TI where =A, B, C, N, Q
RD-YI Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Report yesterday’s metered demand current (I) (phase A, B, C, Neutral, Negative-
Sequence).
Syntax: RD-YI where = A, B, C, N, Q
RF Command
Purpose: Read/Reset fault report data for particular fault ID or the newest fault data.
Syntax: RF(-n/NEW)=0/TRIG
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting
RG Command
Purpose: Report general information (date, time and targets).
Syntax: RG
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock
RG-DATE Command
Purpose: Read/Set date.
Syntax: RG-DATE=<M/D/Y> or RG-DATE=<D-M-Y>

RG-STAT Command
Purpose: Report relay status.
Syntax: RG-STAT
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General Status Reporting
RG-TARG Command
Purpose: Report/Reset target status.
Syntax: RG-TARG means return target information logged during the most recent trip event and
RE-TARG=0 clears the latched target data.
RG-TIME Command
Purpose: Report/Set time.
Syntax: RG-TIME=hr:mn:sc or RG-TIME=hr:mn<f>sc] where <f>-P or A for 12-hour format.
RG-VER Command
Purpose: Read program version, model number, style number and serial number.
Syntax: RG-VER
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Hardware and Software Version Reporting
RO Command
Purpose: Read oscillographic COMTRADE.DAT/.CFG fault report.
Syntax: RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT
RS Command
Purpose: Read/Reset Sequence of Events record data.
Syntax: RS-<n>, RS-F<id>, RS-ALM, RS-IO, RS-NEW where <n> = last xx events
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Sequence of Events Recorder
Setting Command
S Command
Purpose: Read all relay setting parameters.
Syntax: S
Comments: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands
Alarm Setting Commands
SA Command
Purpose: Read all alarm settings for 24, BKR, Major, Minor and Logic alarms.
Syntax: SA
Reference: Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Using ASCII Commands

SA-BKR Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker alarm settings.
Syntax: SA-BKRn={mode},{alarm limit} where n = 1, 2, 3 and Mode = 0 - 3 (disabled/ %duty /#op/
clr), alarm limit = 0 - 100% for Mode = 1, 0 - 99,999 operations for Mode = 2 and 20 -
2,000 ms for Mode = 3
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Breaker Monitoring
SA-DI Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set demand alarm settings, phase, neutral and negative-sequence maximum
current (I).
Syntax: SA-DI<n>={alarm level} where <n> = P, N, Q
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Demand Functions
SA-LGC Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic alarm setting mask.

Syntax: SA-LGC={alarm num}/.../{alarm num}
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Alarms Function
SA-MAJ Command
Purpose: Read/Set major alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-MAJ={alarm num}/ . . . {alarm num}
SA-MIN Command
Purpose: Read/Set minor alarm setting mask.
Syntax: SA-MIN={alarm num}/ . . . {alarm num}
SA-RESET Command
Purpose: Read/Set programmable alarms reset logic.
Syntax: SA-RESET={rst alm logic}
Breaker Monitoring and Setting - Commands
SB Command
Purpose: Read all breaker settings.
Syntax: SB
SB-DUTY Command
Purpose: Read/Set Breaker Contact Duty mode, max and block duty logic.
Syntax: SB-DUTY={Mode},{DMAX}, {BLK BKR logic}

SB-LOGIC Command
Purpose: Read/Set breaker contact logic.
Syntax: SB-LOGIC={breaker close logic}
General Setting Commands
SG Command
Purpose: Read all general settings.
Syntax: SG
SG-BL Command
Purpose: Read/Program backlight timer.
Syntax: SG-BL[={timer}]
Example: SG-BL=5000 or SG-BL=60000
SG-CLK Command
Purpose: Read/Program format of date and time display and daylight savings time enable.
Syntax: SG-CLK={date format (M/D)},{time format (12/24)},{dst enable (0/1)}
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Clock
SG-COM Command
Purpose: Read/Set serial communication parameters (baud, Addr, Page length, Rreply Ack, Xon
enable for Communication Port 0 and 2.
Syntax: SG-COM<n>={baud},{A},{P},{R},{X} where <n> = 0 or 2.
Reference: Section 9, User Interface and Security, User Interface
Section 11, ASCII Command Interface, Serial Port Settings and Connections
SG-CT Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set Phase/Ground CT ratio.
Syntax: SG-CT<n>={CT ratio} where <n> = P, G
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Current Inputs
SG-DI Command
Purpose: Read/Set P(IA/IB/IC/var/watt), N and Q demand interval.
Syntax: SG-DI<n>={interval} where <n> = P, N, Q
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarms Function, Demand Functions
SG-FREQ Command
Purpose: Read/Enter power system frequency (50 or 60 Hz).
Syntax: SG-FREQ={freq (Hz)}
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage Inputs

SG-HOLD Command
Purpose: Read/Enable Output1-5. Hold operation where 1 = enable, 0 = disable.
Syntax: SG-HOLD<n>={1/0 hold enable} where <n> = 1 to 5 A
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Outputs
SG-ID Command
Purpose: Read/Set relay ID and station ID used in reports.
Syntax: SG-ID={relay ID (up to 30 char)},{Station ID (up to 30 char)}
Examples: BE1-700,SUBSTATION_1, SG-ID=448,SUBSTATION3 or SG-ID=GEN3,
POWERPOINT_SUBSTATION
SG-IN Command
Purpose: Read/Set Input 1 - 4 recognition/debounce.
Syntax: SG-IN<n>={Recognition Time (ms)},{Debounce Time (ms)} where <n> = 1 to 4 and ms =
1 to 255
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Contact Sensing Inputs
SG-NOM Command
Purpose: Read/Enter power system nominal voltage and current.

Syntax: SG-NOM={Nom Volts},{Nom Amps}
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, VT Fuse Loss Detection (60FL)
SG-OSC Command
Purpose: Read/Set the number of oscillograph fault records saved.
Syntax: SG-OSC={number of record partitions} where 6, 8, 10, 12, 15, 16 is acceptable.
Reference: Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Oscillographic Records
SG-PHROT Command
Purpose: Read/Set phase rotation setting.

Syntax: SG-PHROT={phase rotation} (ABC/ACB)
Reference: Section 3, Input and Output Functions, Voltage Inputs
SG-SCREEN Command
Purpose: Read/Set default screen(s).
Syntax: SG-SCREEN={default screen number}
Reference: Section 10, Human-Machine Interface, Front Panel Display
SG-SGCON Command
Purpose: Read/Set SGC output on time.
Syntax: SG-SGCON={time} where time is in s (seconds)
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups
SG-TARG Command
Purpose: Report/Enable Target List and Reset Target Logic.
Syntax: SG-TARG={x/x/...x},{rst TARG logic}

SG-TRIGGER Command
Purpose: Read/Set trigger logic for Trip, Pickup, Logic and Close logic expressions that trigger a
fault record and oscillographic record(s).
Syntax: SG-TRIGGER={TRIP trigger},{Pickup trigger},{LOGIC trigger},{Close}
Programmable Logic Setting Commands
SL Command
Purpose: Read all setting logic information.
Syntax: SL:<name>
SL-24 Command (BE1-700V only)

Purpose: Read/Set logic for 24 function modules.
Syntax: SL-24[={mode},{BLK logic}]
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control
SL-25 Command (BE1-700V only) (Optional)

Purpose: Read/Set logic for 25 function modules.
Syntax: SL-25[={mode},{BLK logic}]
SL-43/143 Commands
Purpose: Enable/disable the 43 and 143 virtual switches.
Syntax: SL-<x>43={mode} where <x> = blank or 1
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Virtual Switches
SL-50T/150T Commands (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set mode and block logic for 50T phase, neutral and negative-sequence modules.
Syntax: SL-<x>50T<n>={mode},<BLK logic} where <x> = blank or 1 and <n> = P, N, Q
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Overcurrent Protection
SL-51 Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set mode and block logic for 51 phase, neutral and negative-sequence modules.
Syntax: SL-51<n>={mode},<BLK logic} where <n> = P, N, Q
SL-151 Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set mode and block logic for 151 phase and neutral function modules.
Syntax: SL-151<n>={mode},<BLK logic} where <n> = P, N
SL-101 Command
Purpose: Enable or disable the virtual breaker control switch (101).
Syntax: SL-101={mode}

SL-62/162 Commands
Purpose: Read/Set logic, ini and block logic for 62 and 162 function modules.
Syntax: SL-<x>62={mode},{INI logic},{BLK logic} where <x> = blank or 1
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Logic Timers (62/162)
SL-79 Command (Optional)

Purpose: Read/Set logic for 79 function
Syntax: SL-79=<mode,<RI logic>,<STATUS logic>,<WAIT logic>,<LOCKOUT logic>,<PI logic>
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Reclosing
SL-x81 Commands (BE1-700V only)

Purpose: Read/Set mode and block logic for x81 Over/Underfrequency function modules.
Syntax: SL-<x>81={mode},{BLK logic} where <x> = blank, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Frequency Protection
SL-BF Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set logic for breaker failure function module.
Syntax: SL-BF={mode},{INI logic},{BLK logic}
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Breaker Failure Protection
SL-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/Set logic for setting group module.
Syntax: SL-GROUP={mode},{D0Logic},{D1Logic}{AUTOLogic}
SL-N Command
Purpose: Read/Set the name of the custom logic.
Syntax: SL-N={name}
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Logic Schemes
SL-VO Command
Purpose: Read/Set output logic for auxiliary outputs.
Syntax: SL-VO<n>={Boolean equation} where <n> = A, 1 - 15
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, Working With Programmable Logic
User Programmable Name Setting Command
SN Command
Purpose: Read/Set user programmable names for 43 virtual switches, virtual outputs and inputs
where <var>=43, 143, VOA VO1 to VO15, IN1 to IN4.
Syntax: SN-<n>={name},{TRUE label},{FALSE label} where <n> = <var>
Reference: Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, User Input and Output Logic Variable Names

Protection Setting Commands
S<g> Command
Purpose: Read all protection settings for all Setting Group 0 and 1.
Syntax: S<g> where <g> = 0 (Group 0) or 1 (Group 1) or # (both Group 0 & 1) (Use this syntax
for all S<g> commands to follow.)
S<g>-24 Command (BE1-700V only)

Purpose: Read/Set 24 pickup level, time delay, reset delay and curve.
Syntax: S<g>-24[={pu (V/Hz)},{td},{rst},{crv}] where g = 0, 1, 2, 3
S<g>-25 Command (BE1-700V only)
Purpose: Read/Set 25 delta volts, phase angle, slip frequency and mode.
Syntax: S<g>-25[={Volts},{Ang},{Slip},{mode}] where g = 0, 1; mode =1 - PF > XF, 0 - PF <> XF
S<g>-50T/150T Commands (BE1-700C only)
Purpose: Read/Set 50T Phase, Neutral, Negative-Sequence pickup level, time delay and direction
(Forward, Reverse or Nondirectional).
Syntax: S<g>-<x>50T<n>={Pickup},{Time Delay},{Direction} where <x> = blank or 1 and <n> =
P, N, Q
S<g>-51P/N/Q Commands (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set 51 Phase, Neutral, Negative-Sequence pickup level, time delay, curve type
and direction (Forward, Reverse or Nondirectional).
Syntax: S<g>-51<n>={Pickup},{Time Delay},{Curve},{Direction} where <n> = P, N, Q
S<g>-151N Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set 151 Neutral pickup level, time delay, curve type and direction (Forward,
Reverse or Nondirectional).
Syntax: S<g>-151N={Pickup},{Time Delay},{Curve},{Direction}
S<g>-62/162 Commands
Purpose: Read/Set 62/162 time delay.

Syntax: S<g>-<x>162={TD1},{TD2} where <x> = blank or 1
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Logic Timers (62/162)
S<g>-79 Command (Optional)

Purpose: Read/Set 79 time delay.
Syntax: S<g>-79<x>=<Time Delay> where <x> = 1, 2, 3 or 4 for automatic reclosing groups; R
for reset time; F for fail time; and M for max time.

S<g>-79SCB Command (Optional)
Purpose: Read/Set 79 Sequence Controlled Block Output.
Syntax: S<g>-79SCB=<step list>
SP-BF Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set the Breaker Failure timer setting.
Syntax: SP-BF={Timer Setting}
Reference: Section 4, Protection and Control, Breaker Failure Protection
SP-CURVE Command (BE1-700C only)

Purpose: Read/Set the user programmable 51 curve parameters.
Syntax: SP-CURVE={A},{B},{C},{N},{R}
Reference: Appendix A, Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curves
SP-79ZONE Command (Optional)

Purpose: Read/Set 79 zone-sequence logic.
Syntax: SP-79ZONE=<zone pickup logic>
SP-GROUP Command
Purpose: Read/Program auxiliary setting group auto operation.

Syntax: SP-GROUP<x>=[<sw_time>,<sw_level>,<ret_time>,<ret_level>,<prot_elem>]
Global Commands
GS-PW Command
Purpose: Read/Set a password and access port(s) for Global, Setting, Control and Report
privilege levels.
Syntax: GS-PW<n>={password},{com ports (0/1/ 2)} where <n> = G, S, C, R
Reference: Section 9, Security
GS-PWTIME Command
Purpose: Read/Set a password timeout.
Syntax: GS-PWTIME={timeout time (m)} where (m) = minutes
Reference: Section 9, Security

SECTION 12 • INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 12 • INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Case Cutouts and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
RELAY CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Typical DC and AC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
CT Polarity (BE1-700C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Sidebar: Current Circuit Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
POWER SYSTEM APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
PREPARING THE RELAY FOR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
RS-232 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
RS-485 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Ethernet Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
ASCII COMMAND COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
CONTACT SENSING INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Figures
Figure 12-1. Panel Mount, Non-drawout Case Dimensions (BE1-700C is Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Figure 12-2. Relay Cutout Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Figure 12-3. Rear Panel Terminal Connections, BE1-700C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Figure 12-4. Rear Panel Terminal Connections, BE1-700V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Figure 12-5. Typical External DC Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-6. Typical AC Connections for BE1-700V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Figure 12-7. Typical AC Connections for BE1-700C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 12-8. Standard CT Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-9. Current Transformer Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-10. Example of Reversed CT Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9
Figure 12-11. Three-phase Voltage Sensing, Alternate VTP Input (BE1-700V Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Figure 12-12. Overcurrent Protection of Typical Radial Loads - Distribution Circuit,
Motor or Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-13. Industrial Feeder, IG Connected to Core Balance CT for Sensitive Ground
Fault Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
Figure 12-14. Transformer Overcurrent Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
Figure 12-15. BE1-700V Bus Voltage Protection including UF Load Shed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Figure 12-16. BE1-700V Network Reclosing Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-17. Personal Computer to BE1-700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Figure 12-18. Modem to BE1-700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Figure 12-19. RFL9660 Protective Relay Switch to BE1-700 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-17
Figure 12-20. SEL 2020 to BE1-700 Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Figure 12-21. RS-485 DB-37 to BE1-700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Tables
Table 12-1. RS-232 Pinouts (COM 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
Table 12-2. RS-485 Pinouts (COM 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-18
Table 12-3. Contact Sensing Turn-On Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
BE1-700 Installation i
SECTION 12 • INSTALLATION
GENERAL
BE1-700 Digital Protective Relays are delivered with an instruction manual and BESTCOMS software in a
sturdy carton to prevent shipping damage. Upon receipt of the relay, check the model and style number
against the requisition and packaging list for agreement. If there is evidence of shipping damage, file a claim
with the carrier and notify the Basler Electric Regional Sales Office, your sales representative or a sales
representative at Basler Electric, Highland, Illinois.
If the BE1-700 is not installed immediately, store it in the original shipping package in a moisture and dust free
environment.
MOUNTING
Basler numeric relays are supplied in a Basler Electric “X” case. This is a panel mount, non-drawout case that
is mounted horizontally.
Case Cutouts and Dimensions

The case dimensions are shown in Figure 12-1. Mounting plate cutout and drilling dimensions for the relay
are shown in Figure 12-2.
BE1-700 Installation 12-1

R
4.458
(113.23)
OVERCURRENT
ITEM NUMBER: **************
50/60HZ
POWER SUPPLY: 48Vdc
10.500 (266.70)
D2848-52
08-23-04
(13.59)
BEHIND PANEL
FRONT PROJECTION
NOTE: The front panel shown is shown for a current relay.
Figure 12-1. Panel Mount, Non-drawout Case Dimensions (BE1-700C is Shown)
12-2 Installation BE1-700

Figure 12-2. Relay Cutout Dimensions
RELAY CONNECTIONS
Connections to the relay are dependent on the application and logic scheme selected by the user. As a result,
all of the relay's inputs and outputs may not be used for a given application. Before energizing a relay, make
sure the connections match the options associated with the model and style number found on the relay
nameplate. Refer to the style number identification charts in Figures 1-1 and 1-2 for available options. Be sure
to use the correct input power for the specified power supply. Incorrect wiring may result in damage to the
relay.
Figure 12-3 shows the rear-panel connections for the current relay case and Figure 12-4 shows the rear-panel
connections for the voltage relay case.

12-4
A8
COM 2 IA IB IC IG
RS-485 GND
+IRIG - A B C PWR D1 D3 D5 D7
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 BE1-700
DIGITAL
PROTECTIVE
RELAY
+ IN1 - + IN2 - + IN3 - + IN4 -

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
D2 D4 D6 D8
ETHERNET IA IB IC IG
Installation
R B as ler E lectric
Highland, Illinois USA (618) 654-2341
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 ALARM VA VB VC N VX VX !

WARNING
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 C16 C17 C18
Figure 12-3. Rear Panel Terminal Connections, BE1-700C

D2838-51
07-08-04
BE1-700
BE1-700
A8
COM 2 IA IB IC IG
RS-485 GND
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 BE1-700
DIGITAL
PROTECTIVE
RELAY
+ IN1 - + IN2 - + IN3 - + IN4 -

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
D2 D4 D6 D8
Installation
R B asler Electr ic

WARNING
Figure 12-4. Rear Panel Terminal Connections, BE1-700V

D2838-52
07-08-04
12-5
Typical DC and AC Connections
Typical external DC and AC connections for the BE1-700 are shown in Figures 12-5 through 12-7.
NOTE
The relay should be hard-wired to earth ground with no smaller than 12 AWG copper wire
attached to the rear ground terminal of the relay case. When the relay is configured in a
system with other protective devices, a separate ground bus lead is recommended for each
relay.
Figure 12-5. Typical External DC

Connections

A
B BUS
C
BE1-700
IN2 IN3 IN4
*
VA VB VC VN IN1 VX
+ + + + +
C13 C14 C15 C16 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 C17 C18
ISO ISO ISO ISO

Delta/Wye
Configuration Circuit
Installation
IRIG RS-485
COM2
A1 A2 ETHERNET
A3 A4 A5
+
A B C
TCM
Figure 12-6. Typical AC Connections for BE1-700V

PS
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 A6 A7 A8
D2838-46
06-04-04 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUTA PWR GND
* Vx Auxiliary Input is included with Voltage Sensing Input Option 4.

Ethernet Port (RJ45) is included with Communication Protocols Options 4 or 5.
12-7
12-8
A
B BUS
C
*
IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 VX
+ + + + +
BREAKER D1 D3 D5 D8 C13 C14 C15 C16 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 C17 C18
ISO ISO ISO ISO
Installation
A B C
IRIG RS-485
COM2
LINE IA IB IC IG
FORWARD A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 ETHERNET
+ A B C
TCM
Figure 12-7. Typical AC Connections for BE1-700C

PS
D2 D4 D6 D7 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 C10 C11 C12 A6 A7 A8
D2838-47
06-04-04 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUTA PWR GND
* Vx Auxiliary Input is included with Voltage Sensing Input Option 4.

Ethernet Port ( RJ45) is included with Comminication Protocols Options 4, 5 or 6.
BE1-700
CT Polarity (BE1-700C)
CT polarity is critical to the proper operation of the BE1-700C. The sidebar below provides fundamental
information on CT polarity and protective relays.
Sidebar: Current Circuit Polarity
Figure 12-8. Standard CT Polarity Figure 12-9. Current Transformer Action
By ANSI convention, current transformer polarity will face away

from the protected winding of a transformer, motor, generator
or reactor, and away from the contacts in a circuit breaker.
Therefore, primary current flow towards the winding or contacts
(direction of protected zone) will result in a secondary current
out X1 in phase with the primary (see Figures 12-8 and 12-9).
On occasion, however, protection engineers will run into

situations where CT polarity is reversed for a specific
application. That is, non-polarity of the CT secondary will be in
phase with the primary current flow (Figure 12-10). For
example, a transformer differential CT from a breaker with a
different polarity convention, such as low voltage switchgear or
a bus differential CT taken from the low side of a transformer.
Orientation of CT polarity relative to primary current flow

establishes the secondary CT terminal that should be Figure 12-10. Example of Reversed CT
connected to polarity of the protective relay. Polarity
Terminal Blocks
There are two sizes of terminal blocks used on the X case design, the current circuit block and the input-output
blocks. The current circuit terminal block is the larger of the two types and uses 8/32 inch Phillips head screws
with lock washers. The input-output block is the smaller of the two types and uses 6/32 inch slot or Phillips
head screws with no washer.
NOTE
Except as noted, relay connections should be made with a minimum wire size of #14 AWG.
As stated, the current circuit terminal block on the X case uses 8/32 Phillips head screws with lock washers.
The lock washer is an integral part of the current circuit wiring system and should not be removed. Without
the lock washer, the 8/32 screw may bottom out preventing a tight fit against the lug (screw feels tight but lug
may move under the screw head).

The maximum wire lug width accommodated by the current circuit terminal block on the “X” case is .344
inches (8.6 mm). The maximum wire lug width accommodated by the input-output block on the case is 0.320
inches (8.1 mm).
Figure 12-11. Three-phase Voltage Sensing, Alternate VTP Input (BE1-700V Only)

POWER SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
Figures 12-12 through 12-16 are examples of the applications that can be served by the Basler Electric BE1-
700 series of products. Many of these applications can be used in concert with other Basler numeric systems.
Contact Basler Electric for applications assistance.
Notes: Î
1. The neutral ground (IN) operates on internally calculated residual (3Io) current.
Figure 12-12. Overcurrent Protection of Typical Radial Loads - Distribution Circuit, Motor or Reactor

Notes: Î
2. Independent Ground Input (IG) supplied by a core balance CT.
Figure 12-13. Industrial Feeder, IG Connected to Core Balance CT for Sensitive Ground Fault Detection

D2877-45
06-04-04
Notes: Î
Figure 12-14. Transformer Overcurrent Protection

Ao
VN
BE1-700V C16
VA VB VC
C13 C14 C15
1
52
Distribution Bus
Ao
D2877-46
10-05-04
700C/851/951 700C/851/951
52 52
Notes: Î
1. Potentials used for 24, 25, 27, 47, 59, 81and 3EO detection. Four-wire connection is shown
as typical. See Figure 12-11 for alternate VTP connections.
Figure 12-15. BE1-700V Bus Voltage Protection including UF Load Shed

Ao
Bo
Co
C13 C14 C15
VA VB VC
C16
BE1-700V
C17 C18
Vx
52
Synchronizing Voltage D2877-47
10-05-04
Ao Bo Co
Line
Notes: Î
1. This application requires the optional 79 and VX input.
Figure 12-16. BE1-700V Network Reclosing Application

SETTINGS
Settings for your application need to be entered and confirmed before placing the relay in service. Register
settings such as breaker operations and breaker duty can be entered to match the current state of your
system.
PREPARING THE RELAY FOR SERVICE

Basler microprocessor-based protection systems are similar in nature to a panel of electromechanical or
solid-state component relays. Both must be wired together with inputs and outputs, and have operating
settings applied. Logic settings determine which protection elements are electronically wired to the inputs and
outputs of the device. Operating settings determine the pickup thresholds and time delays.
The logic and operating settings should be tested by applying actual inputs and operating quantities and
verifying proper output response. For more details, refer to Section 13, Testing and Maintenance. All of the
following connections and functions should be verified during commissioning tests:
• Proper connection and sensing of current and voltage signals
• Input and output contact connections
• I/O sensing versus virtual sensing
• Settings validation
• Proper operation of equipment (main or auxiliary)
• Proper alarming (to SCADA) and/or targeting
Refer to Section 7, BESTlogic Programmable Logic, for information about customizing preprogrammed logic
and creating user-defined logic, and Section 8, Application, for information about the application of
preprogrammed logic schemes.
COMMUNICATIONS CONNECTIONS
The following paragraphs describe the communication connections for the BE1-700. Section 11, ASCII
Command Interface , provides information about using the relay communication interface and lists all
communication commands along with a description and the syntax for each command.
RS-232 Connections
A front panel RS-232 connector is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) DB-9 female connector.
Connector pin numbers, functions, names and signal directions are shown in Table 12-1. RS-232 cable
connection diagrams are provided in Figures 12-17 through 12-20. Optional Clear to Send (CTS) and Request
to Send (RTS) connections are required only if hardware handshaking is enabled.
Table 12-1. RS-232 Pinouts (COM 0)
Pin Function Name Direction

1 Shield ---- n/a
2 Transmit Data TXD From relay
3 Receive Data RXD Into relay
4 N/C ---- n/a
5 Signal Ground GND n/a
6 N/C ---- n/a
7 N/C ---- n/a
8 N/C ---- n/a
9 N/C ---- n/a

9-PIN PC-AT TO BE1-700 25-PIN PC-XT TO BE1-700
MALE DB-9, DTE FEMALE DB-9, DCE MALE DB-25, DTE FEMALE DB-9, DCE
1 1 N.C. 1 N.C.
RXD 2 2 TXD RXD 3 2 TXD
TXD 3 3 RXD TXD 2 3 RXD
4 4 N.C. N.C. 4 N.C.
SGND 5 5 SGND 7 5 SGND
6 N.C. 6 N.C.
7 N.C. 7 N.C.
8 N.C. D2848-46 8 N.C.
02/11/04
9 N.C. 9 N.C.
Figure 12-17. Personal Computer to BE1-700
TO 25 PIN MODEM
TO BE1-700
FEMALE DB-25, DCE FEMALE DB-9, DCE
GND 1 1 N.C.
RXD 2 2 TX D
TXD 3 3 RXD
+5V 6 4 N.C.
SGND 7 5 SGN D
DT R 20 6 +10V
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
9 N.C.
50 FEET D2881-39
02/11/04
MAX.
Figure 12-18. Modem to BE1-700
TO BE1-700
RFL 9660 REAR P OR T FEMALE DB-9, DCE
MATING CONNECTOR 1 N.C.
3 2 TX
2 3 RXD
5 4 N.C.
5 SGND
D2881-40
06/04/04 6 N.C.
7 N.C.
8 N.C.
9 N.C .
Figure 12-19. RFL9660 Protective Relay Switch to BE1-700 Cable

TO SEL-2020 TO BE1-700
FEMALE DB-9, DTE FEMALE DB-9, DCE
RXD 2 2 TXD
TXD 3 3 RXD
SGND 5 5 SGND
7 7
8 8
TO BE1-700
IRIG TERMINALS
IRIG-B + 4
IRIG-B 6
Figure 12-20. SEL 2020 to BE1-700 Relay
RS-485 Connections
RS-485 connections are made at a three-position terminal block connector that mates with a standard
communication cable. A twisted pair cable is recommended. Connector pin numbers, functions, names and
signal directions are shown in Table 12-2. An RS-485 connection diagram is provided in Figure 12-21.
Table 12-2. RS-485 Pinouts (COM 2)

Terminal Function Name Direction
A3 (A) Send / Receive A SDA / RDA In / Out
In / Out
A4 (B) Send / Receive B SDB / RDB
A5 (C) Signal Ground GND n/a
TO RS422/RS485 TO BE1-700
DB-37 FEMALE
3 POSITION
TERMINAL BLOCK
4
6
22 Rt A D5
BE1-700
24 B D4 COM 2
19
C D3
A5
A D5
BE1-700
B D4
COM 2
C D3
4000'
MAX .
Rt A D5
BE1-700
B D4
COM 2
C D3
D2848-47
02/11/04
R t = OPTIONAL TERMINATING
RESISTOR (120 S TYPICAL)
Figure 12-21. RS-485 DB-37 to BE1-700

Ethernet Connections
BE1-700 relays with style numbers XXXXX4X, XXXXX5X and XXXXX7X have a rear-panel Ethernet port that
communicates using ASCII commands. The 10BaseT port is an eight-pin RJ-45 connector that connects to
10/100 megabit, shielded, twisted-pair, Category 5 copper wire media.
NOTE
from the Ethernet port. See Section 9, Security, for details.
ASCII COMMAND COMMUNICATION

ASCII communication byte-framing parameters are fixed at 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit. Additional
ASCII communication protocol parameters are settable. Baud rate and address are settable from the ASCII
command interface using the SG-COM command. These parameters can also be set at human-machine
interface (HMI) Screen 6.1.X. Several additional settings are available to further customize ASCII
communication. These settings are described Section 9, Security. Additional parameters for Page Length,
Reply Acknowledge and Software Handshaking can be changed only through the ASCII command interface
using the SG-COM command.
CONTACT SENSING INPUT

Four contact sensing inputs provide external stimulus to initiate BE1-700 actions. An external wetting voltage
is required for the contact sensing inputs. The nominal voltage level of the external dc source must comply
with the dc power supply input voltage ranges listed in Section 1, General Information, Specifications. Also,
Section 1, Figures 1-1 and 1-2 indicate the power supply options available with your type of relay.
Energizing levels for the contact sensing inputs are for a minimum of 5 Vdc for 24 Vdc nominal sensing
voltages, 26 Vdc for 48 Vdc nominal sensing voltages, 69 Vdc for 125 Vdc nominal sensing voltages or 138
Vdc for 250 Vdc nominal sensing voltages. See Table 12-3 for the control voltage ranges.
Table 12-3. Contact Sensing Turn-On Voltage

Nominal Turn-On
Nominal Control Voltage Voltage Range
24 Vdc 5 - 8 Vdc
48 Vdc 26 -38 Vdc
125 Vac / Vdc 69 - 100 Vdc
250 Vac / Vdc 138 - 200 Vdc

SECTION 13 • TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 13 • TESTING AND MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
TESTING PHILOSOPHIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Acceptance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Commissioning Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Periodic Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Functional Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Performance Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Relay Self-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Status Reporting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Event Reporting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
ACCEPTANCE TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Power Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Style Number and Serial Number Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
IRIG Verification (If used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Contact Sensing Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Control Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Current Circuit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Three-Phase Voltage Circuit Verification (BE1-700V only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Auxiliary Voltage Input Verification - VX and VX 3rd
(Fundamental and Third Harmonic) (BE1-700V only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Line and Bus Angle, Frequency and Slip Verification (BE1-700V only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
COMMISSIONING TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Digital I/O Connection Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
Virtual Selector Switches (If not used, skip to Virtual Control Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
Protection and Control Function Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Verify Other Set Points as Appropriate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Report and Alarm Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
PERIODIC TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Settings Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Analog Circuit Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
CARE AND HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
UPDATING FIRMWARE AND SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Updating Relay Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Updating BESTCOMS Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
FUNCTIONAL TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Instantaneous Overcurrent (50T) (BE1-700C only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Time Overcurrent (51) (BE1-700C only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Voltage Protection (BE1-700V only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
Synchronism Check (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
Breaker Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
Virtual Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
Virtual Breaker Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Logic Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Automatic Setting Group Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
BE1-700 Testing and Maintenance i
Figures
Figure 13-1. Rear Panel Terminal Connections, BE1-700C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Figure 13-2. Rear Panel Terminal Connections, BE1-700V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Figure 13-3. x62 Mode 1 (Pickup/Dropout) Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
Figure 13-4. Mode 2 (One-Shot Nonretriggerable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51
Figure 13-5. Mode 3 (One-Shot Retriggerable) Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-52
Figure 13-6. Mode 5 (Integrating Timer) Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-54
Figure 13-7. x62 Mode 6 (Latch) Timing Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-55
Tables
Table 13-1. Input Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Table 13-2. Input Contact Wetting Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
Table 13-3. Current Circuit Verification Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Table 13-4. Voltage Circuit Verification Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-5. Aux Voltage Circuit Verification VX & VX 3rd Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
Table 13-6. 50T Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Table 13-7. 50T Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Table 13-8. 50T/150T Element Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Table 13-9. 150TP Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Table 13-10. 50T Time Delay Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Table 13-11. 50/150T Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Table 13-12. 150T Time Delay Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Table 13-13. 50TQ Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Table 13-14. 50TQ Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Table 13-15. 50/150TQ Pickup Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Table 13-16. 150TQ Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Table 13-17. 50TQ Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21
Table 13-18. 50/150TQ Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Table 13-19. 50/150TN Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22
Table 13-20. 50/150TN Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Table 13-21. 50T/150T Element Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Table 13-22. 50/150TN Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Table 13-23. 51/151 Timing Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Table 13-24. 51 Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
Table 13-25. 51 Timing Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25
Table 13-26. 51P, 51N and 51Q Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Table 13-27. 51P/51N/51Q Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26
Table 13-28. 51P/51N Element Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Table 13-29. 51Q Element Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Table 13-30. 151N Pickup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Table 13-31. V/Hz Alarm, Integrating Time and Definite Time Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Table 13-32. Alarm, Integrating Time and Definite Time Pickup Settings (Step 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Table 13-33. Alarm, Integrating Time and Definite Time Pickup Settings (Step 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Table 13-34. V/Hz Trip Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Table 13-35. V/Hz Trip Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Table 13-36. V/Hz Reset Time Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Table 13-37. V/Hz Reset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Table 13-38. Definite Time V/Hz Trip Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Table 13-39. Definite Time (24D) V/Hz Trip Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Table 13-40. 27P and 59P Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-31
Table 13-41. 27P and 59P Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Table 13-42. 27P, 59P Pickup and Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Table 13-43. 47 Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Table 13-44. 47 Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33
Table 13-45. 47 Pickup and Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
Table 13-46. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
ii Testing and Maintenance BE1-700

Table 13-47. 27X and Pickup Settings (3E0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Table 13-48. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup and Time Delay Settings (3Eo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35
Table 13-49. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Table 13-50. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Table 13-51. 27X, 59X/159X Pickup and Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Table 13-52. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Table 13-53. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Table 13-54. 27X, 59X/159X Pickup and Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-38
Table 13-55. x81 Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
Table 13-56. x81 Pickup and Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
Table 13-57. x81 Time Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
Table 13-58. Sync-Check Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
Table 13-59. Synchro-Check Voltage Monitor Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-41
Table 13-60. Sync-Check 25VM Live/Dead Dropout Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-42
Table 13-61. Sync-Check Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-43
Table 13-62. BF Pickup Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
Table 13-63. BF Current Detector Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
Table 13-64. BF Pickup Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
Table 13-65. BF Time Delay Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-44
Table 13-66. x43 Mode 1 Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-45
Table 13-67. x43 Mode 1 On Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Table 13-68. x43 Mode 1 Off Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Table 13-69. x43 Mode 1 Pulse Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-46
Table 13-71. x43 Mode 2 On Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Table 13-72. x43 Mode 2 Off Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Table 13-74. x43 Mode 3 Pulse Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-47
Table 13-75. 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Table 13-76. 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch Trip Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Table 13-77. 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
Table 13-79. x62 Mode 1 Pickup and Dropout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-49
Table 13-80. x62 Mode 1 Timer Initiate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-49
Table 13-81. x62 Mode 1 Timer Initiate Removal Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-50
Table 13-86. 62 Mode 5 Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
Table 13-87. 62 Mode 5 Timer Initiate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-53
Table 13-90. Automatic Setting Group Change Function Test Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-56
Table 13-91. 51P Element Pickup Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-56
Table 13-92. Setting Group Change Example Accuracy Limits-Increasing Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
Table 13-93. Automatic Setting Group Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
Table 13-94. Setting Group Change Example Accuracy Limits-Decreasing Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
Table 13-95. Manual Setting Group Control Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
Table 13-96. Binary Group Control Selection Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-58
Table 13-97. Binary Group Control Select and Operate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-59
BE1-700 Testing and Maintenance iii

SECTION 13 • TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
The need to test protective relays to confirm performance as designed by relay manufacturers has always
existed. However, numeric relay design is changing the industry testing paradigms that have been in use since
the first protective relay was built. Each time a fault occurs, the numeric protection system is tested, and as
a result of its fault and event recording capability, the test is also documented. In the unlikely event of a
protection system problem, continuos monitoring along with remote communications capability provide for
removing the affected relay from service, auto switching to backup systems and immediate notification of a
manned facility. These features have virtually eliminated the need for periodic maintenance. Simple
acceptance tests that verify the integrity of the relays measuring circuits and commissioning tests that verify
the relays "electronic wiring" (control logic) are Basler Electric's recommended pre-installation tests.
This section provides guidelines for performing tests on BE1-700 current relays and on BE1-700 voltage
relays. Perform the tests appropriate for your relay style. This section also provides guidelines for care,
handling, and troubleshooting of the BE1-700 relay. For assistance in conducting relay self-tests and
troubleshooting using internal diagnostics, contact Basler Electric Technical Support Services.
TESTING PHILOSOPHIES
Testing is generally divided into the following categories:
• Acceptance
C Commissioning
C Periodic (user scheduled maintenance)
C Functional
While all types of tests may be performed, all users do not generally perform them. Likewise, the degree to
which you will conduct each type of test depends on need, economics and perceived system value.
Acceptance Testing
Acceptance testing is intended to confirm that a particular relay delivered to a customer meets published
specifications. Because this is a numerical relay whose characteristics are defined by software, Basler Electric
does not require the user to test each operational setting in the relay. Successful completion of the
Acceptance Test verifies proper response of the relay's input and output circuits as well as its response to all
external sensing input quantities (voltage, current, frequency).
Basler Electric performs detailed acceptance testing on all devices to verify all functions meet published
specifications. All products are packaged and shipped with the strictest of standards. The BE1-700 relay is
a microprocessor-based relay whose operating characteristics will not change over time. The relay will also
not experience any change in operating characteristics during transit. However, it remains material that the
user perform these acceptance tests to verify the device has not suffered any degradation in transit. Basler
Electric warrants all products against any decay in performance outside of the published specified tolerances
that result from problems created during transit.
Commissioning Testing
Commissioning testing verifies all physical connections and functional aspects of the protective relay for a new
installation. This includes a thorough review and documentation of the operational settings to verify that the
users calculated values match the actual values on each enabled protection element of the relay. All of the
following connections or functions can be verified during commissioning tests:
C Proper connection and sensing of current and voltage signals as applicable
C Connections of I/O contacts
C I/O sensing versus virtual sensing
C Setting validation
BE1-700 Testing and Maintenance 13-1

C Proper operation of equipment (main or auxiliary)
C Proper alarming (to SCADA) and/or targeting
Periodic Testing
Periodic testing can be performed at regularly scheduled intervals or upon an indication of problems or
questionable operations within the relay. Verifying the integrity of the relay’s performance, short of playback
of recorded events, may be necessary by performing certain tests similar to those accomplished in the
acceptance tests. Verification that the relay is measuring signals faithfully, that relay logic is appropriate, and,
that protective elements and equipment (main or auxiliary) operate correctly, are goals that can be achieved
during this type of testing.
Basler Electric recommends that all captured fault records and sequence of event records be analyzed and
kept on file as in-service periodic test results for this particular device. This is an indication that all protective
elements and the associated equipment are operating satisfactorily.
It is not the intent of this manual to elaborate on every conceivable test possible since this would encroach
on individual preferences, techniques and philosophies. It is the intent to pursue relevant testing methods to
verify this relay meets published design specifications and applicability.
Functional Testing
Functional (or application) testing is significantly more comprehensive in nature and is intended to test
suitability for a particular application. Functional testing also provides a means to familiarize the user with the
logic and operation of this device. Test setups are generally more involved and often times include ancillary
equipment beyond voltage or current source type equipment. While economics may at times prohibit full
functional testing, it is recommended that some application testing be performed when published specifications
lack appropriate detail to satisfy application testing requirements.
Basler Electric performs a thorough and comprehensive functional test of all relays before shipping. This
ensures that this device is within specified tolerances, measures accurately and operates correctly as
designed.
TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING AIDS

Under test or in-service, the BE1-700 provides several ways to check operations, targets or events. A
continuous self-test monitors the system health and status. The most basic reporting function is targets.
Targets may be viewed through ASCII command interface or through the front panel human-machine interface
(HMI). Fault Summary Reports, Sequence of Events Recorder (SER) Reports and Oscillographic Records
yield more detail.
Each time a system disturbance occurs in or around this relay zone of protection, it is a test of the relay
performance during the fault. If a questionable operation results in the need for troubleshooting, you have
several ways in which to troubleshoot the relay, the installation and the overall application.
Performance Testing
Performance testing can be accomplished through the capture and playback of system fault records. In actual
applications, this type of test realizes further confirmation of faithful relay responses during system
disturbances. For specific power system disturbances, relays can be to subjected to a re-creation of captured
events with the aide of equipment capable of replicating COMTRADE record files. In these instances, there
is significant merit in testing relays in this manner to assess relay performance. Correct response of relay
action in a performance test is supplemental verification of the conclusions drawn from functional (or
application) tests.
This type of testing verifies not only whether or not the device operated correctly for a particular system
disturbance but also offers additional confirmation of your protection philosophy in this application. It is beyond
the scope of this manual to develop performance tests for this device. For assistance in developing these
types of tests, please consult Basler Electric and your test equipment.
13-2 Testing and Maintenance BE1-700

Relay Self-Test
All internal circuitry and software that affect the relay core functionality are monitored by the continuous
self-test diagnostics. For specific relay trouble alarms, the self-test diagnostics force the microprocessor to
reset and try to correct the problem. If unsuccessful, OUTA operates, the Relay Trouble LED on the front
panel turns on, all of the output relays are disabled, internal logic point ALMREL is set and the relay is taken
off line. For more information on self-test diagnostics and relay trouble alarms, see Section 6, Reporting And
Alarm Functions, Alarms Function.
Status Reporting Features

General status reporting is available through the ASCII command interface using the RG-STAT (report
general, status) command. This report assembles all of the information required to determine the relay status.
For more information on general status reporting, see Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, General
Status Reporting, General Status Report.
Fault reporting and target data is dependent on the proper setting of trip, pickup and logic trigger expressions
(via the SG-TRIGGER command) and the assignment of protective elements to be logged as targets (via the
SG-TARG command).
While the design of the relay facilitates obtaining and verifying targets and event data, it is not always
necessary to utilize the relay functions to determine if the device operated while testing. You may simply use
an ohm-meter or continuity tester to monitor the output contact status.
The following is a summary of ASCII commands where target and event data may be viewed.
C RF provides a directory of fault summary reports in memory
C RF-# provides a summary report giving targets, timing and event data
C RG-TARG provides target data only
C RS provides a summary of sequence of events records
C RS-F# provides a detailed SER report for the selected fault event number
C RS-# provides a detailed SER report on the last numbered events
For more information on human-machine interface (HMI) menu trees, see Section 10, Human-Machine
Interface.
Event Reporting Features

The SER function of the relay records protective element output changes, overcurrent element pickup or
dropout, input/output contact state changes, logic triggers, setting group changes and setting changes. For
more information on event reporting, see Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Sequence of Events
Recorder.
The following summarizes the reporting capabilities of the relay through the front panel HMI.
C Trip LED (Flashing): flashes during pickup of protective elements based on the pickup logic expression
set in the SG-TRIGGER command.
C Trip LED (sealed-in): stays lit after trip logic becomes TRUE based on the trip logic expression set in the
SG-TRIGGER command.
C TARGETS, Screen 1.2: Provides target data.
C ALARMS, Screen 1.3: Provides alarm data (including BKR FAIL, REC FAIL, AND REC LO).
C FAULT REPORTS, Screen 4.1: Indicates new fault reports
C EVENT REPORT, Screen 4.2: Gives the number of new events logged by the SER since the last new
counter reset (executed only by the RS=0 command). Events must be viewed using the RS and RS#
commands listed in the previous paragraph.
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
Although Basler Electric performs detailed acceptance testing on all new relays, it is generally recommended
that you perform each of the following acceptance test steps before installation. Performing these steps tests
each function of the BE1-700 relay to validate that the relay was manufactured properly and that no
degradation of performance occurred as a result of shipping.

Test Equipment
Suitable test equipment requires a minimum of two current source elements, two voltage source elements,
and a contact wetting voltage. Test equipment should also have the capability of varying the frequency and
the angle of the voltage and current sources. Refer to Figure 13-1 for a current relay and Figure 13-2 for a
voltage relay.
WARNING
!
D8
D7
IG
IG
B as ler E lectric
(618) 654-2341
C18
D6
D5
VX
IC
IC
C17
VX
D4
D3
IB
IB
USA
C16
N
D1
D2
Highland, Illinois
IA
IA
C15
VC
R
C14
VB
C13
VA
BE1-700
PROTECTIVE
DIGITAL
C12
RELAY
ALARM
ETHERNET
C11
C10
OUT 5
C9
GND
C8
A8
B8
+ IN4 -
OUT 4
C7
A7
B7
PWR
C6
A6
B6
+ IN3 -
OUT 3
C5
A5
B5
C
COM 2
RS-485
C4
A4
B4
B
+ IN2 -
OUT 2
C3
A3
B3
A
C2
A2
B2
+IRIG -
+ IN1 -
OUT 1
C1
A1
B1
D2838-51
07-01-04
Figure 13-1. Rear Panel Terminal Connections,

BE1-700C

BE1-700
COM 2 IA IB IC IG
RS-485 GND
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 BE1-700
DIGITAL
PROTECTIVE
RELAY
+ IN1 - + IN2 - + IN3 - + IN4 -

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
D2 D4 D6 D8
BE1-700V
R B asler Electr ic
Testing and Maintenance

WARNING
Figure 13-2. Rear Panel Terminal Connections,

D2838-52
06-04-04
13-5
NOTE
Test connections referred to in this section are for an X style case relay. Refer to Figure 13-1 for current relay
terminal locations and Figure 13-2 for voltage relay terminal locations.
Power Up
Purpose: To verify that the relay performs the power-up sequence.
Step 1 Apply voltage to the input power Terminals A6 and A7. Table 13-1 shows the appropriate input
voltage for each relay style.
Table 13-1. Input Voltages
Style Number Input Voltage
BE1-700-xxx1xxN 48 Vdc
BE1-700-xxx2xxN 125 Vac/Vdc
BE1-700-xxx3xxN 24 Vdc
BE1-700-xxx4xxN 250 Vac/Vdc
Step 2 Verify that the Power LED is on and that characters are displayed on the HMI display. Upon
power-up, the relay will perform a brief self test.
During this brief test, all front panel LEDs flash momentarily, the display indicates each step of the
self test, the relay model, the software version, and then the default display screen. Contact Basler
Electric, Technical Support Services if anything appears out of the ordinary or if an LCD error
message appears.
Communications
Purpose: To verify that the BE1-700 relay communicates through Com Ports 0 and 2.
Reference Commands: ACCESS, EXIT
To communicate with the BE1-700 through any of the three ports, use the Terminal (VT100 Emulation) screen
available in BESTCOMS. The default relay communication settings are:
C Baud Rate = 9600 bps
C Data Bits =8
C Stop Bit =1
C Parity = None
C Flow Control = Xon/Xoff
Set Up the Relay to Communicate with the PC

Step 1 Depress the Up arrow pushbutton on the front panel HMI until the top level of the menu tree is
reached. Depress the left or right-arrow pushbuttons until Screen 6, General Settings, appears. Next,
depress the Down arrow pushbutton twice to get to Screen 6.1.1, COM0 F-232. This screen displays
the baud rate for the front panel communication port (COM 0). Verify that the baud rate is 9,600 bps
(9.6 Kbps).
Step 2 Connect the serial cable between the PC and the front RS-232 port on the relay.
Step 3 Initiate the communication program for your computer.
Step 4 Transmit the command ACCESS= (you may use the shortcut keystrokes and just enter a=). RESULT:
The relay should respond with ACCESS GRANTED: GLOBAL.
Step 5 Transmit EXIT.
Step 6 Connect the male end of the terminal cable to the RS-232 port on a RS-232/485 converter box.
Connect the RS-485 output of the converter box to the relay RS-485 terminals and repeat Steps
1, 2 and 3.

Style Number and Serial Number Verification
Purpose: To verify that the BE1-700 relay model number, style number and current software
program version matches the unit and unit labels.
Reference Commands: RG-VER
Step 1 Through Com 0 port, transmit the command RG-VER. The BE1-700 relay should respond with the
model number, style number, application program version and date, boot program version and date,
and the relay serial number. Verify that all reported data is current, appropriate and matches the
label on the relay front panel.
IRIG Verification (If used)

Purpose: To verify that the BE1-700 relay acquires and updates IRIG time and date
information.
Reference Commands: RG-DATE, RG-TIME
Step 1 Connect a suitable IRIG source to relay Terminals A1 and A2.

Step 2 Upon receiving the IRIG signal, the relay clock will be updated with the current time, day and month.
Verify this at Screen 4.6 on the front panel HMI or by sending the RG-TIME and RG-DATE
commands to the relay through any communications port.

Purpose: To verify that the BE1-700 relay senses hardware input and output status.
Reference Commands: ACCESS, CO-OUT, CS-OUT, EXIT, R.-STAT
Step 1 Apply an external voltage source within the range of the voltages listed in Table 13-2 to contact
sensing inputs IN1, IN2, IN3 and IN4.
Table 13-2. Input Contact Wetting Voltage

Nominal Control Voltage Turn-On Range
24 Vdc 8 to 8 Vdc
48 Vdc 26 to 38 V
125 Vac/Vdc 69 to 100 V
250 Vac/Vdc 138 to 200 V
Step 2 To verify that all inputs have been detected, transmit the command RG-STAT to retrieve INPUT
(1234) information. Input status can also be viewed at HMI Screen 1.4.1.
Control Outputs
Step 1 Transmit the commands ACCESS=, CS-OUT=ENA, CO-OUT=ENA, EXIT and YES to enable the
output control override capability of the relay in order to pulse each output contact.
Step 2 From the HMI keypad, navigate to Screen (Output Control Override) to override control of the outputs
via the keypad.
Step 3 Once you have accessed the screen, press the Edit pushbutton to enable the override function (Step
1 enables logic override, pressing the Edit pushbutton enables selecting the control action). Select
an output to override by using the LEFT/RIGHT arrow pushbuttons. Once selected, use the
UP/DOWN arrow pushbuttons to choose the type of action (P, 1, or 0) for the selected output contact.
Select the pulse (P) action for the alarm contact (A). Pressing the Edit pushbutton again will force the
alarm output contact action.

Step 4 Verify that the sequence of events recorder logged the events by sending the command RS-2 to the
relay (requesting the last two events it logged). The close-open pulse action should be listed as two
separate events.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3 for all desired output contacts and verify that the sequence of events recorder logged
the events.
Step 6 Transmit the commands CS-OUT=DIS, CO-OUT=DIS, EXIT and YES to disable the output control
override capability of the relay.
Current Circuit Verification (BE1-700C only)

Step 1 To verify IN and IQ, connect an ac current source to Terminals D1 and D2.
Step 2 Apply the appropriate current values in Table 13-3 to the relay. Measured IN should correspond to
values in Table 13-3 while IQ (negative-sequence current I2) should be 1/3 the applied value +1.5%.
(For example, if the applied value equals 2 amps, IQ = 2/ 3 = 0.667 amps +1.5% or +.01 amps.) Verify
current measuring accuracy by transmitting the M command to the relay for each applied current
value. HMI Screen 3.7 also can be used to verify the IN and IQ current measurement.
Table 13-3. Current Circuit Verification Values

Measured Current
Sensing Type Applied Current
Lower Limit Upper Limit
0. 25 amperes 0.2475 A 0.2525 A
1 ampere 0.99 A 1.01 A
1A 2 amperes 1.98 A 2.02 A
3 amperes 2.97 A 3.03 A
4 amperes 3.96 A 4.04 A
1 ampere 0.99 A 1.01 A
5 amperes 4.95 A 5.05 A
5A 10 amperes 9.9 A 10.1 A
15 amperes 14.85 A 15.15 A
20 amperes 19.8 A 20.2 A
Step 3 To verify IP and IG, connect a suitably sized jumper wire across relay Terminals D2 and D3, D4 and
D5, and D6 and D7. Apply an ac current source to Terminals D1 and D8.
Step 4 Apply the appropriate current values in Table 13-3 to the relay. Verify current measuring accuracy
by transmitting the M command to the relay for each applied current value. HMI Screens 3.5 and 3.6
also can be used to verify current measurements. Screen 3.7, IN, will read three times the phase
value.
Step 5 Leave current circuit connected and de-energized. These test connections will be used later when
verifying power readings.
Three-Phase Voltage Circuit Verification (BE1-700V only)

Step 1 Connect an ac voltage source at nominal frequency between relay Terminals C13 (A-phase) and C16
(Neutral Terminal). Apply 100 volts and verify voltage-measuring accuracy by transmitting the M
command to the relay. Readings should be: M-VA = 100 volts, M-VAB = 100 volts, M-VCA = 100
volts, M-3V0 = 100 volts and M-V2 = 33.4 volts (applied divided by 3), all at +1.0%. HMI Screens 3.1,
3.2 and 3.4 can also be monitored to verify voltage measurements.

Step 2 Connect an ac voltage source at nominal frequency between relay Terminals C14 (B-phase) and C16
command to the relay. Readings should be: M-VB = 100 volts, M-VAB = 100 volts, M-VBC = 100
Step 3 Connect an ac voltage source at nominal frequency between relay Terminals C15 (C-phase) and C16
command to the relay. Readings should be: M-VC = 100 volts, M-VBC = 100 volts, M-VCA = 100
Step 4 Connect relay Terminals C13 (A-phase), C14 (B-phase) and C15 (C-phase) together. Connect an ac
voltage source at nominal frequency to the three jumpered terminals and the Neutral Terminal (C16).
Step 5 Apply the voltage values listed in Table 13-4 and verify voltage measuring accuracy by transmitting
the M command to the relay. HMI Screen 3.1 can also be monitored to verify voltage measurements.
Table 13-4. Voltage Circuit Verification Values

Measured Voltage
Applied Voltage Lower Limit Upper Limit
80 volts 79.2 V 80.8 V
100 volts 99.0 V 101.0 V
120 volts 118.8 V 121.2 V
140 volts 138.6 V 141.4 V
160 volts 156.8 V 163.2 V
Auxiliary Voltage Input Verification - VX and VX 3rd (Fundamental and Third Harmonic) (BE1-700V
only)
Step 1 Connect relay Terminals C17 (polarity) and C18 to a 60 hertz ac voltage source.
Step 2 Apply the voltage values listed in Table 13-5 and verify voltage-measuring accuracy by transmitting
the M-V command to the relay. HMI Screens 3.3, VX can also be monitored to verify voltage
measurements.
Step 3 Connect relay Terminals C17 (polarity) and C18 to a 180 hertz (third harmonic) ac voltage source.
Step 4 Apply the voltage values listed in Table 13-5 and verify voltage-measuring accuracy by transmitting
the M command to the relay. HMI Screens 3.3, VX can also be monitored to verify voltage
measurements.
Table 13-5. Aux Voltage Circuit Verification VX & VX 3rd Values

Measured Voltage
Applied Voltage
Lower Limit Upper Limit
5 volts 4.95 V 5.05
20 volts 19.8 V 20.2 V
60 volts 59.4 V 60.6 V
80 volts 79.2 V 80.8 V
120 volts 118.8 V 121.2 V

Line and Bus Angle, Frequency and Slip Verification (BE1-700V only)
Step 1 Connect relay Terminals C13 (polarity) and C16 (A to Neutral of the three-phase voltage input) to a
60 hertz ac voltage source (line voltage).
Step 2 Connect relay Terminals C17 (polarity) and C18 (auxiliary voltage input) to a second 60 hertz ac
voltage source (bus voltage).
Step 3 Apply 115 volts at 0 degrees and 60 hertz to both sources. Verify the measuring accuracy of the line
and bus frequency, angle between the two voltages and slip frequency by transmitting the M
command to the relay. HMI Screens 3.10 and 3.11 can also be monitored to verify the measurements.
Step 4 Vary the angle of the line voltage and verify the measured angle as in Step 3. Polarity of the angle
measurement is relative to the angle of the line voltage. That is, if the line voltage lags the bus voltage
by 30 degrees, the sign of the angle will be negative or -30 degrees. When the line voltage leads, the
angle has no sign and is assumed to be positive.
Step 5 Return the line voltage angle to 0 degrees. Vary the frequency of the line voltage and verify the
measured slip as in Step 3. (Note that the angle shown on HMI Screen 3.11 is continuously changing
as a result of slip between the two systems. This is normal). Polarity of the slip frequency is relative
to the frequency of the line. That is, if the line frequency is 58 hertz and the bus frequency is 60 hertz,
the slip frequency is -2. As soon as the line frequency rises above 60 hertz, slip frequency has no sign
and is assumed to be positive.
COMMISSIONING TESTING
Because the commissioning of this relay may be a new installation or a retrofit, special precautions should
be taken to ensure that all tests are performed with safety as the utmost concern. Any CT circuit signals that
are routed through this device as part of a protection scheme including discrete relays or as a stand-alone
device, should be shorted and isolated from this relay during these tests until the final instrument transformer
current circuit check.
If this relay is being installed in an existing installation, please be aware of the equipment monitoring features
of this device, especially if the monitoring logic will be utilized. Please make note of any pretest operation
levels, duty levels, etc. on existing equipment (e.g., breakers or transformers). As the user, you may make
the determination of what values the relay should have as initial monitoring values when the relay is placed
in service.
Also, please be aware that because of the multi-function nature of the BE1-700 relay, it may on occasion be
necessary to temporarily disable some of the protective elements while testing the relay to facilitate isolated
testing of individual functions. Always remember to enable these functions before placing the relay in service.
To assist you in the commissioning testing of this relay, you may at any time refer to Section 6, Reporting and
Alarm Functions, for various means of reporting status, alarms and targets.
Please refer to the other sections of this instruction manual for assistance on any particular functions of the
relay. If you require further assistance, contact Basler Electric field application personnel or the factory.
Digital I/O Connection Verification

Purpose: To verify contact sensing input label assignments and recognition and debounce
settings.
Reference Commands: SN-IN, SG-IN
Step 1 Transmit the SN-IN1 command to verify the Input 1 user-defined name, TRUE label and FALSE label.
Step 2 Repeat Step 1 for each of the remaining contact sensing inputs. Add the number of an input to the
SN-IN command to check that input's name and labels.
Step 3 Verify the recognition and debounce settings for each contact sensing input by using the SG-IN
command. When the SG-IN command is transmitted, the relay responds with the recognition and
debounce settings for each input. Reported settings use the format SG-IN#=recognition, debounce.

Step 4 Transmit the RG_STAT command to the relay or use HMI Screen 1.4.1 to verify the status of Input
1. Transmit the RS-NEW=0 command to the relay. From the actual field device, close (or open) the
specific contact that supplies relay Input 1. While maintaining contact position, verify that Input 1 has
changed state by transmitting the RG-STAT command or using HMI Screen 1.4.1. Return the field
contact to its original state, verifying that Input 1 returns to its original state. Transmit the RS-NEW
command to the relay and review the event record associated with the field contact change.
Step 5 Repeat Step 4 for each connected input.
Output Contacts
Purpose: To verify output contact settings and output contact logic settings.
Reference Commands: SN-VO, SL-VO, SG-HOLD
Step 1 Transmit the SN-VOA command to verify the virtual output A user-defined name, TRUE label and
FALSE label.
Step 2 Repeat Step 1 for Virtual Outputs 1 through 15. Add the number of an output to the SN-VO command
to check that output's name and labels.
Step 3 Transmit the SL-VO command to obtain a list of all virtual outputs and their Boolean logic equations.
Verify that the desired virtual output equations match the reported equations.
Step 4 Verify the programmable hold timer setting for each hardware output by transmitting the command
SG-HOLD. The output hold timer setting for each output is reported as enabled (1) or disabled (0).
Step 5 Verify the output contact activity by viewing the sequence of events reports with the RS-###
command.
Step 6 Use the procedure outlined under "Acceptance Tests, Control Outputs" to actuate selected output
contacts (V01 through V05) and actually trip or close the connected field device (circuit breaker,
lockout, etc.). Use the same procedure to verify that operation of the alarm output relay (V0A) initiates
the appropriate alarm response.
Virtual Selector Switches (If not used, skip to Virtual Control Switch)
Purpose: To verify the operation, labels, and logic settings of the 43 switches.
Reference Commands: SN-43, SL-43, RG-43STAT, RG-STAT, CS/CO-43
Step 1 Transmit the SN-43 command to verify the virtual selector Switch 43 name, TRUE label and FALSE
label. This information is reported using the format SN-x43=name,TRUE label, FALSE label.
Step 2 Repeat Step 1 for Virtual Selector Switch 143. Use the number of a switch in the SN-43 command
to retrieve name and label information for that switch.
Step 3 Use the SL-x43 command to obtain the logic setting of Virtual Switches 143. Logic settings for virtual
switches can also be obtained by using the SL command or by viewing HMI Screens \CTRL\43\143.
Verify that the desired virtual selector switch setting matches the reported setting.
Step 4 Transmit the RG-43STAT command to obtain the position of the eight virtual selector switches.
Alternately, the virtual selector switch positions can be obtained through the RG-STAT command or
HMI Screens \CTRL\43\43 or \CTRL\43\143.
Step 5 Obtain write access to the relay by using the ACCESS= command. For each virtual selector switch
enabled in your logic scheme, change the switch position by entering CS-x43 = 1 (TRUE), 0 (FALSE)
or P (Pulse) followed by CO-x43=1,0 or P. The syntax of the CS-x43 and CO-x43 commands must
match or the CO-x43 command won't be executed.
Step 6 Verify each switch position change by using the CO-x43 command or through HMI Screens
\CTRL\43\43 or \CTRL\43\143.
Step 7 Return each Virtual Selector Switch to the original position by repeating Step 7.
Step 8 Verify the 43 Switch activity by viewing the sequence of events reports with the RS-### command.

Virtual Control Switch (If not used, skip to Protection and Control Function Verification)
Purpose: To verify the operation, label, and logic setting for the 101 Switch.
Reference Commands: SB-LOGIC, SL-101, RG-101STAT, RG-STAT, CS/CO-101
Step 1 Verify the breaker label and breaker-closed logic expression with the SB-LOGIC command.
Step 2 Use the SL-101 command to read the logic mode of the 101 Switch. The switch is either enabled (1)
or disabled (0).
Step 3 Obtain the virtual control switch status by using the RG-101STAT or RG-STAT commands.
Step 4 Transmit the command ACCESS= to obtain write access to the relay. Change the switch position by
entering CS-101=T (Trip) or C (Close) followed by CO-101=T (trip) or C (close). The syntax of the
CS-101 and CO-101 commands must match or the CO-101 command won't be executed.
Step 5 Confirm the switch position change with the RG-101STAT or RG-STAT commands.
Step 6 Repeat Step 4 to return the 101 Switch to the desired position for your application.
Step 7 Verify the 101 Switch activity by viewing the sequence of events reports with the RS-### command.
Protection and Control Function Verification

Before placing the relay in service, the user should ensure that all system ac and dc connections are correct,
that the relay functions as intended with user settings applied and that all equipment external to the relay
operates as intended. All connected or monitored inputs and outputs, and polarity and phase rotation of ac
connections should be tested. Verify that:
C Power supply and contact wetting voltages are correct.
C User desired protection and control functions are enabled and connected to the correct CT and VT input
circuits.
C The programmable logic settings (electronic wiring) provide the proper interconnection of these functions
with the I/O of the relay.
C Each protection function has the desired operational set points.
Simple user designed fault tests should be used to verify that the operational settings are correct, that the
proper output relays are actuated and proper targeting occurs. (Refer to Figure 13-1 or Figure 13-2 for
terminal locations.) It is not necessary to test every protection element, timer and function in these tests.
Use of the fault and event recording capability of the relay will aid in the verification of the protection and
control logic. Transmit the RS command to retrieve all SER records or RS-n to get a specific operation. Also,
it is helpful to transmit RS-NEW=0 prior to starting a test. This allows the user to review only those operations
recorded since the last RS-NEW was initiated. Replace the S with F and use the same commands for fault
records. Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, for more detail.
Please be aware that because of the multi-function nature of the BE1-700 relay, it may be necessary to
disable protection elements or change setting logic to verify a specific function. To guard against placing the
relay in service with unwanted operational or logic settings, it is good practice to save a copy of the original
setting file before the testing process begins. When testing is complete, compare the copy of the saved
settings to the actual relay settings as a final verification.
To accomplish this, transmit the S command to the relay. This command generates all logic and operational
settings that are on the relay. Copy the data to a text editor such as Notepad and print it out. This along with
the user's logic diagram provides a complete picture of the relay's protection and control capability. The logic
and operational settings of the protection and control functions should be examined to determine:
C The mode setting for the function so that you know what the relay is supposed to do.
C Which virtual output logic expressions contain the logic variables that represent the output contacts for
protection function being tested.
C The input logic expressions for the function under test (especially the block input because it renders
the function disabled if the block input is asserted).
C That the operational pickup and dropout threshold values and time delays agree with the user’s calculated
values.

C That the fault reporting settings are set so the relay properly indicates pickup and trip states and records
targets. These settings are set from the ASCII command interface using the SG-TRIGGER and SG-TARG
setting commands. Section 6,Reporting and Alarm Functions,Fault Reporting Functions, for more details.
Verify Other Set Points as Appropriate

Consult Functional Testing found later in this section for guidelines on testing and verifying set points of other
protection and control functions.
Report and Alarm Functions

Just prior to placing the relay in service, the following reporting and alarm functions should be reset and/or
verified. For details on how to use the LCD HMI or the ASCII command interface to enter or edit relay
operating values, see Sections 10 and 11, respectively.
Clock Display
Set the real time clock to the current date and time. If an IRIG input is used, day and time are automatically
synched to the IRIG source but note that the IRIG time code signal does not contain the current year
information thus necessitating the entry of the year.
Reference Commands: RG-TIME, RG-DATE
References: HMI Screen: 1.4.6 and Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Clock, for setting
details.
Demand Data
Read, change or reset Current Demands. If the demand functions feature of the relay is enabled, use the
following to reset the peak current demand registers to "0" or a pre-existing value.
Reference Commands: RD, RD-<pp>
References: HMI Screens 4.4.1.x, 4.4.2.x, 4.4.3.x and Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions,
for setting details.
Breaker Monitoring
If the Breaker Monitoring features of the relay are enabled, use the following to reset the counter and the duty
registers to "0" or a pre-existing value.
Reference Commands: RB-OPCNTR, RB-DUTY
References: HMI Screen 4.3.1 and Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Breaker
Monitoring, for setting details.
Relay Trouble Alarms

Reset and verify that the relay trouble alarm is not illuminated. If required, alarm information can be read by
transmitting the RA or RG-STAT commands. To attempt clearing a Relay Trouble Alarm, first gain write
access to the reporting functions ("R" password) and initiate the RA=0 or RA-REL=0 commands or press the
RESET key from a STAT \ALARMS \ALARM Screen on the HMI. Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm
Functions, Relay Trouble Alarms, for setting details.
Major/Minor/Logic Programmable Alarms

Reset and verify that the programmable alarms, Major, Minor and Logic, as set to meet user needs verify that
they are not illuminated or asserted. If required, alarm information can be read by transmitting the RA or
RG-STAT commands. To reset a Major/Minor/Logic Alarm, first gain write access to the reporting functions
("R" password) and initiate the RA=0 or RA-MAJ/MIN/LGC=0 commands or by pressing the RESET key from
a STAT \ALARMS \DET Screen on the HMI.
Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Alarms Function, for setting details.

Targets
Reset and verify that there is no target information. Targets are reset from HMI Screen 1.2, \STATS
\TARGETS by pressing the Reset key or gaining write access to the reporting functions ("R" password) and
transmitting RG-TARG [= 0]. Relay target information can be read either from HMI Screen 1.1.1, \STATS
\TARGETS or by transmitting the RG-TARG command.
Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting, for setting details.
Fault Summary Reports

Reset "new" fault summary directory records to "0" by first gaining write access to the reporting functions ("R"
password), and transmitting the RF-NEW [= 0] command. Verify that new faults is "0" by transmitting the RF
command.
Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Fault Reporting, for setting details.
Sequence of Events Recorder (SER)

Reset the "new" SER records counter to "0" by first gaining write access to the reporting functions ("R"
password), and transmitting the RS-NEW [= 0] command two times. Verify that new records is "0" by
transmitting the RS command.
Refer to Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, Sequence of Events Recorder, for setting details.
Just Prior to Energizing-Report Documentation

After completing the previous steps, capture and save a General Status Report by transmitting the RG-STAT
command. This report should be kept in the permanent record file of the device so the data can be used for
comparison in future maintenance procedures.
Also, save the entire settings record for future reference by transmitting the "S" command. Use this record
during the maintenance cycle or during the analysis of an operation to verify that the "as found" settings are
exactly as left during the commissioning process.
Refer to Section 6, General Status Reporting, for details.
In Service Readings
Just after energizing the equipment, transmit the "M" command to the relay. Use this record to review the
following:
C M-I and M-V to verify VT and CT ratios
C M-IQ and M-V2 to verify proper phase sequence connections
C M-SYNC to verify proper phase relationship of VP and VX
C Anything else that the user might find helpful
Save this record along with the RG-STAT record mentioned earlier for future reference.
PERIODIC TESTING
Because the BE1-700 has extensive internal test capabilities, periodic testing of the protection system can
be greatly reduced. Relay operating characteristics are a function of programming instructions that do not drift
over time. Thus, the user may wish to verify items that the relay's self-testing features cannot completely
determine. Periodic testing might consist of the following settings and function checks:
C Verify that the set points that were proven during commissioning have not been changed.
C Verify that the inputs and outputs are interfacing properly with the rest of the protection and control
system.
C Verify that the power system analog parameters used by the protection and control functions are
being measured accurately.

Settings Verification
Verification of the relay digital I/O connections can be accomplished in different ways. The method used
depends on your preferences and practices. You might choose to use either of the following two methods:
C Repeat the digital I/O connection and label verification under commissioning tests.
C Monitor SER, Status and Fault reports for proper sensing of digital signals and proper output tripping
during normal operation.
NOTE
In redundant protection systems where multiple relays will trip a given breaker or other
device for a fault, fault record monitoring may not indicate a failed output contact. The relay
may report that it energized an output when tripping was actually accomplished by the
redundant relay. In this situation, testing the contact is recommended.
Analog Circuit Verification

Verification of relay analog measurement circuits can be accomplished in multiple ways and depends on your
preferences and practices. Either of the two following methods might be used:
C Repeat the acceptance tests by injecting test quantities into the relay.
C Use the relay metering functions to compare the relay's measurements with those made by similar
devices that are measuring the same signals. Redundant relays or metering devices can provide this
independent conformation of measured signals. If the relay is connected to an integration system, this
verification can even be automated and done on a semi-continuous basis.
NOTE
If verifying the analog measurement circuits by comparison to independent devices is
used, you should ensure that the two devices use similar measurement algorithms. For
example, the measurements of a fundamental sensing relay cannot be compared with
the measurements of an RMS sensing device.
CARE AND HANDLING

The BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay requires no preventive maintenance. The fully numeric design of the
relays contain no internal jumpers or mechanical settings and requires no circuit-board level calibration.
There is no need to disturb the circuit interconnections within the assembly. Repair of the assembly by
replacement of individual circuit boards is not recommended. The printed circuit boards are constructed using
surface-mount technology and are not intended to be field serviceably.
Before returning the assembly for repair, contact the Basler Electric Technical Services Department at 618
654-2341 for a return authorization number.
UPDATING FIRMWARE AND SOFTWARE

Future enhancements to relay functionality may make a firmware update desirable. Enhancements to relay
firmware typically coincide with enhancements to BESTCOMS software for that relay. When a relay is updated
with the latest version of firmware, the latest version of BESTCOMS software should also be obtained.
Updating Relay Firmware

If a firmware upgrade is desired, you may request a CD-ROM containing the latest firmware or download the
firmware from the Basler Electric website. Direct your web browser to http://www.basler.com/BE1_Firm/ and
complete the online form to request a CD-ROM containing the latest firmware or a password for downloading
firmware from the Basler Electric web site.

Once the appropriate firmware is obtained, it can be uploaded to a relay using the BESTload software utility
provided on the CD-ROM originally supplied with the relay.
Updating BESTCOMS Software

Firmware enhancements often include the addition of relay settings or the modification of existing settings.
BESTCOMS software is revised to accommodate the new or changed settings. When firmware is updated,
the latest version of BESTCOMS should also be obtained. If a CD-ROM containing firmware was obtained
from Basler Electric, then that CD-ROM will also contain the corresponding version of BESTCOMS software.
BESTCOMS can also be downloaded from the Basler Electric web site (http://www.basler.com). An online
form can be completed to obtain a password for downloading BESTCOMS from the Basler Electric web site.
FUNCTIONAL TESTING
NOTE
Functional testing is not required for this device. It is necessary only when performing a
comprehensive assessment to determine suitability for an application.
Functional testing is a way to assess this relay's suitability for your application. Functional testing goes beyond
the more basic tests found in acceptance testing, but lacks the detailed function testing that is part of the
commissioning process.
Test each of the following functions to verify that your relay measures accurately, is within specified tolerances
and operates correctly. These tests are also suitable for assisting in systematic troubleshooting in the event
that an operation is questioned. Revisiting the test of a specific function can help verify whether the relay is
operating within specified tolerances. For further assistance, contact Basler Electric, Technical Support
Services Department.
Refer to Figures 13-1 and 13-2 for terminal locations.
The “access command” (A=) and the “exit with save commands” (E and Yes) are shown in the initial logic
setup table found in each test section. In order to include multiple test settings in each operational setting
table. The “ACCESS” and “EXIT WITH SAVE” commands are not included. However, “ACCESS” and “EXIT
WITH SAVE” are required each time a logic or operational setting is changed.
To accelerate the testing process, two protection elements may have the same setting and are tested at the
same time but with different outputs. During the pickup/dropout test, one of the elements could pick up slightly
ahead of the other, resulting in only one target being displayed. At some point in the test, apply 110% of the
pickup value and verify that both targets display. Reset targets prior to each test by pressing the HMI RESET
key.
Instantaneous Overcurrent (50T) (BE1-700C only)
50/150TP and TN (Calculated 3Io) Pickup and Dropout Verification

Purpose: To verify the accuracy of the operation of the 50/150TP and TN (3Io) elements.
Reference Commands: SL-50T/150T, SL-GROUP, SL-VO
Step 1 Connect a current source to Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase). Refer to Figures 13-1 and 13-2 for
terminal locations. An ohmmeter or continuity tester may be used to monitor output contact status.
Step 2 Prepare the 50T/150T elements for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-6 to the relay.
Reset targets.

Table 13-6. 50T Pickup Test Commands
Command Purpose
A= Gain write access
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom logic settings. Overwrite with logic = None
settings.
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=PU50 Sets PU50 as custom logic name
SL-50TP=1,0; SL- Enables 50TP, 50TN (3Io) and 50TQ and disables blocking
50TN=1,0
SL-VO1=50TPT Enables OUT1 to close for 50TP trip
SL-VO2=50TNT Enables OUT2 to close for 50TN trip
SG-CTP=1 Sets P, N CT ratio at 1:1
SG-TRIG=50TPT+50TNT, Enable 50TPT or 50TNT to log and trigger fault recording
50TPPU+50TNPU,0
SG-TARG=50T/150T Enables 50T/150T targets
EXITY;Y Exit and save settings
Step 3 Using Table 13-7 as a guide, transmit the low range setting commands (minimum pickup setting) for
your sensing input type.
Step 4 Slowly increase the A-phase current until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup occurs within the specified
accuracy listed in Table 13-8. Slowly decrease the applied current until OUT1 opens. Dropout should
occur at 93 to 97 percent of pickup.
Step 5 Repeat Step 4 while monitoring OUT2 (50TN enabled for 3Io). Verify 50TA and 50TN targets on the
HMI.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the middle and high range pickup settings for your sensing input type.
Table 13-7. 50T Pickup Settings

Current Pickup Settings commands
Sensing Purpose
Input Type Ranges Phase Neutral
Sets 50T PU at 0.5 A, TD = 0,

Low S0-50TP=0.5,0,N S0-50TN=0.5,0,N
non-directional
Sets 50T PU at 5.0 A, TD = 0 ,

5A Middle S0-50TP=5.0,0,N S0-50TN=5.0,0,N
non-directional

High S0-50TP=25.00,N S0-50TN=25.0,0,N
non-directional

Low S0-50TP=0.1,0,N S0-50TN=0.1,0,N
non-directional

1A Middle S0-50TP=1.0,0,N S0-50TN=1.0,0,N
non-directional

High S0-50TP=5.0,0,N S0-50TN=5.0,0,N
non-directional

Table 13-8. 50T/150T Element Accuracy
Sensing Type Pickup Accuracy
B (1 A) +2% or +10 mA
E or F (5 A) +2% or +50 mA
Step 7 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for phase B (Terminals D3 and D4), phase C (Terminals D5 and
D6).
Step 8 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the 150T elements. Overwrite the 50T commands entered
in Step 2 with the commands of Table 13-9.
Table 13-9. 150TP Pickup Test Commands

Command Purpose
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0 Enables 150TP, disables blocking
SG-TRIGGER=150TPT+150TNT, Enable 150TPT or 150TNT to log and trigger fault

150TPPU+150TNPU,0 recording
Step 9 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for the 50T and 150T elements in Setting Group 1. Before
testing settings in other setting groups, a setting group must be selected using the CS/CO-GROUP
commands. To activate Setting Group 1, CS-GROUP=1 would be entered to select Setting Group 1
and CO-GROUP=1 would be entered to make Setting Group 1 active.
Also, the pickup settings made in Step 3 (Table 13-7) must be changed to specify the setting group
being tested. To test settings in Group 1, replace the 0 in the S0-x50 commands with a 1 (S1-x50).
50/150TP and TN (Calculated 3Io) Time Delay Verification

Step 1 Connect a current source to Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for
terminal locations.
Step 2 Prepare the 50T/150T elements for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-10 to the relay.
Table 13-10. 50T Time Delay Test Commands

Command Purpose
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom logic settings. Overwrite with logic

= None settings.
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=TD50 Sets TD50 as custom logic name
SL-50TP=1,0; SL-50TN=1,0 Enables 50TP, 50TN (3Io) and 50TQ and disables
blocking

Command Purpose
SG-CTP=1 Sets P, N ct ratio at 1:1
SG-TRIG=50TPT+50TNT,50TPPU+50TNPU,0 Enable 50TPT or 50TNT to log and trigger fault

recording
Step 3 Using Table 13-11 as a guide, transmit the first column of setting commands.
Table 13-11. 50/150T Time Delay Settings
Pickup and Time Delay Settings

Purpose
2 Second TD 5 Second TD 10 Second TD
S0-50TP=0.5,2S, S0-50TP=0.5,5S S0-50TP=0.5,10S Sets 50TP TD
S0-50TN=0.5,2S S0-50TN=0.5,5S S0-50TN=0.5,10S Sets 50TN TD
Step 4 Step the applied A-phase current to .55 amps (for 1 amp CT circuit divide by 5). Measure the time
delay and verify the accuracy of the 50TP time delay setting, OUT1, and 50TN, OUT2. Timing
accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 5 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the middle and higher time delay settings in Table 13-11.
D6).
Step 7 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for the 150T elements. Overwrite the 50T commands entered
in Step 2 with the commands of Table 13-12.
Table 13-12. 150T Time Delay Commands

Command Purpose
SL-150TP=1,0; SL-150TN=1,0 Enables 150TP, disables blocking
SG-TRIGGER=150TPT+150TNT, Enable 150TPT or 150TNT to log and trigger fault

150TPPU+150TNPU,0 recording
Step 8 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the 50T and 150T elements in Setting Group 1. Before
testing settings in other setting groups, a setting group must be selected using the CS/CO-GROUP
commands. To activate Setting Group 1, CS-GROUP=1 would be entered to select Setting Group 1
and CO-GROUP=1 would be entered to make Setting Group 1 active.
Also, the pickup settings made in Step 3 (Table 13-11) must be changed to specify the setting group
being tested. To test settings in Group 1, replace the 0 in the S0-x50 commands with a 1 (S1-x50).

50/150TQ Pickup and Dropout Verification
Purpose: To verify the operation of the 50TQ and 150TQ elements.
Reference Commands: SL-50T/150T
Step 1 Connect a current source to Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase).

Step 2 Prepare the 50TQ and 150TQ elements for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-13 to
the relay. Reset targets.
Table 13-13. 50TQ Pickup Test Commands

Command Purpose
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom settings. Overwrite with logic = None settings
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=Q50 Sets Q50 as custom logic name
SL-50TQ=1,0 Enables 50TQ, disables blocking
SL-VO1=50TQT Enables OUT1 to close for 50TQ trip
SG-CTP=1 Sets CT ratio at 1
SG-TRIGGER=50TQT,50TQPU,0 Enable 50TQT to log and trigger fault recording
Step 3 Using Table 13-14, transmit the first row of setting commands for your sensing input type.
Table 13-14. 50TQ Pickup Settings

Sensing Type Command Comments
S0-50TQ=0.1,0,N Sets 50TQ pickup at 0.1 A, TD = 0, non-directional
1A S0-50TQ=1.0,0,N Sets 50TQ pickup at 1.0 A, TD = 0, non-directional
5A S0-50TQ=5.0,0,N Sets 50TQ pickup at 5.0 A, TD = 0, non-directional
For a single-phase input test, I2 = Ia ÷ 3. Therefore, the relay should pick up at a value of three times the
setting value when applying only a single-phase input. For example, to determine the pickup current value
required for an a 1 A relay with a pickup setting of 0.1, it would require 0.1 times 3 or 0.3 amperes of input
current.
Step 4 Slowly ramp up A-phase current until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup occurred within the specified
accuracy of the relay (5 A sensing: +3 percent or +75 mA, 1 A sensing: +3 percent or +15 mA). Table
13-15 provides the upper and lower limits for the specified tests.

Table 13-15. 50/150TQ Pickup Values
Sensing Lower Upper
Type Pickup Setting Limit Limit
S0-50TQ=0.1,0 0.225 A 0.375 A
1A S0-50TQ=1.0,0 2.91 A 3.09 A
S0-50TQ=5.0,0 14.55 A 15.45 A
S0-50TQ=0.5,0 1.425 A 1.575 A
5A S0-50TQ=5.0,0 14.55 A 15.45 A
S0-50TQ=10.0,0 29.1 A 30.1 A
Step 5 After pickup occurs, slowly ramp the current down until OUT1 opens. Verify that dropout occurred as
specified (95 percent, +2 percent). Verify 50TQ target on the HMI.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 3, 4, and 5, applying all Table 13-15 values that apply to your sensing input type.
Step 7 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 3 through 6 for phase B (terminals D3 and D4) and phase C (terminals D5
and D6).
Step 8 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the 150TQ elements. Use Table 13-16 as a reference when
substituting the commands used in Step 1.

Replace These Commands With These Commands
SL-50TQ=1,0 SL-150TQ=1,0
SL-VO1=50TQT SL-VO1=150TQT
SG-TRIG=50TQT,50TQPU,0 SG-TRIG=150TQT,150TQPU,0
Step 9 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 8 for the 50TQ and 150TQ elements in Setting Group 1.
50/150TQ Time Delay Verification

Step 1 Connect a current source to Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase).
Step 2 Prepare the 50TQ and 150TQ elements for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-17 to
the relay.
Command Purpose
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom settings. Overwrite with
logic = None settings.
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=50/150 Sets Q50 as custom logic name
SG-TRIGGER=50TQT,50T Enable 50/150TQT to log and trigger fault
QPU, 150TQT,150TQPU 0 recording

Step 3 Using Table 13-18, transmit the first column of setting commands for your sensing input type
(substitute 0.1 for 1 amp CT).
Table 13-18. 50/150TQ Time Delay Settings

Purpose
S0-50TQ=0.5,2S S0-50TQ=0.5,5S S0-50TQ=0.5,10S Sets 50TQ TD
For a single-phase input test, I 2 = Ia ÷ 3. Therefore, the relay should pick up at a value of three times the
setting value when applying only a single-phase input. For example, to determine the pickup current value
required for a 1A relay with a pickup setting of 0.1, it would require 0.1 times 3 or 0.3 amperes of input current.
Step 4 Step the applied A-phase current to 110% of pickup. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy
of the 50TQ time delay setting, OUT1, and 150TQ, OUT2. Timing accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles
of the time delay setting.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 and 3 for the middle and higher time delay settings in Table 13-18.
D6).
Step 7 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 6 for Setting Group 1.
50/150TN (Independent Ground Input IG) Pickup and Dropout Verification

Purpose: To verify the operation of the 50TN and 150TN elements for IG input.
Reference Commands: SL-50TN/150TN
Step 1 Connect a current source to Terminals D7 and D8 (IG).

Step 2 Prepare the 50TN and 150TN elements for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-19 to
the relay. Reset targets.
Table 13-19. 50/150TN Pickup Test Commands

Command Purpose
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom settings.
Overwrite with logic = None settings.
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=50/150TN Sets 50/150TN as custom logic name
SL-50TN=G,0 Enables 50TN for IG input, disables blocking
SL-150TN=G,0 Enables 150TN for IG input, disables blocking
SG-CTG=1 Sets CT ratio at 1
SG-TRIGGER=50TNT+150TNT, Enable 50/150TNT to log and trigger fault
50TNPU+150TNPU,0 recording
Step 3 Using Table 13-20, transmit the first row of setting commands for your sensing input type.

Table 13-20. 50/150TN Pickup Settings
Sets 50TN pickup at 0.1 A, TD = 0,

S0-50TN=0.1,0,N S0-150TN=0.1,0,N non-directional. Sets 150TN pickup at
0.1 A, TD = 0, non-directional.

1A S0-50TN=1.0,0,N S0-150TN=1.0,0,N non-directional. Sets 150TN pickup at



5A S0-50TN=5.0,0,N S0-150TN=5.0,0,N non-directional. Sets 150TN pickup at

Step 4 Slowly increase the IG current until OUT1 closes. Verify that pickup occurs within the specified
accuracy listed in Table 13-21. Slowly decrease the applied current until OUT1 opens. Dropout should
occur at 93 to 97 percent of pickup.
Step 5 Repeat Step 4 while monitoring OUT2 (150TN). Verify 50TG and 150TG targets on the HMI. Verify
the pickup accuracy of the middle and upper pickup settings.
Table 13-21. 50T/150T Element Accuracy

Pickup Accuracy Sensing Type
B or F (1 A) +2% or +10 mA
E (5 A) +2% or +50 mA
Step 6 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the 50TN and 150TN elements in Setting Group 1.
50/150TN (Independent Ground Input IG) Time Delay Verification

Step 1 Prepare the 50TN and 150TN elements for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-19 to
the relay.
Step 2 Using Table 13-22, transmit the first column of setting commands for your sensing input type (5A is
shown).
Table 13-22. 50/150TN Time Delay Settings

Purpose
S0-50TN=0.5,2S, S0-50TN=0.5,5S S0-50TN=0.5,10S Sets 50TN TD
S0-150TN=0.5,2S S0-150TN=0.5,5S S0-150TN=0.5,10S Sets 150TN TD

Step 3 With the current source still connected to Terminals D7 and D8 (IG), step the applied current to .55
amps (for 1 amp CT circuit divide by 5). Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the 50TN
time delay setting, OUT1 and 150TN, OUT2. Timing accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles of the time
delay setting.
Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the middle and higher time delay settings in Table 13-22.
Time Overcurrent (51) (BE1-700C only)
Timing Verification
Purpose: To verify the timing operation of the 51 and 151 elements.
Reference Commands: SL-51PNQ/151P,151N, S<g>-51P/151P
Step 1 Prepare the 51 element for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-23 to the relay.
Table 13-23. 51/151 Timing Test Commands

Command Purpose
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom settings. Overwrite with logic =

None settings.
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-51P=1,0 Enables 51P, disables blocking
SL-51N=1,0 Enables 51N, disables blocking
SL-51Q=1,0 Enables 51Q, disables blocking
SL-VO1=51PT Enables OUT1 to close for 51P trip
SL-VO2=51NT Enables OUT2 to close for 51N trip
SL-VO3=51QT Enables OUT3 to close for 51Q trip
SG-TARG=51/151 Enable 51/151 targets
SG-TRIG=51PT+51NT+51QT,51PPU+51NPU+ Enable 51PT or 51NT or 51QT to log and trigger

51QPU,0 fault recording
Step 2 Transmit the appropriate commands in Table 13-24 for your sensing input type.
Table 13-24. 51 Pickup Settings

Negative-Sequence
Sensing Type Phase Commands Neutral Commands Commands
1A S0-51P=0.1,0.5,I2,N S0-51N=0.1,0.5,I2,N S0-51Q=0.1,0.5,I2,N
5A S0-51P=0.5,0.5,I2,N S0-51N=0.5,0.5,I2,N S0-51Q=0.5,0.5,I2,N

Step 3 Connect a current source to relay Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase). Using the values listed in Table
13-25 (table value x3 for 51Q), apply the appropriate current values and measure the time between
the application of current and the closure of OUT1, OUT2 and OUT3. Verify that the relay performs
within the specified limits.
Table 13-25. 51 Timing Values

Relay Trip Limits
Sensing Time
Type Dial Applied Current Lower Limit Higher Limit
0.15 A 0.748 seconds 0.827 seconds
0.5 0.50 A 0.19 seconds 0.24 seconds
1A 5 0.50 A 1.798 seconds 1.988 seconds

0.5
5 2.5 A 1.798 seconds 1.988 seconds

5A
Step 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for all of the current and time dial settings for your current sensing type.
Step 5 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for phase B (Terminals D3 and D4) and phase C (Terminals D5
and D6).
Step 6 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 5 for the 151N element. Using ASCII commands, substitute 151
for any 51 logic or setting commands in each test.
Pickup and Dropout Verification

Purpose: To verify the pickup accuracy of the 51P, 51N, 151N and 51Q elements.
Reference Commands: SL-51P, SL-51N, SL-51Q, SL-151N, SL-GROUP, SL-VO
Step 1 Connect a current source to Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase). Refer to Figure 13-1 for terminal
locations. An ohmmeter or continuity tester may be used to monitor output contact status.
Step 2 To prepare the 51P, 51N and 51Q elements for testing, transmit the commands in Table 13-26 to the
relay. Reset targets.

Table 13-26. 51P, 51N and 51Q Pickup Test Commands
Command Purpose
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom logic settings. Overwrite with logic = None settings.
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-51P=1,0 Enables 51P and disables blocking
SL-51N=1,0 Enables 51N and disables blocking
SL-51Q=1,0 Enables 51Q and disables blocking
SL-VO1=51PT Enables OUT1 to close for 51PT trip
SL-VO2=51NT Enables OUT2 to close for 51NT trip
SL-VO3=51QT Enables OUT3 to close for 51QT trip
SG-TRIGGER=51PT+51NT+51
Enable 51PT or 51NT or 51QT to log and trigger fault recording
QT,51PPU+51NPU+51QPU,0
EXIT;Y Exit and save settings
Step 3 Using Table 13-27 as a guide, transmit the first row of setting commands (minimum pickup setting)
for your sensing type.
Table 13-27. 51P/51N/51Q Pickup Settings

Current
Sensing Pickup Settings
Input
Type Phase Neutral Neg. Sequence Purpose
S0-51P=0.5,0,I2,N S0-51N=0.5,0,I2,N S0-51Q=0.5,0,I2,N Sets 51PNQ PU at

0.5 A

5A
5.0 A

25.0 A

0.1 A

1A
1.0 A

5.0 A
Step 4 Slowly increase the A-phase current until OUT1 (51P pickup indicator) closes. Verify that pickup
occurs within the specified accuracy listed in Table 13-28. Slowly decrease the applied current until
OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 93 to 97 percent of pickup. Verify 51A and 51N targets on the
HMI. Repeat Step 4 while monitoring OUT2 (51N). Verify the pickup and dropout accuracy of the
middle and upper pickup settings for your sensing type.

Table 13-28. 51P/51N Element Accuracy
B (1 A) +2% or +10 mA
E or F (5 A) +2% or +50 mA
Step 5 Slowly increase the A-phase current until OUT3 (51Q pickup indicator) closes (3 x A-phase value).
Verify that pickup occurs within the specified accuracy listed in Table 13-29. Slowly decrease the
applied current until OUT3 opens. Dropout should occur at 93 to 97% of pickup. Verify the 51Q target
on the HMI. Verify the pickup accuracy of the middle and upper pickup settings for your sensing type.
Table 13-29. 51Q Element Accuracy

B (1 A) +2% or +10 mA
E or F (5 A) +2% or +50 mA
Step 6 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for phase B (Terminals D3 and D4) and phase C (Terminals D5
and D6). To test independent ground input IG, gain access and transmit SL-51N=G,0 exit and save.
Apply test current to Terminals D7 and D8 while monitoring OUT2 and repeat Step 4. Verify 51G
target on the HMI.
Step 7 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 4 and Step 6, IG input, for the 151N element. Overwrite the 51
commands entered in Step 2 with the commands of Table 13-30.
Table 13-30. 151N Pickup Commands

Command Purpose
SL-151N=G,0 Enables 151N, disables blocking
SL-VO2=151NT Enables OUT2 to close for 151N trip
SG-TRIGGER=151NT,151NPU,0 Enable 151NT or 151NPU to log and trigger fault recording
Step 8 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for the 51P, 51N and 151N elements in Setting Group 1. (See
Table 13-21.) Before testing settings in other setting groups, a setting group must be selected using
the CS/CO-GROUP commands. To activate Setting Group 1, CS-GROUP=1 would be entered to
select Setting Group 1 and CO-GROUP=1 would be entered to make Setting Group 1 active. Also,
the pickup settings made in Step 3 (Table 13-27) must be changed to specify the setting group being
tested. To test settings in Group 1, replace the 0 in the S0-x51 commands with a 1 (S1-x51).
Voltage Protection (BE1-700V only)

Purpose: To verify the operating accuracy of the 24, 27P/127P & 27X, 59P/159P & X and 47
protection elements.
Reference Commands: SL-24, SL-27P/127P or (27X), SL-59P/159P or (X), SL-47, SL-VO, SL-GROUP,
RG-STAT

Overexcitation, Volts/Hertz Alarm, Integrating Time and Definite Time Pickup Verification
The BE1-700V detects overexcitation conditions with a volts/hertz element that consist of one alarm setting,
one integrating time characteristic with selectable exponents (3 sets of time curves as shown in Appendix C)
and two definite time characteristics. Note that V/Hz nominal is 69.3 volts (phase to neutral) x square root
3/60 Hz, or 2.001. That is, at nominal voltage and frequency (60 Hz system) 1 pu V/Hz = 2.001.
Step 1 Prepare the 24 pickup function for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-31 to the relay.
Reset targets.
Table 13-31. V/Hz Alarm, Integrating Time and Definite Time Test Commands
Command Purpose
SL-N=NONE Zero out custom logic settings

Overwrite with logic = None settings
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=24 Sets 24 as custom logic name
SG-VTP=1,4W,PN,PN Set VT phase voltage parameters
SG-NOM=69.3,5.00 Set nominal voltage to 69.3 P to N
SA-MAJ=31 Enables Major Alarm Light for 24 alarm
SL-24=1,0 Enables 24, disables blocking
SL-VO1=24T Enables OUT1 to close for 24 trip
SG-TRIG=24T, 24PU, 0 Enables 24 to log and trigger fault

recording
Step 2 Using Table 13-32 as a guide, transmit the setting commands to the relay.
Table 13-32. Alarm, Integrating Time and Definite Time Pickup Settings (Step 2)
Overexcitation
Settings Purpose
PICKUP
SA-24=2.05,0.0 Set 24 Alarm at 1.025% of nominal (2.05 V/Hz) and time delay = 0.
Set 24 Integrating PU at 1.05% of nominal (2.10 V/Hz), Trip Time Dial =

S0-24=2.1,0.0,0.0,2.0
0, Reset Time Dial = 0, time curve exponent = 2.
S0-24D=0.0,50ms,0.0,
Sets 24 definite pickups at 0 and time definite time delay at minimum.
50ms
Step 3 Prepare to monitor the operation of the 24 Alarm and Trip functions. Alarm operation can be verified
by monitoring the Major Alarm LED on the relay's front panel. Operation of 24T by can be verified by
monitoring OUT1.
Step 4 Connect a 120 Vac, three-phase, 50 or 60 hertz voltage source (depending on user’s nominal
frequency) to Terminals C13 (A-phase), C14 (B-phase), C15 (C-phase) and C16 (neutral). Refer to
Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.

Step 5 Apply A-phase voltage at nominal frequency and slowly increase until the Major Alarm LED lights (V/H
PU x Freq x % Alarm = PU). Pickup should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt of the Alarm setting.
Continue increasing the A-phase voltage until OUT1 closes (V/H Trip x Freq = PU). Pickup should
occur within +2 percent or 1 volt of the Trip pickup setting. Slowly decrease the A-phase voltage until
OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur at 95% or higher of the of the actual pickup value for both Trip
and Alarm.
Step 6 Verify the 24 target on the HMI.
Step 7 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for higher and lower alarm and trip pickup settings.
Step 8 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for frequencies other than nominal.
Step 9 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 2 through 8 for the B-phase and C-phase voltage inputs.
Table 13-33. Alarm, Integrating Time and Definite Time Pickup Settings (Step 11)
Overexcitation Settings
PICKUP Purpose
SA-24=0,0.0 Set 24 Alarm at 0 and time delay = 0.
Set 24 Integrating PU at 0, Trip Time Dial = 0, Reset Time Dial = 0, time

S0-24=0.0,0.0,0.0,2.0
curve exponent = 2.
Set the first 24 definite pickup at 118% of nominal (2.36 V/Hz) and
S0-24D=2.36,50ms,0.0,
definite time delay at minimum. Set second pickup at 0 and time delay
50ms
at minimum.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the first definite time pickup
Step 13 Using Table 13-33 as a guide, set first definite time setting to 0 and second to 2.36 V/Hz.
Step 14 Repeat Steps 2 through 10 for the second definite time delay.
Overexcitation, Volts/Hertz Integrating Trip Time Verification

The following test uses the (M-1)^2 time curve.
Table 13-34. V/Hz Trip Time Settings

Settings Purpose
S0-24=2.1,0.5,0.0,2.0 Sets integrating 24 PU at 1.05% of nominal (2.10 V/Hz), Trip

Time Dial = 0.5, Reset Time Dial = 0, time curve exponent = 2.
Figures 13-1 and 13-2 for terminal locations.
Step 3 All integrating timing tests are based on % of nominal Volts/Hertz (1 PU value). Refer to Appendix C
of the BE1-700 instruction manual for time curves. Apply A-phase voltage at nominal frequency and
a value of voltage that equals the V/Hz % of nominal shown in Table 13-35 for Time Dial 0.5. Measure
the time between the application of voltage and the closure of OUT1. Verify that the relay operates
withing +5% of the values shown in Table 13-35.

Table 13-35. V/Hz Trip Times
Percent of
Nominal V/Hz Time Dial 0.5 Time Dial 1.0 Time Dial 2.0
110% 50 seconds 100 seconds 200 seconds
120% 12.5 seconds 25 seconds 50 seconds
140% 3.1 seconds 6.3 seconds 12.5 seconds
Step 4 Repeat the test for Time Dial 1.0 and 2.0.
Overexcitation, Volts/Hertz Linear Reset Time Verification

The following reset time test is an approximation. For a more precise test, use a computer driven test set and
the integration time equations found in Section 4, Protection and Control, Voltage Protection, 24 Function, or
Appendix C, Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves.
Table 13-36. V/Hz Reset Time Pickup Settings

Settings Purpose
S0-24=2.1,0.5,0.2,2.0 Sets 24 PU at 1.05% of nominal (2.10 V/Hz), Trip Time Dial = 0.5,
Reset Time Dial =0.2, time curve exponent = 2.
Step 2 Connect a 120 Vac, three-phase, 50 or 60-hertz voltage source (depending on user’s nominal
Step 3 Apply A-phase voltage at nominal frequency and a value of voltage that equals the V/Hz % of nominal
shown in Table 13-37. Measure the time between the application of voltage and the closure of OUT1
(12.5 seconds). Remove the test voltage and reapply after 5 seconds has elapsed.
With a Reset Time Dial setting of 0.2, the total time to reset, after trip is removed, will be
approximately 10 seconds. (See Section 4, Protection and Control, Voltage Protection, for more
details.) Reapplying the test voltage after 5 seconds will yield a trip time of approximately ½ its original
value or 6.25 seconds for Trip Time Dial 0.5 verifying that the reset time delay is working.
Table 13-37. V/Hz Reset Time

Percent of
Nominal V/Hz Time Dial 0.5 Time Dial 1.0 Time Dial 2.0
Step 4 Repeat Step 3 for Trip Time Dial 1.0 and 2.0 (½ trip time is approximately 12.5 seconds for Time Dial
1.0, and 25 seconds for Time Dial 2.0. (Still reapply voltage after 5 seconds as reset time dial is still
0.2.)
Overexcitation, Volts/Hertz Definite Time (24D) Trip Time Verification

The following test uses the (M-1)^2 time curve.

Table 13-38. Definite Time V/Hz Trip Time Settings
Settings Purpose
Set the first 24 definite pickup at 118% of nominal (2.36 V/Hz)
S0-24D=2.36,50ms,0.
and definite time delay at minimum. Set second pickup at 0 and
0, 50ms
time delay at minimum.
Step 3 Definite timing tests are based on % of nominal Volts/Hertz (1 PU value). Apply A-phase voltage at
nominal frequency and a value of voltage that equals the V/Hz % of nominal shown in Table 13-39
(118% or 2.36 V/Hz). Measure the time between the application of voltage and the closure of OUT1.
Verify that the relay operates withing +0.5% or 1 cycle, whichever is greater, for the TD settings
shown in Table 13-39.
Table 13-39. Definite Time (24D) V/Hz Trip Times

Percent of Minimum Second Time Third Time
Nominal V/Hz Time Delay Delay Delay
Step 6 Set first definite time pickup setting to 0 and set the second definite time pickup setting to 2.36 V/Hz.
Step 7 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the second definite time function.
Phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage Pickup Verification

Step 1 Prepare the 27P and 59P pickup functions for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-40
to the relay. Reset targets. Follow the same procedure for the 127P/159P.
Table 13-40. 27P and 59P Pickup Test Commands

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=27_59 Sets 27_59 as custom logic name
SA-MAJ=0 Disables major Alarm
SL-VO1=27PT+59PT Enables OUT1 to close for 27P or 59P trip
SG-TRIG=27PT+59PTU,27PPU+59PPU,0 Enables 27P and 59P to log and trigger fault record
SG-TARG=27/127/59/159 Enables 27/127/59/159 targets
Step 2 Using Table 13-41 as a guide, transmit the first row of setting commands (highest 27P PU, lowest 59P
PU) to the relay.

Table 13-41. 27P and 59P Pickup Settings
Phase Pickup Settings
Purpose
Undervoltage Overvoltage
S0-27P=96,50ms S0-59P=132,50ms Sets 27P PU at 96 V, 59P at 132 V, TD at min
S0-27P=84,50ms S0-59P=144, 50ms Sets 27P PU at 84 V, 59P at 144 V, TD at min
S0-27P=72,50ms S0-59P=156, 50ms Sets 27P PU at 72 V, 59P at 156 V, TD at min
Step 3 Prepare to monitor 27P and 59P function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring Out 1.
Step 4 Connect and apply a 120 Vac, three-phase voltage source to Terminals C13 (A-phase), C14
(B-phase), C15 (C-phase) and C16 (Neutral). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
Step 5 Slowly decrease the A-phase voltage until OUT1 closes. Pickup should occur within +2 percent or
1 volt of the 27P pickup setting. Slowly increase the A-phase voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout
should occur between 102 and 103 percent of the actual pickup value. Verify the 27A target and the
HMI. Reset the target.
Step 6 Continue increasing the A-phase voltage until OUT1 closes. Pickup should occur within +2 percent
or 1 volt of the 59P pickup setting. Slowly reduce the A-phase voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout
should occur between 97 and 98 percent of the actual pickup value. Verify 59A target on the HMI.
Step 7 Verify the pickup and dropout accuracy of the middle and upper pickup settings listed in Table 13-41.
Phase Undervoltage and Overvoltage Timing Verification

Step 1 Using Table 13-42 as a guide, transmit the first row of setting commands to the relay.
Table 13-42. 27P, 59P Pickup and Time Delay Settings

Purpose
S0-27P=72,2s S0-59P=156,2s Sets 27P PU at 72 V, 59P at 156 V

Sets 27P TD, 59P TD at 2 seconds
S0-27P=,5s S0-59P=,5s Sets 27P TD, 59P TD at 5 seconds
S0-27P=,10s S0-59P=,10s Sets 27P TD, 59P TD at 10 seconds
Step 2 Prepare to monitor the 27P and 59P timings. Timing accuracy is verified by measuring the elapsed
time between a sensing voltage change and OUT1 closing.
Step 3 Connect and apply a 120 Vac, three-phase voltage source to Terminals C13 (A-phase), C14
(B-phase), C15 (C-phase) and C16 (neutral). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
Step 4 Step the A-phase voltage down to 68 volts. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the 27P
time delay setting. Timing accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 5 Step the A-phase voltage up to 165 volts. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the 59P
time delay setting. Timing accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 6 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the middle and upper time delay settings of Table 13-42.

Negative-Sequence Voltage Pickup Verification
Step 1 Prepare the 47 pickup function for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-43 to the relay.
Reset targets.
Table 13-43. 47 Pickup Test Commands
Command Purpose

Y Confirm overwrite
SL-27P=0 Disables 27P
SL-59P=0 Disables 59P
SP-60FL=ENA,PN Removes 60FL block from 47 element
SG-TRIG = 47T,47PU, 0 Enables 47 to log and trigger fault recording
SG-TARG=47 Enables 47 targets
Table 13-44. 47 Pickup Settings

Pickup Settings
Purpose
(Negative-Sequence Voltage)
S0-47=24, 50ms Sets 47 PU at 24 V, time delay at minimum
Step 3 Prepare to monitor 47 function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring OUT1.
Step 4 Connect and apply a 50 Vac, single-phase voltage source to Terminals C13 (A-phase) and C16
(neutral). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
Step 5 Negative-sequence voltage is a the phase voltage. Therefore for a V2 setting of 24 volts, the applied
phase voltage will be 24 x 3 or 72 volts. Slowly increase the A-phase voltage until OUT1 closes.
Pickup should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt of the pickup setting. Slowly decrease the A-phase
voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur between 97% and 98% of the actual pickup value.
Verify the 47 target on the HMI.
Step 6 Verify the pickup and dropout accuracy of the middle and upper 47 pickup settings.

Negative-Sequence Voltage Timing Verification
Table 13-45. 47 Pickup and Time Delay Settings

Pickup and Time
Purpose
Delay Settings
S0-47=36,2S Sets 47 PU at 36 V, 47 TD at 2 seconds
S0-47=,5S Sets 47 TD at 5 seconds
S0-47=,10S Sets 47 TD at 10 seconds
Step 2 Prepare to monitor the 47 timings. Timing accuracy is verified by measuring the elapsed time between
a sensing voltage change and OUT1 closing.
Step 3 Connect and apply a 100 Vac, single-phase voltage source to Terminals C13 (A-phase) and C16
(neutral). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
Step 4 Step the A-phase voltage up to 115 volts. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the
47-time delay setting. Timing accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 5 Repeat Step 5 for the middle and upper time delay settings of Table 13-42.
Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Pickup Verification (3V0 Input)

Step 1 Prepare the 27X and 59X/159X pickup function for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-
46 to the relay. Reset targets.
Table 13-46. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Test Commands

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=27X,59/159X Sets 27/59/159X as custom logic name
SL-47=0 Disables 47
SL-27X=2,0 Enables 27X (3E0), disables blocking
SL-59X=2,0 Enables 59X/159X(3E0), disables blocking
SL-159X=2,0 Enables 159X(3E0), disables blocking
SL-VO1=27XT+59XT/159XT Enables OUT1 to close for 27X and 59X/159X trip
SL-V02=159XT Enables OUT2 to close for 159X trip
SG-TRIG=27XT+59XT+159XT, Enable 27XT, 59XT/159XT to log and trigger fault
27XPU+59XPU+159XPU,0 recording
SG-TARG=27/59/127/159 Enables 27/59/127/159 targets
EXIT Y;Y Exit and save settings
Step 2 Using Table 13-47 as a guide, transmit the first row of setting commands (highest 27X PU, lowest
59XPU/159XPU) to the relay.

Table 13-47. 27X and Pickup Settings (3E0)
Pickup Settings
Purpose
Sets 27X PU at 50V, 59X/159X at 60V, TD

S0-27X=50,50ms S0-59X/159X=60,50ms
at minimum
Sets 27X PU at 20V, 59X/159X at 30V, TD

S0-27X=20,50ms S0-59X/159X=30,50ms
at minimum
Sets 27X PU at 5 V, 59X/159X at 10V, TD

S0-27X=5,50ms S0-59X/159X=10,50ms
at minimum
Step 3 Prepare to monitor the 59X/159X function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring OUT1
(OUT2 for 159X).
Step 4 Connect and apply a single-phase, 55 Vac voltage source to Terminals C13 (polarity) and C16 (non-
polarity). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
Step 5 Slowly decrease the voltage until OUT1 closes. Pickup should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt of the
27X pickup setting. Slowly increase the voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur between
102% and 103% of the actual pickup value. Verify the 27N target on the HMI and reset.
Step 6 Continue increasing the voltage until OUT1 closes. Pickup should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt
of the pickup setting. Slowly reduce the voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur between
97% and 98% of the actual pickup value. Verify the 59N target on the HMI.
Step 7 Verify the pickup and dropout accuracy of the middle and upper pickup settings in Table 13-44.
Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Timing Verification (3V0 Input)

Table 13-48. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup and Time Delay Settings (3Eo)
Purpose
S0-27X=10,2s S0-59X/159X=30,2s Sets 27X PU at 10V, 59X/159X at

30V
Sets 27X TD, 59X/159X TD at 2s
S0-27X=0,5s S0-59X/159X=0,5s Sets 27X TD, 59X/159X TD at 5s
S0-27X=0,10s S0-59X/159X=0,10s Sets 27X TD, 59X/159X TD at 10s
Step 2 Prepare to monitor the 27X and 59X/159X timings. Timing accuracy is verified by measuring the
elapsed time between a sensing voltage change and OUT1 closing.
Step 3 Connect and apply a single-phase, 20 Vac to Terminals C13 (polarity) and C16 (non-polarity). Refer
to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
Step 4 Step the voltage down to 5 volts. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the 27X time
delay setting. Timing accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 5 Step the voltage up to 35 volts. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the 59X/159X time

Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Pickup Verification (Fundamental Vx Input)
Step 1 Prepare the 27X and 59X/159X pickup functions for testing by transmitting the commands in Table
13-49 to the relay. Reset targets.

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=27X_59X/159X Sets 27X_59X/159X as custom logic name
SG-VTX=1,AN Set auxiliary voltage parameters
SL-27X=1,0 Enables 27X, disables blocking
SL-59X/159X=1,0 Enables 59X/159X, disables blocking
SL-VO1=27XT+59X/159XT Enables OUT1 to close for 27X or 59X/159X trip
SG- Enables 27XT and 59XT/159XT to log and
TRIG=27XT+59X/159XT,27XPU+59XP/ trigger fault recording
159XPU
Step 2 Using Table 13-50 as a guide, transmit the first row of setting commands (highest 27X PU, lowest
59XPU/159XPU) to the relay.
Table 13-50. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Settings

Pickup Settings
Purpose
Sets 27X PU at 70 V, 59X/159X at 90 V, TD

S0-27X=70,50ms S0-59X/159X=90,50ms
at minimum

S0-27X=60,50ms S0-59X/159X=100, 50ms
at minimum

S0-27X=50,50ms S0-59X/159X=110, 50ms
at minimum
Step 3 Prepare to monitor the 27X and 59X/159X function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring
OUT1.
Step 4 Connect and apply a single-phase, 80 Vac voltage source to VX Input, Terminals C17 (polarity) and
C18 (non-polarity). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
pickup setting. Slowly increase the voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur between 102%
and 103% of the actual pickup value. Verify the 27 bus target on the HMI and reset.
Step 6 Continue to increase the voltage until out1 closes. Pickup should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt
of the pickup setting. Slowly reduce the voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur between
97% and 98% of the actual pickup value. Verify the 59 Bus target on the HMI.

Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Timing Verification (Fundamental Vx Input)
Table 13-51. 27X, 59X/159X Pickup and Time Delay Settings

Purpose
Sets 27X PU at 50 V, 59X/159X at 110 V
S0-27X=50,2s S0-59X/159X=110,2s
Sets 27X TD, 59X/159X TD at 2 seconds
S0-27X=,5s S0-59X/159X=,5s Sets 27X TD, 59X/159X TD at 5 seconds
Step 3 Connect and apply a single-phase, 80 Vac voltage source to Terminals C17 (polarity) and C18
(non-polarity). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations .
delay setting. Timing accuracy is +5% or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Pickup Verification (3rd Harmonic Vx Input)

Step 1 Prepare the 27X and 59X/159X pickup functions for testing by transmitting the commands in Table
13-52 to the relay. Reset targets.

Command Purpose

Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=27X_59X/159X Sets 27X_59X/159X as custom logic name
SG-VTX=1,AN Set auxiliary voltage parameters
SL-27X=3,0 Enables 27X, disables blocking
SL-59X/159X=3,0 Enables 59X/159X, disables blocking
SL-VO1=27XT+59XT/159XT Enables OUT1 to close for 27X or 59X/159X trip
SG-TRIG=27XT+59XT/159XT, Enables 27XT + 59XT/159XT to log trigger fault

27XPU+59XPU/159XPU,0 recording
Step 2 Using Table 13-53 as a guide (same values as the fundamental test but at 3rd harmonic frequency),
transmit the first row of setting commands (highest 27X PU, lowest 59XPU/159X PU) to the relay.

Table 13-53. 27X and 59X/159X Pickup Settings
Pickup Settings
Purpose
S0-27X=70,50ms S0-59X/159X=90, Sets 27X PU at 70 V, 59X/159X at 90 V, TD

50ms at minimum

50ms at minimum

50ms at minimum
Step 3 Prepare to monitor the 27X and 59X/159X function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring
OUT1.
Step 4 Connect and apply a single-phase, 80 Vac, 3rd harmonic voltage source to Terminals C17 (polarity)
and C18 (non-polarity). Refer to Figures 13-1 or 13-2 for terminal locations.
pickup setting. Slowly increase the voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur between 102%
and 103% of the actual pickup value. Verify the 27-3 Bus target on the HMI.
Step 6 Continue to increase voltage until OUT1 closes. Pickup should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt of
the pickup setting. Slowly reduce the voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur between 97%
and 98% of the actual pickup value.
Verify the 59-3 Bus target on the HMI.
Auxiliary Undervoltage and Overvoltage Timing Verification (3rd harmonic Vx Input)

Step 1 Using Table 13-54 as a guide (same values as the fundamental test but at 3rd harmonic frequency),
transmit the first row of setting commands to the relay.
Table 13-54. 27X, 59X/159X Pickup and Time Delay Settings

Undervoltage Overvoltage Purpose
S0-59X/159X= Sets 27X PU at 50 V, 59X/159X at 110 V

S0-27X=50,2s
110,2s Sets 27X TD, 59X/159X TD at 2 seconds
S0-59X/159X=, Sets 27X TD, 59X/159X TD at 10

S0-27X=,10s
10s seconds
Step 3 Connect and apply a single-phase, 80 Vac, 3rd harmonic voltage source to Terminals C17 (polarity)
and C18 (non-polarity). Refer to Figure 13-1 for terminal locations.

Frequency
Purpose: To verify the operating accuracy of the 81/181/281/381/481/581 protection elements.
Reference Commands: SL-x81, SL-VO, S<g>-x81, S<g>-81INH
Over/Underfrequency Pickup Verification

Step 1 Prepare the x81 pickup functions for pickup testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-55 to
the relay.
Table 13-55. x81 Pickup Test Commands

Command Purpose

Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=FREQTEST Sets FREQTEST as custom logic name
SL-VO1=81T+581T Enables OUT1 to close for 81 or 581 trip
SG-TARG=81/181/281/ Enables 81/181/281/381/481/581 targets

381/481/581
SG-TRIG=81T+181T+ Sets fault trigger on any x81

281T+381T+481T+
581T,81T+181T+
281T+381T+481T+ 581T
Step 2 Transmit the commands in Table 13-56 to the relay. These commands set the voltage inhibit value,
pickup value, and operating mode (Underfrequency or Overfrequency) for each of the x81 functions.

Table 13-56. x81 Pickup and Mode Settings
Pickup and Mode
Settings Purpose
S0-INH=40,0,46,64 Set inhibits--UV-40 volts, V2-0%, UF-46 Hz,
OF-64 Hz
S0-81=42,0,U Sets 81 PU at 42 Hz, underfrequency
S0-381=65,0,O Sets 381 PU at 65 Hz, overfrequency
Step 3 Prepare to monitor x81 function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring the programmed
output contacts or HMI Screen 1.5.2.
Step 4 Connect and apply a 120 Vac, 60 hertz voltage source to Terminals C13 (A-phase) and C16 (neutral).
Step 5 Slowly decrease the frequency of the applied voltage until OUT3 (281) closes. Pickup should occur
within +0.01 hertz of the pickup setting. Slowly increase the frequency until OUT3 opens. Dropout
should occur at 0.02 hertz above or below the pickup setting.
Step 6 Lower the frequency until OUT3 again closes. Lower the source voltage until OUT3 drops out (under-
voltage inhibit level), raise the voltage until OUT3 picks up. Pickup should occur +2% of the voltage
inhibit setting and drop out at 95% of pickup.
Step 7 Repeat Step 5 for the 181 (OUT2) and 81 (OUT1) functions.
Step 8 Repeat Step 4.
Step 9 Slowly increase the frequency of the applied voltage until OUT4 (381) closes. Pickup should occur
within +0.01 hertz of the pickup setting. Slowly decrease the frequency until OUT4 opens. Dropout
should occur at 0.02 hertz above or below the pickup setting.
Step 10 Repeat Step 5 for the 481 (OUT5) and 581 (OUT1) functions.
Step 11 In Table 13-55, change SL-81 through 581 = 2,0 and transmit to the relay.
Step 12 Connect and apply, 120 Vac, 60Hz voltage source to Vx Input C17 and C18.
Step 13 Repeat Steps 5 through 9.
Time Delay Verification

Step 1 Prepare the x81 functions for time delay testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-55 to the
relay. Next, transmit the commands in the first column (2 second TD) of Table 13-57 to the relay.
Commands entered in Tables 13-56 should be retained for this test.
Table 13-57. x81 Time Delay Settings

Purpose
S0-81=,2S S0-81=,5S S0-81=,10S Sets 81 TD
S0-181=,2S S0-181=,5S S0-181=,10S Sets 181 TD
S0-281=,2S S0-281=,5S S0-281=,10S Sets 281 TD
S0-381=,2S S0-381=,5S S0-381=,10S Sets 381 TD
S0-481=,2S S0-481=,5S S0-481=,10S Sets 481 TD
S0-581=,2S S0-581=,5S S0-581=,10S Sets 581 TD

Step 2 Prepare to monitor the x81 timings. Timing accuracy is verified by measuring the elapsed time
between a frequency change and programmed output closing.
Step 3 Connect and apply a 120 Vac, 60 hertz voltage source to Terminals C13 (A-phase) and C16 (neutral).
Step 4 Step the frequency of the applied voltage down from 60 hertz to a value below the 281
underfrequency setting. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the 281 time delay setting.
Timing accuracy is +5 percent or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 5 Repeat Step 4 for the 181 (OUT2) and 81 (OUT1) elements.
Step 6 Step the frequency of the applied voltage up from 60 hertz to a value above the 381 overfrequency
setting. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the 281 time delay setting. Timing accuracy
is +5% or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 7 Repeat Step 6 for the 481 (OUT5) and 581 (OUT1) elements.
Step 8 Transmit the commands in the second column (5 second TD) of Table 13-57 to the relay.
Step 9 Repeat Steps 2 through 7 with a time delay setting of 5 seconds.
Step 10 Transmit the commands in the third column (10 second TD) of Table 13-57 to the relay.
Step 11 Repeat Steps 2 through 7 with a time delay setting of 10 seconds.
Step 12 Repeat Steps 4 through 11 for Vx Inputs C17 and C18 (change SL command to 2,0).
Synchronism Check (Optional)

Purpose: To verify the operation of the Sync-Check (25) function.
Reference Commands: SL-25, SL-V0.
25VM - VTP and VTX Live Voltage, Dead Voltage Pickup Test
Step 1 Prepare the 25 function block for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-58 to the relay.
Table 13-58. Sync-Check Pickup Test Commands

Command Purpose

Y Confirm overwrite
SG-VTX=1,AN Set VT Auxiliary voltage parameters
SL-25=1,0 Enables 25 function
SL-VO1=25VM1 Enables OUT1 to close for 25VM1
Table 13-59. Synchro-Check Voltage Monitor Pickup Settings

Sync-Check Purpose
S0-25VM=95,55,0,123,123 Sets LV = 95, DV = 55, TD = 0, VM1 = 123, VM2 =123

Step 3 Prepare to monitor the 25VM function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring OUT1.
Step 4 Connect relay Terminals C13 (A-phase), C14 (B-phase) and C15 (C-phase) together. Apply a
single phase, 0 Vac, 50 or 60 hertz ac voltage source (line VTP) to the three jumpered terminals
and the neutral Terminal (C16).
Step 5 OUT 1 should be closed. Slowly increase the line voltage until OUT1 opens (55 volts). Dropout
should occur within +2% or 1 volt of the Dead Voltage setting. Lower the voltage until OUT1 closes.
Pickup should be between 97% to 98% of the actual dropout value. Increase the voltage until OUT1
opens. Continue to increase the voltage until OUT1 closes (95 volts). Pickup should occur within
+2% or 1 volt of the hot voltage setting. Lower the voltage until OUT1 opens. Dropout should occur
between 97% and 98% of the actual pickup value. Remove voltage source 1.
Step 6 Connect a second single-phase 50 or 60 hertz voltage source (Auxiliary VTX) to relay Terminals
C17 (polarity) and C18 (non-polarity). Apply 0 vac.
Step 7 Output 1 should be closed. Slowly increase the Auxiliary voltage until OUT1 opens (55 volts).
Dropout should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt of the Dead Voltage setting. Lower the voltage until
OUT1 closes. Pickup should be between 97 to 98% of the actual dropout value. Increase the
voltage until OUT1 opens. Continue to increase the voltage until OUT1 closes (95 volts). Pickup
should occur within +2 percent or 1 volt of the Hot Voltage setting. Lower the voltage until OUT1
opens. Dropout should occur between 97% and 98% of the actual pickup value.
25VM Live/Dead Dropout Timing Verification

Table 13-60. Sync-Check 25VM Live/Dead Dropout Time Settings

Sync-Check Purpose
S0-25VM=95, 55, 50ms, 123, 123 Sets LV = 95, DV = 55, TD = Min, VM1 = 123, VM2 =
123
S0-25VM=95, 55, 2S, 123, 123 Sets LV = 95, DV = 55, TD = 2sec, VM1 = 123, VM2 =
123
S0-25VM=95, 55, 5S, 123, 123 Sets LV = 95, DV = 55, TD = 5 sec, VM1 = 123, VM2 =
123
Step 2 Prepare to monitor the 25VM Hot/Dead timing. Timing accuracy is verified by measuring the elapsed
time between a sensing voltage change and OUT1 opening.
Step 3 Connect relay Terminals C13 (A-phase), C14 (B-phase), and C15 (C-phase) together. Apply a 50
Vac, 50 or 60 hertz ac voltage source (Line VTP) to the three jumpered terminals and the neutral
Terminal (C16).
Step 4 Step the voltage up to 60 volts. Measure the time delay and verify the accuracy of the dead dropout
time delay setting. Timing accuracy is +% or +3 cycles of the time delay setting.
Step 5 Set the ac voltage at 100 volts. Step the voltage down to 90 volts. Measure the time delay and verify
the accuracy of the Live dropout delay setting. Timing accuracy is +5% or +3 cycles of the time delay
setting.
Step 7 Connect a second single-phase 50 or 60 hertz voltage source (Auxiliary VTX) to relay Terminals C17
(polarity) and C18 (non-polarity). Repeat Steps 2 through 6.
25VM1 Output Test

Step 1 With no voltage applied to either the Line or Auxiliary voltage sources, OUT1 should be closed. This
verifies the DEAD-LINE, DEAD AUX output of 25VM1.

Step 2 Apply 0 Vac to the Line voltage input (VTP). OUT1 contact should be closed. Output 1 will open as
the voltage is increased above the DEAD-LINE setting and close again when voltage exceeds the
LIVE-LINE setting. This verifies the LIVE-LINE, DEAD-AUX output of 25VM1. Remove voltage source
1.
Step 3 Apply 0 Vac to the Auxiliary Voltage Input (VTX). OUT1 contact should be closed. Output 1 will open
as the voltage is increased above the DEAD-LINE setting and close again when voltage exceeds the
LIVE-LINE setting. This verifies the DEAD-LINE, LIVE-AUX output of 25VM1.
25 Sync-Check Verification
Step 1 Transmit SL-VO1=25 to the relay and save it.
Table 13-61. Sync-Check Settings

Sync-Check Purpose
S0-25=10,10,0.3,0 Sets Delta V, Angle, Delta Slip and GF > BF Mode
Step 3 Prepare to monitor the 25 function operation. Operation can be verified by monitoring OUT 1.
Step 4 As in the previous test, connect relay Terminals C13 (A-phase), C14 (B-phase) and C15 (C-phase)
together. Apply a 120 Vac, 50 or 60 hertz ac, 0 degree voltage source (Line VTP) to the three
jumpered terminals and the neutral Terminal (C16).
Step 5 Apply a second 120 Vac, 50 or 60 hertz ac, 0 degree voltage source (Auxiliary VTX) to C17 and C18.
OUT1 should close verifying the 25 output for a Delta Angle of 0 degrees, 0 Delta V and 0 Delta
Frequency (Slip).
Step 6 Decrease the Auxiliary voltage input (VTX) until OUT1 opens. Slowly increase the voltage until OUT1
closes. Pickup should occur within +2% of the Delta V setting. Dropout should occur at 97% to 98%
of actual pickup.
Step 7 Repeat Step 6 for the Line voltage input (VTP). Return voltage inputs to 120 vac, 50 or 60 hertz, 0
degrees.
Step 8 Swing the angle between voltage source 1 and 2 until the OUT1 opens. Slowly decrease the angle
until OUT1 closes. Pickup should occur within +2% of the Delta Angle setting on the leading and
lagging side of 0 degrees. Dropout should occur at 97% to 98% of actual pickup. Return Delta Angle
of 0 degrees.
Step 9 With the Auxiliary Voltage set at nominal frequency, step change the frequency of the Line voltage
input by -0.25 hertz (59.75 on a 60 hertz relay). Note that OUT1 is closing and opening based on a
slip rate of 0.25 hertz. Decrease the frequency until OUT1 stays open. Slowly increase the frequency
until OUT1 begins to cycle (closed/open). Cycling pickup should occur within +2% of the Delta Slip
setting. Also check on the fast side (60.25 for a 60 hertz relay).
Step 10 Repeat Step 9 for the Auxiliary Voltage input.
Breaker Failure
Purpose: To verify the operation of the breaker failure (BF) function.
Reference Commands: SL-BF, SP-BF
Step 1 Prepare the BF function block for testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-62 to the relay.

Table 13-62. BF Pickup Test Commands
Command Purpose

Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=BF Sets BF as custom logic name
SL-BF=1,IN4,/IN3 Enables BF, CT input 1, IN4 initiate, /IN3 block
SP-BF=50m Set BF time delay at minimum
SL-VO1=BFT Enables OUT1 to close for BF trip
SL-VO2=BFPU Enables OUT2 to close for BF pickup
SG-TRIGGER=BFT,BFPU,0 Enable BFT to log and trigger fault recording
SG-TARG=BF Enables BF target
Step 2 Energize relay Inputs IN3 and IN4. This enables the BF logic and BF initiate. The BF current detector
pickup setting is a fixed value that is determined by the relay current sensing type. Table 13-63 lists
the pickup setting for each current sensing type.
Table 13-63. BF Current Detector Pickup Settings
Sensing Type Pickup Setting
B (1 A) 0.1 A
E or F (5 A) 0.5 A
Step 3 Connect a current source to Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase input). Slowly increase the current
applied to the A-phase input until OUT2 (and subsequently OUT1) closes. Compare the applied
current to the current values listed in Table 13-64. Verify that pickup occurred between the lower and
upper limits for your relay.
Table 13-64. BF Pickup Limits
Sensing Type Lower PU Limit Upper PU Limit
B (1 A) 0.09 A 0.11 A
E or F (5 A) 0.45 A 0.55 A
Step 4 Transmit the commands in Table 13-65 to set the BF time delay.
Table 13-65. BF Time Delay Commands

Command Purpose
SP-BF=100m Set BF time delay at 100 milliseconds

Step 5 Verify the BF time delay by applying the pickup current obtained in Step 3 for the duration given in
the following steps:
A. Apply pickup current to phase A for 4 cycles (67 ms at 60 Hz). No trip should occur.
B. Apply pickup current to phase A for 5 cycles. (83 ms at 60 Hz). No trip should occur.
C. Apply pickup current to phase A for 7 cycles (117 ms at 60 Hz). A BF trip should occur. Use the
RS-LGC command to retrieve an SER report and verify that a BF trip was logged 100 milliseconds
+5% (+1¼, -¼) after application of pickup current.
Step 6 (Optional.) De-energize relay Input IN3. This will block the breaker fail logic and cause OUT1 and
OUT2 to open. Verify that relay outputs OUT1 and OUT2 remain open (BF element does not operate)
even though pickup current is applied. De-energize IN3 and verify that OUT2 (and subsequently
OUT1) closes. Remove current from phase A.
Step 7 (Optional.) Apply pickup current to phase A. OUT2 and OUT1 should close. De-energize IN4 and
verify that OUT1 and OUT2 open. Remove current from phase A.
Step 8 Energize IN4 and apply 0.7 A of current to the phase A current input and measure the time between
the application of current and OUT1 closing. OUT2 should have closed immediately when current was
applied. Verify that the BF Timer operated within the specified accuracy of +5% or +1¼, -¼ cycles,
whichever is greater.
Step 9 (Optional.) Repeat Steps 3 through 8 for the phase B and phase C elements.
Virtual Switches
Purpose: To verify operation of the 43/143 Virtual Switches.
Reference Commands: SL-43/143, CS/CO-43/143
To test virtual switches, we verify each mode of operation but you do not have to verify both of the virtual
switches. In your testing, you may use either of the switches, as desired. If you give an invalid command such
as CS-143=1/CO-143=1 when Switch 143 is programmed for Mode 3 operation, the relay will reject the
command and return an INVALID PARAMETER message through the ASCII command interface. For more
information about virtual switch operation, see Section 4, Protection and Control, Virtual Switches. You may
verify operation of virtual switches by monitoring the programmed output contacts, HMI Screen 1.5.4, or by
using the RS-LGC command to retrieve logic variable data from the SER. You also may use the RG-STAT
command. See Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, for more information about reports.
Mode 1 - On/Off/Pulse
Step 1 Prepare the x43 Virtual Switch for Mode 1 testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-66.
.
Table 13-66. x43 Mode 1 Test Commands
Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=MODE1 Sets MODE1 as custom logic name
SL-43=1 Sets 43 for Mode 1 operation
SL-VO1=43 Enables OUT1 operation
Step 2 Prepare to monitor the virtual switch operation. An ohmmeter or continuity tester may be used to
monitor the contact status of OUT1.
Step 3 Transmit the commands in Table 13-67 to the relay. These commands change the state of the 43
Switch to On. Result: OUT1 contact closes and remains closed.

Table 13-67. x43 Mode 1 On Commands
Command Purpose
CS-43=1 Selects 43 for On operation
CO-43=1 Executes 43 for On operation
Switch to off. It isn't necessary to gain access for the following steps unless the write access timer
expires. Result: OUT1 contact opens and remains open.
Table 13-68. x43 Mode 1 Off Commands

Command Purpose
CS-43=0 Selects 43 for Off operation
CO-43=0 Executes 43 for Off operation
Step 5 Transmit the commands in Table 13-69. These commands pulse the 43 Switch on and off once.
Result: OUT1 contact closes for 200 milliseconds and returns to the open state.
Table 13-69. x43 Mode 1 Pulse Commands

Command Purpose
CS-43=P Selects 43 for Pulse operation
CO-43=P Executes 43 for Pulse operation
Mode 2 - On/Off
Step 1 Prepare for Mode 2 testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-70 to the relay.

Command Purpose

Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=MODE2 Sets MODE2 as custom logic name
SL-143=2 Sets 143 Switch for Mode 2 operation
SL-VO1=143 Enables OUT1 to close for 143
Switch to On. Result: OUT1 contact closes and remains closed.

Table 13-71. x43 Mode 2 On Commands
Command Purpose
CS-143=1 Selects 143 for On operation
CO-143=1 Executes 143 for On operation
Switch to Off. It isn't necessary to gain access for the following steps unless the write access timer
expires.
Table 13-72. x43 Mode 2 Off Commands

Command Purpose
CS-143=0 Selects 143 for Off operation
CO-143=0 Executes 143 for Off operation
Mode 3 - Pulse
Step 1 Prepare for Mode 3 testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-73 to the relay.

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=MODE3 Sets MODE 3 as custom logic name
SL-143=3 Sets 143 Switch for Mode 3 operation
SL-VO1=143 Enables OUT1 to close for 143
Step 3 Transmit the commands in Table 13-74 to the relay. These commands pulse the 143 Switch On and
Off once.
Result: OUT1 contact closes for 200 milliseconds and returns to the open state.
Table 13-74. x43 Mode 3 Pulse Commands

Command Purpose
CS-143=P Selects 143 for On operation
CO-143=P Executes 143 for On operation

Virtual Breaker Control Switch
Purpose: To verify 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch operation.
Reference Commands: SL-101, CS/CO-101C, CS/CO-101T
Step 1 Prepare the 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch for testing by transmitting the commands in Table
13-75 to the relay.
Table 13-75. 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch Test Commands

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=S101 Sets S101 as custom logic name
SL-101=1 Enables 101 switch
SL-VO1=101T Enables OUT1 to close when 101T is TRUE
SL-VO2=101C Enables OUT2 to close when 101C is TRUE
SL-VO3=101SC Enables OUT3 to close when 101SC is TRUE
Step 2 Prepare to monitor the 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch operation. Operation can be verified by
monitoring the programmed output contacts, HMI Screen 2.2.1 or by using RG-STAT command. See
Section 6, Reporting and Alarm Functions, for more information.
Step 3 Transmit the commands in Table 13-76 to the relay. These commands place the 101 Switch in the
trip position. Result: OUT1 closes for 200 milliseconds and returns to the open state. OUT3 opens
(trip state) and remains open.
Table 13-76. 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch Trip Test Commands
Command Purpose
CS-101T=T Selects 101T for trip operation
CO-101T=T Executes 101T for trip operation
Step 4 Transmit the commands in Table 13-77 to the relay. These commands place the 101 Switch in the
closed state. Result: OUT2 closes for 200 milliseconds and returns to the open state. OUT3 closes
(close state) and remains closed.
Table 13-77. 101 Virtual Breaker Control Switch Close Test Commands
Command Purpose
CS-101C=C Selects 101C for close operation
CO-101C=C Executes 101C for close operation
Logic Timer
Purpose: To verify the operation of the 62/162 Timer elements.
Reference Commands: SL-62/162, S<g>-62/162, RS-LGC

NOTE
In these tests, the relay's virtual switches (x43) are used to initiate the 62/162 timers. See Section 4,
Protection and Control, Virtual Switches, for detailed information about x43 Switch operation.
Mode 1 - Pickup/Dropout
Step 1 Prepare the 62 Timer for Mode 1 testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-78 to the relay.

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=T62 Sets T62 as custom logic name
SL-43=2 Enables 43 switch On/Off mode
SN-43=62_INI,PU,DO Name switch to make SER report easier to read
SL-62=1,43 Enables 62 PU/DO mode, 43 initiate, no blocking
Step 2 Transmit the commands in Table 13-79 to set the 62 function pickup and dropout time.
Table 13-79. x62 Mode 1 Pickup and Dropout Settings

Command Purpose
S0-62=400m,2000m Sets 62 pickup at 400 milliseconds,

dropout at 2,000 milliseconds
Step 3 Transmit the commands in Table 13-80 to the relay. These commands will initiate the 62 Timer by
changing the 43 Switch state to closed (logic 1). Once initiated, the 62 Timer will force an output
based on the 400 millisecond pickup time setting.
Table 13-80. x62 Mode 1 Timer Initiate Commands

Command Purpose
CS-43=1 Selects 43 for on operation
CO-43=1 Executes 43 for on operation
Step 4 Transmit the commands in Table 13-81 to the relay. These commands will remove the initiate input
from the 62 Timer by changing the 43 Switch state to open (logic 0).

Table 13-81. x62 Mode 1 Timer Initiate Removal Commands
Command Purpose
CS-43=0 Selects 43 for off operation
CO-43=0 Executes 43 for off operation
Step 5 Use the RS-LGC command to retrieve logic variable data from the SER. Verify that the 43 Switch
change to a closed state was logged and approximately 400 milliseconds later, the 62 Timer picked
up. Then, some time later, the 43 Switch change to an open state was logged and the 62 Timer
dropped out approximately 2,000 milliseconds later. The state of the 43 switches in the SER report
use the programmable name parameters applied to the switch. Figure 13-3 illustrates the timing
relationship of the 43 Switch and 62 Timer.
D2843-08
10-23-03
Figure 13-3. x63 Mode 1 (Pickup/Dropout) Timing Example
Mode 2 - One-Shot Nonretriggerable

Step 1 Prepare the 162 Timer for Mode 2 testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-82 to the relay.
Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-162=2,143,0 Enables 162 1-shot, nonretriggerable mode, 143 initiate, no blocking
SL-143=3 Enables 143 Switch momentary Pulse mode
SN-143=162_INI,INI,NORMAL Name Switch 143 to make SER report easier to read
S0-162=400m,20s Sets 162 delay at 400 milliseconds

Sets 162 dropout at 20 seconds
Step 2 Transmit the commands of Table 13-83 to the relay. These commands supply the 162 Timer with a
momentary initiate input by pulsing the 143 Switch from a FALSE state to a TRUE state and then
back to a FALSE state. You may view the state changes of the 143 Switch at Screen 1.5.4 of the front
panel HMI.

NOTE
The 143 Switch action is performed twice in this test. To illustrate the action of the timer
mode, the commands of Table 13-83 should be executed as quickly as possible. Ideally, this
test should be repeated within 20 seconds. If this is a problem, try extending the dropout
timer setting to 30 seconds.

Command Purpose
CS-143=P Selects 143 for pulse F-T-F operation
CO-143=P Executes 143 pulse F-T-F operation
EXIT Exit select and operate mode
Step 3 Use the RS-LGC command to retrieve logic variable data from the SER. Verify that a 143
FALSE-TRUE-FALSE pulse action was logged and that approximately 400 milliseconds after the
initial 143 FALSE-TRUE-FALSE initiate signal action, the 162 Timer output went TRUE. Then,
approximately 20 seconds later, duration Timer T2 expired and the timer output went FALSE despite
a second 143 FALSE to TRUE initiate signal while the duration timer was active. Figure 13-4
illustrates the timing relationship of the 143 Switch and x62 Timer.
D2843-09
10-23-03
Figure 13-4. Mode 2 (One-Shot Nonretriggerable)
Mode 3 - One-Shot Retriggerable

Step 1 Prepare the 62 Timer for Mode 3 testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-84.

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-62=3,43,0 Enables 62 1-shot, retriggerable mode, 43 initiate, no blocking
SL-43=3 Enables 43 Switch momentary Pulse mode
SN-43=62_INI,INI,NORMAL Name Switch 43 to make SER easier to read

Command Purpose
S0-62=15s,20s Sets 62 delay at 15 seconds
Sets 62 dropout at 20 seconds
Step 2 Transmit the commands of Table 13-85 to the relay. These commands supply the 62 Timer with a
momentary initiate input by pulsing the 343 Switch from FALSE to TRUE and then back to FALSE.
You may view the state changes of the 343 Switch at Screen 1.5.4 of the front panel HMI.
NOTE
The 43 Switch action is performed three times in this test. To illustrate the action of the timer mode, the
second 43 Switch action should be executed as quickly as possible (within the 15 second duration of the
pickup time delay). Perform the third 43 Switch action after at least 15 seconds (the pickup timer setting) have
elapsed but before the 20 second dropout time delay expires. This will illustrate the action of the timer mode.
The time delay settings may be increased if difficulty is encountered with repeating the 43 Switch actions.

Command Purpose
Wait at least 15 seconds (but no longer than 35 seconds) to execute next commands.
Step 3 Use the RS-LGC command to obtain an SER report and verify that the following actions were logged.
These events are illustrated in the timing diagram of Figure 13-5.
D2843-10.vsd
1
02-02-99
BLK
0
1
INI
0
1 t1 t1 t1
X
x62 X X
t1 t2 t2
0
Figure 13-5. Mode 3 (One-Shot Retriggerable)

Timing Example
Approximately 15 seconds after the second 43 FALSE to TRUE initiate signal, the 62 Timer output went
TRUE. The timer output went FALSE when the third FALSE to TRUE initiate signal forced the 62 Timer (T1)
to restart.

Mode 4 - Oscillator
Because this operating mode is not intended for general use, no testing procedure is available. Information
about Mode 4 is available in Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Logic Timers.
Mode 5 - Integrating
Step 1 Prepare the 62 Timer for Mode 5 testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-86.
Table 13-86. 62 Mode 5 Test Commands

Command Purpose

Y Confirm overwrite
SL-43=2 Enables 43 Switch On/Off mode
SN-43=62_INI,PU,DO Name Switch 43 to make SER easier to read
SL-62=5,43,0 Enables 62 integrating mode, 43 initiate, no

blocking
S0-62=15s,5s Sets T1 at 15 seconds

Sets T2 at 5 seconds
Step 2 Transmit the commands of Table 13-87 to the relay. These commands supply a block input to the 62
Timer by changing the 43 Switch state to TRUE.
NOTE
The CS and CO commands of Table 13-87 are performed three times. Follow the timing
sequence to illustrate timer mode action. The time delay settings may be increased if difficulty
is encountered with repeating the 43 Switch actions.
Table 13-87. 62 Mode 5 Timer Initiate Commands

Command Purpose
CS-43=1 Selects 43 for TRUE operation
CO-43=1 Executes 43 TRUE operation
Wait no longer than 10 seconds to interrupt the T1 timer
CS-43=0 Selects 43 for FALSE operation
CO-43=0 Executes 43 FALSE operation
Wait at least 5 seconds for the T2 timer to reset.

Command Purpose
Wait at least 20 seconds to allow the T1 timer to elapse
EXIT Exit the select and operate mode
Timer T1 failed to time out in the first 43 Switch action (TRUE).

Timer T2 timed out after the second 43 Switch action (FALSE).
Timer T1 timed out and the 62 Timer output went TRUE.
Timer T2 timed out and the 62 Timer output returned to a FALSE state.
1 D2843-12.vsd
BLK 02-02-99
0
1
INI
0
100%
t1
t2
t2
Timer t1
0%
1
x62
0
Figure 13-6. Mode 5 (Integrating Timer) Timing
Example
Step 4 (Optional.) Repeat the 62 Timer tests for Modes 1, 2, 3 and 5 for Setting Group 1.
Mode 6 - Latch
Step 5 Prepare for Mode 6 logic timer testing by transmitting the commands in Table 13-88 to the relay.

Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-43=P Enables 43 Switch pulse mode
SL-143=P Enables 143 Switch pulse mode
SN-43=62_INI Name Switch 43 to make SER report easier to read
SN-143=62_RES Name Switch 143 to make SER report easier to read
SL-62=6,43,143 Enables 62 latch mode, 43 initiate, 143 blocking
S0-62=30s Sets T1 at 30 seconds

Step 6 Transmit the commands in Table 13-89 to the relay. These commands supply a latch input to the 62
Timer by changing the 43 Switch state to TRUE. By changing the BLK input (143 Switch) to TRUE,
these commands supply a reset command, also.
NOTE
The CS and CO commands of Table 13-89 are performed twice in this test. Follow the timing
sequence to illustrate time mode action. The time delay settings may be increased if difficulty
is encountered with repeating the 43 and 143 Switch actions.

Command Purpose
CS-43=P Selects 43 for pulse operation
CO-43=P Executes 43 pulse operation
Execute the following commands in less than 30 seconds.
Wait at least 30 seconds (total elapsed time) to initiate the block command.
EXIT Exit the select and operate mode
Timer T1 continued to time out after the first 43 Switch action. (TRUE).
Timer T1 timed out and the 62 Timer output went TRUE 30 seconds after 43 Switch action
(TRUE). Timer output 62 returned to a FALSE state with the 143 Switch action (TRUE).
1 D2863-07.vsd
BLK 10-11-99
0
1
INI
0
1
x62
t1 t2
0
Figure 13-7. x62 Mode 6 (Latch) Timing Example
Step 8 (Optional.) Repeat the 62 Timer tests for Modes 1, 2, 3 and 5 for Setting Group 1.
Automatic Setting Group Change

Purpose: To verify the operation of the automatic setting group change function.
Reference Commands: SL-GROUP, SG-SGCON, SP-GROUP, CS/CO-GROUP, SL-51, S<g>-51
Automatic Change
Step 1 Connect a current source to Terminals D1 and D2 (A-phase input).
Step 2 Prepare the automatic setting group change function for testing by transmitting the commands in
Table 13-90 to the relay.

Table 13-90. Automatic Setting Group Change Function Test Commands
Command Purpose
Y Confirm overwrite
SL-N=ASG Name custom logic for this test
SL-GROUP=1,43,143,INI Sets logic mode to discrete selection with virtual
switch and contact input control
SG-SGCON=1S Sets SGC on-time at 1 second
SL-VO1=SG1 Closes OUT1 when SG1 is active
SG-CTP=1 Sets the phase CT ratio at 1
SG-TRIGGER=51PT,51PPU,0 Enable 51PT to log and trigger fault recording
SL-43=3 Enables 43 Switch Off/momentary On mode
SL-143=3 Enables 143 Switch Off/momentary On mode
SN-43=MAN_SEL,GRP0,NORMAL Assigns 43 Switch labels
SN-143=MAN_SEL,GRP1,NORMAL Assigns 143 Switch labels
SN-IN1=MAN_SEL,AUTO,MANUAL Assigns IN1 Switch labels
SP-GROUP1=1,75,1,70,51P SG1 ts = 1min@75%, tr = 1min@70% of SG0 51P
setting
Step 3 Select automatic setting group control by energizing Input IN1.

Step 4 Gain write access and transmit the appropriate setting commands in Table 13-91 to the relay.
Remember to save your setting changes with the EXIT;Y commands. An ohmmeter or continuity
tester may be used to monitor the output contacts (OUT1, OUT2, OUT3) status.
Table 13-91. 51P Element Pickup Settings

S0-51P=1.0,5.0,I2 pu = 1.0, td = 5, curve = I2
S0-51P=1.5,5.0,I2 pu = 1.5, td = 5, curve = I2

1A
S0-51P=1.8,5.0,I2 pu = 1.8, td = 5, curve = I2
S0-51P=2.2,5.0,I2 pu = 2.2, td = 5, curve = I2
S0-51P=5.0,5.0,I2 pu = 5.0, td = 5, curve = I2
S0-51P=7.5,5.0,I2 pu = 7.5, td = 5, curve = I2

5A
S0-51P=9.0,5.0,I2 pu = 9.0, td = 5, curve = I2
S0-51P=10.5,5.0,I2 pu = 10.5, td = 5, curve = I2
Step 5 Using the values listed in Table 13-92, apply current to the A-phase current input. Begin at the starting
point and then step the current up to just slightly above the low limit for the amount of time listed. If
the active setting group does not change, step the current up to just below the high limit for the

duration indicated. The setting group should change should occur between the low and high limits.
Verify that the change occurred within the time limits programmed at an accuracy of +5 percent or
+2 seconds, whichever is greater. Step the current up to each new level and verify the setting group
change and pickup accuracy.
Table 13-92. Setting Group Change Example Accuracy Limits-Increasing Current
Sensing Current Limit

Time Comments
Type Low High
0.5 0.5 Starting point 50% pickup

1A
0.735 0.765 >1 min Switch to SG1 (75% SG0 51P)
2.5 2.5 Starting point 50% pickup

5A
Step 6 Transmit the select and operate commands in Table 13-93 to the relay.
Table 13-93. Automatic Setting Group Control Selection

Command Purpose
Step 7 Begin stepping down the current from one level to the next as shown in Table 13-94. First, step the
current down to just below the high limit for the amount of time listed. If the active setting group does
not change, step the current down to just above the low limit for the duration indicated. This will verify
the accuracy of the pickup. Continue stepping the current down to each new level.
Table 13-94. Setting Group Change Example Accuracy Limits-Decreasing Current

Sensing Current Limit
Comments
Type Low High Time
1A
5A
Step 8 Remove the current from Phase A, Terminals D1 and D2.

Step 9 Using the RS-LGC command to retrieve logic variable data from the SER, verify that the following
actions were logged:
Verify that all setting group changes were logged.
Verify that VO1 went TRUE and closed relay output OUT1 when SG1 became the active setting
group.
Verify the events that occurred in reverse order when the current was being stepped down.

Manual Change - Mode 1
Manual Change Mode 1 test procedures are a continuation of the automatic test procedures. Do not change
the logic or settings except for those in Step 1 and subsequent.
Step 1 De-energize IN1 and verify that VO1 goes TRUE and closes OUT1 when SG1 becomes the active
setting group.
Step 2 Transmit the select and operate commands in Table 13-95 to the relay.
Table 13-95. Manual Setting Group Control Selection

Command Purpose
Step 3 Use the RS-LGC command to retrieve logic variable data from the SER. Verify that the setting group
change actions were logged.
Manual Change - Mode 2

Manual Change Mode 2 test procedures are a continuation of the Mode 1 test procedures. Do not change the
logic or settings except for those in Step 1 and subsequent.
Step 1 Transmit the commands in Table 13-96 to the relay. These commands set up the relay for binary
setting group control selection.
Table 13-96. Binary Group Control Selection Setup

Command Purpose
SL-GROUP=2,43,0,143 Configures the setting group control function as binary

coded selection
D0 logic=43 D1, D2 or D3 logic=0 Auto Logic = 143
SL-43=2 Sets 43 to On/Off mode
Step 2 Transmit the select and operate commands in Table 13-97 to the relay. For more information on
setting group selection, see Section 4, Protection and Control, Setting Groups.

Table 13-97. Binary Group Control Select and Operate Commands
Command Purpose
Step 3 Verify that VO1 goes FALSE and opens OUT1 when SG0 becomes the active setting group.

SECTION 14 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 14 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE............................................................................................. 14-1

DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................................... 14-1
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 14-1
INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................. 14-2
Operating Requirements................................................................................................................. 14-2
Installing the Program On Your PC Using Microsoft Windows ................................................... 14-2
Connecting the PC to the Relay...................................................................................................... 14-3
UPDATING BESTCOMS SOFTWARE .............................................................................................. 14-3
STARTING BESTCOMS .................................................................................................................... 14-3
Start BESTCOMS ........................................................................................................................... 14-3
System Setup Summary Screen..................................................................................................... 14-3
CONFIGURE THE PC........................................................................................................................ 14-4
SETTING THE RELAY ....................................................................................................................... 14-4
Select Logic Scheme for Display .................................................................................................... 14-4
Settings Display and Selection ....................................................................................................... 14-5
General Operation Screen.............................................................................................................. 14-5
General Information..................................................................................................................... 14-5
Power System ............................................................................................................................. 14-5
CT & VTP Setup.......................................................................................................................... 14-6
Global Security ............................................................................................................................ 14-7
Communication ........................................................................................................................... 14-8
HMI Display ................................................................................................................................. 14-8
Conversions ................................................................................................................................ 14-9
Setting Group Selection ................................................................................................................ 14-10
Overcurrent Protection.................................................................................................................. 14-11
51 (Time Overcurrent)............................................................................................................... 14-11
50T and 150T (Instantaneous Overcurrent with Settable Time Delay) ..................................... 14-11
Voltage Protection......................................................................................................................... 14-12
24 (Overexcitation) .................................................................................................................... 14-13
25 (Sync-Check) ....................................................................................................................... 14-13
27P/127P................................................................................................................................... 14-13
27X ............................................................................................................................................ 14-14
47 .............................................................................................................................................. 14-15
59P/159P................................................................................................................................... 14-16
59X/159X................................................................................................................................... 14-16
INH/81/181/281/381/481/581 .................................................................................................... 14-17
Reclosing (optional) ...................................................................................................................... 14-17
Breaker Failure ............................................................................................................................. 14-19
Logic Timers ................................................................................................................................. 14-20
Timers (62/162) ......................................................................................................................... 14-20
Reporting and Alarms ................................................................................................................... 14-20
Clock Display Mode................................................................................................................... 14-20
Demands ................................................................................................................................... 14-21
VT Monitor................................................................................................................................. 14-22
Breaker Monitoring .................................................................................................................... 14-22
Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 14-23
Fault Recording ......................................................................................................................... 14-24
BE1-700 BESTCOMS Software i
Inputs and Outputs........................................................................................................................ 14-25
Inputs 1 - 4 ................................................................................................................................ 14-25
Outputs 1 – 5, A ........................................................................................................................ 14-25
Virtual Switches ............................................................................................................................ 14-26
BESTNet Settings ......................................................................................................................... 14-27
BESTlogic ..................................................................................................................................... 14-27
Logic Select............................................................................................................................... 14-27
Virtual Outputs........................................................................................................................... 14-28
Function Elements..................................................................................................................... 14-29
COPYING SETTINGS FROM GROUP TO GROUP........................................................................ 14-30
DOWNLOADING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES ................................................................................... 14-30
View Fault Details ......................................................................................................................... 14-31
View Fault Sequence of Events .................................................................................................... 14-31
Download Oscillography File ........................................................................................................ 14-31
METERING....................................................................................................................................... 14-31
FILE MANAGEMENT ....................................................................................................................... 14-32
Saving a Settings File ................................................................................................................... 14-32
Opening a Settings File................................................................................................................. 14-32
Uploading a Settings File .............................................................................................................. 14-33
Downloading a Settings File ......................................................................................................... 14-33
Printing a Settings File .................................................................................................................. 14-33
Figures
Figure 14-1. Typical User Interface Components .................................................................................. 14-2
Figure 14-2. BESTCOMS Splash Screen .............................................................................................. 14-3
Figure 14-3. BE1-700C System Setup Summary Screen ...................................................................... 14-4
Figure 14-4. BE1-700C General Operation Screen, General Information Tab ...................................... 14-5
Figure 14-5. General Operation Screen, Power System Tab ................................................................ 14-6
Figure 14-6. BE1-700V General Operation Screen, CT & VTP Setup Tab............................................ 14-7
Figure 14-7. General Operation Screen, Global Security Tab ............................................................... 14-7
Figure 14-8. General Operation Screen, Communication Tab............................................................... 14-8
Figure 14-9. General Operation Screen, HMI Display Tab .................................................................... 14-9
Figure 14-10. General Operation Screen, Conversions Tab ................................................................. 14-9
Figure 14-11. Setting Group Selection Screen .................................................................................... 14-10
Figure 14-12. BE1-700C Overcurrent Protection Screen, 51 Tab ....................................................... 14-11
Figure 14-13. BE1-700C Overcurrent Protection Screen, 50T Tab ..................................................... 14-12
Figure 14-14. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 24 (Overexcitation) Tab .................................... 14-12
Figure 14-15. BE1-700V Voltage Protections Screen, 25 (Sync-Check) Tab...................................... 14-13
Figure 14-16. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 27P/127P Tab................................................... 14-14
Figure 14-17. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 27X Tab ............................................................ 14-15
Figure 14-18. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 47 Tab .............................................................. 14-15
Figure 14-19. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 59P/159P Tab................................................... 14-16
Figure 14-20. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 59X/159X Tab................................................... 14-16
Figure 14-21. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, INH/81/181/281/381/481/581 Tab .................... 14-17
Figure 14-22. Reclosing Screen (Optional).......................................................................................... 14-18
Figure 14-23. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Reclosing........................................................... 14-19
Figure 14-24. BE1-700C Breaker Failure Screen ................................................................................ 14-19
Figure 14-25. Logic Timers Screen...................................................................................................... 14-20
Figure 14-26. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Clock Display Mode Tab............................................... 14-21
Figure 14-27. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Demands Tab ............................................. 14-21
Figure 14-28. BE1-700V Reporting and Alarms Screen, VT Monitor Tab ........................................... 14-22
Figure 14-29. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Breaker Monitoring Tab .............................. 14-23
Figure 14-30. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Alarms Tab.................................................. 14-23
Figure 14-31. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Fault Recording Tab ................................... 14-24
Figure 14-32. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Inputs 1 – 4 Tab ................................................................ 14-25
Figure 14-33. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Outputs 1 – 5, A Tab......................................................... 14-26
Figure 14-34. Virtual Switches Screen................................................................................................. 14-26
Figure 14-35. BESTNet Settings Screen (Optional)............................................................................. 14-27
ii BESTCOMS Software BE1-700
Figure 14-36. BE1-700C BESTlogic Screen, Logic Select Tab ........................................................... 14-28
Figure 14-37. BESTlogic Screen, Virtual Outputs Tab......................................................................... 14-29
Figure 14-38. BE1-700C BESTlogic Screen, Function Elements Tab ................................................. 14-29
Figure 14-39. BE1-700C From Group to Group from Copy Pull-down Menu ...................................... 14-30
Figure 14-40. BE1-700C Oscillography Download from Reports Pull-down Menu.............................. 14-31
Figure 14-41. BE1-700C Metering from Reports Pull-down Menu....................................................... 14-32
Figure 14-42. Settings Have Changed Dialog Box .............................................................................. 14-32
BE1-700 BESTCOMS Software iii

SECTION 14 • BESTCOMS SOFTWARE
DESCRIPTION
®
BESTCOMS is a Windows based program that runs on an IBM compatible computer and provides a user
friendly, graphical user interface (GUI) for use with Basler Electric communicating products. BESTCOMS
is an acronym that stands for Basler Electric Software Tool for Communications, Operations, Maintenance
and Settings.
BESTCOMS provides the user with a point and click means for setting and monitoring the in-service relay
or relays under test. The point and click method provides an efficient, fast setup for configuring one or
several relays. This software is provided free with every BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay.
INTRODUCTION
A primary advantage of the 32-bit BESTCOMS is that an actual unit (i.e., operating transmission protection
system) is not required to perform any or all settings and adjustments for any preprogrammed scheme.
Nor is it needed to create a custom scheme complete with settings and adjustments. Also, BESTCOMS is
identical within all of the Basler Electric numerical systems except for differences inherit in the individual
systems. This means that once you become familiar with a BESTCOMS for one system, you are also
familiar with BESTCOMS for all of the systems.
Using the BESTCOMS GUI, you may prepare setting files off-line (without being connected to the relay)
and then upload the settings to the relay at your convenience. These settings include protection and
control, operating and logic, breaker monitoring, metering and fault recording. Engineering personnel can
develop, test and replicate the settings before saving them to a file and transmitting the file to technical
personnel in the field. In the field, the technician simply opens the *.bst settings file with BESTCOMS and
uploads the file to the relay where it is stored in nonvolatile memory. (See the paragraphs on File
Management later in this manual for more information on saving, uploading and downloading files.)
The BESTCOMS GUI also has the same preprogrammed logic schemes that are stored in the relay. This
gives the engineer the option (off-line) of developing his/her setting file using a preprogrammed logic
scheme, customizing a preprogrammed logic scheme or building a unique scheme from scratch. Files
may be exported from the GUI to a text editor where they can be reviewed or modified. The modified text
file may then be uploaded to the relay. After it is uploaded to the relay, it can be brought into the GUI but it
cannot be brought directly into the GUI from the text file. The GUI logic builder uses basic AND/OR gate
logic combined with point and click variables to build the logic expressions. This reduces the design time
and increases dependability.
The BESTCOMS GUI also allows for downloading industry-standard COMTRADE files for analysis of
stored oscillography data. Detailed analysis of the oscillography files may be accomplished using Basler
®
Electric's BESTwave software. For more information on Basler Electric's Windows based BESTwave
software, contact your local sales representative or Basler Electric, Technical Support Services
Department in Highland, Illinois.
This section provides an introduction to all of the screens in the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay with their
field layouts and typical entries. Common program activities such as applying settings, modifying logic and
setting up password security are discussed. These discussions are application oriented. We explore how
the activity or task can be performed using an appropriate BE1-700 BESTCOMS screen.
BESTCOMS screens are similar to most Windows based GUI screens. You may immediately notice
common features such as the pull-down menu, toolbar, icons and help prompts when the mouse pointer is
paused over an icon. Some of these features are shown in Figure 14-1. Like most computer programs,
there are often more than one way to perform an activity or task. These various methods are discussed in
the following paragraphs in conjunction with the appropriate BESTCOMS screen.
BE1-700 BESTCOMS Software 14-1

Figure 14-1. Typical User Interface Components
INSTALLATION
BESTCOMS for the BE1-700 software contains a setup utility that installs the program on your PC. (This
is typical for all of the BASLER ELECTRIC numerical systems.) When it installs the program, an Uninstall
icon (in the Control Panel, Add/Remove Programs feature) is created that you may use it to uninstall
(remove) the program from your PC. The minimum recommended operating requirements are listed in the
following paragraph.
Operating Requirements
IBM compatible PC, 486DX2 or faster (100 MHz or higher speed microprocessor is recommended) with a
minimum of 20 megabytes of RAM
• Microsoft Windows NT, Windows95, Windows98, Windows Millennium Edition (Me), XP
• One of the following: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW or DVD drive
• One available serial port
• One Ethernet port (optional Ethernet-enabled relay)
Installing the Program On Your PC Using Microsoft Windows

Insert the CD in the computer CD or DVD drive.
When the Setup and Documentation CD menu appears, click the Install button for the BESTCOMS PC
Program. The setup utility automatically installs “BESTCOMS for BE1-700” on your PC.
®
When BESTCOMS is installed, a Basler Electric folder is added to the Windows program menu. This
folder is accessed by clicking the Start button, Programs button and then Basler Electric. The Basler
Electric folder contains an icon for the “BESTCOMS for the BE1-700” program.
14-2 BESTCOMS Software BE1-700

Connecting the PC to the Relay
Remember, you do not have to have a unit connected to the PC to operate BESTCOMS and configure
program settings. If you have an actual unit, connect a communication cable between the front RS-232
communication port on the BE1-700 front panel and an appropriate communication port on the PC.
UPDATING BESTCOMS SOFTWARE

Future enhancements to relay functionality may make firmware update desirable. Enhancements to relay
firmware typically coincide with enhancements to BESTCOMS software for that relay. When a relay is
updated with the latest version of firmware, the latest version of BESTCOMS should also be obtained.
If a CD-ROM containing firmware was obtained from Basler Electric, then that CD-ROM will also contain
the corresponding version of BESTCOMS software. BESTCOMS can also be downloaded from the Basler
Electric web site (http://www.basler.com). An outline form can be completed to obtain a password for
downloading BESTCOMS from the Basler Electric web site.
STARTING BESTCOMS
Start BESTCOMS
Start BESTCOMS by clicking the Start button, Programs, Basler Electric and then the BESTCOMS for
BE1-700 icon. At startup, a splash screen with the program title and version number is displayed for a
brief time (Figure 14-2). After the splash screen clears, you can see the initial screen - the System Setup
Summary Screen. (This is the same process if you do or do not have a unit connected to your PC.)
Figure 14-2. BESTCOMS Splash Screen
System Setup Summary Screen

If you are at another BESTCOMS screen such as Overcurrent Protection and want to go to this
screen, you may use the Screens pull-down menu or click on the System Setup Summary icon
which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has no tabs but gives you an
overview of the system setup. See Figure 14-3 ( a BE1-700C screen is shown).
Look in the lower, right-hand corner for the legend. This legend provides interpretation for the various
indicated colors. Any protection and control function or element may be enabled or disabled and the
current state is indicated by the associated color. If the function is enabled, the color is green. If the
function is only disabled by a setting (such as zero), the color is yellow. If the function is only disabled by
logic, the color is blue. If the function is disabled by both a setting and logic, the color is gray.
If a function has variations such as 27X which has three modes (fundamental, three-phase residual and
third harmonic) and none of these modes are enabled, a tilde (~) is displayed.

In addition to the functional status, Group selection is displayed and the names are shown for the
displayed and active logic and the virtual switches.
Figure 14-3. BE1-700C System Setup Summary Screen
CONFIGURE THE PC
If you have an actual BE1-700 relay, configure your PC to match the BE1-700 configuration. To do this,
pull down the Communication menu in the pull-down menu and select Configure. Now, match the
communication configuration in the BE1-700 relay. You may select Terminal (VT100 Emulation) and go
directly to that communication protocol. You must close Terminal Mode before you can use BESTCOMS
again. If you are comfortable using ASCII commands, the Terminal Mode is an easy method for checking
the actual settings or status of the relay when you are in doubt about an action to take in BESTCOMS.
ASCII commands are available in Section 11, ASCII Command Interface.
SETTING THE RELAY

To set the relay, we will discuss the contents of each of the screens for BESTCOMS for the BE1-700. The
System Setup Summary Screen (entitled BE1-700 Settings) was discussed in previous paragraphs. We
begin with the assumption that you have started BESTCOMS, connected the PC to the relay and
configured your PC to the relay. If the default settings are active in your relay, you will have to change the
logic to clear the Major alarm or disable the Logic = None Alarm under Alarm Priority in Reporting and
Alarms, Alarms. This section describes BESTCOMS features as they occur and not on a priority (perform
this setting first) basis. For information on how to select or name the active logic, see the paragraphs on
BESTlogic.
Select Logic Scheme for Display

In Figure 14-3, below the pull-down Menu bar, there is a pull-down arrow for the Logic window in the
Toolbar row. To select a preprogrammed scheme, pull down this menu and click on the desired scheme.
When you do, the logic selected name is displayed in the Logic window and the System Setup Summary
Screen displays what results would be if that scheme were active. It does not make it the active screen.
You select custom and preprogrammed logic schemes using the BESTlogic screen. (See additional
paragraphs in this manual.)

Settings Display and Selection
Immediately to the right of the Logic window is a Settings window. A pull-down menu is shown and
provides for Group 0 or 1 selection. An example of this is the Overcurrent Protection Screen. Pull down
the Screens menu and select Overcurrent Protection. When you do, the Settings window display changes
to the Group pull-down menu. If you wanted the specific setting change that you were about to make to
affect the Group 1 settings, select Group 1.
General Operation Screen

Pull-down the Screens menu and select General Operation or click on the General Operation
icon which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has seven areas or folder
tabs (like paper file folder tabs) to the screen (See Figure 14-4). When the screen is first
displayed, the General Information tab information is in the foreground and the other tabs are in
the background. You may select any of these other tabs and bring that tab and information into the
foreground.
Figure 14-4. BE1-700C General Operation Screen, General Information Tab
General Information
The General Information tab (Figure 14-4) allows you to fill in the style number of the relay which is
available from the label on the relay front panel. You can also enter the serial number of the relay and
software application version information. Additionally, you may enter the name of the substation and the
feeders so that the relay reports have some form of installation-specific identification.
Power System
This tab (Figure 14-5) allows you to enter the frequency, phase rotation, nominal CT secondary voltage
and current. If the phase rotation entry is not correct, it will cause problems in several areas including
metering values and targets. In other words, you must make entries in these fields in order for the BE1-
700 protection elements to function properly. These symmetrical component sequence quantities are
entered to provide immediate reference information for settings of the protection elements in the BE1-700
relay.

Figure 14-5. General Operation Screen, Power System Tab
CT & VTP Setup

This tab (Figure 14-6) allows you to enter the CT ratios and set up the VT parameters. These entries
affect every function that relies on voltage and current measurements and calculations derived from those
measurements. Click the up or down arrows to adjust the CT Phase Turns Ratio. Once you enter the CT
Ratio, Phase Turns value, the primary amperes value is entered for you. For example, if you entered 240
for the Turns value and the secondary nominal current input is 1, the primary amperes value becomes
240. If you change the secondary nominal current input to 5, the primary amperes value becomes 1,200.
The CT Ground Ratio is set in the same manner and again the primary amperes is automatically set.
The VTP Setup is very similar. You may click once in an entry window and select the entire value entered.
If you are making an entry in the window, clicking once locates the cursor in the entry and clicking twice
selects the entire value entered. Over- and undervoltage modes can be set to operate on either the
phase-to-phase (PP) or phase-to-neutral (PN) quantities. Click on the appropriate button to select the
quantity required. Pull down the connection menu and select the appropriate Connection for phase voltage
input. Perform these same steps for the VTX Setup if the auxiliary voltage input is valid.

Figure 14-6. BE1-700V General Operation Screen, CT & VTP Setup Tab
Global Security
Each of three communication ports and the three functional areas (Settings, Reports and Control) have
password security. This allows the user to customize password protection for any and all ports. For
example, you could allow technicians to have global access (sometimes called a fourth level of access) to
all three functional areas via the front port. You could also restrict the rear port, which is connected to a
modem to read-only access.
Figure 14-7. General Operation Screen, Global Security Tab

If you select Show Passwords and the default passwords have not been changed, all four passwords
appear and can be changed. If the Global Access password has been changed, a dialog box appears
explaining that you must enter the Global Access password to enable viewing and editing the existing
passwords. After entering the global password, the passwords and enable boxes appear. You may then
make changes in any and all areas. Clicking a box for a specific communication port toggles the functional
area for that port either ON or OFF. Notice that the front panel HMI and communications port zero are
combined and considered as one. Note: By default, all modes of access are disabled on the optional rear
Ethernet port (Com1). Read access is always enabled.
Communication
This tab (Figure 14-8) allows the user to set or change communication port settings. Each of the two com
ports (Com Port 0 Front and Com Port 2) have entries to adjust the Baud Rate using a pull-down menu,
and check boxes to either enable or disable Reply and Handshaking. In addition, Page Length can be
stepped up or down one page at a time using the Up or Down arrow buttons. Address can be stepped up
or down to change the address (except for Com Port 0 Front). The Com Port 0 Front address is always A0
and cannot be changed. Additional settings are available when Option 5, Modbus over RS485, BESTNET
TCP/IP, is purchased with your relay. These settings are shown (and only shown with Option 5) in the far
right hand column of Figure 14-8. Note that a password can be required or not required.
Figure 14-8. General Operation Screen, Communication Tab
HMI Display
This tab (Figure 14-9) allows the user to view what would be shown on the BE1-700’s human-machine
interface (HMI) display as the UP, DOWN, LEFT and RIGHT push buttons are clicked. These displays are
similar to Figures 10-2 through 10-8 in Section 10, Human-Machine Interface. Notice, too, that the
corresponding screen number is shown in the right pane. The user is also able to change the screen scroll
list from the right pane. Be aware that only the code for the latest version of BESTCOMS is contained
within BESTCOMS. If you have an earlier version of the embedded firmware in your relay and select
information on the General Information tab under General Operation Screen, you might select a screen
scroll item in BESTCOMS that is not available in the relay. If you do, you will immediately get an error
code.

Figure 14-9. General Operation Screen, HMI Display Tab
Conversions
The Conversions tab (Figure 14-10) brings up the tab that allows entries in per unit. The per unit
conversion for the settings involves entries for the Base quantities. When you are entering settings later
on, you can select either primary current values, secondary current values, percent or per unit values. If
you are using percent or per unit, then you have to enter the Conversion Screen field values regarding
three-phase, phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral base quantities. If the settings are entered in terms of
primary or secondary current values, you do not need to enter this information.
Figure 14-10. General Operation Screen, Conversions Tab

Setting Group Selection
Pull down the Screens menu and select Setting Group Selection or click on the Setting Group
Selection icon which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen (see Figure 14-
11) has no folder tabs and is labeled Setting Group Selection - Setting Group Automatic Control
Settings.
Figure 14-11. Setting Group Selection Screen

Setting group selection involves programming the relay to automatically select one group out of two
protective element setting groups in response to system conditions. When the system is normal, the
default or normal group is 0. Auxiliary setting groups allow adapting the coordination settings to optimize
them for a predictable situation. Sensitivity and time coordination settings can be adjusted to optimize
sensitivity or clearing time based upon source conditions or to improve security during overload
conditions. Near the bottom of Figure 14-11, there is a Monitor Setting window for Group 1. This field
allows you to select which element controls that specific group selection. The Switch Threshold sets the
level for the monitored element and the Switch Time sets the time delay (in minutes) to prevent the group
change from changing the instant that the monitored element exceeds the Switch Threshold setting.
Return Threshold and Return Time does the same thing for changing back to the previous group.
You do not have to depend only on monitored conditions to change the group selection. The active Setting
Group can be controlled at any point in time by the setting group control logic. (Refer to Section 4,
Protection and Control, for more information on setting groups.) The setting group control also has an
alarm output variable SGC (Setting Group Changed). This output is asserted whenever the BE1-700
switches from one setting group to another. The alarm bit is asserted for the SGCON time setting. You
can click in the Setting Group Change (SGC) Alarm Timer (Sec) field and set the SGCON time setting. Or
use the up and down arrows to adjust the SGCON time setting.

Overcurrent Protection
Pull down the Screens menu and select Overcurrent Protection or click on the Overcurrent
icon which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has five folder tabs and
the first tab is 51.
Figure 14-12. BE1-700C Overcurrent Protection Screen, 51 Tab
51 (Time Overcurrent)
This tab (Figure 14-12) allows you to enter the settings for the time overcurrent elements. BE1-700 relays
have three time overcurrent elements. The pull down Pickup menu allows you to select the relative pickup
quantity. As the default, BE1-700 relays measure the current input in secondary amperes. If you want to
use primary current, per unit or percent amperes, you must coordinate the settings in CT & VT Setup and
Conversions. Settings for Time Dial, Curve (time characteristic curve) and Direction Control are
conventional settings. If you want to change the characteristic curve constants, select the Curve
Coefficients and a dialog box opens for those entries. Select the BESTlogic box at the bottom of the
Phase (51P) column. The status of the logic is shown above the BESTlogic box. A dialog box (BESTlogic
Function Element) opens showing the status of the element logic and the logic scheme name. If you have
a custom logic scheme active, you may change the status of the element logic by pulling down the menu
and selecting from the available choices. The 151 is adjusted in a similar fashion to the 51 element.
50T and 150T (Instantaneous Overcurrent with Settable Time Delay)

The BE1-700 relay has six instantaneous elements. The tabs for the instantaneous elements are almost
identical to the 51 screen. See Figure 14-13. for the 50T tab. The 150T tab is similar. The settable time
delay is the primary difference. To change the time delay, click the Time menu DOWN arrow and select
your preferred unit of measure (milliseconds, minutes or cycles). Then change the time for the appropriate
phase, neutral or negative-sequence element.

Figure 14-13. BE1-700C Overcurrent Protection Screen, 50T Tab
Voltage Protection
Pull down the Screens menu and select Voltage Protection or click on the Voltage Protection
icon which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen (see Figure 14-14) has
nine folder tabs and the first tab is 24 (Overexcitation). Many of the settings for voltage
protection are identical or similar to those settings in overcurrent protection. These settings
explanations are not repeated.
Figure 14-14. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 24 (Overexcitation) Tab

24 (Overexcitation)
This tab (Figure 14-14) allows you to make the settings for the volts/hertz element. The pull down Pickup
menu allows you to select the relative pickup quantity. The BE1-700 relay measures the voltage input in
secondary voltage. If you want to use primary volts, per unit volts or percent volts, you must coordinate
the settings in CT & VT Setup and Conversions. Whatever the measurement, the method is displayed
besides the settings – e.g., VPP (voltage, phase-to-phase). Settings for trip Time Dial and Reset Dial can
be adjusted in the range of 0 to 9.9 in .1 increments. The Alarm Threshold (percent of pickup) can be
adjusted from 0 to 120.
Select the BESTlogic box at the bottom of the 24 column. The status of the logic is shown above the
BESTlogic box. A dialog box (BESTlogic Function Element) opens showing the status of the element logic
and the logic scheme name. If you have a custom logic scheme active, you may change the status of the
element logic by pulling down the menu and selecting from the available choices.
25 (Sync-Check)
This tab (Figure 14-15) allows you to make the settings for the sync-check monitor element. The pull down
Delta Voltage menu allows you to select the relative pickup quantity. The BE1-700 relay measures the
voltage input in secondary voltage. If you want to use primary volts, per unit volts or percent volts, you
must coordinate the settings in CT & VT Setup and Conversions. Whatever the measurement, the method
is displayed besides the settings, e.g. VPN (voltage, phase-to-neutral). Settings for Delta Angle (Degrees)
and Slip Frequency (Hertz) are conventional settings. If you want the 25 phase input frequency to be
greater than the auxiliary input frequency during sync-check, click the Enable box on the tab.
Figure 14-15. BE1-700V Voltage Protections Screen, 25 (Sync-Check) Tab

Set the 25 VM Live and Dead threshold levels. Set the Dropout Delay (time delay between sensing
dropout and clearing VM1 logic bit) unit of measure and value. Select the 25VM Logic that will set the VM1
logic bits.
27P/127P
This tab (Figure 14-16) is the Phase Undervoltage With Settable Time Delay. The pull down Pickup menu
allows you to select the relative pickup quantity. The BE1-700 relay measures the voltage input in
secondary voltage. If you want to use primary volts, per unit volts or percent volts, you must coordinate
the settings in CT & VT Setup and Conversions. Whatever the measurement, the method is displayed

besides the settings, e.g., VPP (voltage, phase-to-phase). Select the Time delay unit of measure and the
value for the 27P and 127P elements in the range of 0.50 to 600 seconds. Select the BESTlogic box at the
bottom of the Phase (27P) or Phase (127P) columns. The status of the logic is shown above the
BESTlogic box. A dialog box (BESTlogic Function Element) opens showing the status of the element logic
and the logic scheme name. If you have a custom logic scheme active, you may change the status of the
element logic by pulling down the menu and selecting from the available choices.
Figure 14-16. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 27P/127P Tab
27X
This tab (Figure 14-17) is the Auxiliary Undervoltage With Settable Time Delay. Changing the settings for
this element are identical or similar to those of the 27P/127P elements above.

Figure 14-17. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 27X Tab
47
This tab (Figure 14-18) is the Negative-Sequence Overvoltage with Settable Time Delay. Changing the
settings for this element are identical or similar to those of the 27P/127P elements above.
Figure 14-18. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 47 Tab

59P/159P
This tab (Figure 14-19) is the Phase Overvoltage with Settable Time Delay. Changing the settings for this
element are identical or similar to those settings of the 27P/127P elements above.
Figure 14-19. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 59P/159P Tab
59X/159X
This tab (Figure 14-20) is the Auxiliary Overvoltage with Settable Time Delay. Changing the settings for
this element are identical or similar to those settings of the 27P/127P elements above.
Figure 14-20. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, 59X/159X Tab

INH/81/181/281/381/481/581
This tab (Figure 14-21) is the O/U (over/under) Frequency with Settable Time Delay. Changing the
settings for these elements are identical or similar to those settings of the 27P/127P elements above.
Figure 14-21. BE1-700V Voltage Protection Screen, INH/81/181/281/381/481/581 Tab
Reclosing (Optional)
Pull down the Screens menu and select Reclosing or click on the Reclosing icon which is shown
at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen (Figure 14-22) has no folder tabs and is labeled
Reclosing.
The reclosing function provides up to four reclosing attempts that can be initiated by a protective
trip or by one of the contact sensing inputs. There are two initiates and two close outputs in the 79
element and can be viewed by pressing the BESTlogic button on the Reclosing screen. Pilot Initiate (PI)
produces a reclosing attempt through the 79 Pilot Close (79P) output, and Reclose Initiate (RI) produces
reclosing attempts through the 79 Close (79C) output. PI attempts are normally associated with high
speed tripping of transmission lines where breakers on both ends open simultaneously and high speed
reclose together, without need for voltage and synchronism checks (one-shot). RI attempts can be
associated with either radial distribution or sub-transmission reclosing applications where voltage and
synchronism checks are not required, or transmission network time delay reclosing applications that do
require voltage and synchronism checks prior to closing the breaker (multiple time delay attempts).
Additional logic is required for voltage and synchronism checks, and is only available in the voltage
version of the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay.
To set the actual reclose sequence, first pull down the Time Units menu box and set the units
(milliseconds, seconds, minutes or cycles) for time measurement. Notice that when the Reclose 1 Time
and the Pilot settings are zero, the Sequence Controlled Block (SCB), Trip 1 is grayed out. Set the
Reclose 1 Time or Pilot for the first reclose time (other than zero) and the SCB window is now available.
After entering a value, proceed to enter the reclose times for the remaining three reclose attempts. The
total time for all reclose attempts is cumulative. For example, the second reclose attempt is the sum of
Reclose 1 Time or Pilot, and Reclose 2 Time. Reclose three total time would be the sum of the reclose
time for three, two and one (or Pilot). If you want to block the instantaneous or any other protection
element during reclose, check the Sequence Controlled Block window or windows. If the 79C or 52 status
is TRUE, and the SCB is enabled (checked) for the next reclose attempt, the 79 SCB output becomes
TRUE and the output logic can be used to block the instantaneous element.
Figure 14-22. Reclosing Screen (Optional)

Set the Reset time using the same unit of measure that was used for the reclosing attempts. Reset time is
how long you want the relay to remain reset before the relay returns to the initial state. Its range is from
100 to 600 seconds.
Set the maximum cycle time. Maximum cycle (Max Cycle) time limits the duration of a reclosing sequence
as determined from sequence initiation to automatic relay reset or lockout. Its range is also 0.100 to 600
seconds.
Logic settings for the 79 reclosing function can be made by clicking on the BESTlogic button. See Figure
14-23. With your custom logic selected, select the mode and other input logic by using the Mode pull-down
menu and click on the logic inputs to set the logic.
To set the zone-sequence coordination, click on the Zone-Sequence Logic button.
When the Reclosing dialog box opens, click on the logic diagram and set the logic. Click Done when
finished.

Figure 14-23. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, Reclosing
Breaker Failure
Pull down the Screens menu and select Breaker Failure or click on the Breaker Failure icon
which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen (see Figure 14-24) has no
folder tabs and is labeled Breaker Failure. The breaker failure function includes a timer and a
current detector. The unit of measurement can be set for milliseconds, seconds or minutes.
The acceptable range is 0.050 to 0.999 seconds. The timer can also be set for cycles. If used, the
acceptable range is from 3.00 to 59.94 cycles.
Logic settings for the breaker failure function can be made by clicking on the BESTlogic button. With your
custom logic selected, select the mode and other input logic by using the Mode pull-down menu and click
on the logic inputs to set the logic.
Figure 14-24. BE1-700C Breaker Failure Screen

Logic Timers
Pull down the Screens menu and select Logic Timers or click on the Logic Timers icon which is
shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has no folder tabs and is labeled
Logic Timers (see Figure 14-25).
Timers (62/162)
Logic timers, 62 and 162, are general purpose timers with six operating modes. Each operating mode has
a T1 and T2 setting. The function of these settings depends on the type of timer (mode) selected. For a
description of the setting functions, see Section 4, Protection and Control, General Purpose Timers.
The unit of measurement can be set for milliseconds, seconds or minutes. The acceptable range is 0.00 to
9,999 seconds. The timer can also be set for cycles. If used, the acceptable range is from 0.00 to 599,969
cycles.
Logic settings for the logic timers can be made by clicking on the BESTlogic button and with your custom
logic selected, use the Mode pull-down menu and select one of the six timer modes or disable the logic
timers. Select other input logic by clicking on the logic inputs to set the logic.
Figure 14-25. Logic Timers Screen
Reporting and Alarms

Pull down the Screens menu and select Reporting and Alarms or click on the Reporting and
Alarms icon which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has six folder tabs
and the first tab is Clock Display Mode (Figure 14-26).
Clock Display Mode

Use the Time Format and Date Format pull-down menus to set the current time and date in the preferred
format. Daylight savings time can be automatically adjusted if the appropriate check box is checked.
Likewise, select the preferred method for displaying month, date and year from the two choices provided.
The Front Panel Back Light Delay can be adjusted to dim the back light after a period of time. The range is
0 to 600 seconds with 600 as the default.

Figure 14-26. Reporting and Alarms Screen, Clock Display Mode Tab
Demands
Demand intervals can be set independently for the phase, neutral and negative-sequence demand
calculations. See Figure 14-27. Click in the phase, neutral or negative-sequence field and enter the time or
adjust the time by using the appropriate up or down arrow buttons. Use the pull-down menus to set the
unit of measure for each threshold setting. The demand value is shown in each field as the data is
metered.
Figure 14-27. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Demands Tab

VT Monitor
Fuse loss block logic can prevent mis-operation on loss of sensing voltage. This can be applied on the
27/59 functions. See Figure 14-28.
If the 27/59, Block Phase is enabled with a check mark in the field and a 60FL condition is detected, all
functions that use the phase voltage are blocked. If the 27/59, Block 3V0 is enabled with a check mark in
the field and a 60FL condition is detected, all functions that use the auxiliary over/undervoltage (27x/59X)
functions with Mode 2 selected are blocked. If the 27/59, Block V2 is enabled with a check mark in the
field and a 60FL condition is detected, all functions that use the negative-sequence voltage are blocked.
Figure 14-28. BE1-700V Reporting and Alarms Screen, VT Monitor Tab
Breaker Monitoring
Each time the breaker trips, the breaker duty monitor updates two sets of registers for each pole of the
breaker. This function selects which of the two sets of duty registers are reported and monitored, sets the
existing values and programs the function logic. See Figure 14-29.
Use the Breaker Duty Monitoring pull-down menu to select the operating mode. Click in the field for 100%
Duty Maximum and set the value. Logic settings for the Block Accumulation Logic can be made by clicking
on the logic button and with your custom logic selected, select the block accumulation logic.
Because the relay is completely programmable, it is necessary to program which logic variable monitors
breaker status (how the relay knows when the breaker is closed). Set the Breaker Status Logic by clicking
on the Logic button and with your custom logic selected, select the control logic.
Three breaker alarm points are programmable for checking breaker monitoring functions. Each alarm
point can be programmed to monitor any of the three breaker monitoring functions or all three alarm points
can be programmed to monitor one function and alarm at various threshold levels. Use the pull-down
menu for Point 1 and select the preferred breaker monitoring mode (Disabled, Operations or Clearing
Time). With the mode set, the Threshold field is viable and has a zero threshold. Use the keyboard to
enter the threshold value or the appropriate (UP or DOWN) arrow buttons. Repeat the procedure for
Breaker Alarm Points 2 and 3.

Figure 14-29. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Breaker Monitoring Tab
Alarms
BE1-700 relays have 33 programmable alarm points. These points are for the monitored power system,
associated equipment and non-core circuits and functions in the relay. Each of these alarm points can be
programmed to assert the Major, Minor or Logic Alarms when an alarm point is activated. To program an
alarm point, find the point in the Alarm Priority list and then click on the appropriate field under the Major,
Minor or Logic Alarm. See Figure 14-30.
Figure 14-30. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Alarms Tab

Logic settings for the Alarm Reset Logic can be made by clicking on the BESTlogic Logic button and then
clicking on the reset input. Other logic blocks shown under BESTlogic on the Alarms tab are shown for
reference only. There is no interaction available.
Fault Recording
Logic expressions define the three conditions that determine when a fault has occurred. When a fault is
detected by the relay, the relay records (stores in memory) data about the fault. The three conditions that
determine a fault are Trip, Pickup and Logic Trigger. To define these conditions, click on Fault Recording,
Logic box. See Figure 14-31. Then click on Tripped, Picked Up and Logic, in turn, and program the inputs
that define each condition. You may clear existing programming by clicking on the Clear button or clicking
on each individual variable.
Figure 14-31. BE1-700C Reporting and Alarms Screen, Fault Recording Tab
The fault recording function can record up to 16 oscillographic records in volatile memory. Because there
is only a specific amount of memory available, as additional faults are recorded, the oldest records are
overwritten. Each record can record only a limited number of data cycles. If you have less than 16
records, you can have more than 15 cycles of data per record. To select the number of cycles of data and
number of records, click on the Oscillographic Records, Select button and click on the number of records
that you want to record.
Logic settings for the Target Reset Logic can be made by clicking on the Target Reset - Logic button and
then clicking on the Reset input. Other logic blocks shown under BESTlogic on the Alarms tab are shown
for reference only. There is no interaction available.
Any protective function, except 62, 162 and 60FL, that has a trip will set a target because these functions
have the targets enabled on the Fault Recording tab. If you are using a protective function in a supervisory
capacity and do not want to set a target when the protective function trips, disable that target by clicking
on the specific target. If you want to disable all of the targets for a function such as the directional
overcurrent functions, click on the No 67’s button on the left side of the Enabled Targets pane.

Inputs and Outputs
Pull down the Screens menu and select Inputs and Outputs or click on the Inputs and Outputs
icon which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has two folder tabs and
the first tab is labeled Inputs 1 – 4 (Figure 14-32).
Figure 14-32. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Inputs 1 – 4 Tab
Inputs 1 - 4
The first tab (Figure 14-32) allows setting the four programmable inputs available in the BE1-700 relay. To
program how long the Input 1 contact must be closed to be recognized as closed, first, pull down the Time
Units menu and set the units for the appropriate time measurement. Then in the Input 1 pane, enter the
new value for Recognition Time or use the appropriate up or down arrow buttons to set the new value. To
program how long the Input 1 contact must be open to be recognized as open, enter the new value in
Input 1, Debounce Time box or use the appropriate up or down arrow buttons to set the new value.
You can assign a meaningful name to each input. This makes sequential events reports easier to analyze.
To assign a meaningful name to Input 1, click in the Name field and enter the new name. To change the
label for the Closed State, click on the Closed State field and enter the new name. To change the label for
the Open State, click on the Open State field and enter the new name. The remaining three inputs have
the same functions.
Outputs 1 – 5, A
On this tab (Figure 14-33), the only feature that you may change is to select the programmable hold
attribute. To select the hold attribute (contacts remain closed for 200 milliseconds) for any output, click on
the Hold Attribute field for that output. To change the label for any of the virtual outputs, see the
paragraphs on BESTlogic, Virtual Outputs, later in this manual.

Figure 14-33. Inputs and Outputs Screen, Outputs 1 – 5, A Tab
Virtual Switches
Pull down the Screens menu and select Virtual Switches or click on the Virtual Switches icon
which is shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has no folder tabs and is
labeled Virtual Switches (Figure 14-34).
Figure 14-34. Virtual Switches Screen

The virtual breaker control switch provides manual control of a circuit breaker or switch without using
physical switches and/or interposing relays. The mode logic setting for Virtual Switch 43 can be made by
clicking on the BESTlogic button and, with your custom logic selected, select the mode logic by using the
Mode pull-down menu. The remaining three virtual switches have the same functions.
You can assign a meaningful name or label to each virtual switch. This makes sequential events reports
easier to analyze. To assign a meaningful label to Virtual Switch 43, click in the Label field and enter the
new name. To change the label for the Closed State, click on the Closed State field and enter the new
name. To change the label for the Open State, click on the Open State field and enter the new name. The
remaining three virtual switches function the same way.
BESTNet Settings
Pull down the Screens menu and select BESTNet Settings or click on the BESTNet icon which is
shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has no folder tabs and is labeled
BESTNet Settings (Figure 14-35).
Com protocol 4 or 5 must be ordered with your relay. For detailed information regarding the BESTNet
Settings Screen, refer to Section 15, BESTNet Communication.
Figure 14-35. BESTNet Settings Screen (Optional)
BESTlogic
Pull down the Screens menu and select BESTlogic or click on the BESTlogic icon which is
shown at the right margin of this paragraph. This screen has three folder tabs and the first tab is
labeled Logic Select (Figure 14-36).
Logic Select
This tab allows you to select one of the preprogrammed logic schemes and copy that scheme to the active
logic. You may then keep the preprogrammed logic but are allowed to change nothing in the scheme. You
must rename that logic to a custom name and then make changes as you desire. Click on the logic to be
copied to the active logic. Two check boxes allow you include appropriate variable names and include
appropriate logic expressions for Breaker Status and Fault Recording. A box appears requiring that you

okay the replacement of all settings. Click OK to close the dialog box and then type in your customized
logic name.
Figure 14-36. BE1-700C BESTlogic Screen, Logic Select Tab
Virtual Outputs
You can assign a meaningful name or label to each virtual output. This makes sequential events reports
easier to analyze. To assign a meaningful label to virtual output VO6, for example, click in the Label field
and enter the new name. See Figure 14-37. To change the label for the True State, click on the True State
field and enter the new name. To change the label for the False State, click on the False State field and
enter the new name. To change the logic associated with VO6, click on the BESTlogic button associated
with VO6. Click on the logic input and program the logic variables that define VO6. You may clear existing
programming by clicking on the Clear button or clicking on each individual variable. The other 15 virtual
outputs have the same function.
VO7 through VO15 do not have actual hardware output contacts. Only VOA and VO1 through VO6 have
hardware output contacts.

Figure 14-37. BESTlogic Screen, Virtual Outputs Tab
Function Elements
Not all of the logic functions have BESTlogic labeled on the button. See Figure 14-38. If the logic function
is labeled Logic and not BESTlogic, the ASCII command for the function is not prefixed with SL-. For
example: Breaker Status is a function of breaker monitoring and the ASCII command is SB-LOGIC for
Setting, Breaker-Logic. To program a logic function, find the logic function in the list and click on the
associated BESTlogic or Logic button. The BESTlogic Function Element dialog box opens with the
available programming. If the Mode pull-down menu is available, select the appropriate mode. Click on the
logic inputs and program the appropriate logic.
Figure 14-38. BE1-700C BESTlogic Screen, Function Elements Tab

COPYING SETTINGS FROM GROUP TO GROUP
There are a lot of settings in any BE1-700 numerical systems product but the differences between Group
0 and any other group settings may be minimal. It would be convenient if there was a way to copy settings
from Group 0 to another group and then just change only those settings that are different. With
BESTCOMS, there is an easy way to do that. Pull down the Copy menu (see Figure 14-39) from the pull-
down menu. There is only one choice, From Group to Group. When you select this choice, a dialog box
opens allowing you to select which group you wish to copy. After making your selection and clicking OK,
the copy routine commences followed by another dialog box informing you that the copy routine is
complete. Now, change those settings that are different.
Figure 14-39. BE1-700C From Group to Group from Copy Pull-down Menu
DOWNLOADING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES

To download an oscillography file, pull down the Reports menu (see Figure 14-40) from the pull-down
menu and select Oscillography and then either Serial Connection or Ethernet Connection. When you have
selected your choice, you may get a communication error if you are not configured to an actual relay. If
you have communication with the relay, a dialog box opens allowing you to View/Download Relay Fault
Files. If there have been no fault events triggered, you may create one by clicking on the Trigger button in
the View/Download Relay Fault Files dialog box.

Figure 14-40. BE1-700C Oscillography Download from Reports Pull-down Menu
View Fault Details

To view the fault record details, select an event by clicking on the event number or anywhere on the event
line. The event grays-out while the information is being retrieved from the relay. View the fault details in
the associated window.
View Fault Sequence of Events

To view the fault record sequence of events, click on the radio button by the View Fault Sequence of
Events. View the fault sequence of events in the associated window.
Download Oscillography File

To download an oscillography file, click on the Download button in the View/Download Relay Fault Files
®
Dialog box. Use normal Windows techniques to select the computer folder that is to receive the download
file. You may create a new folder at this time by clicking on the New Folder button. Select the type of file to
download: Binary or ASCII. Okay the file save and the Fault Record Filenames dialog box then opens.
Use the default Base Filename or enter a new file name. As you change the file name, the names for the
Header File, Fault Sequence and Fault Summary also change automatically. Okay the file names and then
exit the dialog box. You have now downloaded the oscillography file. You may view this oscillography file
using Basler Electric's BESTwave software.
METERING
To observe the system metering, pull down the Reports menu (see Figure 14-41) from the pull-down
menu and select, Metering. When the Metering dialog box opens, click on the Start Polling button. If
BESTCOMS is not configured to the relay communication settings, you will receive a communications
error. The Metering dialog box has two pull-down menus: File and Communication. To configure
communication with the relay, pull down the Communication menu and select Configure. Choose the
communication port and baud rate as required. If you have communication with the relay, click on the Start
Polling button. Metering values are displayed in the various screen windows. If you select Configure with
polling in progress, you will get the Polling Active dialog box. You must stop polling before you can change
configuration. To stop polling, click on the Stop Polling button. To exit, pull down the File menu and select
®
Exit. You may also use the Windows techniques and click on the close icon (X) in the upper right-hand
corner of the Metering dialog box.
Figure 14-41. BE1-700C Metering from Reports Pull-down Menu
FILE MANAGEMENT
In these paragraphs, file management describes saving, opening, uploading, downloading and printing
settings files.
Saving a Settings File

If you change any settings in the active
custom logic scheme and try to exit
BESTCOMS, the dialog box shown in Figure
14-42 appears. If you choose Yes, a file
properties dialog box appears. The file
properties dialog box also appears if you pull
down the file menu and choose Save or Save
As. The lines of information that are grayed- Figure 14-42. Settings Have Changed Dialog Box
out are automatically entered based on the
file name and relay identifier information
command (SG-ID). You may enter up to 50 characters in the Additional Info: field and 2,500 characters in
the File Comments field. When you OK the dialog box, you are given an opportunity to name the file and
select the path. Clicking on Save completes saving a settings file.
Opening a Settings File

To open a settings file into BESTCOMS, pull down the File menu (see Figure 14-1) and choose Open. If
the settings in your BESTCOMS have changed, a dialog box will open asking you if want to save the
current settings changes. You may choose Yes or No. After you have taken the required action to save or
not save the current settings, the Open dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to use normal
®
Windows techniques to select the file that you want to open. Select the file and open it and the file
settings have been brought into BESTCOMS.

Uploading a Settings File
To upload a settings file to the BE1-700 relay, you must first open the file through BESTCOMS or create
the file using BESTCOMS. Then pull down the RS-232 Communication menu or the Ethernet
Communication menu and select Upload Settings to Device. You are prompted to enter the password. If
the password is correct, the upload begins and the percent complete loading bar is shown. At upload
completion, you are asked if you want to save the settings and make them active. After replying, you are
informed of the status: Yes – settings are saved or No – settings are discarded. If you would like to view
the file names as they are uploaded, pull down the Communication menu and select Configure. When the
Configure Communication Port dialog box opens, click the On button for Show Commands During Data
Transfer and then click OK. Now, during data transfer, you will see two screens (Sending and Status) and
the percent complete loading bar. If a data transfer error occurs, you can briefly see the error notification
in the Status window. The file settings will not be uploaded and the changes discarded. You may then
scroll through the Status window until you find the error notification. Click on the error notification and the
data file that transferred in error is shown in the Sending window.
Downloading a Settings File

To download a settings file from a BE1-700 relay, you must pull down the RS-232 Communication menu
or Ethernet Communication menu and select Download Settings from Device. If the settings in your
BESTCOMS have changed, a dialog box will open asking you if want to save the current settings
changes. You may choose Yes or No. After you have taken the required action to save or not save the
current settings, the downloading is executed.
Printing a Settings File

To print a settings file, pull down the File menu (see Figure 14-1) and select Print. A dialog box, Print
®
BE1-700 Settings File opens with the settings file shown and typical Windows choices to setup the page
and the printer. Execute these commands, as necessary, and then select Print.
You may also export the settings file to a text file. Pull down the File menu and select Export to Text. A
®
dialog box, Export to Text File opens with the settings file shown. Click OK and then use normal Windows
techniques to select the path. Execute the Save command. You now have a text file of your BESTCOMS
settings.

SECTION 15 • BESTNet COMMUNICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 15 • BESTNet COMMUNICATION ......................................................................................... 15-1

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................. 15-1
INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................... 15-1
Configuring the BE-700 for Ethernet ................................................................................................ 15-1
CONFIGURATION SCREENS............................................................................................................. 15-3
Home ................................................................................................................................................ 15-3
Network............................................................................................................................................. 15-4
Web Page Security ........................................................................................................................... 15-5
E-mail Alerts ..................................................................................................................................... 15-6
Backup/Restore ................................................................................................................................ 15-8
System Information........................................................................................................................... 15-9
Restart BESTNet ............................................................................................................................ 15-10
CONFIGURING BESTCOMS FOR ETHERNET ............................................................................... 15-10
Identifying the IP Address............................................................................................................... 15-10
VIEWING WEB PAGES ..................................................................................................................... 15-11
View the Status Page ..................................................................................................................... 15-11
Metering Web Page ........................................................................................................................ 15-13
Fault Reports Web Page ................................................................................................................ 15-14
Fault Summary Web Page.............................................................................................................. 15-14
E-MAIL ALERTS ................................................................................................................................ 15-15
Configuring the E-mail Alerts Function ........................................................................................... 15-15
TCP/IP ASCII COMMUNICATION ..................................................................................................... 15-17
Telnet Command Example ............................................................................................................. 15-18
ETHERNET PORTS........................................................................................................................... 15-18
UNIQUE ASCII COMMANDS............................................................................................................. 15-19
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...........................................................................................................15-19
For LAN Connections ......................................................................................................................15-19
For Direct Connections (PC to Relay Without a LAN).....................................................................15-19
Figures
Figure 15-1. Launch Screen for BESTNet Configuration Applet (Internet Explorer) ............................... 15-2
Figure 15-2. BESTNet Configuration Applet............................................................................................ 15-3
Figure 15-3. Home Configuration Screen ................................................................................................ 15-3
Figure 15-4. Network Configuration Screen ............................................................................................ 15-5
Figure 15-5. Web Page Security Configuration Screen........................................................................... 15-6
Figure 15-6. E-mail Alerts Configuration Screen ..................................................................................... 15-7
Figure 15-7. Backup/Restore Configuration Screen ................................................................................ 15-8
Figure 15-8. System Information Configuration Screen .......................................................................... 15-9
Figure 15-9. Restart BESTNet Configuration Screen ............................................................................ 15-10
Figure 15-10. BE1-700 Device List Window .......................................................................................... 15-11
Figure 15-11. BE1-700 Device Discovery Results Window................................................................... 15-11
Figure 15-12. BE1-700C Sample Status Web Page ............................................................................. 15-12
Figure 15-13. BE1-700C Sample Metering Web Page.......................................................................... 15-13
Figure 15-14. Sample Fault Reports Web Page.................................................................................... 15-14
Figure 15-15. Sample Fault Summary Report Web Page ..................................................................... 15-15
Figure 15-16. BE1-700C BESTCOMS BESTNet Screen ...................................................................... 15-16
Figure 15-17. BE1-700C BESTlogic Function Element Screen, E-mail 1 Trigger................................. 15-16
Figure 15-18. General Operation Screen, Global Security Tab............................................................. 15-17
Figure 15-19. Windows Command Prompt Window.............................................................................. 15-18
BE1-700 BESTNet Communication i

Figure 15-20. Windows Run Box ........................................................................................................... 15-18
Figure 15-21. Telnet Session Command and Relay Response ............................................................ 15-18
Tables
Table 15-1. Home Configuration Screen Settings and Information .........................................................15-4
Table 15-2. Network Configuration Screen Settings and Information .....................................................15-4
Table 15-3. Web Page Security Configuration Screen Settings and Information....................................15-6
Table 15-4. E-mail Alerts Configuration Screen Settings and Information ..............................................15-7
Table 15-5. Backup/Restore Configuration Screen Settings and Information .........................................15-9
Table 15-6. Restart BESTNet Configuration Screen Settings and Information .....................................15-10
ii BESTNet Communication BE1-700

SECTION 15 • BESTNet COMMUNICATION
INTRODUCTION
The BESTNet Communication package provides additional BE1-700 features if the relay is ordered with
one of the BESTNet Protocol Options (Refer to Section 1, General Information, Figures 1-1 and 1-2, Style
Charts.) By using the user's TCP/IP network, remote access via Ethernet provides a new and unique
method of monitoring, controlling and coordinating protection and control functions. A web browser such
®
as Microsoft Internet Explorer is used to view relay status remotely. The BESTNet over Ethernet option
provides the following capabilities:
• Viewing relay status and real time metering using easy to use web pages as the graphical user
interface.
• Operational parameters can be set using BESTCOMS for BE1-700 Software over the Ethernet port
interface.
• ASCII commands can be sent via a TCP/IP terminal or Telnet program. For example, ASCII
commands can be sent to set up the BESTlogic required to use user-established protection and
control schemes over the BESTNet Ethernet interface.
• Outputs from the relay such as alarms and BESTlogic variables or data reports can be viewed.
• Alarms can be configured to send e-mail messages to alert interested parties when a particular
condition occurs.
NOTE
For security reasons, all change passwords are disabled by default on the (optional) Ethernet port. You
must use a serial connection to enable and upload the desired change functions before changes will be
allowed from the Ethernet port. Refer to Section 9, Security.
INSTALLATION
BESTNet is part of the BE1-700 firmware and part of the BESTCOMS software for the BE1-700. (See
Section 14, BESTCOMS Software, for BESTCOMS installation instructions.) The Basler Electric Device
Discovery component is an aid to initial configuration and is contained in BESTCOMS. Once network
parameters such as the static IP address are set, this configuration will not have to be run again.
NOTE
The use of dynamically assigned IP addresses (default) will require the Device
Discovery component to be used each time BESTCOMS is started in order to
find BE1-700 relays on the local area network (LAN).
Configuring the BE-700 for Ethernet

BE1-700 Ethernet options are set through a configuration applet that is stored in the BE1-700. This
configuration applet is loaded into the PC on demand, and is not part of the BESTCOMS software for the
BE1-700.
To configure the BE1-700 BESTNet features, follow the steps outlined below:
1. Ensure that the PC has an Ethernet port, a recent version of Microsoft Internet Explorer, and a Java
Runtime Environment installed.
NOTE
A Java Runtime Environment is required for proper operation of the BE1-700
configuration applet and web pages. Once the BE1-700 is configured, Java is not
required to receive e-mail alerts from the BE1-700 or to use BESTCOMS over
Ethernet, but is required to view web page data.
BE1-700 BESTNet Communication 15-1

2. Insure that the PC has a current version of BESTCOMS for BE1-700 Software installed.
BESTCOMS for BE1-700 Software is included on the BESTCOMS for BE1-700 Software CDROM,
and is also available for download from the Basler Electric web site.
3. Connect the PC to the same LAN as the BE1-700, or connect the PC directly to the BE1-700 through
a hub, or with a Category 5 (Cat-5) crossover cable.
4. If you already know the IP address of the BE1-700, skip to the next step. To scan the network for
connected BE1-700 relays, launch BESTCOMS, click on the "Ethernet Communications" menu, and
select "Download Settings From Device". When the Device Selection Dialog appears, select "Scan for
Connected Devices" and note the IP address of the device of interest. (See Figures 15-10 and 15-
11.) If no devices are found, insure that the BE1-700 is on the same subnet, that all cables are
connected, or that the direct connection cable is a CAT5 crossover cable, as appropriate.
5. Launch an Internet Explorer window and type the following URL, substituting the IP address of the
BE1-700 for the zeros shown below:
http://000.000.000.000/FS/WEB/config.htm
6. If the computer has a compatible Java Runtime installed, the screen shown in Figure 15-1 should
appear.
Figure 15-1. Launch Screen for BESTNet Configuration Applet (Internet Explorer)
7. Once the configuration applet is loaded, its window should appear (Figure 15-2).
8. Prior to changing any configuration parameters, verify, by serial number, that the relay being
configured is the correct one.
9. Step through the Network, HTTP Security and E-mail Alerts screens and set as desired (see the
following paragraphs for details). Save or cancel the changes, as required, with the appropriate
screen buttons.
NOTE
E-mail alerts are triggered by BESTlogic equations that are configured under the
BESTNet section of BESTCOMS software. E-mail alerts will not function unless
BOTH the configuration applet AND the BESTNet e-mail equations are set.
15-2 BESTNet Communication BE1-700

Figure 15-2. BESTNet Configuration Applet
CONFIGURATION SCREENS
The BESTNet Configuration Applet has seven screens of information and settings, as described in the
following paragraphs.
Home
Purpose: Provides general identifying information about the BE1-700. This screen should be used to
verify that the correct relay device has been selected prior to making any configuration changes. The
Home Configuration screen is shown in Figure 15-3. Information provided on the Home Configuration
screen is described in Table 15-1.
Figure 15-3. Home Configuration Screen

Table 15-1. Home Configuration Screen Settings and Information
Information Value Function
Model “BE1-700” Indicates the type of BESTNet relay. This value is factory-
assigned and cannot be changed.
Relay ID Programmable text string This string can contain up to 30 alphanumeric characters and
is programmed through BESTCOMS or an ASCII command.
It can be used to provide information about the location and
function of each BE1-700. It is helpful (but not required) for
each BE1-700 to be programmed with a unique relay ID.
Style Number 7-character, Describes the features and functions included in a particular
alphanumeric string BE1-700 relay. Refer to the relay style chart or BESTCOMS
software for the meaning of each style chart character. The
style number is not unique to each BE1-700. This value is
factory assigned and cannot be changed by the user.
Serial Number 9-character string A unique serial number is assigned to each BE1-700 relay.
The serial number is printed on a label attached to the relay
and provides a way to ensure that the relay data being
viewed is for the correct relay. The serial number is factory
assigned and cannot be changed.
IP Address IP address of the BE1- The internet protocol address of the BE1-700. This address is
700 is in dotted decimal required for BE1-700 communication with BESTCOMS,
notation (0.0.0.0) Internet Explorer, or any other application. It can be set
manually through the Network screen of the BESTNet
configuration applet, or can be automatically assigned by a
DHCP server.
MAC Address 6-byte hexadecimal value Globally unique identifier assigned to each Ethernet Media
Access Controller. This value is factory assigned and cannot
be changed by the user.
Network
Purpose: Allows configuration of the BE1-700 relay IP address and other parameters that may be
required on the network to which the BE1-700 is connected. Consult your network administrator for the
appropriate values for these settings. Incorrect Network Configuration screen settings can prevent BE1-
700 network access, or create problems on the network to which it is connected.
Network Configuration screen settings are summarized in Table 15-2. The Network Configuration screen
is shown in Figure 15-4.
Table 15-2. Network Configuration Screen Settings and Information

Setting Value Function
Access relay data over Unchecked/Checked An unchecked box disables ASCII, BESTCOMS, and web
network page data communication over TCP. A checked box enables
ASCII, BESTCOMS, and web page data communication over
TCP. This setting does not affect EMAIL ALERTS. EMAIL
ALERTS must be enabled or disabled by the ENABLE
SENDING EMAIL ALERTS setting.
Select method to assign Obtain automatically This setting allows a DCHP server on your network to assign
IP address using DHCP network parameters (such as IP address) to the relay
automatically. A DHCP server is required if this option is
selected. If this option is used, the BE1-700 IP address may
change from time to time. BESTCOMS includes a Discovery
function that will detect BESTNet relays and display their IP
addresses.
Use the following IP This setting allows a static IP address to be assigned to the
address relay, as well as a subnet mask and default gateway. For
more information, see the following settings in this table.
The following settings are enabled only when USE THE FOLLOWING IP ADRESS setting is selected.

IP Address IP address to be This is the IP address, expressed in dotted decimal notation
assigned to a BE1-700 (0.0.0.0), that users enter to access this relay on the network.
Consult your network administrator for the appropriate value
to use in this field.
Subnet Mask Subnet mask to be This is the subnet mask, expressed in dotted decimal notation
assigned to a BE1-700 (0.0.0.0), of the subnet of the network to which the BE1-700
is connected. Consult your network administrator for the
appropriate value to use in this field.
Default Gateway IP address of the default This is the IP address, expressed in dotted decimal notation
gateway server (0.0.0.0), of the gateway used to access the BE1-700. If no
gateway is used, this value should be set at 0.0.0.0. Consult
your network administrator for the appropriate value to use in
this field.
Figure 15-4. Network Configuration Screen
Web Page Security

Purpose: Provide security to prevent unauthorized changes to BESTNet configuration.
NOTE
Web page security ONLY protects against changes to the BESTNet configura-
tion. It DOES NOT prevent changes to relay settings over Ethernet. To add
password control for setting changes, use the SECURITY tab in BESTCOMS to
select password(s) for the COM1 Ethernet port.
By entering a username and password on this screen, a login will be required to make future changes to
the BESTNet configuration.
NOTE
BEFORE saving the username and password, make a written note of these
values! Once the values are saved, the user name and password will be required
for all future changes, including disabling security.

Web Page Security Configuration screen settings are shown in Figure 15-5 and described in Table 15-3.
Figure 15-5. Web Page Security Configuration Screen
Table 15-3. Web Page Security Configuration Screen Settings and Information
Enable password Unchecked Disables password authentication of web pages
authentication
Checked Requires entry of a password before allowing web page
viewing
The remaining settings are enabled only when the ENABLE PASSWORD AUTHENTICATION setting is checked.
User Name User name required for A user name must be entered to allow future changes to
access BESTNet configuration. Both a user name and password are
required to gain access.
Password Password required for A password must be entered to allow future changes to
access BESTNet configuration. Both a user name and password are
required to gain access.
Verify Password Second entry of The correct password must be reentered in this field to
password required for ensure that an entry error was not made. If the PASSWORD
confirmation of access and VERIFY PASSWORD fields do not match, an error will
privilege be generated and the security settings will not be saved.
E-mail Alerts
Purpose: Configure the parameters for E-mail Alerts. E-mail alerts allow a BESTlogic equation to cause
an e-mail message to be sent to a predetermined e-mail address and carbon-copied (CC) to a second e-
mail address. The subject line of the e-mail message can be programmed to indicate the type of event
that triggered the e-mail.
Settings allow a trigger interval time delay to be added to prevent multiple e-mails from being sent when a
trigger is being sent repeatedly. Separate settings allow "reminder" e-mails to be sent periodically if a
trigger remains active for an extended period. Care must be taken with these settings to ensure that
recipients are not "flooded" with e-mails.
E-mail Alerts Configuration screen settings are shown in Figure 15-6 and described in Table 15-4.

NOTE
E-mail alerts are triggered by BESTlogic equations that are configured in the
BESTNet section of BESTCOMS. E-mail alerts will not function unless BOTH the
configuration applet AND the BESTNet e-mail equations are set.
Figure 15-6. E-mail Alerts Configuration Screen

Table 15-4. E-mail Alerts Configuration Screen Settings and Information
Enable sending e-mail Unchecked Disables sending of any e-mail alerts
alerts
Checked Enables sending of e-mail alerts
SMTP Server Address IP address of an SMTP This setting field contains the IP address, in dotted decimal
server notation (0.0.0.0), of an SMTP server accessible by the BE1-
700. This server must not require authentication.
From Any e-mail address with This e-mail address will show in the From field of e-mails sent
a valid format by the BE1-700. It cannot contain spaces or punctuation
other than an underscore (_). It must contain one ampersand
(@).
The remaining settings are repeated for each of the 10 programmable alerts.
Enable e-mail alert Unchecked Disables sending of this e-mail alert
Checked Enables sending of this e-mail alert
To Any e-mail address with When the ALERT LOGIC condition becomes true, this is the
a valid format address that the BE1-700 attempts to send an e-mail
message to. The address cannot contain spaces or
punctuation other than an underscore (_). It must contain one
ampersand (@).
CC Any e-mail address with When the ALERT LOGIC condition becomes true, this is the
a valid format address that the BE1-700 attempts to send a carbon copy e-
mail message to. The address cannot contain spaces or
punctuation other than an underscore (_). It must contain one
ampersand (@).
Subject Text string , up to 63 This string is placed in the subject line of the e-mail message
characters and contains user-defined text that describes the type of error
indicated by the selected ALERT LOGIC equation. Subject
line examples are “Overcurrent Trip” and “Breaker Close”.
Priority Normal Sends e-mail with normal priority
High Sends e-mail with high priority. (The effect of this setting
depends on the recipient’s e-mail application.)
Alert Logic SG-EMAIL1, This setting selects which BESTNet logic equation will cause
SG-EMAIL2 . . . e-mail message(s) to be sent by the BE1-700 relay. The
SG-EMAIL7 BESTNet logic equations are defined in BESTCOMS.
Trigger Interval 0 to 99,999 seconds Minimum time to detect a true ALERT LOGIC condition. A
setting other than zero causes the BE1-700 to wait the
specified time before sending another e-mail message for
additional occurrences of the same trigger.
Enable Reminder Unchecked Send only one alert e-mail per trigger.
Notifications
Checked Send e-mails periodically for as long as the ALERT LOGIC
remains true.
Reminder Interval 0 to 99,999 seconds Repetition interval for reminder e-mails, if enabled. A value of
zero is NOT recommended and will send many e-mails per
second while the ALERT LOGIC is true.
Backup/Restore
Purpose: Allows BESTNet configuration to be saved in a file on the PC or loaded from a file. This is useful
for saving a configuration before making a change, or for copying a configuration from one BE1-700 to
another.
NOTE
This file will contain only settings saved by the BESTNet configuration applet. To
save all settings from a BE1-700, save the BESTNet settings with this function,
then use BESTCOMS to save the protection settings to a .BST file. These two
files together will contain all configuration information for a BE1-700 relay.
Backup/Restore Configuration screen settings are shown in Figure 15-7 and described in Table 15-5.
Figure 15-7. Backup/Restore Configuration Screen

Table 15-5. Backup/Restore Configuration Screen Settings and Information
BACKUP Button Click to activate Click the BACKUP button to save all BESTNet settings. A
dialog box will appear and allow you to select a location and
file name on your PC. Click the BACKUP button in the dialog
box to save BESTNet settings in a file. Clicking this button
DOES NOT save ANY relay protection or configuration
settings!
Restore From File File path string Enter a valid path to a previously saved BESTNet backup file.
BROWSE Button Click to activate A dialog box will appear and allow you to select a location
and file name or an existing backup file on your PC. Click the
BACKUP button in the dialog box to save BESTNet settings
in a file.
RESTORE Button Click to activate After selecting a file with the BROWSE button, click the
RESTORE button to open the selected file and restore the
settings from that file into the BESTNet subsystem. All
currently active BESTNet settings will be lost and replaced
with the settings from the file.
System Information
Purpose: Provides detailed technical information about the configuration and status of the BESTNet
Ethernet subsystem in the BE1-700 Relay. This information is not generally required, but may be useful
for troubleshooting.
The System Information Configuration Screen is shown in Figure 15-8.
Figure 15-8. System Information Configuration Screen
Information Available from the System Information Configuration Screen

General: Provides information about the firmware installed in the BESTNet subsystem, as well as
statistics about how long the BESTNet subsystem has been running and CPU and memory utilization
information.
Serial: Provides information about how much data has flowed between the BESTNet subsystem and the
BE1-700 protection processor.
Network: Provides information about how much data has flowed between the BESTNet subsystem and
Ethernet clients accessing data on the BE1-700 relay.
Restart BESTNet
Purpose: Resets the BESTNet subsystem and processor. This is required for new NETWORK setting
changes to take effect. Restarting BESTNet does not affect any protection settings or data.
Restart BESTNet Configuration Screen settings are shown in Figure 15-9 and described in Table 15-6.
Figure 15-9. Restart BESTNet Configuration Screen
Table 15-6. Restart BESTNet Configuration Screen Settings and Information

RESTART BESTNet Click to activate Clicking this button generates a prompt which allows you to
Button restart the BE1-700 BESTNet subsystem. This restart
terminates all Ethernet connections and reinitializes the
BESTNet processor. It is necessary to restart BESTNet after
changing network parameters.
CONFIGURING BESTCOMS FOR ETHERNET

Connect your PC and the BE1-700 Digital Protective Relay to the TCP/IP LAN or
intranet. An Ethernet port is provided on the back of the relay. (Refer to Section 12,
Installation, Figure 12-3 or 12-4, for the port location.) Start BESTCOMS as described
in Section 14, BESTCOMS Software. Pull down the Screens menu and select
BESTNet Settings or click on the BESTNet Settings icon (shown at the right margin
of this paragraph). The Launch screen for the BESTNet Configuration Applet appears
(Figure 15-1).
Identifying the IP Address

To identify an unknown IP address, click the Ethernet Communications pull-down menu (available on
any BESTCOMS screen) and select Download Settings from Device. This will display the screen
shown in Figure 15-10. Click the Scan for Connected Devices button. Immediately, the Basler Electric
Device Discovery (configuration utility) Program will run and reflect the IP Address and Relay ID of BE1-
700 relays on the same LAN (as shown in Figure 15-11). The active IP Address can also be read from the
Com0, Com1 or Com2 ports with the RG-IPADDR command or from front panel Screen 4.7.2. (Note that
all BE1-700 Ethernet-enabled relays on the same subnet will be displayed. So, you may have to confirm
the correct IP address with your network administrator.) On the BE1-700 Device Discovery Screen, click
the Add button to add the second device to the list of known BE1-700 relays. Click Connect to connect
without adding the device to the list. Note this IP address since it can be used to access the web pages of
the BE1-700 with BESTNet.
Figure 15-10. BE1-700 Device List Window
Figure 15-11. BE1-700 Device Discovery Results Window
VIEWING WEB PAGES
View the Status Page

Using the PC, start your web browser and type the IP address, determined by the Device Discovery utility,
in the browser URL Block (Address Bar). Click Go. The Basler Electric BE1-700 Protection System Status
Web Page will appear (Figure 15-12).
This home page provides overall status information of the relay and of the network. Current data is
presented each time the web page is refreshed. A web page is refreshed manually by pressing the
keyboard F5 button or clicking the Refresh button in Microsoft Internet Explorer. A web page is refreshed
continuously if the START POLLING button is clicked. The Current Status and System Info panes provide
the most important information from the protection and control relays. This web page is created by the
BE1-700 relay and provides the following "read-only" information.

• General Status • Networking Settings
o Relay Trouble o MAC (address)
o Major Alarm o E-mail (server)
o Minor Alarm o DHCP (mode)
o Logic Alarm o IP Address
o Targets o IP Subnet Mask
o Breaker o IP Gateway
o Recloser (status)
• Version Info
• System Info o Model Number
o Relay ID o Style Number
o Station ID o App Program (firmware version)
o Boot Program (firmware version)
o Serial Number
None of the above settings can be changed from within the web page but some can be changed through
the BE1-700 front panel human-machine interface (HMI) or through a PC using BESTCOMS. Refer to
other sections in the instruction manual for details. Network settings can be changed by the company
network administrator or through BESTCOMS as was discussed previously in this section. The Status
Page is also the location from which other web-based features are launched, as is discussed in the
following paragraphs.
Figure 15-12. BE1-700C Sample Status Web Page

Metering Web Page
From the Status Web Page (home page) click the Real Time Metering hyperlink below and to the left of
the page title. The Basler Electric BE1-700 Metering Data Web Page will appear as illustrated in Figure
15-13. (Figure 15-13 illustrates a web page obtained with a BE1-700 that has only current sensing inputs.
A BE1-700 with voltage sensing inputs will produce a web page with different measurements.) Click the
Start Polling button at the bottom of the page, and real-time, read-only metering information will appear.
If you wish to freeze the information, click the Stop Polling (start/stop toggle) button. If desired, you may
save a copy of the screen shot (by pressing the keyboard Alt and Print Screen keys) and pasting the
image in another application for analysis. Note, too, that the relay date and time information is shown at
the top of the Metering Data Web Page. For more information on metering, see Section 5, Metering, and
Section 14, BESTCOMS Software, Metering. Click the Back button on your browser to return to the
Status Web Page.
Figure 15-13. BE1-700C Sample Metering Web Page

Fault Reports Web Page
From the Status Web Page (home page) click the Fault Reports hyperlink below and to the left of the
page title. The Basler Electric BE1-700 Digital Protection Relay - Fault Reports - Web Page will appear as
illustrated in Figure 15-14. The web page shows general information about the relay at the top, including
the number of faults recorded and the time range during which they occurred. Below that is a list of faults,
with the highest numbered faults appearing at the top. The date, time, type and number of oscillographic
recordings is shown for each fault.
For a more detailed fault summary of a particular fault, click on the fault number hyperlink to show the
Fault Summary Report web page.
Click the web browser’s Back button to return to the Status (home) Web Page.
Figure 15-14. Sample Fault Reports Web Page
Fault Summary Web Page

From the Fault Reports Web Page click the fault number hyperlink at the left of the row of interest. The
Basler Electric BE1-700 Digital Protection Relay - Fault Summary Reports - Web Page will appear as
illustrated in Figure 15-15. (Figure 15-15 illustrates a web page obtained with a BE1-700 that has only
current sensing inputs. A BE1-700 with voltage sensing inputs will produce a web page with different
measurements.) This web page shows details from the selected fault summary report. General
information about the fault is at the top of the page, including relay information, date, time, type, trigger,
targets, and fault clearing and operate time (if applicable), as well as number of oscillographic recordings.
At the bottom under Signals, the measured values for that fault are shown as magnitudes with angles for
each measured analog quantity.
Click the Back button on the browser to return to the Fault Reports (list) Web Page.

Figure 15-15. BE1-700C Sample Fault Summary Report Web Page
E-MAIL ALERTS
The BE1-700 relay with the BESTNet option can provide status alerts via e-mail. Any system or device
capable of receiving electronic-mail (e-mail) can be the recipient of these alerts.
Configuring the E-mail Alerts Function

In order to use e-mail alerts, the BE1-700 must be purchased with Communications Protocol option 4 or
5. Refer to Section 1 for the BE1-700 style charts, Figures 1-1 and 1-2. Likewise, option 4 or 5 must be
entered as part of the style number in BESTCOMS. (See Section 14, BESTCOMS Software, Figure 14-4,
General Operation Screen, General Info Tab.)
Configuring BE1-700 e-mail alerts involves two steps. Both steps must be executed in order for e-mail
alerts to function properly.
Step 1. The BESTlogic equations must be set using the BESTNet tab in BESTCOMS.
First, go to the BESTNet Settings Screen in BESTCOMS (Figure 15-16). This screen is used
for setting e-mail triggers. A maximum of seven alerts can be set.
Click the Logic button for the desired trigger and the BESTlogic Function Element Screen
(Figure 15-17) will appear. To select the desired inputs, click the TRIGGER button. The
BESTlogic Expression Builder Screen will open. Select the expression type to be used. Then
select the BESTlogic variable to be connected to the input. (It is suggested that only one
variable be selected.) Select Save when finished to return to the BESTlogic Function Element
Screen. For more details on the BESTlogic Expression Builder, see Section 7, BESTlogic
Programmable Logic. Select Done when the settings have been completely edited.

Figure 15-16. BE1-700C BESTCOMS BESTNet Screen
Figure 15-17. BESTlogic Function Element Screen, E-mail 1 Trigger

Step 2. The e-mail addresses, subject, etc. must be set and the appropriate e-mail alerts enabled using
the BESTNet configuration applet, which is accessed with a web browser. (See Configuring the
BE1-700 for Ethernet.)
The To, CC (carbon copy) and Subject may be set just like an ordinary E-mail. It is suggested
that the subject be tailored to match the type of trigger conditions. The functionality of E-mail 2
through 7 are the same as for E-mail 1, just described.
TCP/IP ASCII COMMUNICATION

TCP/IP ASCII communication allows an BE1-700 relay Ethernet connection for the purpose of issuing
ASCII commands and receiving responses. The commands and responses are identical to those
available on the serial communication ports, and described in Section 11 ASCII Command Interface.
A TCP/IP ASCII session can be started in most versions of Microsoft Windows using the built-in Telnet
application.
To be able to use Telnet to change parameters on a Basler Electric BE1-700 relay, the user must have
security access through the rear Ethernet port (Com 1). This can be achieved by setting the GS-PW
ASCII command to enable area 1 (see Section 9, Security) or by selecting the appropriate Com 1 rear
Ethernet check box(es) in BESTCOMS as shown in Figure 15-18. Note: These changes can only be
made using a serial (RS232 or RS485) connection. Attempts to enable changes for Com 1 (Ethernet) will
be rejected. See Section 9, Security, for details.
Figure 15-18. BE1-700C General Operation Screen, Global Security Tab
®
The Telnet application is normally located in the C:\Windows\System32 folder in the Microsoft Windows
®
operating system and can be accessed through the Run command of the Windows Start menu. Since
there is almost always a search path defined for the System32 folder, it is usually not necessary to type
the full path. To get help on the Telnet command, type telnet/? at a command prompt.
To access the BE1-700 using Telnet, you must know the IP address of the BE1-700. Refer to the
paragraphs under Identifying the IP Address for information about determining the IP address.
The main syntax for the Telnet command is:
telnet [host IP Address] [port #]
NOTE
The Telnet access port for all BE1-700 relays is 2101. This port number will be
required any time a program wishes to establish a TCP/IP ASCII session with a
BE1-700 relay.
Telnet Command Example
Telnet into a BE1-700 relay with an IP Address of 10.0.1.112.
Open the Windows Command Prompt Window (Figure 15-19) or Windows Run box (Figure 15-20) and
type telnet 192.168.100.112 2101 and press Enter. The Command Prompt Window will display a blinking
cursor.
Figure 15-19. Windows Command Prompt Window Figure 15-20. Windows Run Box
Type an ASCII command, such as RG-VER, and press Enter to verify that you have made the Telnet
connection. See Figure 15-21.
Figure 15-21. Telnet Session Command and Relay Response

Once the Telnet connection is verified, you can type any BE1-700 ASCII command to see settings,
reports, or status information.
NOTE
The Telnet application may not echo your typed entries.
To close the Telnet connection, type Ctrl + ] and then type quit. You can also exit the Telnet connection
by clicking the X button in the upper right corner of the Telnet session window.
ETHERNET PORTS
An Ethernet port is available as an option and communicates using ASCII commands (relay style
XXXXX4X or XXXXX5X).
The 10BaseT port is an eight-pin RJ-45 connector that connects to 10/100 megabit Category 5 copper
wire media.

UNIQUE ASCII COMMANDS
SG-EMAIL Command
Purpose: Read/Set E-mail parameters where n is 1 to 7.
Syntax: SG-EMAIL[n][={e-mail logic}]
Comments: Sets up to seven different e-mail triggers which will automatically send e-mail
messages when the trigger logic becomes TRUE. The following parameters are
required:
[n] E-mail number 1 to 7.

{logic} This is an OR-only BESTlogic equation that when TRUE triggers the
sending of an e-mail message. A entry into the sequence of event record
will be logged for each e-mail message triggered.
SG-EMAIL Command Example
1. Set e-mail #2 logic to VO3, where SL-VO3=50TPT.
>SG-EMAIL2=VO3
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
For LAN Connections

Requirements
• Standard Cat 5 or Cat 5e cable less than 100 meters in length.
• For BESTCOMS to be able to detect the relay(s) with the scan function, the PC and relay must
be on the same side of a single router (i.e., on the same network segment).
• If DHCP is not used, consult your network administrator for a static IP address, subnet mask and
default gateway, appropriate for your network.
• To use e-mail alerts, an SMTP server that does not require a login (by clients on the network)
must be accessible by the relay. Consult your network administrator.
Troubleshooting Suggestions
• When configuring the relay for Ethernet, the first time the configuration applet is run, you may get
a security warning asking if you trust the signed applet distributed by Basler Electric. Clicking Yes
will allow the process to continue.
• If DHCP is being used, Ethernet cable should be connected to the relay before applying power. If
the Ethernet cable is connected after powering up relay, it may take a long time for the IP address
to be assigned by the DHCP server. You can force this process to happen by cycling relay power
while the Ethernet cable is connected.
• If some commands work and some do not, the security settings for COM1 may be set to the
default state which allows reading parameters via Ethernet but prevents writing. These settings
can be changed from BESTCOMS but ONLY via an RS-232 connection to the relay. For security
reasons, the Ethernet port cannot be used to turn on Ethernet write options.
• Only one user can be polling the relay at a time. If another user is using the Ethernet connection,
you must wait until their session is complete.
For Direct Connections (PC to Relay Without a LAN)

Requirements
• A special Ethernet crossover/cross wired Cat 5 or Cat 5e cable less than 100 meters should be
used. A standard Ethernet cable will not work for a back-to-back PC connection (i.e., directly
connected without a hub/switch/router) to a relay.
• If the relay is set for DHCP, then the PC must also be set for DHCP.

Troubleshooting Suggestions
• E-mail alerts will not work on a direct PC-to-relay connection.
•
®
On some computers, particularly those with older Windows operating systems, it may be
necessary to release/renew the DHCP connection on the PC to get it to the default subnet that
®
matches the relay. This can be done with the ipconfig.exe or winipconfig.exe (Windows ME, 98
®
or 95, only) application provided with Windows .
• If the direct connection is not working, try using a hub, switch, router or LAN to verify that the PC
and relay are communicating. In this case, do not use crossover cable(s).
• If some commands work and some do not, the security settings for COM1 may be set to the
default state which allows reading parameters via Ethernet but prevents writing. These settings
can be changed from BESTCOMS but ONLY via a RS-232 connection to the relay. For security
reasons, the Ethernet port cannot be used to turn on Ethernet write options.
• If the scan function of BESTCOMS shows an address of 0.0.0.0 when the relay is set to DHCP,
the communications processor of the relay is still being initialized. Wait 30 seconds and then try
"Scan for Connected Devices" or "Refresh" again.
• If the scan function in BESTCOMS shows the relay but no other Ethernet functions work, then it
may be necessary to set the static IP address of the PC to the same IP address shown in
BESTCOMS. But, change the part after the last period to a different number and change the
subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.

APPENDIX A • TIME OVERCURRENT
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
(BE1-700C ONLY)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX A • TIME OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVES (BE1-700C ONLY) . . . . . . . . . A-1

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
CURVE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
TIME OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVE GRAPHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Using Table A-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
THE 46 CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
46 Pickup Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
46 Time Dial (= Generator K Factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Relay Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Figures
Figure A-1. Time Characteristic Curve S, S1 Short Inverse, 99-1369, (Similar to ABB CO-2) . . . . . . . . A-6
Figure A-2. Time Characteristic Curve S2, Short Inverse, 99-1595 (Similar to GE IAC-55) . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Figure A-3. Time Characteristic Curve L, L1, Long Inverse, 99-1370, (Similar to ABB CO-5) . . . . . . . . A-8
Figure A-4. Time Characteristic Curve L2, Long Inverse, 99-1594, (Similar to GE IAC-66) . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Figure A-5. Time Characteristic Curve D, Definite Time, 99-1371, (Similar to ABB CO-6) . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Figure A-6. Time Characteristic Curve M, Moderately Inverse, 99-1372, (Similar to ABB CO-7) . . . . . A-11
Figure A-7. Time Characteristic Curve I, I1 Inverse Time, 99-1373 (Similar to ABB CO-8) . . . . . . . . . A-12
Figure A-8. Time Characteristic Curve I2, Inverse Time, 99-1597 (Similar to GE IAC-51) . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Figure A-9. Time Characteristic Curve V, V1, Very Inverse, 99-1374 (Similar to ABB CO-9) . . . . . . . A-14
Figure A-10. Time Characteristic Curve V2, Very Inverse, 99-1596 (Similar to GE IAC-53) . . . . . . . . A-15
Figure A-11. Time Characteristic Curve E, E1, Extremely Inverse, 99-1375 (Similar to ABB CO-11) . A-16
Figure A-12. Time Characteristic Curve E2, Extremely Inverse, 99-1598 (Similar to GE IAC-77) . . . . A-17
Figure A-13. Time Characteristic Curve A, Standard Inverse, 99-1621 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
Figure A-14. Time Characteristic Curve B, Very Inverse, 99-1376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Figure A-15. Time Characteristic Curve C, Extremely Inverse, 99-1377 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
Figure A-16. Time Characteristic Curve G, Long Inverse, 99-1622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-21
Figure A-17. 46 Time Characteristic Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Tables
Table A-1. 51P and 51N Time Characteristic Curve Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Table A-2. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Table A-3. Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Equations
Equation A-1 ...................................................................... A-1
Equation A-2 ...................................................................... A-1
Equation A-3 ...................................................................... A-4
Equation A-4 ...................................................................... A-5
BE1-700 Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curves i

Equation A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Equation A-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Equation A-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
ii Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curves BE1-700

APPENDIX A • TIME OVERCURRENT
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
(BE1-700C ONLY)
GENERAL
Basler Electric inverse time overcurrent relays (ANSI Device 51) provide time/current characteristic curves
that closely emulate most of the common electromechanical, induction disk relays manufactured in North
America. To further improve relay coordination, selection of integrated reset or instantaneous reset
characteristics is also provided.
CURVE SPECIFICATIONS
Timing Accuracy (All 51 Functions) Within ±5% or ±1.5 cycles, whichever is greater, for time dial
settings of D greater than 0.1 and multiples of 2 to 40 times the
pickup setting but not over 150 A for 5 A CT units or 30 A for 1 A
CT units.
Sixteen inverse time functions, one fixed time function and one
programmable time function can be selected. Characteristic curves
for the inverse and definite time functions are defined by the
following equations.
A•D
TT = + B•D + K Equation A-1
M N -C
R ·D
TR = Equation A-2
M2 -1
TT = Time to trip when M $ 1

TR = Time to reset if relay is set for integrating
reset when M < 1. Otherwise, reset is 50
milliseconds or less
D = TIME DIAL setting (0.0 to 9.9)
M = Multiple of PICKUP setting (0 to 40)
A, B, C, N, K = Constants for the particular curve
R = Constant defining the reset time
These equations comply with IEEE Standard C37.112-

1996.
Table A-1 lists the time characteristic curve constants. See

Figures A-1 through A-17 for graphs of the characteristics.
BE1-700 Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curves A-1

Table A-1. 51P, 51Q and 51N Time Characteristic Curve Constants
Curve Trip Characteristic Constants Reset *

BE Curve Name
Selection
A B C N K R
S1 S, Short Inverse 0.2663 0.03393 1.0000 1.2969 0.0280 0.5000
S2 S2, Short Inverse 0.0286 0.02080 1.0000 0.9844 0.0280 0.0940
L1 L1, Long Inverse 5.6143 2.18592 1.0000 1.0000 0.0280 15.750
L2 L2, Long Inverse 2.3955 0.00000 1.0000 0.3125 0.0280 7.8001
D D, Definite Time 0.4797 0.21359 1.0000 1.5625 0.0280 0.8750
M M, Moderately Inverse 0.3022 0.12840 1.0000 0.5000 0.0280 1.7500
I1 I, Inverse Time 8.9341 0.17966 1.0000 2.0938 0.0280 9.0000
I2 Inverse Time 0.2747 0.10426 1.0000 0.4375 0.0280 0.8868
V1 V, Very Inverse 5.4678 0.10814 1.0000 2.0469 0.0280 5.5000
V2 V2, Very Inverse 4.4309 0.09910 1.0000 1.9531 0.0280 5.8231
E1 Extremely Inverse 7.7624 0.02758 1.0000 2.0938 0.0280 7.7500
E2 E2, Extremely Inverse 4.9883 0.01290 1.0000 2.0469 0.0280 4.7742
A Standard Inverse 0.01414 0.00000 1.0000 0.0200 0.0280 2.0000
B B, Very Inverse (I2t) 1.4636 0.00000 1.0000 1.0469 0.0280 3.2500
C Extremely Inverse (I2t) 8.2506 0.00000 1.0000 2.0469 0.0280 8.0000
G Long Time Inverse 12.1212 0.00000 1.0000 1.0000 0.0280 29.0000

(I2t)
F Fixed Time 0.0000 1.00000 1.0000 0.0000 0.0280 1.0000

†
46 Negative-Sequence
‡ 0 0 2 0.0280 100.00
Overcurrent
P Programmable 0 to 600 0 to 25 0 to 1 0.5 to 2.5 0.0280 0 to 30
* For integrated reset, append R to the curve name. For example, curve S1 has instantaneous reset. Curve
S1R has integrated reset.
† Curve F has a fixed delay of one second times the Time Dial setting.
‡ Constant A is variable for the 46 curve and is determined, as necessary, based on system full-load current
(SG-NOM) setting, minimum pickup and K factor settings.
TIME OVERCURRENT CHARACTERISTIC CURVE GRAPHS

Figures A-1 through A-17 illustrate the characteristic curves of the BE1-700C relay. Table A-2 cross-
references each curve to existing electromechanical relay characteristics. Equivalent time dial settings were
calculated at a value of five times pickup. A drawing number is provided in the caption of each graph.
A-2 Time Overcurrent Characteristic Curves BE1-700

Table A-2. Characteristic Curve Cross-Reference
Curve Curve Name Drawing No. Similar To
S1 S, Short Inverse 99-1369 ABB CO-2
S2 S2, Short Inverse 99-1595 GE IAC-55
L1 L, L1, Long Inverse 99-1370 ABB CO-5
L2 L2, Long Inverse 99-1594 GE IAC-66
D D, Definite Time 99-1371 ABB CO-6
M M, Moderately Inverse 99-1372 ABB CO-7
I1 I, I1 Inverse Time 99-1373 ABB CO-8
I2 I2 Inverse Time 99-1597 GE IAC-51
V1 V, V1 Very Inverse 99-1374 ABB CO-9
V2 V2, Very Inverse 99-1596 GE IAC-53
E1 E, E1 Extremely Inverse 99-1375 ABB CO-11
E2 E2, Extremely Inverse 99-1598 GE IAC-77
A A Standard Inverse 99-1621 BS, IEC Standard Inverse
B B, Very Inverse (It) 99-1376 BS, IEC Very Inverse (I2t)
C Extremely Inverse (I2t) 99-1377 BS, IEC Extremely Inverse (I2t)
G Long Time Inverse 99-1622 BS, IEC Long Time Inverse
F Fixed Time n/a n/a
P Programmable n/a n/a
Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference

Although the time characteristic curve shapes have been optimized for each relay, time dial settings of Basler
Electric relays are not identical to the settings of electromechanical induction disk overcurrent relays. Table
A-3 helps you convert the time dial settings of induction disk relays to the equivalent setting for Basler Electric
relays. Enter time dial settings at HMI Screens 5.X.7.1 (51P), 5.X.7.2 (51N), 5.X.7.3 (51Q) and 5.X.7.5 (151N).
Enter time dial settings through the communication ports using the S<g>-51P/51N/151N/51Q commands. For
more information, refer to Section 4, Protection and Control Functions, Overcurrent Protection.
Using Table A-3

Cross-reference table values were obtained by inspection of published electromechanical time current
characteristic curves. The time delay for a current of five times tap was entered into the time dial calculator
function for each time dial setting. The equivalent Basler Electric time dial setting was then entered into the
cross-reference table.
If your electromechanical relay time dial setting is between the values provided in the table, it will be necessary
to interpolate (estimate the correct intermediate value) between the electromechanical setting and the Basler
Electric setting.
Basler Electric relays have a maximum Time Dial setting of 9.9. The Basler Electric equivalent Time Dial
setting for the electromechanical maximum setting is provided in the cross reference table even if it exceeds
9.9. This allows interpolation as noted above.

Basler Electric time current characteristics are determined by a linear mathematical equation. The induction
disk of an electromechanical relay has a certain degree of non-linearity due to inertial and friction effects. For
this reason, even though every effort has been made to provide characteristic curves with minimum deviation
from the published electromechanical curves, slight deviations can exist between them.
In applications where the time coordination between curves is extremely close, we recommend that you
choose the optimal time dial setting by inspection of the coordination study. In applications where coordination
is tight, it is recommended that you retrofit your circuits with Basler Electric electronic relays to ensure high
timing accuracy.
Table A-3. Time Dial Setting Cross-Reference

Electromechanical Relay Time Dial Setting
Curve Name Equivalent Drawing 0.5 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 11.0
to No. Basler Electric Equivalent Time Dial Setting
S, S1 ABB CO-2 99-1369 0.3 0.8 1.7 2.4 3.4 4.2 5.0 5.8 6.7 7.7 8.6 9.7
L, L1 ABB CO-5 99-1370 0.4 0.8 1.5 2.3 3.3 4.2 5.0 6.0 7.0 7.8 8.8 9.9
D ABB CO-6 99-1371 0.5 1.1 2.0 2.9 3.7 4.5 5.0 5.9 7.2 8.0 8.9 10.1
M ABB CO-7 99-1372 0.4 0.8 1.7 2.5 3.3 4.3 5.3 6.1 7.0 8.0 9.0 9.8
I, I1 ABB CO-8 99-1373 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.3 3.2 4.0 5.0 5.8 6.8 7.6 8.7 10.0
V, V1 ABB CO-9 99-1374 0.3 0.7 1.4 2.1 3.0 3.9 4.8 5.7 6.7 7.8 8.7 9.6
E, E1 ABB CO-11 99-1375 0.3 0.7 1.5 2.4 3.2 4.2 5.0 5.7 6.6 7.8 8.5 10.3
I2 GE IAC-51 99-1597 0.6 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.7 4.8 5.7 6.8 8.0 9.3 10.6
V2 GE IAC-53 99-1596 0.4 0.8 1.6 2.4 3.4 4.3 5.1 6.3 7.2 8.4 9.6
S2 GE IAC-55 99-1595 0.2 1.0 2.0 3.1 4.0 4.9 6.1 7.2 8.1 8.9 9.8
L2 GE IAC-66 99-1594 0.4 0.9 1.8 2.7 3.9 4.9 6.3 7.2 8.5 9.7 10.9
E2 GE IAC-77 99-1598 0.5 1.0 1.9 2.7 3.5 4.3 5.2 6.2 7.4 8.2 9.9
THE 46 CURVE
The 46 curve (Figure A-17) is a special curve designed to emulate the (I2)2t withstand ratings of generators
using what is frequently referred to as the generator K factor. The 46 curve may be selected for use with the
51P, 51N and 151 protection functions.
To use the 46 curve, the user should determine the “K factor” of the generator and the continuous (I2)2t rating
of the generator and use this to set the time dial and pickup for the 46 curve by the process described below.
46 Pickup Current
Generators have a maximum continuous rating for negative sequence current. This is typically expressed as
a percent of stator rating. When using the 46 curve, the user should convert the I2 rating data to actual
secondary current at the relay. This value (plus some margin if appropriate) should be entered as the pickup
setting. For example, if a generator’s rated full-load current is 5 amperes at the relay terminals and the
generator has a 5 percent continuous I2 rating, then this converts to 0.25 amperes I2 continuous. The minimum
setting pickup for the 46 curve should therefore be set at or above 0.25 amperes. Typical values for the
continuous I2 rating of generators is in the range of 3 to 15 percent of the full-load current rating.
46 Time Dial (= Generator K Factor)

The amount of time that a generator can withstand a given level of unbalance is defined by the Equation A-3.
K
t= Equation A-3
(I 2 )2

The K factor gives the time that a generator can withstand 1 per unit negative sequence current. For example,
with a K factor of 20, since (I2)2 becomes 1 at 1 per unit of current, the generator can withstand the condition
for 20 seconds. Typical values for generator K factor are in the 2 to 40 range. The relay uses the “nominal
current” setting of the relay (front panel Screen 6.3.7 or via the SG-NOM command) to determine what
corresponds to 1 per unit current in the generator.
When curve 46 is selected, the relay changes the range of the allowed time dial to 1 to 99 (instead of the time
dial range of 0.1 to 9.9 for all other curves). The user should enter the “K factor” of the generator into the time
dial field.
Relay Equation
When the 46 curve is used, the relay uses the K factor (i.e., time dial setting), minimum pickup setting and
generator full-load current to create a constant Z (Equation A-4).
2
 I NOM. Setting  Equation A-4
Z = 46 Time Dial  
 46 Pickup Setting 
Z
The time to trip equation used in the relay is: TT = + 0.028 seconds Equation A-5
M2
Measured I 2
where: M= Equation A-6
46 Pickup Setting
2
which, when M > 1, reduces to:  INOM . Setting  Equation A-7
TT = 46 Time Dial   + 0.028 seconds
 I 2 measured 

Figure A-1. Time Characteristic Curve S, S1 Short Inverse,
99-1369 (Similar to ABB CO-2)
Figure A-2. Time Characteristic Curve S2, Short Inverse,
99-1595 (Similar to GE IAC-55)
Figure A-3. Time Characteristic Curve L, L1, Long Inverse,
Figure A-4. Time Characteristic Curve L2, Long Inverse,
Figure A-5. Time Characteristic Curve D, Definite Time,
Figure A-6. Time Characteristic Curve M, Moderately Inverse, 99-1372
(Similar to ABB CO-7)
Figure A-7. Time Characteristic Curve I, I1 Inverse Time,
Figure A-8. Time Characteristic Curve I2, Inverse Time,
Figure A-9. Time Characteristic Curve V, V1, Very Inverse,
Figure A-10. Time Characteristic Curve V2, Very Inverse,
Figure A-11. Time Characteristic Curve E, E1, Extremely Inverse,
Figure A-12. Time Characteristic Curve E2, Extremely Inverse,
Figure A-13. Time Characteristic Curve A, Standard Inverse, 99-1621

Figure A-14. Time Characteristic Curve B, Very Inverse, 99-1376

Figure A-15. Time Characteristic Curve C, Extremely Inverse, 99-1377

Figure A-16. Time Characteristic Curve G, Long Inverse, 99-1622

Figure A-17. 46 Time Characteristic Curve
Note: Curves are shown as extending farther to the left than they will in practice. Curves stop at pickup level.
For example, if the user selects 5A FLC and a pickup setting of 0.5 A, the per-unit pickup is 0.1 A pu. The
relay will not pick up at less than 0.1 pu I2 for these settings.

APPENDIX B • COMMAND CROSS-REFERENCE
INTRODUCTION
This appendix lists ASCII commands, command syntax, brief command descriptions and any corresponding
human-machine interface (HMI) screens. Commands are organized by function in the following groups and
tables:
C Miscellaneous (Table B-1) C General Setting (Table B-7)

C Metering (Table B-2) C Breaker Monitoring and Setting (Table B-8)
C Control (Table B-3) C Programmable Logic Setting (Table B-9)
C Report (Table B-4) C User Programmable Name Setting (Table B-10)
C Setting (Table B-5) C Protection Setting (Table B-11)
C Alarm Setting (Table B-6) C Global (Table B-12)
A C entry in the Type column means the command pertains to the BE1-700C (current) relay; a V indicates
it applies to the BE1-700V (voltage) relay; an empty field means it applies to both types of relays; and an O
indicates that the command applies to a feature that is an option per the style charts (see Figures 1-1 and 1-
2). An entry of x in the HMI Screen column represents multiple entry possibilities such as 0 or 1 for setting
groups or 43 or 143 for virtual switches.
Table B-1. Miscellaneous Commands

Type ASCII Command Function HMI Screen
Read/Set access level in order to change

ACCESS[=<password>] n/a
settings
EXIT Exit programming mode n/a
HELP <cmd> or H <cmd> Obtain help with command operation n/a
Table B-2. Metering Commands

M Read all metered values n/a

C M-I<phase> Read metered current in primary unit 3.5, 3.6, 3.7
Table B-3. Control Commands

CO-<control>=<mode> Control operation n/a

CS-<control>=<mode> Control selection n/a
CS/CO-43 Control virtual switches 2.1.x
CS/CO-101 Control breaker control switch 2.2.1
CS/CO-GROUP Control group 2.3.1
CS/CO-OUTn Control output n 2.4.1
BE1-700 Command Cross-Reference B-1

Table B-4. Report Commands
RA=0 Report/Reset alarm information 1.3
RA-LGC=0 Report/Reset logic alarm information n/a
RA-MAJ=0 Report/Reset major alarm information n/a
RA-MIN=0 Report/Reset minor alarm information n/a
RA-REL=0 Report/Reset relay alarm information n/a
RB Read breaker status 1.5.6
C RB-DUTY<phase>=%duty> Read/Set breaker contact duty log 4.3.2
RB-OPCNTR=<#operations> Read/Set breaker operation counter 4.3.1
C RD Report all demand data n/a
4.4.3.1-
C RD-PI=0 Read/Reset peak demand current
4.4.3.5
4.4.1.1-
C RD-TI Report today’s demand current
4.4.1.5
4.4.2.1-
C RD-YI Report yesterday’s demand current
4.4.2.5
RF[-n/NEW]=0/TRIG Read/Reset fault report data n/a
RG Report general information n/a
RG-DATE=<M/D/Y> or
Read/Set date 4.6
RG-DATE=<D-M-Y>
RG-STAT Report relay status n/a
RG-TARG=0 Report/Reset target status 1.2
RG-TIME=hr:mn:sc or
Report/Set time 4.6
RG-TIME=hr:mn<f>sc]
Read program version, model number,
RG-VER 4.7
style number and serial number
RO-nA/B[#].CFG/DAT Read oscillographic fault report n/a
Read oscillographic
RS[-n/Fn/ALM/IO/LGC/NEW]=0 n/a
COMTRADE.DAT/.CFG fault report
Table B-5. Setting Command

S Read all relay setting parameters n/a
Table B-6. Alarm Setting Commands

SA Read all major and minor alarm settings n/a
V SA-24[={alarm level},{td (m)}] Read/Set volts per hertz alarm settings n/a
alarm level = volts per hertz
SA-BKR<n>=<mode>,<alarm limit> Read/Set breaker alarm settings n/a
SA-DI=<alarm level> Read/Set demand alarm settings n/a
B-2 Command Cross-Reference BE1-700

SA-LGC=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] Read/Set logic alarm setting mask n/a
. . . [<alarm num n>]
SA-MIN=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] Read/Set minor alarm setting mask n/a
SA-MAJ=<alarm num 1>[/<alarm num 2>] Read/Set major alarm setting mask n/a
SA-RESET=<rst alm logic> Read/Set programmable alarms reset n/a
logic
Table B-7. General Setting Commands

SG Read all general settings n/a
SG-BL=<time> Read/Set the backlight timer 6.4
SG-CLK=<date format(M/D)>, <time format Read/Program time and date format n/a
(12/24)>
SG-COM<#>=<baud>,A<addr>,P<pg len>, Read/Set serial communication protocol 6.1.1-6.1.3
R<reply ack>,X<XON ena>]
C SG-CT<x>=<CT ratio> Read/Set Phase/Neutral (Gnd) CT ratio 6.4.1, 6.3.2
C SG-DI<x>=<interval> Read/Set P(IA/IB/IC), N and Q demand n/a
interval
SG-EMAIL<x> Read/Set e-mail logic n/a
SG-FREQ=<freq (Hz)> Read/Enter power system frequency 6.3.8
SG-HOLD<x>=<1/0 hold ena> Read/Program output hold operation n/a
SG-ID=<relayID>,<Station ID> Read/Set relay ID and station ID used in n/a
reports
SG-IN<x>=<Recognition Time>,<Debounce Read/Set input recognition / debounce n/a
Time>
SG-NOM Read/Set nominal current and nominal 6.3.7
voltage
SG-PHROT=<phase rotation> Read/Set phase rotation setting n/a
SG-SCREEN<x>=<default screen number> Read/Set default screen(s) n/a
SG-SGCON=<time> Read/Set SGC output on time n/a
SG-TARG=<x/x/...x>,<rst TARG logic> Report/Enable Target List and reset n/a
target Logic
SG-TRIGGER<x>=<TRIPtrigger>, Read/Set trigger logic n/a
<PUtrigger>,<LOGIC trigger>
V SG-VTP=<VT ratio>,<connection>,<27/59 Read/Set VT ratio, connection and 27/59 6.3.3, 6.3.4
mode>,<51 mode> & 51 pickup mode
V SG=VTX=<VT ratio>,<connection> Read/Set VT Aux ratio and connection 6.3.5, 6.3.6

Table B-8. Breaker Monitoring and Setting Commands
C SB Read all breaker settings n/a
C SB-DUTY=<mode>,<DMAX> Read/Set breaker contact duty n/a
C SB-LOGIC=<breaker close logic> Read/Set breaker contact logic n/a
Table B-9. Programmable Logic Setting Commands

SL:<name> Obtain setting logic information n/a
V SL-24=<mode>,<BLK logic> Read/Set logic for 24 function modules n/a
V SL-<x>27=<mode>,<BLK logic> Read/Set logic for 27 function modules n/a
SL-43=<mode> Read/Set Logic for 43 virtual switches n/a
O SL-79=<mode>,<RI logic><Status logic> Read/Set logic for 79 function modules n/a
<Watt logic><Lockout logic>
C SL-<x>50T=<mode>,<BLK logic> Read/Set logic for x50 function modules n/a
C SL-<x>51=<mode>,<BLK logic> Read/Set logic for 51 function modules n/a
SL-<x>62=<mode>,<INI logic>,<BLK logic> Read/Set logic for 62 function modules n/a
C SL-BF<x>=<mode>,<INI logic>, Read/Set logic for breaker failure function n/a
<BLK logic> modules
SL-GROUP=<mode>,<D0 logic>, Read/Set logic for setting group module n/a
<D1 logic>
SL-N=<name> Read, set or copy the name of the n/a
custom logic
SL-VO<x>=<Boolean equation> Read/Set output logic n/a
Table B-10. User Programmable Name Setting Command

SN-<var>=<name>,<TRUE label>, Read/Set user programmable names n/a
<FALSE label>
Table B-11. Protection Setting Commands

S<g> Read all protection settings n/a
V S<g>-24=<Pickup>,<Time Delay>, Read/Set 24 pickup level, time delay, 5.x.1.1
<Reset Time Delay>,<Curve> reset delay and curve
V S<g>-24D=<Pickup 1 (V/Hz)>,<Time Delay Read/Set 24 definite time pickup levels 5.x.1.2
1>,<Pickup 2 (V/Hz)>,<Time Delay 2> and time delays
V, O S<g>-25=<Volts>,<Angle>,<Slip>,<Mode> Read/Set 25 delta volts, phase angle, slip 5.x.2.1
frequency and mode
B-4 Command Cross-Reference BE1-700

V S<g>-<x>27<X or P>=<Pickup>, Read/Set 27 pickup level, time delay and 5.x.3 &
<Time Delay> mode 5.x.3.1
V S<g>-47=<Pickup>,<Time Delay> Read/Set 47 pickup level and time delay 5.x.5.1
C S<g>-<x>50T=<Pickup>,<Time Delay> Read/Set 50TP/50TN pickup level and 5.x.6.1 to
time delay 5.x.6.6
C S<g>-<x>51=<Pickup>, Read/Set 51P/51N pickup level, time 5.x.7.1 to
<Time Delay>,<Curve> delay and curve 5.x.7.6
V S<g>-<x>59<X or P>=<Pickup>, Read/Set 59 pickup level and time delay 5.x.8.1
<Time Delay>
S<g>-<x>62=<T1>,<T2> Read/Set 62/162 time delay 5.x.9.1 and
5.x.9.2
O S<g>-79<x>=<Time Delay> Read/Set 79 time delay 5.x.11.1 to
5.x.11.4
O S<g>-79SCB=<step list> Read/Set 79 Sequence Controlled Block 5.x.11.5
output
V S<g>-<x>81=<Pickup>,<Time Delay>, Read/Set 81 pickup level, time delay and 5.x.12.1 to
<Mode> mode 5.x.12.6
V S<g>-81INH=<Pickup> Read/Set 81 undervoltage inhibit level 5.x.12.7 &
5.x.12.8
V SP-60FL=<I_Blk>,<V_Blk> Read/Set loss of potential pickup setting 5.3.2.2
C SP-BF=<time [m/s/c]> Read/Set the breaker failure timer setting 5.3.1.1
C SP-CURVE=<A>,,<C>,<N>,<R> Read/Set the user programmable 51 n/a
curve parameters
Table B-12. Global Command

GS-PW<t>=<password>,<com ports Read or change a password n/a
(0/ 1/ 2)>

APPENDIX C • OVEREXCITATION (24)
INVERSE TIME CURVES
(BE1-700V ONLY)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
APPENDIX C • OVEREXCITATION (24) INVERSE TIME CURVES (BE1-700V Only) ..........................C-1

GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................C-1
CURVE SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................................C-1
Figures
Figure C-1. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^0.5 – Time on Vertical Axis .....................................................C-2
Figure C-2. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^0.5 – Time on Horizontal Axis .................................................C-2
Figure C-3. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^1 – Time on Vertical Axis ........................................................C-3
Figure C-4. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^1 – Time on Horizontal Axis ....................................................C-3
Figure C-5. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^2 – Time on Vertical Axis ........................................................C-4
Figure C-6. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^2 – Time on Horizontal Axis ....................................................C-4
BE1-700 Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves i

APPENDIX C • OVEREXCITATION (24) INVERSE
TIME CURVES (BE1-700V ONLY)
GENERAL
This appendix contains the inverse time curves for the overexcitation element (24). Equations C-1 and C-2
represent the trip time and reset time for constant volts per hertz level. Normally, the V/Hz pickup is set to
a value greater than the V/Hz nominal. This ensures that V/Hz measured divided by V/Hz nominal is
always greater than 1.000 throughout the pickup range.
CURVE SPECIFICATIONS
If the pickup is set less than nominal, then measured values above pickup and below nominal will result in
the maximum time delay. The maximum time delay is determined by equation C-1 with (V/Hz measured /
V/Hz nominal) set equal to 1.001. The overall inverse time delay range is limited to 1,000 seconds
maximum and 0.2 seconds minimum.
DT
TT = n
Equation C-1, Time to Trip
 V / Hz MEASURED 
 − 1
 V / Hz NOMINAL 
ET
T R = DR ∗ Equation C-2, Time to Reset
FST
where:
TT = Time to trip
TR = Time to reset
DT = Time dial trip
DR = Time dial reset
ET = Elapsed time
n = Curve exponent (0.5, 1, 2)
FST = Full scale trip time (TT)
ET/FST = Fraction of total travel toward trip that integration had progressed to. (After a trip, this value
will be equal to one.)
When the measured volts/hertz rises above a pickup threshold, the pickup element becomes TRUE and
integrating or definite time timer starts. If the volts/hertz remains above the pickup threshold and the
integration continues for the required time interval as defined by the equations shown above and the set
time dial, the trip output becomes TRUE. If the measured volts/hertz drops below pickup before timeout to
trip, either an instantaneous or a time delayed integrating reset can be selected.
The following sets of curves are shown first with the time axis on the vertical and then on the horizontal for
ease of use.
BE1-700 Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves C-1

10000.0
1000.0
Trip Time (seconds)
100.0
10.0
9.9
5.0
2.0
1.0
1.0 0.5
0.2
0.1
0.1
100% 110% 120% 130% 140% 150% 160% 170% 180% 190% 200%
Percent of Nominal V/Hz D1089-12
03-03-04
Figure C-1. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^0.5 – Time on Vertical Axis

200%
190%
180%
170%
160%
150% 9.9
5.0
2.0
140%
1.0
0.5
130% 0.2
0.1
120%
110%
100%
0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 1000.0
D1089-13
Trip Time in Seconds 03-03-04
Figure C-2. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^0.5 – Time on Horizontal Axis
C-2 Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves BE1-700

10000.0
Trip Time (seconds) 1000.0
100.0
10.0
9.9
5.0
2.0
1.0
1.0 0.5
0.2
0.1
0.1
100% 110% 120% 130% 140% 150% 160% 170% 180% 190% 200%
Percent of Nominal V/Hz D1089-14
03-03-04
Figure C-3. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^1 – Time on Vertical Axis
200%
190%
180%
170%
160%
150% 9.9
5.0
2.0
140%
1.0
0.5
130% 0.2
0.1
120%
110%
100%
0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 D1089-15 1000.0
Figure C-4. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^1 – Time on Horizontal Axis
BE1-700 Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves C-3

10000.0
1000.0
Trip Time (seconds)
100.0
10.0
9.9
5.0
2.0
1.0
1.0 0.5
0.2
0.1
0.1
100% 110% 120% 130% 140% 150% 160% 170% 180% 190% 200%
D1089-16
03-03-04
Figure C-5. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^2 – Time on Vertical Axis
200%
190%
180%
170%
160%
150% 9.9
5.0
2.0
140%
1.0
0.5
130% 0.2
0.1
120%
110%
100%
0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 1000.0
D1089-17
Figure C-6. Volt/Hz Characteristic (M-1)^2 – Time on Horizontal Axis
C-4 Overexcitation (24) Inverse Time Curves BE1-700

ROUTE 143, BOX 269
HIGHLAND, IL 62249 USA
http://www.basler.com, info@basler.com
PHONE +1 618-654-2341 FAX +1 618-654-2351

Instruction Manual: Digital Protective Relay BE1-700C BE1-700V

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual: Digital Protective Relay BE1-700C BE1-700V

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual: Digital Protective Relay BE1-700C BE1-700V

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

DIGITAL PROTECTIVE RELAY

Digital Protective Relay Relay Minor Major

C General information, specifications and a Quick Start guide.

© 2004 Basler Electric, Highland, Illinois 62249 USA

All Rights Reserved

2.02.00 / 09-04 C Added support for the Modbus/TCP protocol.

2.01.00 / 07-04 C Provided support for voltage relays (BE1-700V).

2.00.00 / 06-04 C Initial release.

1.02.00 / 10-04 C Added the Modbus/TCP option.

1.01.00 / 06-04 C Initial release.

Hardware Version Change

A / 07-04 C Added support for voltage relays (BE1-700V).

- / 06-04 C Initial release.

Manual Version Change

B / 10-04 C Annotated each section, sub-section, figure and table to indicate

A / 07-04 C Initial release

BE1-700 Introduction iii

SECTION 1 • GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

BE1-700 General Information i

ii General Information BE1-700

Input and Output Functions

Power System Measurement Functions

Contact Sensing Inputs

Protection and Control Functions

Overcurrent Protection (BE1-700C)

Voltage Protection (BE1-700V)

1-2 General Information BE1-700

Frequency Protection (BE1-700V)

Breaker Failure Protection (BE1-700C)

Fuse Loss Protection (BE1-700V)

General Purpose Logic Timers

Virtual Control Switches

BE1-700 General Information 1-3

General Status Reporting

Trip Circuit Monitoring

Sequence of Events Recorder

1-4 General Information BE1-700

BESTlogic Programmable Logic

Write Access Security

Human-Machine Interface (HMI)

BE1-700 General Information 1-5

MODEL AND STYLE NUMBER DESCRIPTION

Sample Style Number

1-6 General Information BE1-700

Figure 1-1. Style Chart for a BE1-700C Current Relay

Figure 1-2. Style Chart for a BE1-700V Voltage Relay

BE1-700 General Information 1-7

Metered Current Values and Accuracy (BE1-700C)

Metered Voltage Values and Accuracy (BE1-700V)

Metered Frequency Values and Accuracy (BE1-700V)

Calculated Values and Accuracy

Contact Inputs Recognition Time

1-8 General Information BE1-700

Time Overcurrent Functions (BE1-700C)

Current Pickup, Phase and Neutral (51P, 51N, 151N)

Current Pickup, Negative-Sequence (51Q)

Current Input - All 51 Functions

Time Current Characteristic Curves (BE1-700C)